Help

-1-
Contents
Contents 2
Welcome to the Lectora Publisher Help 27
What's new in this release 28
Getting started 54
What you need 54
Activating the product 55
Accessing Help 55
Tips and training 57
Getting the latest news 57
Uninstalling the program 57
How the program works 58
Understanding the book metaphor 58
Understanding inheritance 59
Accessing your License Key number and version information 60
Setting preferences 60
Setting general settings 61
Showing buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer 62
Showing visibility check boxes in Title Explorer 62
Using resource names as object names 62
Enabling spell check while typing 63
Using default IMS metadata when creating objects 63
Hiding the Getting Started window at start-up 63
Showing text formatting marks 64
Displaying audio/video closed captions by default 64
Clicking to open the Media Library 64
Specifying the location of your media library 65
Specifying your user name 65
Specifying editor preferences 65
Specifying CourseMill preferences 66
Specifying Inspire Tools preferences 67
Specifying ReviewLink preferences 67

-2-
 Specifying when to check for program updates 68
Specifying publish strings preferences 68
Specifying publish messages preferences 70
Specifying form elements preferences 70
Navigating the workspace 72
Using the Getting Started window 72
Starting from a blank title 73
Starting from a blank responsive title 73
Using the Design Wizard to create a title 73
Using a template to start your title 74
Opening an existing title 74
Viewing the video tutorials 75
Take the self-paced product demonstration 75
Launching the Quick Tour 75
Viewing sample titles 75
Sharing ideas on the Community Forum 75
Launching the Help 75
Keeping up to date with the latest news 76
Launching a tool 76
Contacting Support 76
Touring the interface 76
Using the quick-access bar 78
Adding and removing commands 78
Moving the quick-access bar below the ribbon 79
Using the ribbon bar 79
Navigating the File ribbon 79
Navigating the Home ribbon 82
Navigating the Design ribbon 87
Navigating the Insert ribbon 90
Navigating the Test & Survey ribbon 94
Navigating the Tools ribbon 97
Navigating the View ribbon 101

-3-
 Navigating the Properties ribbon 103
Using the Title Explorer 103
Using the work area 104
Using the Media Library side-tabs 105
Using the status bar 106
Using the Help menu 107
Launching the Help 107
Launching the Getting Started window 107
Viewing Video Tutorials 107
Opening the Trivantis Community 107
Launching Click and Learn 108
Taking the Quick Tour 108
Viewing sample titles 108
Contacting Us 108
Viewing your License Key and software version information 108
Activating the product 108
Building a title 109
Creating a title 109
Creating a new, blank title 110
Creating a responsive title 110
Creating a title using the Design Wizard 111
Creating a title using a Title Wizard 111
Creating a title from a theme 112
Using a template 113
Opening an existing title 114
Designing your title 114
Changing the title options 115
Changing the name of the title 115
Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS 116
Declaring the language for the title 116
Designating a title as a dynamic title 117
Preparing a title for accessibility 117

-4-
 Resetting tracking status between sessions 118
Designating a title as responsive 119
Changing the default page size 119
Changing the default HTML page alignment 120
Changing the default theme 120
Changing the default background properties 120
Creating custom backgrounds 122
Creating a background for your entire title 122
Creating a background for a chapter, section, page, or test 123
Changing the default text properties 124
Changing the default transition properties 125
Choosing a different transition 126
Changing the options and effects of a transition 126
Changing the delay, duration, and speed of a transition 127
Rename an object from within the Transition pane 128
Changing the default content frame style 128
Saving a title 130
Setting auto-save preferences 130
Saving a title as a template 131
Importing and exporting templates 131
Sharing templates online 132
Protecting your title with a password 133
Working with responsive content 133
Deleting an object in an responsive title 141
Common chapter, section and page properties 142
Changing the name of a chapter, section or page 142
Enabling author control of chapters, sections and pages 143
Changing the page size of chapters, sections and pages 143
Changing the HTML page alignment of chapters, sections and pages 144
Changing inheritance settings for chapters, sections and pages 145
Managing page layouts of chapters, sections, and pages 146
Adding a page using page layouts 147

-5-
 Applying a page layout to a page 147
Creating a custom page layout for chapters, sections, and pages 148
Replacing a page layout from chapters, sections, and pages 148
Deleting a custom page layout for chapters, sections, and pages 149
Importing and exporting page layouts for chapters, sections, and pages 149
Changing background properties of chapters, sections and pages 150
Changing text properties for chapters, sections and pages 151
Changing transition properties for chapters, sections and pages 153
Adding an action to chapters, sections and pages 154
Resetting overrides on a chapter, section or page in a responsive title 155
Resetting all overrides on a chapter, section, or page in all views 155
Resetting all overrides for a chapter, section, or page for a specific view 155
Viewing the list of overrides for a chapter, section, or page 156
Working with chapters 156
Adding a chapter 156
Working with sections 157
Adding a section 157
Working with pages 158
Adding a page 159
Including metadata on a page 159
Working with assignable units 160
Adding an assignable unit 161
Changing the name of an assignable unit 162
Enabling author control of an assignable unit 162
Changing the page size of an assignable unit 163
Changing the HTML page alignment of an assignable unit 163
Changing the inheritance settings for an assignable unit 163
Managing page layouts of assignable units 164
Adding a page using page layouts 165
Applying a page layout to a page 166
Creating a custom page layout for assignable units 166
Replacing a page layout from assignable units 167

-6-
 Deleting a custom page layout for assignable units 167
Importing and exporting page layouts for assignable units 168
Changing the background properties of an assignable unit 168
Changing the text properties of the assignable unit 170
Changing the transition properties for an assignable unit 172
Adding an action to an assignable unit 172
Changing assignable unit information 173
Resetting overrides on an assignable unit in a responsive title 174
Resetting all overrides on an assignable unit in all views 175
Resetting all overrides for an assignable unit for a specific view 175
Viewing the list of overrides for an assignable unit 175
Working with tracking 175
Using and managing page layouts 177
Adding a page using page layouts 178
Applying a page layout to a page 178
Creating a custom page layout 179
Replacing a page layout 179
Deleting a custom page layout 179
Importing and exporting page layouts 180
Working with content frames 180
Using content frames within your title 181
Changing the name of a content frame 183
Changing the HTML page alignment of a content frame 183
Changing background properties of a content frame 183
Changing text properties of a content frame 185
Changing transition properties of a content frame 186
Adding an action to a content frame 187
Switching between modes 187
Working with the Debug window 189
Setting debug options 189
Saving your debug log 190
Printing your debug log 190

-7-
 Clearing your debug log 190
Changing variable values in debug mode 191
How the program organizes your content 191
Importing and exporting content 192
Importing content from an existing title 192
Importing and exporting a CSV question file 193
Importing and exporting a QTI file 198
Importing and exporting to Lectora Online 199
Importing and exporting a XML file 199
Importing and exporting a zip file 200
Importing PowerPoint presentations 200
Importing an entire PowerPoint presentation 201
Importing pages from a PowerPoint presentation 202
Exporting to Word 203
Specifying grids and guides preferences 203
Running an error check 204
Managing resources 205
Searching for a resource 205
Viewing a resource's usage 206
Changing the name of a resource file 206
Creating a unique resource 207
Editing a resource 207
Deleting a resource 208
Converting audio and video 208
Working with notes 209
Adding a note 209
Creating a note with a custom notes style 210
Creating a notes report 210
Managing translations 210
Working with text 213
About adding text 213
Adding text to your title 214

-8-
 Copying and pasting text from an existing document 215
Adding a text block and typing the text within the text block 216
Specifying text block properties 216
Changing the name of a text block 217
Associating a text block with a form object 218
Enabling author control on a text block 218
Wrapping text around overlapping objects 219
Displaying a vertical scroll bar in a text block 219
Rendering a text block as an image 219
Specifying a description of a text block 220
Viewing the HTML name of a text block 220
Making a text block initially invisible 221
Placing a text block on the top layer 221
Specifying the CSS classes for a text block 221
Changing the transition properties of a text block 222
Specifying an empty ALT tag for a text block 223
Enabling dynamic text for a text block 223
Changing the HTML text type of a text block 224
Adding an action to a text block 224
Adding a table from the Text Properties ribbon 225
Adding variables from the Text Properties ribbon 225
Changing or removing the background of a text block 226
Changing or removing a border of a text block 226
Changing or removing the outline of a text block 227
Changing or removing the opacity of a text block 227
Changing the margin size of a text block 228
Changing the shadowing effect of a text block 228
Locking the size and position of a text block 229
Changing the position and size of a text block 230
Rotating and flipping a text block 231
Declaring the language for the text block 232
Changing paragraph and text attributes 232

-9-
 Applying a text style to a text block 233
Changing the text color of a text block 233
Changing the font in a text block 234
Changing font size in a text block 234
Bolding, italics, and underlining text in a text block 234
Changing the shadowing effect of text in a text block 235
Superscripting and subscripting text in a text block 236
Scaling text in a text block in a responsive title 237
Justifying text in a text block 237
Highlighting text in a text block 238
Changing the indent levels in a text block 238
Adding bulleted lists in a text block 239
Adding a numbered list in a text block 239
Changing numbered lists 239
Changing paragraph spacing in a text block 240
Adding a symbol in a text block 241
Showing text formatting marks in a text block 241
Associating references to a text block 242
Adding hyperlinks to text 242
Working with tables 243
Adding tables to a text block 243
Selecting a table style 243
Editing a table 244
Formatting cells in a table 244
Changing the row height 244
Changing the column width 245
Changing the cell margin 245
Changing the cell borders 245
Changing the cell border color 246
Changing the cell color 246
Changing the cell margin 247
Changing the alignment of text within a cell 247

- 10 -
 Including a header to a table 247
Adding images and equations to a text block 248
Managing text styles 248
Creating a custom text style 248
Editing a text style 249
Deleting a text style 249
Importing and exporting text styles 250
Editing the default text style 250
Formatting multiple text blocks at once 251
Finding and replacing text 252
Checking spelling 252
Adding words to your dictionary 253
Configuring spelling options 253
Adding the date and time 254
Adding a title to the page 254
Adding breadcrumbs 254
Numbering the pages within a title 254
Globally increasing or decreasing the font size for all the text in a title 255
Working with objects 256
About adding objects 257
Adding objects to a title 257
Dragging and dropping an object 258
Shortcuts for adding objects 258
Working with Quick Insert 259
Changing common object properties 260
Changing the name of an object 261
Changing the description of an object 261
Viewing the HTML name of an object 262
Making an object initially hidden 262
Placing an object on the top layer 262
Specifying the CSS classes of an object 263
Changing the transition properties of an object 264

- 11 -
 Using an empty ALT tag for an object 265
Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing 265
Adding an action to an object 266
Adding a reference for an object 266
Including metadata for an object 267
Locking the size and position of an object 268
Changing the position and size of an object 268
Resetting overrides on an object in a responsive title 271
Resetting all overrides on an object in all views 271
Resetting all overrides on an object for a specific view 272
Viewing the list of overrides for an object 272
Enabling author control on an object 273
Working with images 273
Creating new images 274
Creating screen capture images 275
Adding existing image files 275
Changing the resource of an image 276
Editing an image 277
Working with clip-art 278
Changing or removing the border of an image 278
Adjusting the transparency of an image 279
Changing shadowing and reflection effects of an image 280
Cropping an image 281
Rotating and flipping an image 281
Working with audio 282
Recording a new audio object 284
Adding existing audio files 284
Adding streaming audio 286
Changing the resource of an audio 286
Editing an audio object 287
Converting to MP3 audio 287
Changing the display type of an audio object 288

- 12 -
 Changing the skin of the audio controller 289
Automatically starting an audio object 290
Continuously playing an audio object 290
Adding and managing the synchronized actions of an audio object 290
Adding synchronized events to an audio object 291
Adding synchronized actions to an audio object 292
Viewing the synchronized events of an audio object 293
Viewing the synchronized actions of an audio object 294
Editing synchronized events of an audio object 295
Editing synchronized actions of an audio object 295
Deleting synchronized events of an audio object 296
Deleting synchronized actions of an audio object 297
Working with closed-captioning audio objects 297
Working with video 300
Recording a new video object 302
Adding existing video files 303
Creating screen recordings using Camtasia 304
Adding streaming video objects 305
Changing the resource of a video 305
Editing a video object 305
Changing the skin of the video controller 306
Displaying the controller when users roll-over a video object 307
Automatically starting a video object 308
Continuously playing a video object 308
Adding and managing the synchronized actions of a video object 308
Adding synchronized events to a video object 309
Adding synchronized actions to a video object 310
Viewing the synchronized actions of a video object 311
Viewing the synchronized events of a video object 312
Editing synchronized events of a video object 313
Editing synchronized actions of a video object 313
Deleting synchronized events of a video object 314

- 13 -
 Deleting synchronized actions of a video object 315
Converting to MP4 video 315
Working with closed-captioning video objects 316
Working with buttons 319
Creating buttons 320
Creating custom buttons with text 321
Creating buttons from the Stock Library 322
Creating a transparent button 323
Creating 4-state image buttons 323
Converting a shape to a button 324
Making a button initially disabled 324
Assigning an action to a button 325
Changing the shape of the button 326
Changing the resources of a button 326
Changing the shape style of the button 328
Changing the shadowing and reflection effects of the button 330
Changing the text style of the button 331
Scaling button text in a responsive title 333
Configuring the states of buttons 333
Rotating and flipping a button 338
Working with characters 339
Adding a character 340
Using an action to change the pose 341
Editing a character 342
Changing the character and the pose 342
Working with shapes, lines, and arrows 343
Adding shapes, lines and arrows 344
Changing the type of shape, line, or arrow object 344
Changing the style of a shape, line, or arrow object 345
Changing the shadowing and reflection effects of a shape, arrow, or line
object 347
Adding text to a shape or arrow object 348

- 14 -
 Scaling text in a shape or arrow in a responsive title 350
Maintaining the aspect ratio of a shape, line, or arrow object 350
Rotating and flipping a shape, line, or arrow object 351
Working with charts 352
Adding a chart 352
Editing a chart 353
Working with certificates 353
Adding a certificate 354
Working with documents 355
Adding a document 355
Changing the resource of a document object 356
Working with attachments 356
Working with Flash animation objects 357
Changing the resource of a Flash animation 359
Adding existing Flash animation files 359
Specifying additional files for a Flash animation object 360
Specifying required variables for a Flash animation object 361
Specifying Flash parameters 362
Specifying Flash animation parameters 362
Editing a Flash animation object 373
Automatically starting a Flash animation object 373
Making a Flash animation object transparent 373
Sizing the Flash animation object to fit to browser 374
Working with YouTube videos 374
Adding YouTube video objects 375
Changing the Web address of a YouTube object 375
Working with social media content 376
Adding the All in One Share button 377
Working with the Tweet button 377
Working with the Twitter Feed widget 377
Working with the Facebook Like button 378
Working with the Facebook Send button 378

- 15 -
 Working with the Facebook Comments widget 378
Working with the Facepile widget 379
Working with the Google +1 button 379
Editing a Twitter Feed object 379
Working with Web windows 380
Adding a Web window 380
Editing a Web window 381
Changing the style of a Web window 382
Working with RSS feeds 383
Adding a RSS feed 383
Editing a RSS feed object 384
Working with animation objects 384
Adding an animation 385
Changing the resource of an animation object 386
Editing an animation object 386
Automatically starting an animation object 387
Working with HTML extension objects 387
Adding a HTML extension object 389
Editing a HTML extension object 390
Changing the type of the HTML extension object 390
Specifying additional files used by a HTML extension object 392
Specifying required variables for a HTML extension object 393
Specifying Java applet parameters for a HTML extension object 393
Working with tables of contents 394
Adding a table of contents 395
Specifying the type of a table of contents 395
Specifying the scope of a table of contents 396
Specifying the frame of reference for a table of contents 397
Removing chapters, sections and pages from a table of contents 397
Removing pages from a table of contents 398
Removing frames in HTML 398
Removing icons from a table of contents 399

- 16 -
 Specifying the status indicator image set in a table of contents 399
Specifying the text style of a table of contents 400
Scaling the text in a table of contents in a responsive title 401
Working with menus 402
Adding a menu 403
Editing a menu object 406
Creating a menu from the table of contents 407
Including pages in a menu 407
Specifying the status indicator image set in a menu 408
Working with status indicators 409
Creating a stock status indicator 410
Creating a custom status indicator 410
Changing the target of a status indicator 411
Changing the images for the states of a status indicator 411
Changing or removing the border of a status indicator 412
Working with forms and form elements 413
Working with form objects 413
Adding a form object 414
Retaining form information between sessions 414
Specifying form submission properties 415
Working with form elements 416
Adding a radio button group element 417
Adding a radio button element 418
Specifying the label for a radio button 419
Specifying a radio button to be initially selected by default 420
Customizing radio buttons 420
Adding a check box object 421
Specifying the label for a check box 422
Specifying a check box to be initially selected by default 422
Customizing check boxes 423
Adding an entry field object 423
Specifying the initial text for an entry field 424

- 17 -
 Specifying the maximum number of characters for an entry field 425
Creating a multi-line entry field 425
Creating a password entry field 426
Creating an number-only entry field 426
Creating a read-only entry field 427
Specifying a background color for an entry field 427
Adding a drop-down list object 428
Adding items to a drop-down list 429
Specifying a background color for a drop-down list 429
Adding a list box object 430
Enabling multiple selections within a list box 431
Adding items to a list box 431
Specifying a background color for a list box 432
Adding a text label 432
Associating a text label with a form element 433
Changing the associated variable name of a form element 433
Retaining form element information between sessions 434
Specifying the text style of a form element 434
Scaling the text in a form object in a responsive title 435
Working with progress bars 436
Adding a progress bar 437
Specifying the type of progress bar 437
Changing the variable name associated with the progress bar 438
Emptying a progress bar as progress increases 439
Specifying the layout of a progress bar 440
Working with timers 441
Adding a timer 442
Changing the type of timer 442
Changing the time of a timer object 443
Changing the layout of a timer object 443
Automatically starting a timer object 444
Changing the text properties of a timer object 444

- 18 -
 Scaling the text in a timer in a responsive title 445
Configuring the action that is associated with a timer object 446
Working with reference lists 447
Adding a reference list 448
Specifying the scope of a reference list 448
Specifying the text style of a reference list 449
Working with QR Codes 450
Adding a QR Code 450
Editing a QR Code object 451
Working with equations 452
Adding an equation 452
Editing an equation 453
Working with BranchTrack objects 453
Adding a BranchTrack object 454
Editing a BranchTrack object 454
Grouping and ungrouping objects 455
Grouping objects 456
Adding a group 456
Selecting objects and grouping them 457
Ungrouping objects 457
Specifying that the group will be read last 457
Excluding objects using inheritance 458
Moving and resizing objects 458
Locking and unlocking objects 460
Aligning and positioning objects 460
Aligning objects 461
Centering objects on a page 462
Spacing objects evenly 462
Making objects the same size 463
Layering objects 463
Working with library objects 465
Creating a library object 465

- 19 -
 Sharing a library object online 466
Inserting a library object 466
Working with the Media Library 467
Working with Title Resources 468
Working with My Library 468
Copying objects to My Library 469
Sharing media online 469
Managing custom media categories 470
Searching for media 470
Specifying properties 470
Opening the folder in Windows Explorer 471
Working with the Stock Library 472
Working with the Inspire Tools 472
Entering the eLearning Brothers Library 473
Starting BranchTrack 473
Tests, surveys and questions 475
Adding tests 475
About tests 475
Creating a test 475
Showing feedback for each question 477
Setting the resulting action when a test is passed or completed 477
Setting the resulting action when a test is failed or canceled 478
Timing the test 478
Randomizing test pages 479
Grading the test and specifying the passing score 479
Showing test results 480
Prompting for the student's name 481
Including variables values with the results 481
Displaying a success message when the test is submitted 481
Customizing the test results 482
Changing the name of the test results object 482
Setting test results content properties 482

- 20 -
 Making the test results initially hidden 486
Placing the test results object on the top layer 486
Adding a vertical scroll to the test results object 487
Adding an action to the test results object 487
Adding sections to a test 487
Changing the name of a test section 488
Enabling author control for a test section 489
Changing the page size 489
Changing the HTML page alignment 490
Specifying inheritance settings 490
Changing the background properties 491
Changing the text properties 492
Changing the transition properties 494
Adding an action 494
Randomizing the pages within the test section 495
Common test and survey properties 496
Changing the name of a test or survey 496
Enabling author control 496
Changing the page size 497
Changing the HTML page alignment 497
Changing the inheritance properties 498
Changing the background properties 499
Changing the text properties 500
Setting transition properties 502
Adding an action 502
Making each question mandatory 503
Removing a test or survey from the table of contents 503
Retaining answers between sessions 504
Submitting results 504
Adding questions 505
Creating a true or false question 507
Creating a multiple choice question 509

- 21 -
 Creating a multiple response question 512
Creating a fill in the blank question 514
Creating a number-entry question 517
Creating a matching question 519
Creating a rank/sequence question 522
Creating a drag and drop question 524
Creating a hot spot question 527
Creating a short answer question 530
Creating an essay question 531
Creating a Likert question 532
Specifying question properties 534
Changing the name of a question 535
Enabling author control of a question 535
Changing the associated variable name of a question 535
Retaining the question answer between sessions 536
Specifying a description of the question 536
Editing a question 537
Changing the feedback settings 537
Changing the point value 538
Enabling feedback 538
Changing the attempts settings 539
Enabling maximum attempts 540
Making a question initially invisible 540
Placing a question on the top layer 541
Associating a cascading style sheet (CSS) class name 541
Specifying transitions 542
Adding surveys 543
About surveys 543
Creating a survey 543
Setting the resulting action when a survey is completed 544
Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled 545
Actions and variables 546

- 22 -
About actions 546
Adding an action 548
Changing the name of an action 549
Selecting another action 549
Enabling author control on an action 549
Adding a description 550
Viewing the HTML name of an action 550
Selecting an action's trigger 551
Delaying an action 553
Selecting the action 553
Navigation 554
Objects 554
Commands 557
xAPI 559
Documents 560
Media 561
Variables 562
Questions, Tests & Surveys 562
Forms 564
Progress Bars 564
Executing Flash commands 565
Executing Go To actions 566
Selecting an action's target 568
Specifying conditions 569
Defining conditions 570
Executing an alternative action when conditions are not met 573
Adding an action 573
Using the Action pane 574
Working with variables 574
About variables 575
Reserved variables 576
Using the Variable Manager 583

- 23 -
 Viewing a variable's usage 583
Creating a variable 584
Editing a variable 585
Deleting a variable 585
Modifying variable values 586
Displaying a variable value 588
Displaying variables inline within text blocks 588
Publishing a title 590
Publishing to ReviewLink 590
Publishing for offline use 591
Publishing to HTML 592
Publishing to CourseMill 593
Publishing to AICC 594
Publishing to SCORM 595
Publishing to xAPI 596
Publishing to xAPI cmi5 597
Command line publishing 598
Publishing options 599
Specifying ReviewLink options 599
Specifying HTML options 600
Specifying compress and convert options 602
Specifying language options 603
Specifying Offline options 604
Specifying FTP options 605
Specifying CourseMill options 606
Specifying SCORM options 606
Specifying AICC options 607
Sample ASP script 608
Specifying xAPI options 610
Specifying xAPI cmi5 options 610
Specifying AU options 611
Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG) 612

- 24 -
 Using program features and tools for creating Web-based accessible content 613
Working with ALT tags 613
Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot be used 614
Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects 615
Using actions and integrating accessible interactivity 615
Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information 616
Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order 616
Ensuring users can complete and submit tests, surveys, and forms 617
Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation 618
Using audio and video 619
Checking for accessibility 620
Tools that can be used to access and measure color contrast 620
Browsers that support zooming on Lectora published content 621
Allowing users to review and correct test question before submission 622
Providing users a way to hide moving flashing or updating content 622
Objects and actions that do not work with the keyboard 623
Keyboard tabbing order and visual focus 623
Complying with Section 508 624
Complying with WCAG 2.0 - Level AA 625
Appendix 628
Supported media types 628
Title Wizard gallery 630
Matching colors used within your title 635
Creating custom HTML skins for media 636
Automatically starting media on mobile devices 643
Submitting test, survey, and form results to Google Drive 644
Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI 645
Sample ASP Script 646
Sample Perl Script 648
Answer and response variable value formats 650
Setting the SCORM status to complete 651
Working with the Experience API (xAPI) 652

- 25 -
Token replacements for custom JavaScript 667
Custom JavaScripting 668
Frequently Asked Questions 669
Why can't I select and edit title objects? 669
What is the size or position of my object? 669
What if I changed something by accident? 670
How do I resize my image? 670
How do I check my spelling? 670
How do I open a new browser window? 670
What file extensions does the program support? 671
Can I import an existing title into my current working title? 671
How do I keep my objects from moving? 671
How do I select all the objects on my page? 672
How do I select and format hyperlink text? 672
How do I add the same object to every page? 672
How do I exclude an item from a page? 672
What extensions do my files have? 673
Why is my random test finishing too soon? 673
Can the program display mathematic equations? 673
Do the program tests support book marking? 674
Trademarks 674

- 26 -
Welcome to the Lectora Publisher Help
This help was designed so that you can quickly find the information you need and con-
tinue working on your titles.
The help is divided into the following main sections. Click a topic in the Contents to get
started.
l Getting started
View important information that you should know before using the program.
l Navigating the workspace
Familiarize yourself with the important features of the workspace so you can make
your experience easy and efficient.
l Building a title
This section contains topics for starting out with a blank title to adding chapters,
sections, and pages.
l Working with text
This section contains topics about using text to enhance your title.
l Working with objects
This section contains topics about adding objects like images, audio, and video.
l Tests, surveys, and questions
Add tests, surveys, and questions to test your users' knowledge and interact with
your users.
l Actions and variables
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying inter-
activity and dynamically updated information.
l Publishing a title
View the options available for publishing your completed title.
l Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG)
Learn how to create titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 -
1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines
(WCAG) 2.0.
l Appendix
View related topics that you will find useful.

- 27 -
What's new in this release
The following updates are available in this release (Version 18):
Publishing, Application, and Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Visible focus indicators When an object receives focus through tabbing, a
visual indicator is displayed that highlights the
object that is in focus. You can determine the
color and thickness of the indicator.
Specialized Options
New Feature What's in it for you
Limit the number of drag items per Drag and drop questions support "one-to-many"
drop zone and "many-to-one" (bucket-type) scenarios. You
can determine the maximum number of items that
can be placed into a drop zone.

What's new in 17.1

The following updates are available in this release (Version 17.1):
Publishing, Application, and Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Access to the eLearning Brothers The eLearning Brothers Library - one of the
Stock Asset Library Inspire Tools provided within Lectora Inspire -
provides access to the Stock Asset Library. The
library includes over 2 million stock assets, includ-
ing images, graphics, sound effects, music loops,
videos, and more.
Publish titles to cmi5 Create and publish Experience (xAPI) titles that
meet xAPI's cmi5 standards.
Save FTP profiles Save your FTP settings to streamline the pub-
lishing process.
Manage events within Lectora Add events to audio or video files and use the
same dialog to sync those events to actions, all
without ever leaving Lectora.
Access the title folder Click the folder button on the Title Information win-
dow to access the folder containing the title's files.
Disable browser resize of pub- For responsive titles, resizing the browser window
lished content from a desktop will keep the course in desktop
view, rather than switching to tablet or phone

- 28 -
 view.
Scale published content to fill the This publishing option allows your content to fill
browser window the full size of the student's browser, making it
easier to see for visually challenged individuals
and for presentations.
Sunsetting support for various To continue the commitment toward responsive
audio and video formats titles and mobile delivery, Lectora is ceasing sup-
port for audio and video formats other than the
.mp3 and .mp4 file formats. The following file
types are not supported in Run and Preview
Mode, and might not play successfully when pub-
lished:
Audio:
l Flash Audio (.flv)
l Uncompressed Windows audio (.wav)
l Standard MIDI (.mid)
l MPEG 4 Audio (.m4a)
l Advanced Systems Format (.asf)
l uLaw audio (.au)
l Windows Media audio (.wma)
Video:
l Apple QuickTime® movie (.mov)
l Advanced Systems Format (.asf)
l Audio Video Interleave (.avi)
l Flash Video (.flv and .f4v)
l Moving Picture Experts Group (.mpg, .mpeg,
MPEG-4, .mpg4, .M4V)
l Windows Media Video (.wmv)
Converting these file types to .mp3 audio or .mp4
video will ensure optimal playback. Media con-
taining synchronized actions will continue to play
in the published content; however you will need to
convert them to .mp3 or .mp4 to edit the events.

What's new in 17.0.3

The following updates are available in this release (Version 17.0.3):

- 29 -
Publishing, Application, and Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Anchored objects enhanced Anchored objects will always be on top of all other
objects, regardless of where they are ordered in
the Title Explorer. (This includes being treated as
on top of other objects marked as "Always on
Top".) When Anchor Position is selected,
Always on Top is selected and disabled.

What's new in 17
The following updates are available in this release (Version 17):
New and Updated Inspire Tools
New Feature What's in it for you
Add scenario-based exercises to Easily create, import, and edit scenario-based sim-
your titles with BranchTrack ulations using the BranchTrack application. Track
the learner's selections during the exercise and
use the available score.
Updated Snagit and Camtasia ver- The latest versions of these products are included
sions in this release of Lectora.
Publishing, Application, and Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Seamless Play publish option When this option is selected on the HTML
Options tab during publishing, your title will
smoothly flow from page to page, eliminating the
screen wipe commonly associated with HTML
pages.
Control how to open the Media By default, the Media Library opens when you
Library hover over the Media Library buttons located ver-
tically along the right side of the work area. You
can enable the ability to open the Media Library
with a click, instead of hovering.
SVG rendering of shapes and but- Using scalable vector graphics technology, pub-
tons lished content will remain crisp and scalable on
high-resolution displays.
Set default for closed captioning Using a preferences setting, determine whether
display viewers will see closed captions immediately or
need to turn on captioning.
System-generated alert message Beginning with this release, when a title created

- 30 -
 with a previous version is opened, you are alerted
with a system-generated note to the presence of
modified functionality within your title.
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities
New Feature What's in it for you
Auto-play media on mobile When publishing using the Seamless Play option,
devices media files will honor the Auto-Start selection on
mobile devices, allowing simplified use of page
narration and videos.
Convert shapes to buttons A button can be any shape. Now a shape can be
quickly converted to a button, complete with nor-
mal, over, down, and disabled states.
Improved question importing and Use comma-separated value (CSV) files to import
exporting and export nine question types, as stand-alone
questions or contained within a test or survey.
Persisting background audio Background audio files will continue to play
across pages and can be controlled with play,
pause, and stop actions.
Objects, Actions, and Variables
New Feature What's in it for you
Initially disabled state for buttons Set the button properties to immediately display in
the disabled state when a page is viewed.
Anchor the position of your Specify whether the object will maintain its loc-
objects ation on the page within the view, even when the
view is scrolled.
Improved character properties If you've selected the wrong character there is no
need to delete it. You can now change the char-
acter or pose from the Properties ribbon.
Maintain aspect ratio for video When you resize a video on the page, the original
width and height aspect ratio is maintained to pre-
vent distortion. If the Maintain Aspect Ratio
option is off and the video gets stretched or
squeezed, use the new Reset to Original button
to restore the original dimensions.
Additional resources: What’s New in Lectora 17

What's new in 16.2

The following updates are available in this release (Version 16.2):
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities

- 31 -
New Feature What's in it for you
Improved PowerPoint importing New “Size for Lectora” option and enhancements
to shape recognition and call-outs improve the
import process for PowerPoint presentations.
Enhanced support for xAPI-based It's now easier than ever to create and publish
titles Experience API-based titles with these xAPI-
based improvements:
l Your xAPI titles no longer require special
designation in Title Setup before you get
started.
l Set the enhanced Send Statement action
(previously labeled xAPI Statement) to
deliver the statements of learning exper-
ience to the learning records store (LRS).
l Set the Send Course Completion action to
set the course's completion status.
New closed captioning file sup- Select from three popular closed-captioning file
port formats (WebVTT, SRT, XML) and use the
sample files to quickly get started.
New sets of check boxes and Select from dozens of new sets of check boxes
radio buttons and radios to enhance the interactive experience.
Many of these sets are designed to match Title
Themes.
Enhanced Preview in Browser Enjoy better rendering and improved security
mode when previewing your content in Preview in
Browser mode.
Select from Active Mode or Specify the mode for transferring the published
Passive Mode when you FTP title as either Active Mode or Passive Mode.
Quick-launch access to After publishing to ReviewLink, use the
ReviewLink ReviewLink button to quickly access your con-
tent, or scan the QR code to launch ReviewLink
on your mobile device.
Objects, Actions, and Variables
New Feature What's in it for you
Set Completion Status now This action has been renamed to reflect that you
renamed to Set Tracking Status can set the tracking status for chapter-
s/sections/pages to states other than “completed”.
The functionality of this feature has not changed.
Additional resources: What’s New in Lectora 16.2

- 32 -
What's new in 16.1
The following updates are available in this release (Version 16.1):
Questions, Tests, and Surveys
New Feature What's in it for you
Improved test results Use the Results Designer to specify the appear-
ance of the test results page, including the con-
tents and text formatting of general test
information (such as the test name and pass/fail
status), as well as for all questions answered cor-
rectly, those answered incorrectly, and
unanswered questions, should you choose to
include any or all of these. Specify whether to dis-
play custom images, answer choices, and Display
Message feedback. A preview of the test results
page based on your selections is also displayed.
Enhanced Likert questions Likert table questions have been reformatted into
a single object, improving creation, editing, mov-
ing and sharing. Additionally, you can now specify
instruction text as part of the question, and cus-
tomize the scale choices.
Improved bullets and numbered Bullets and numbered lists render properly, includ-
lists ing right-alignment of numbers and Roman numer-
als.
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities
New Feature What's in it for you
Additional status indicators Select from 50 additional status indicators sets,
objects such as the three-cut pie, bull's eye, hourglass,
and progress meters.
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Media play optimized The playing of media has been optimized with a
new HTML5 player, eliminating the Flash require-
ment and providing for sharper rendering on
mobile devices.
Additional resources: What’s New in Lectora 16.1

What's new in 16
The following updates are available in this release (Version 16):

- 33 -
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities
New Feature What's in it for you
Develop responsive courses Design and build your title for viewing on your
audience's primary device and Lectora will auto-
matically rescale objects to fit appropriately on
other devices. Make custom adjustments to any
object to further ensure your title looks and func-
tions perfectly on all devices. These specific
Responsive Course Design™ (RCD) features are
included in this release:
Convert existing titles to RCD Conveniently
convert your
existing non-
responsive titles
to RCD and
begin to make
the device-spe-
cific adjustments
to ensure your
title looks and
functions appro-
priately on all
devices.
Auto-fit mobile devices RCD auto-
matically fills the
screen of any
device.
Responsive title themes All Design rib-
bon title themes
are fully respons-
ive; ensuring a
great look on all
device types and
sizes.
Responsive page layouts Page Layouts
are a convenient
way to organize
basic content
and know how it
will appear on

- 34 -
 each device and
orientation. Each
layout has been
specifically
designed to
provide the best
look on each
device. And you
can create your
own customized
page layouts as
well.
RCD device inheritance Anything you do
on the desktop
view will affect
(be inherited to)
the tablet. And
any changes
you make on the
tablet will affect
(be inherited to)
the phone in the
corresponding
orientation. This
trickle-down
inheritance
saves you valu-
able devel-
opment time.
Override RCD device inher- Rearrange, res-
itance ize, change the
color, or even
replace objects
in any view to
create the
WYSIWYG look
you desire. Eas-
ily identify which
object's prop-
erties are over-
ridable by
colored labels

- 35 -
 on the ribbon.
Reset overrides If you customize
content and later
decide you want
to reset to the
program's auto-
matic behavior,
click the Reset
button to remove
the overrides for
any page or
object and
restore the RCD
device inher-
itance.
Cross-device object moving Move or resize
and resizing an object pro-
portionally on all
views at the
same time by
using
Ctrl+Shift+drag.
Automatic page height adjust-If content on any
ment mobile device is
too low on the
page to appear
within the default
height, RCD will
automatically
grow the page to
create vertical
scrolling, ensur-
ing no content is
lost.
Shrink/grow text scaling Scale text to
appear smaller
or larger on a
mobile device by
applying a scale
factor to the
base point size.

- 36 -
 CurrentView variable This reserved
variable allows
you to display
content and con-
trol actions
based on the
device type and
orientation. For
example, you
could display a
message to
"Rotate your
device to land-
scape for this
exercise" if the
program detects
that the Cur-
rentView is in
the portrait ori-
entation.
Device rotation trigger Trigger actions
when the stu-
dent rotates their
tablet or smart-
phone from land-
scape to portrait
or portrait to land-
scape.
Enhanced preview in Preview any
browser page or pub-
lished title in
your browser.
Resize the
browser window
to emulate how
the content will
appear on tab-
lets and smart-
phones.
Display variables inline within text Insert variable syntax directly into text blocks to
blocks create dynamic and customized content.

- 37 -
Compatibiity with Lectora Online 3 Export a title to an online package file and import
it to Lectora Online 3. You can also take a title
exported from Lectora Online 3 and import it to
Lectora 16.
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Increase or decrease text size New buttons allow you to quickly increase or
decrease the point size of text, saving you valu-
able clicks and development time.
Objects, Actions, and Variables
New Feature What's in it for you
Configure actions to work with With the Step Progress Bar Position action, you
progress bars can choose to step the progress forward or back-
ward (by the amount specified by Step Size), elim-
inating the need for special variable actions.
Additional status condition rela- You can configure the following inverse status
tionships relationship conditions:
l Is Started (which is the same as saying Is
In Progress or Is Completed)
l Is Not In Progress (that is, Is Not Started
or Is Completed)
l Is Not Completed (that is, Is Not Started or
Is In Progress)
New and Updated Inspire Tools
New Feature What's in it for you
Camtasia 8.6 (Lectora Inspire) Lectora Inspire 16 supports the latest enhance-
ments for the Camtasia 8.6 video editor.
Snagit 12.4.1 (Lectora Inspire) Lectora Inspire 16 supports the latest enhance-
ments for the Snagit 12.4.1 image editor.
Additional resources: What’s New in Lectora 16

What's new in 12.1.2

The following updates are available in this release (Version 12.1.2):
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities
New Feature What's in it for you
Saving the button state as the You can save the custom button state as the new

- 38 -
new default button style default button style when adding a button.

What's new in 12.1

The following updates are available in this release (Version 12.1):
New and Updated Inspire Tools
New Feature What's in it for you
eLearning Brothers Template Lectora Inspire provides integrated access to the
Library and Interaction Builder eLearning Brothers Template Library and Inter-
action Builder. Enhance your title with Flash and
HTML5 interactions and games from the Inter-
action Builder and select templates and assets
from the Template Library.
Integration with the Flypaper tool has been
discontinued. Installing this version and
future versions of Lectora Inspire will not
remove instances of the tool from your com-
puter.
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
ReviewLink 2.0 ReviewLink 2.0 includes a number of new fea-
tures including a responsive interface, security
and performance enhancements, improved email
reliability, and Brazilian-Portuguese as a default
language option.
Publishing for offline use When publishing for offline use, you can select to
create a single zip file of all the offline files or an
executable file.

What's new in 12
The following updates are available in this release (Version 12):
New and Updated Inspire Tools
New Feature What's in it for you
Updated Snagit and Camtasia ver- The latest versions of these products are included
sions in this release of Lectora.
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities
New Feature What's in it for you

- 39 -
Place objects outside page bound-You can place objects completely outside of the
aries page boundaries of the publisher. These objects
will not be viewed by users when the title is pub-
lished. However, the object can be moved to or
from the page with the Move action.
Updated numbered and bulleted Numbered and bulleted lists are formatted using
lists the current HTML standards. This allows screen
reader applications such as JAWS to recognize
the text as lists when publishing to HTML. Addi-
tionally, you can select from new types of bullets
and numbering schemes or select to not show bul-
lets or numbering.
Text character shadowing You can change the shadow of a text block. This
includes the type, color, transparency, blur, angle
and distance of the shadow. Additionally, you can
change shadowing effect of the text within a text
block.
Improved Guide Handling ​Use the Add Guide and Clear Guide options on
the View ribbon to quickly add and remove
guides. Use the grid handles in the ruler to easily
move a guide horizontally or vertically.
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Publishing for offline use Publish titles for offline use to external media such
as CD-ROMs and Flash drives.
Objects and Actions
New Feature What's in it for you
Object adorners and handles on Use adjustment adorners and handles on shapes,
shapes, images, and text buttons images, and text buttons to stretch, resize, rotate
and flip these objects.
Rotation and Mirroring group for Use the controls in the Rotation and Mirroring
shapes, images, and text button group to rotate and flip shapes, images, and text
objects buttons objects.
Editing properties of Twitter Feed Edit the properties for Twitter Feed and RSS Feed
and RSS Feed objects such as changing the feed address and the Twit-
ter username.
Border style for shapes, images, You can alter the border style of shapes, images,
buttons, and text blocks buttons, and text blocks, such as the background
color, outline, margin size, border weight, color,
and opacity.

- 40 -
Opacity for shapes, images, but- You can adjust the opacity settings of shapes,
tons, and text blocks images, buttons, and text blocks.
Shadow and reflection for shapes, You can specify the shadow and reflection set-
images, buttons, and text blocks tings of shapes, images, buttons, and text blocks.
This includes specifying the shadow color along
with the transparency, blur, angle and distance set-
tings.
Image cropping Crop images to improve the framing or to better
highlight the subject matter.
Star and callout shapes Add star and callout shapes to draw attention to a
part of a page or a part of an image.
Text within shapes and arrows Add text to a shape or arrow object. You can also
select and change the text style of the text.
Switch shape types Change the type of shape, line or arrow object
you initially selected to add to the title.
Gradient, texture fill, and picture Change the fill style of buttons and shapes, such
fill for buttons and shapes as adding color, gradient, texture or a picture.
Button one-click insert Rapidly add buttons to your title with a single
click.
Create buttons in any shape Change the shape of the button. Select from the
variety of different shapes, such as the basic
shapes, block arrows, and stars, for example.
Customizable button states - Configure the four states of custom text button.
Normal, Over, Down, and Disabled The four button states are: Normal, as the button
exists when the page is initially displayed, Over,
when the users pass their cursors over the button,
Down, when the button is clicked, and Disabled,
when the button is disabled. For each state, you
change the shape style, alter the effects, or modify
the text style.
Set State action for buttons Use the Set State action to set the state of a but-
ton as either enabled or disabled.
Change the style and edit the When you add a Web window object, you can
source type and URL address of change the style and make changes to the Web
Web Windows window's source type and URL address.
Specialized Options
New Feature What's in it for you
Web-based Run mode Run Mode is Web-based. You can run JavaScript
and Web windows directly from Run mode, for
instance. Additionally, you can test CSS and

- 41 -
 HTML extensions and preview HTML-based text
that renders more closely to your browser.
Additional resources: What’s New in Lectora 12

What's new in 11.3

The following updates are available in this release (Version 11.3):
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Languages Install Lectora in one of the following supported
languages:
l Simplified Chinese
l Brazilian Portuguese
l French

l German

l Spanish

l Swedish

UTF-8 Support Develop and publish content with Chinese, Japan-

ese, Korean, and other double-byte language text
that renders correctly in a Web browser.
WCAG2 AA Support You can use Lectora to create titles published to a
Web-based format (HTML, CourseMill,
SCORM/Web-based, AICC/Web-based) that com-
ply with the standards set in Web Content Access-
ibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 - Level AA.
New Titles
New Feature What's in it for you
Tracking object, actions, and con- With tracking you can account for which chapters,
ditions sections, and pages that your users have visited
and completed. This allows you to know where
your users have been within your content. You
can automatically display the tracking status
within the table of contents and menu objects
based on your users' interactions with content.
Status is tracked automatically and you can also
select to add status indicator objects to pages to
display tracking information. Additionally, you can
execute actions to manually update the tracking
status of chapters, sections, and pages, and you
can execute conditional actions that are depend-

- 42 -
 ent on the tracking status for specific chapters, sec-
tions, and pages.
Web-enhanced Transitions You can apply modern effects to your object trans-
itions. Additionally, you can fade-in images and
text, apply a modern fly animation, and apply
other enhanced--transition effects to Web-based
objects, such as elastic and bounce.
New and Updated Inspire Tools
New Feature What's in it for you
Text Resize Tool Globally increase or decrease the font size for all
of the text in a title. This allows you to correct
issues caused by opening the title on multiple
operating systems with different display settings.
Camtasia 8.1 (Lectora Inspire) Lectora Inspire supports Camtasia 8.1. This
includes the Remove a Color feature, the crop
tool, stitching clips, and the copy visual properties
feature.
Snagit 11.2 (Lectora Inspire) Lectora Inspire supports Snagit 11.2. This
includes more capture options, like the OneClick
interface, enhanced image captures, and sharing
to even more destinations.

What's new in 11.2

The following updates are available in this release (Version 11.2):
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Publishing to CourseMill Wave Lectora supports publishing to CourseMill Wave
(formerly Lectora Express) (formerly Lectora Express). CourseMill Wave is an
online learning management tool developed by
Trivantis. CourseMill Wave allows you to recom-
mend and assign content to online viewers. Pub-
lishers can enable ratings, guest book settings,
run reports, and post content to social networking
sites. For more information about CourseMill
Wave, visit http://trivantis.-
com/products/coursemill-wave-online-lms/.
xAPI 1.0 Support Lectora updates its support for the xAPI API to the
1.0 official release. A successor to SCORM, the
xAPI API allows any learning activity be stored as

- 43 -
 a statement inside a Learning Records Store.

What's new in 11.1

The following updates are available in this release (Version 11.1):
New Ribbon Interface
New Feature What's in it for you
Tabbing Navigation in the Prop- You can press Tab to navigate and select a con-
erties ribbons trol on the Object Properties ribbons. Additionally,
pressing Shift + Tab will focus on the previous
control. To start tabbing navigation, press Alt or
click to select an editable field, such as the Name
or Image fields in the Image group on the Prop-
erties ribbon for images.
New Titles
New Feature What's in it for you
Theme Swapping When you select a theme for your title, place-
holders are automatically inserted for a logo and a
course title. Changes made to these placeholders
are retained should you select a different theme.
Thumbnail View improvements The Thumbnail View includes improvements to
your ability to modify chapters, sections, and
pages. Along with better visual indicators of your
title structure, this includes the ability to reorder,
rename, copy, paste, delete, and access the right-
click menu all from the Thumbnail View.
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
xAPI .95 Support Lectora updates its support for the xAPI API to the
.95 specification. A successor to SCORM, the
xAPI API allows any learning activity be stored as
a statement inside a Learning Records Store.
Objects and Actions
New Feature What's in it for you
Mobile Triggers and Actions Use the Swipe Left and Swipe Right to execute
an action when a user swipes with a finger on a
touch device or with a click-and-swipe using a
mouse.

- 44 -
What's new in 11
The following updates are available in Version 11:
New Ribbon Interface
New Feature What's in it for you
Ribbon Layout The program has a reorganized layout with task-
based ribbons and ribbon-based object prop-
erties.
Getting Started Screen Use the Getting Started launch pad for quick
access to create new titles, open existing titles,
contact Support, view learning resources, and
launch supplemental tools.
Thumbnail Page View Quickly locate individual pages using the thumb-
nail page view as an alternative to the Title
Explorer view.
Title Explorer View Easily identify objects using unique icons in the
enhanced Title Explorer view.
Slide-out Media Library Instantly access your Title Resources, My Media,
and Stock Media with the slide-out Media Library.
Home Ribbon The Home ribbon gives you the ability to add
objects, edit text, and publish your title all from
one ribbon.
Design Ribbon The Design ribbon is your single location to
select the "look and feel" of your title, including
the default background, page transition, text
styles, and colors.
Insert Ribbon Use the Insert ribbon for one-click access to
insert all available objects into your title.
Test & Survey Ribbon Evaluate users and collect input by adding ques-
tions, tests, surveys, and forms all from the Test &
Survey ribbon.
Tools Ribbon Create and edit new media, manage resources,
and review your title before publishing with the
options on the Tools ribbon.
View Ribbon Work with the View ribbon to switch modes and
modify the application display.
Run Mode Ribbon The Run Mode ribbon appears when you are in
Run Mode and prompts you when you attempt to
edit objects to return to Edit Mode.
Action Pane The Action Pane allows you to view the details of,

- 45 -
 and organize all actions tied to a Chapter, Sec-
tion, Page or object.
Moveable and Dockable Panes The Action Pane and both views of the Title
Explorer (Thumbnail View and Detail View) can
be moved and docked in multiple places, includ-
ing dragged onto a second monitor.
Status Bar Commands Modes, Alignment Tools, a Zoom Slider, and a
dynamic Position/Size Lock button are all avail-
able in the status bar.
Backstage View The reorganized File Menu provides easier
access to file, title and preference options.
New and Updated Inspire Tools
New Feature What's in it for you
Snagit 11 (Lectora Inspire) Snagit has been updated to the latest full version
of the product. Capture images on your screen
and edit for a custom, visual learning tool.
Camtasia Studio 8 (Lectora Camtasia has been updated to the latest full ver-
Inspire) sion of the product. Create professional screen
recordings, edit and add effects to make a pro-
fessional video tutorial.
ReviewLink One-click access to your published title on
ReviewLink where you can share and collect feed-
back from reviewers and other team members.
Audio Editor and Audio Record- A new audio tool is included. Record voice-overs
ing Tool using a microphone. Edit existing audio files and
synchronize audio playback with events that
occur within your project. Convert files to MP3
format.
Video Editor and Video Recording A new video tool is included. Record directly from
Tool your Web camera. Edit existing video files and
synchronize video playback with events. Convert
files to MP4 format.
Enhanced Content Development Capabilities
New Feature What's in it for you
Real-time Updates Make object properties changes within individual
properties ribbons and see real-time updates in
Edit Mode that reflect your changes.
Set Multiple Object Properties You can select multiple objects and change com-
mon properties for all objects at one time.

- 46 -
Browse My Media / Side Bar Modal The "Browse My Media" option in the File drop-
Mode down slides open the Media Library for instant
access to saved resources.
Simplified Use of Variables The "VAR" button makes the use of variable val-
ues easily accessible to novice and intermediate
users.
Type Variables Directly Into Mes- Create dynamic feedback, messages, and text by
sage Fields combining variables and text into one edit field.
Quick Insert Use the dynamic Quick Insert button to add the
most commonly used object types with one click.
Optimized Page Sizing Quickly select from a set of standard page sizes
for your title that are optimized for viewing on dif-
ferent platforms and devices.
Title Themes Choose from professionally designed themes for
your title that include background graphics and
standard navigation buttons. Optionally install
themes from third-party vendors.
Dynamic Paste Button The Paste button is a dynamic icon, so that the
button image, and the paste method, changes to
reflect the last selection made.
Show Text Formatting Turn Text Formatting on and off directly from the
ribbon.
Object Descriptions User-defined Object Descriptions enable easier
review and maintenance of titles.
CSS Classes Create and utilize CSS classes to specify a style
for an object like drop-shadows or text formatting.
Improved Color Palette The selection tool for colors includes an updated
palette and the ability to select from both Recently
Used colors and Saved colors.
Import PowerPoint Import an entire PowerPoint presentations to cre-
ate a new title or pick and choose slides from an
existing PowerPoint presentation to insert into an
existing title.
New Titles
New Feature What's in it for you
Blank Title on Startup When you create a new title, the workspace
opens with a blank canvas already in place. You
can begin developing content right away.
Design Wizard The Design Wizard will walk you through the
basic steps needed to set up and design your title.

- 47 -
Templates Online Choose from hundreds of professionally designed
templates directly from the online repository.
New Title from Theme Create a new title with a predefined look and feel
using a professionally designed Title Theme.
Expanded Title Information Thumbnail previews and detailed title information
make it easy to find and select titles.
Publishing and Application Preferences
New Feature What's in it for you
Publish to xAPI Publish to xAPI, the newest learning technology
specification, where any learning activity can be
stored as a statement inside a Learning Records
Store.
Web Accessibility Settings Disable certain features that are not compliant
and set specific publishing options up front before
you begin development of 508- and WAG 2.0-com-
pliant titles.
Flash Overlap Warnings Publish Turn off the Flash overlap warnings displayed dur-
Preference ing the publish process.
ReviewLink Notification option Choose whether to notify reviewers of updated
content when you publish to ReviewLink.
Note Style Create a note style directly from the Add Note
menu to distinguish your notes from other
developers.
Clear Guides Quickly remove all guides within a title with the
click of a button.
Grid and Guides Options Access color and spacing options for guides and
grids directly from the ribbon.
Display Skin Style the program with the new Windows 8 dis-
play skin.
Questions, Tests, and Surveys
New Feature What's in it for you
Expanded Use of Questions All question types are available for use in tests, in
surveys, or as standalone interaction questions.
Default Feedback for Questions Correct/Incorrect Feedback are now pre-pop-
ulated with default feedback for all questions.
Multiple Attempts for Questions All graded questions support multiple attempts
and unique feedback on the final attempt.
Enhanced Feedback Options for Most question types support general correct and
Questions incorrect feedback or feedback for each individual

- 48 -
 choice
Media Support for Questions In addition to images, questions support the use of
audio and video for more engaging assessments.
Descriptive Test Results The test results for drag and drop and matching
questions will now display the student's choices
using an Item Name instead of numbered pairs.
Multiple Response Question Type Select the multiple response question for multiple
choice questions with more than one correct
answer.
Number Entry Question Type The new number entry question is like a fill in the
blank question for numeric-only answers. You
identify whether the answer is correct using the fol-
lowing Relationships: Equal To, Not Equal To,
Greater Than, Less Than, Greater Than or Equal,
Less Than or Equal, or Between two values.
Hot Spot Question Enhanced hot spot questions support "zones" for
correct and incorrect responses.
Drag And Drop Question Enhanced drag and drop questions support "one-
to-many" and "many-to-one" (bucket-type) scen-
arios.
Matching Question Select the color and thickness of the match lines
to enhance the look of your titles.
Rank/Sequence Question The former ordinal survey-only question has been
improved with additional display options, and can
be used as a graded question.
Likert Question The streamlined Likert question simplifies entry of
multiple questions (Likert table) and common
scale choices.
Fill in the Blank Question Provide multiple correct options for fill in the blank
questions and determine if they are case sens-
itive.
Randomize Choices Option for Multiple choice and multiple response questions
Questions have the ability to randomize the answers choices
on the page.
Submit Tests and Surveys to Submit test and survey results to a spreadsheet in
Google Drive Google Drive for easy tracking and review of ques-
tion interactions without use of a LMS.
CSV Import Add questions to an existing title as standalone
pages or within a test.
Objects and Actions

- 49 -
New Feature What's in it for you
Smart-Text Objects New one-click Date, Time, Page Title and Bread-
crumb objects are pre-programmed to display
dynamic information.
Social Objects Allow users to share content to social media net-
works with Share buttons and other Social
objects.
Timer Object The Timer object can be used to trigger Done
Playing actions.
RSS Feed Object Embed an RSS Feed directly in your title.
QR Code Object Add a scannable QR Code to your title for text,
links, addresses, and more.
Web Window Object Embed Web pages from multiple sources like
Google Maps, Wikipedia, or anywhere on the
Web.
xAPI Statement Action Record and track any kind of user interaction in a
Learning Record Store with a xAPI Statement.
Open Attachment Action Launch an attachment like a PDF file in a new win-
dow.
Run JavaScript Action Quickly enter a JavaScript function that will be
executed when the title is published to the Web.
Display Page in Pop Up Action Use one action to open a page as a pop-up win-
dow.
Go To Action Easily select a page in your title to navigate your
users.
Go To Web Address Action By default, the Web page will open in a new win-
dow.
Launch Program/Document By default, the program or document will open in a
Action new window.
Modify Variable Action Use the Set As Empty option to empty the value
of the variable.
Advanced Text Editor Insert variable information such as a user's name
or test score directly into the message field of the
Change Contents and Display Message action.
The Advanced Text Editor also allows line returns
for creation of paragraphs within Change Con-
tents and Display Message actions.
Conditional Actions Icons on the ribbon and within the Action Pane
show which actions are conditional. Entering con-
ditions is simplified into one dialog and uses the

- 50 -
 Advanced Text Editor for easy variable com-
parison.
On Page Show Trigger Attach an On Page Show action to an object so
that the action only triggers when the page loads,
rather than when the parent object loads.
On Select/Change Trigger Multiple On Select/Change actions are now per-
mitted for Forms and form objects. They can have
conditions and are visible in the Title Explorer
view.
Specialized Options
New Feature What's in it for you
Character Image type Add a character image directly from the Insert rib-
bon.
Transparent Button Type Add a transparent button directly from the Button
drop-down.
Custom Button Text Alignment Left, center or right align the text within your cus-
tom button.
Dynamically Redrawn Buttons Custom text buttons will resize dynamically and
redraw, maintaining their font and size.
Elevated On Click Action for But- The On Click action for buttons is now visible in
tons the Title Explorer view.
Edit Caption File for Video Make changes to the XML Caption file by select-
ing Edit from the Captions dialog. Optionally open
a sample XML file to copy and revise.
Sync Events for Audio and Video View and edit all events synchronized to your
audio/video in a new table format.
Preview Streaming Audio and Confirm URLs for YouTube and other Web-
Video streamed media before inserting them into your
title.
Mobile-Friendly Audio/Video Easily convert files to MP3/MP4 format for viewing
on tablets and mobile devices.
Insert Tables from the Ribbon Add tables to your content directly from the Insert
ribbon.
Table Styles Select from a gallery of pre-defined table styles
and quickly apply one to an existing table.
Ribbon Properties for Tables All properties for the table object have been elev-
ated to a ribbon so you can easily modify the look
and feel of your table.
Additional Files for Flash Add files or folders to your Flash objects so they

- 51 -
 are all stored together.
Required Variables for Flash Define required variables for Flash objects to
ensure they are declared on the page.
Transparent Option for Flash Set WMODE to Transparent with the Transparent
option.
Fit to Browser Option for Flash Fit the Flash object to the size of the browser win-
dow.
Set Pages to Include in Table of Determine which pages to include in your Table
Contents of Contents directly within the Table of Contents
properties, rather than on each individual page.
Page-Based Menu Menus can now behave like a Table of Contents
with the page-based menu option.
Preview Menu in Menu Designer The Preview Pane in the menu designer lets you
see changes as you update - roll over the preview
to see the submenu.
Set Submenu to Menu Style Set the submenu style in a menu to the menu
level style by clicking Use Menu Style.
Actions Tied to Menu Objects Actions can be applied to the menu object. For
example, trigger an On Show action to an initially
hidden menu.
Control Menu Items Size Create evenly sized menu and submenu items, or
set them to automatically fit the text to the largest
height or width.
Border Color Selection for Pro- Customize the look of a progress bar by selecting
gress Bars a border color to match the look and feel of your
title.
Select Included Pages for Pro- For Table of Contents progress bars you have con-
gress Bars trol of which pages to count, regardless of where
the progress bar is located within the title.
Advanced Custom Progress Bar You can connect a variable value to a custom pro-
gress bar.
Text Labels for Form Objects Add a text label to drop-down lists and list boxes
for accessible forms.
Entry Field Validation Entry fields can be defined as "Numeric Only",
eliminating the need for multiple conditional
actions.
Radio Button Groups Adding a radio button group will automatically
include radio buttons, eliminating an additional
step.
Text Styles for Form Objects Override the page text style with a unique style for

- 52 -
 individual form objects.
Submit Forms to Google Drive Submit form input directly to an easily accessible
spreadsheet in Google Drive.
Additional Files for HTML Exten- Add files or folders to your HTML Extension
sion objects objects so they are all stored together.
Required Variables for HTML Define required variables for HTML Extension
Extension objects objects to ensure they are declared on the page.
Always on Top Option for Groups Set a group object to Always on Top so that any
object within the group inherits that property.
Attach Files or Folders In addition to single file attachments, you can add
entire folders for use in published titles.
Create Hyperlink to Attachment Add a hyperlink to open your attachment as soon
as you import the file or folder.
Link to Attachment Choose to add files/folders as attachments as a
link to local content that will not be copied until
publish time.
Reference List Styling Customize the style of a reference list by selecting
a text style and background color.

- 53 -
Getting started
This section presents information to help you get started with the program, such as mak-
ing sure you have the proper system requirements before installing, how to activate the
product, and how to get help. Additionally, you can further customize your Lectora exper-
ience by setting preferences before you get started creating titles.
In this chapter, the following topics are covered:
l What you need
l Activating the product
l Accessing Help
l Tips and training
l Getting the latest news
l Uninstalling the program
l How the program works
l Accessing your License Key number and version information
l Setting preferences

What you need

Be sure you meet the following minimum system requirements before installing the pro-
gram:
l Intel® or AMD® class processor
l 500MB free RAM
l 1.1GB free hard disk space for the application

l Microsoft® .NET Framework 4.0 SP1 (required to install Camtasia Studio®; not

required for the Lectora)

l A monitor with a minimum resolution of 1024x768

The program runs on the following operating systems:

l Microsoft Windows® XP
l Microsoft Windows 7
l Microsoft Windows 8

Camtasia and Snagit - included with Lectora Inspire - only support Windows 7 and Win-
dows 8.
Internet courses produced by the program require Internet Explorer® 8.0 or newer or any
version of Mozilla Firefox™, Google Chrome™ or Apple Safari®. Mobile browsers in
iOS® and Android® are also supported. Titles published for offline use can be written to
external media such as CD-ROMs and Flash drives and require one of the following
operating systems:

- 54 -
 l Microsoft Windows XP
l Microsoft Windows 7

l Microsoft Windows 8

The program supports publishing to:

l External media (CD-ROMs and Flash drives, for example) - offline use
l Web servers (HTML)
l Learning Management Systems (AICC, SCORM 1.1,SCORM 1.2, SCORM 2004)
l Learning Record Store (xAPI)

Activating the product

You can activate your product after installing the product. There are two ways to activate:
l Click to open the Help menu, then click Product Activation.
l Click to open the Help menu, then click About Lectora.On the About Lectora
window, click Product Activation. The Purchase and Activate window opens.
Follow the instructions in the windows to complete the product activation.

Accessing Help
The Help is a browser-based system that provides Help topics of the tasks you can com-
plete using the tools. To access the Help, click the Help button where available. You can
also select Help from the File ribbon within the program.
The Help menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or pressing the F1
key.
Navigating the Help
To navigate the Help, click the plus sign (+) to the left of the section name to expand the
section. Click the title of the topic to display the topic. Click the minus sign (-) to collapse
a section.
Click the Search tab to enter words or phrases to quickly find topics. Topics containing
the search words or phrases appear in the navigation pane. Click the title of the topic to
display the topic.
To improve your search, use quotation marks around a phrase, such as "Group
Object". Only those topics containing all words in the phrase are displayed.
Other ways to get help:
Lectora provides the following additional information:
Getting Started Use this launch pad to get started using the program. You can start a
title in several ways, access learning resources, and more. To open
the Getting Started window:
l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Getting Started.

- 55 -
 l On the Help menu, click Getting Started.
lType Ctrl + N.
Video Tutorials View the Video Tutorials for introductions and overviews of the power-
ful and time-saving features. You can access the Video tutorials using
one of the following ways:
l On the Getting Started window, select Video Tutorials in the
Learning Resources section.
l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Video Tutorials.
l On the Help menu, click Video Tutorials.
Trivantis Com- Learn from fellow users. Ask questions and receive answers within
munity the community. You can access the Community Forum using one of
the following ways:
l On the Getting Started window, select Community Forum in
the Learning Resources section.
l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Community Forum.
l On the Help menu, click Community Forum.
Help Access this comprehensive product documentation to read about all
of the various tasks you can complete using the program. Access the
Help using one of the following ways:
l On the Getting Started window, select Help in the Learning
Resources section.
l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Help.
l On the Help menu, click Help.
lPress F1.
Click and Learn Get up to speed on the latest version of the product.Use this self-
paced product demonstration to learn the new features available in
the latest version of the product. Access Click and Learn using one of
the following ways:
l On the Getting Started window, select Click and Learn in the
Learning Resources section.
l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Click and Learn.
l On the Help menu, click Click and Learn.
Sample Titles Take a hands-on approach to learning by downloading one of several
sample titles. Each course showcases a number of features.
l On the Getting Started window, select Sample Titles in the
Learning Resources section.

- 56 -
 l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Sample Titles.
l On the Help menu, click Sample Titles.
Contact Us Still have questions? Need support? Contact us and we'll make sure
you have access to the people and resources that can help. To con-
tact us:
l On the Getting Started window, select Contact Support in the
Launch section.
l On the File ribbon, click Help and select Contact Us.
l On the Help menu, click Contact Us.

Tips and training

A variety of resources are available with the program:
The Quick Start Guide included with the product packaging details the top ten features of
the interface. A handy list of shortcut keys that can be used to add objects, publish your
title and more, can be found on the back side of the guide.
Trivantis also offers the following instructor-led training courses to enhance your exper-
ience. These courses are offered at the Trivantis locations or can be scheduled at your
location. Online training is also available. For more information, visit http://www.trivantis.-
com/elearning-software-training/lectora-training.

Getting the latest news

The Getting Started window displays headlines and links to articles to keep you updated
on all things Lectora.
Press Ctrl + N to open the Getting Started window from within the program. Check the
Latest News section to stay up-to-date with the program.
For details about the Getting Started window, see Using the Getting Started window.

Uninstalling the program

To uninstall Lectora, use the Windows Control Panel.
Uninstalling Lectora will not uninstall the tools. The tools must be uninstalled indi-
vidually.
Follow these steps to uninstall the program:
1. Click the Windows Start Button and select Control Panel.
2. Select Uninstall or change a program under Programs.
3. Select Lectora Inspire (or Lectora Publisher) in the list of programs and select
Uninstall. To uninstall a tool, locate it in the list and uninstall it.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

- 57 -
The program is uninstalled.

How the program works

The program relies on two basic concepts that novice users should learn before using
the product. This section explains the book metaphor from which the product is based,
defines the title hierarchy, and describes how to inherit objects to simplify creating a title.
Understanding these concepts will make using the product easier and will enable you to
maximize its full potential.
View the following topics for more information about the book metaphor and inheritance:
l Understanding the book metaphor
l Understanding inheritance

Understanding the book metaphor

The product uses a book metaphor to help you create an organized hierarchy of content.
The title represents the overall course (or book metaphorically), and the course (book)
can contain and be organized using chapters, sections, sub-sections, and pages. The
pages represent the physical pages that are designed by the author. Chapters, sections,
and sub-sections are not physical pages, but rather a means of organizing the title.
Here's a more detailed look at these title components:
The Title
l Holds all the information on a particular subject
l Contains pages
l Organizes those pages into chapters or sections, or both

l Can include title-wide features such as a company logo or forward and backward

navigation
The Chapters
l Contain logical "major" subdivisions of information about the subject
l Can be further subdivided into sections

l Contain sections, pages, or both, but not other chapters

l Can include chapter-wide features that are apparent on every page within that

chapter
The Sections
l Contain logical "minor" subdivisions of information about the subject
l Can be further subdivided into smaller sections (called sub-sections)

l Contain sub-sections, pages, or both

l Can include section-wide features that are apparent on every page within that sec-

tion
The Pages
l Contain physical objects such as text, images, and video
l Cannot be further subdivided

- 58 -
 l Are the physical pages that your users will see
With the product, you can use the same approach to organizing your content. There is a
direct relationship between the elements of a book and the elements that comprise your
title. The title can contain only pages or you can organize those pages into chapters, sec-
tions, and subsections.

Understanding inheritance
One of the biggest time-saving features that the program offers is a concept called inher-
itance. This concept may not be natural to you, and it will very likely be the aspect of the
program that requires the most thought when you are designing a new title. The scenario
in which you’ll realize the greatest benefits from using inheritance is when you have an
object or a group of common objects that need to appear on more than one page of your
title.
A scenario
For instance, let’s imagine that your course will have a How to Sharpen a Pencil section
with 10 pages in it, and you want the student to be able to traverse forward and back-
ward through the pages by using a Next button and a Previous button. Furthermore, you
always want a Glossary button to appear on each of those pages, so the student can
quickly display a Glossary of terms when necessary. Suppose also that the last page of
your How to Sharpen a Pencil section is the last page of the entire title. Since it is the
last page of your title, it should not have a Next button.
Achieving the scenario without using inheritance
Traditionally, you would create ten new pages in the How to Sharpen a Pencil section.
You would then import and place the Next, Previous and Glossary buttons on one of
the pages, and make the Action of each button go specifically to the next page, the pre-
vious page, and the glossary respectively. Finally, you would copy and paste all three of
the buttons on the remaining nine pages within the section (minus the Next button on the
last page).
Achieving the scenario using inheritance
Alternatively, take advantage of the program’s inheritance feature. With inheritance, you
can import and place those three buttons (Next, Previous, and Glossary) on the Sec-
tion level object that you titled How to Sharpen a Pencil instead of placing them on all
the pages.
You will place these three buttons on that Section one time, you will set the buttons
actions one time, and then you will simply start creating new pages in that section. The
inheritance feature enables those three buttons to automatically appear on every new
page you create in the How to Sharpen a Pencil section! Anything you place on the sec-
tion level will automatically appear on every page you create in that section.
You don’t always have to inherit everything

- 59 -
As mentioned above in the scenario, the last page should not have a Next button, since
it is the last page of the title. By placing all three buttons on the Section, every page cre-
ated in that Section contains all three buttons, which we know is not desirable on the last
page.
To solve this problem, the program offers you the ability to exclude certain objects from
being inherited. By using this feature, you can continue to inherit the three buttons
throughout the section, while excluding the Next button from the last page.
See also: Excluding objects using inheritance
Inheritance summary
l Anything placed on a page appears on only that page
l Anything placed on a section appears on every Page* of every sub-Section in that

Section
l Anything placed on a chapter appears on every Page* of every Section in that

Chapter
l Anything placed on a test appears on every Page* of every Section in that Test

l Anything placed on your title appears on every Page* of every Section of every

Chapter in that Title

*Unless you use the Exclude Inheritance of Certain Objects property on the page.

Accessing your License Key number and ver-

sion information
You can access your program's License Key number and view the version number of the
program you currently have installed. The License Key number is the access code you
were provided to activate the program.
To view this information, open the File ribbon and select Help. The License Key number
and version are displayed on the right side of the window.
Your License Key number is also displayed on the Getting Started window. For details
about the Getting Started window, see Using the Getting Started window.

Setting preferences
Use the Preferences window to specify how you want your version of the product to per-
form. For example, specify the location of the Media Library folder and designate the edit-
ors to be launched when editing objects. Preferences must only be set once, and will
persist with each title you create.
Preferences are divided into the following categories:
l General settings
Contain settings involving your general experience.
l Editors settings
Contain settings for configuring your preferred editors when editing various object

- 60 -
 types.
l CourseMill settings
Contains settings for specifying the host, path, and credentials for logging onto
CourseMill.
l ReviewLink settings
Contains settings for specifying the host, path, and credentials for logging onto
ReviewLink.
l Inspire Tools settings
Contains settings for specifying the credentials for logging onto the online solu-
tions provided by our Lectora Inspire partners.
l Auto update settings
Contains settings for automatically updating the program.
l Publish strings settings
Contains settings for customizing the text used in the runtime.
l Publish message settings
Contains settings for specifying the type of messages that are displayed during an
error check.
l Form Elements settings
Contains settings for specifying custom images when adding radio buttons and
check boxes to your title.

Setting general settings

Set these preferences to control your overall experience:
l Show buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer
l Show visibility check boxes in Title Explorer
l Use resource names as object names
l Spell check text objects while typing
l Use default IMS metadata when creating objects
l Show Getting Started dialog on program start
l Show text formatting marks
l Displaying audio/video closed captions by default
l Clicking to open the Media Library
l Specify the location of your media library
l Specify your user name

- 61 -
Showing buttons for hiding objects in the Title
Explorer
Choose whether to show buttons in the Title Explorer that allow you to hide title, chapter,
and section objects. The Title Explorer will display clickable plus (+) and minus (-) icons
that allow you to collapse or expand the icons representing objects residing above the
page level.
To enable showing the expand and collapse icons in the Title Explorer:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Enable the Show buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer check box.
3. Click OK.
The icons are enabled in the Title Explorer.
See also: Using the Title Explorer

Showing visibility check boxes in Title Explorer

Choose whether to show visibility check boxes in the Title Explorer. The Title Explorer
will display an enabled check box graphic ( ) next to an object that is visible. To turn the
visibility of an object off, click the corresponding check box to disable it ( ). The object
will be made invisible within the work area. This could be helpful when working with mul-
tiple objects layered on a page. For example, suppose you have two hyperlinks on a
page that will display the definitions of the hyperlinked words. You might want these
definitions to appear in the same place on the page, but only once the user has clicked
on the corresponding hyperlink. To make it easy to work with these definitions, you can
uncheck the visibility icon for one of them, while working with the other, and vice versa.
The visibility icons do not affect your title’s functionality while viewing it in Run or Pre-
view mode, and do not affect the published title.
Visibility states are preserved between sessions.
To enable the visibility-state icon in the Title Explorer:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Enable the Show visibility check boxes in the Title Explorer check box.
3. Click OK.
The visibility state icon is enabled in the Title Explorer. While in Edit mode, an open eye
displays the corresponding object on the page. A closed eye conceals the cor-
responding object from view. Visibility states are preserved between sessions.
See also: Using the Title Explorer

Using resource names as object names

You can automatically assign the file name (minus the file extension) to an object as the
object name. For example, with this option selected, if you drag-and-drop MyImage.jpg

- 62 -
into your title, the image will appear listed in the Title Explorer as MyImage.
To enable automatically assigning the file name to an object:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Enable the Use resource names for object names check box.
3. Click OK.

Enabling spell check while typing

You can have the program automatically check the spelling of text as you type it. Mis-
spelled words will appear underlined in red. The red underlines will only be visible while
the text block is being edited. If an underlined word is not misspelled, it can be added to
the dictionary. You can also right-click on underlined words to select from a list of sug-
gested spellings. Spelling changes you add to the dictionaries will be reflected in the
automatic spell checking results.
See also: Checking spelling
To enable automatic spell checking:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Check the Spell check text objects while typing box.
3. Click OK.

Using default IMS metadata when creating objects

To save time, you can automatically define all the objects that you add to your title to
have IMS metadata data elements (IEEE LTSC LOM). This eliminates having to manu-
ally define each object's IMS metadata data element.
To select the use default IMS metadata preference:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Check the Use default IMS metadata when creating objects box.
3. Click OK.
See also: Including metadata for an object

Hiding the Getting Started window at start-up

By default, the Getting Started window opens when you start the program. You can
change it to be hidden when the program starts up.
To hide the Getting Started window:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Disable the Show Getting Started dialog on program start check box.
3. Click OK.
The Getting Started window will be hidden next time you start the program.

- 63 -
See also: Using the Getting Started window

Showing text formatting marks

You can show text formatting marks within text blocks, such as paragraph returns, hard
and soft returns, spaces, tabs, and page breaks.
To show text formatting marks:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Enable the Show text formatting marks check box.
3. Click OK.
To quickly enable and disable this feature while working within your title, right-click on a
text block and select Show Text Formatting Marks or enable the Show Text Formatting
Marks graphic in the Paragraph group on the Home ribbon.
See also: Working with text
Displaying audio/video closed captions by default
You can control whether audio/video closed captioning is displayed by default.
For details about working with closed captioning see Working with closed-cap-
tioning audio and Working with closed-captioning video.
This preference is enabled by default.
To disable displaying audio/video closed captions by default:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Disable the Display audio/video closed cpations by default box.
3. Click OK.
Clicking to open the Media Library
You can control how you can open the Media Library. By default, the Media Library
opens when you hover over the Media Library buttons (Title Resources, My Library,
Stock Library, and Inspire Tools) located vertically along the right side of the work
area. You can enable the ability to open the Media Library with a click, instead of hov-
ering.
To enable clicking to open the Media Library:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Enable the Click to open Media Library check box.
3. Click OK.
The Media Library closes when the cursor is no longer hovering over it.

- 64 -
For details about using the Media Library to help you create titles, see Working with the
Media Library.

Specifying the location of your media library

Use the Media Library Folder field to specify the location of your shared media library.
When you install the program, the \MediaLib folder is the default directory for the Media
Library. This location can be changed to a local or network folder where media intended
for reuse is stored. The media can then be accessed from the program and added to any
title.
You must save all open titles and close the program before moving the Media
Library folder. For details about saving titles and closing the program, see Nav-
igating the File ribbon.
If you specify a different location for your Media Library, and still want to be able to
access the media installed with the program, you should copy or move the entire \Me-
diaLib directory (C:\Program Files\Trivantis\Lectora\MediLib) from the program's install-
ation path and paste it into your new Media Library location.
To specify the location of your Media Library folder:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Specify the folder in the Media Library Folder field or click the Browse button to
navigate and select the folder.
3. Click OK.
The location of the Media Library folder is set.
See also: Working with the Media Library

Specifying your user name

If you create notes to add to your title, your user name will appear on them. Notes are
helpful when working in a team environment, and can be placed on pages as reminders
or additional information. Notes are only displayed in Edit mode and are not visible in
published titles.
See also: Working with notes
Switching between modes
To specify your user name:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Specify your user name in the User Name field.
3. Click OK.

Specifying editor preferences

You can specify the editor applications used by the program to externally edit resource
files used within a title. For each type of editable resource (images, audio, video,

- 65 -
animations, documents, and text files), you can define an external application that edits
that resource type.
When you install the program, the corresponding tool editors are automatically
populated on this tab. If you install just the Publisher, you must specify your own
editing applications for the different media types.
Within the program, you can edit the resource by selecting the Edit option from the
object’s right-click menu or by selecting the Edit button from the object’s properties win-
dow. This action will then launch the defined editor for the resource type, with the current
resource as the editor’s target. If you save changes to the resource in the external editor,
the program will automatically reload the modified resource when you return focus to the
title.
Until you have defined a resource editor for a particular resource type, the Edit options
discussed above will be disabled.
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the Editors tab.
3. For each resource type (Images, Audio, and so on), type the full file path and
name of the corresponding editor’s executable file or use the browse button to loc-
ate and select it.
4. Click OK.

Specifying CourseMill preferences

CourseMill® is a learning management system designed and developed by Trivantis. If
you are using a CourseMill server, the information specified on this tab will enable you to
easily transfer published titles to the server. Specify the Web address of the CourseMill
server and the location on the server where the CourseMill system resides.
If you are not using a CourseMill server, this tab can be ignored.
To specify the location of the CourseMill server:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the CourseMill tab.
3. In the Host field, specify the Web address of the CourseMill server. By default, this
value is www.coursemill.com.
4. In the Path to CourseMill on Host field, specify the location on the CourseMill
server where the CourseMill system resides. If the CourseMill system was installed
with the default settings, specify /cm6 in this field.
5. In the Instructor field, specify the user ID of the course instructor in the CourseMill
system.
6. In the Password field, specify the password for the user ID of the course instructor

- 66 -
 in the CourseMill system.
7. Click OK.
For details about publishing to CourseMill, see Publishing to CourseMill.

Specifying Inspire Tools preferences

Use this tab to provide your credientials for accessing the online solutions provided by
our partners.
If you are not using the tools provided by the eLearning Brothers, this tab can be ignored.
To specify the eLearning Brothers credentials:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the Inspire Tools tab.
3. In the Username field, specify the username to access the eLearning Brother site.
4. In the Password field, specify the password for the user name.
5. Click OK.
For details about the tools provided by the eLearning Brothers, see Working with the
Inspire tools.

Specifying ReviewLink preferences

ReviewLink® is an online review tool designed and developed by Trivantis. Storing your
ReviewLink credentials on this tab will enable you to easily transfer published titles for
review on ReviewLink. Your password is securely hidden. Specify the Web address of
the ReviewLink server and the location on the server where the ReviewLink system
resides.
If you are not using a ReviewLink server, this tab can be ignored.
To specify the location of the ReviewLink server:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the ReviewLink tab.
3. Use the fields in the ReviewLink group to specify your server settings. In the Host
field, specify the Web address of the ReviewLink server. By default, this value is
reviewlink.com.
4. In the Path to ReviewLink on Host field, specify the location on the ReviewLink
server where the ReviewLink system resides. By default, this value is /reviewlink.
5. Specify the email address with which you registered with ReviewLink in the Pub-
lisher Email ID field.
6. Specify the password with which you registered with ReviewLink in the Password
field.
7. Click OK.

- 67 -
For details about publishing to ReviewLink, see Publishing to ReviewLink.

Specifying when to check for program updates

You can specify when the program should automatically check for program updates. If
an update is available, the program will notify you. Follow the on-screen instructions to
download and update your version of the program
You must have administrative rights on your computer to set this feature.
To specify your program update preferences:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the Auto Update tab.
3. Enable Check for program updates every n days to have the program check for
updates and specify the number of days.
4. If you want to check for updates now, click the Check for Updates Now button.
5. Click OK.

Specifying publish strings preferences

You can customize the text used in the runtime. Change the text displayed within the
Test Results window, content generated emails, and some program buttons. For
example, you can change the FAILED text message, that is displayed within test results
to students with a non-passing test score, to more sensitive terminology. Publish strings
can also be changed here if you are producing content written in a language other than
English.
To specify Publish String preferences:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the Publish Strings tab.
3. Use the String Set drop-down to select the string set that you want to customize:
Additional custom Publish String sets can be created, which enables you to select
from a list of predefined Publish String sets when publishing titles for different audi-
ences and languages. Click Add to add a new string set. Click Import to import a
text file of a string set. Click Export to save a string set to a text file. This enables
you to translate and change the publish strings of the exported text file using any
text editor and import them back into the program. Click Delete to delete a string
set.
4. Select the row you want to change and alter the text in the Value column as neces-
sary. The Description column lists instances at which the corresponding text in
the Value column will be displayed. The Value column lists default text that is dis-
played to the student during the corresponding instance in the Description
column.

- 68 -
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
6. Click OK.
The Date Format and Time Format publish strings allow you to specify the display
of the date and time when shown to the student.
The formatting options are as follows:
Date Formats:
l Month: M or MM (Examples: 1 , 01)
l Day of Month: D or DD (Examples: 1 , 01)
l Year: YY or YYYY (Examples: 71 , 1971)
Date Format Examples:
To show the days 5/24/72 and 10/7/02, use M/D/YY.
To show the same days as 24-05-1972 and 07-10-2002 use DD-MM-YYYY.
Time Formats:
l AM/PM: a or A (Examples: am , AM)
l 12-hour: h or hh (Examples: 1 - 12, 01 - 12)
l 24-HOUR: H or HH (Examples: 1 - 24, 01 - 24)
l Minute/Seconds: m/s or mm/ss (Examples: 1 , 01)
Time Format Examples:
To show 8:25 am and 2:15 pm, use h:mm a.
To show the same times as 08:25 and 14:15 use HH:mm.
Date and Time Local Functions:
In addition to these formatting options, you can specify that the student be shown
the date and/or time based on their browser and system locale formatting.
To do this, use the following FUNC(xxx) format to specify a function to call rather
than a format.
The following functions are available:
FUNC(GetLocaleDate) The date based on browser and locale
FUNC(GetLocaleTime) The time based on browser and locale
FUNC(GetDate_GER) The date with German months
FUNC(GetDate_PTB) The date with Brazilian Portuguese months
FUNC(GetDate_SPA) The date with Spanish months
If a function is specified with an incorrect name, GetLocaleDate or GetLocaleTime
will be used in its place.

- 69 -
Specifying publish messages preferences
You can specify the type of messages that are displayed during an error check. Selec-
tions made here will determine the information that is displayed during an error check ini-
tiated from the Tools menu or by publishing. For example, you can select to show
warnings for large resources or when Flash overlapping occurs. You can also select to
display a warning for unused resources and variables and whether the unused
resources and variables should be removed.
To determine which publish messages should be displayed during an error check:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the Publish Messages tab.
3. Select the Show only errors and warnings check box if you want informational
messages (displayed in black) to be omitted from the Publish and Error Check win-
dows.
4. Select the Show HTML Warnings check box to enable the selection of HTML-spe-
cific warnings. Select from the following warning options:
Show warnings for Select this to display warnings for any resources used
resource sizes within the title that are larger than 128Kb in size.
Show warnings for Select this to display warnings for the variables and
unused resources (images, audio, video, and so on) that are not
resources/variables used within the title. This can occur with resources that were
added to the title but then later deleted. The program will
ask during the error-check process if those unused
resources and variables should be removed. This happens
during an error check; not the publish process.
Show Flash overlap Select this to display warnings if Flash overlapping occurs.
warnings
5. Click OK.

Specifying form elements preferences

You can use custom images for when adding radio buttons and check boxes to your
titles. Using custom images for these type of form elements will affect the appearance of
test and survey questions, along with any individual radio buttons or check boxes that
are added to a title. Select from the available images or import your own images.
To specify Form Elements preferences:
1. Select Lectora Preferences from the File ribbon. The Preferences window opens.
2. Click the Form Elements tab.
3. Enable the Radio Buttons check box to enable customizing the images for radio
buttons. Use the Selected image list to select an image to use for radio buttons

- 70 -
 that have been selected. Use the Unselected image list to select an image to use
for radio buttons that are not selected. Samples are displayed to the right.
To choose your own image, select Custom Image from the list. Locate and select
the image you want to use and click Open.
4. Enable the Check Boxes check box to enable customizing the images for check
boxes. Use the Selected image list to select an image to use for selected check
boxes. Use the Unselected image pull-down list to select an image to use for
unselected check boxes. Samples are displayed to the right.
To choose your own image, select Custom Image from the list. Locate and select
the image you want to use and click Open.
5. Click OK.
The preferences are set.

- 71 -
Navigating the workspace
Each time you launch the product, the Getting Started window is displayed that presents
options for creating new titles and accessing existing titles. Once you have opened a
title, the workspace is revealed. It consists of menus, toolbars, the Title Explorer, and a
work area.
The following sections present additional information about the workspace:
l Using the Getting Started window
l Touring the interface
See also: Uninstalling the product

Using the Getting Started window

The Getting Started window opens when you start the program. The Getting Started win-
dow is the launch pad to everything within the program. You can quickly get started with
a blank title, use the Design Wizard to guide you through the steps in building a new
title, start with a template, and much more.
If you are already working in the program, you can select Getting Started from the Help
menu on the File ribbon or press Ctrl + N to launch the Getting Started window.
Use the Getting Started window to complete the following tasks:
l Start from a blank title
l Starting from a blank responsive title
l Use the Design Wizard to create your title
l Use a template to start your title
l Open an existing title
l Import a title using PowerPoint
l View the video tutorials
l Take the self-paced product demonstration
l Launch the Quick Tour
l View sample titles
l Share ideas on the Community Forum
l Launch this Help
l Keep up with the latest news
l Launch a tool
l Contact Support

- 72 -
To view the latest changes that we have added to this version of the program, click the
What's New in Lectora 16 link in the upper-right corner. To prevent the Getting Started
window from being displayed at startup, enable the Do not show this screen at startup
check box. (You can also set a preference to hide the Getting Started window. For
details, see Hiding the Getting Started window at start-up.)
Additionally, your program's License Key number is displayed in the lower-right corner.

Starting from a blank title

To create a new title from scratch without the use of a wizard, click New Blank Title from
the Getting Started window.
The program immediately opens to a blank canvas.
See also: Creating a new, blank title

Starting from a blank responsive title

To create a responsive title from scratch without the use of a wizard, click New Respons-
ive Title from the Getting Started window. Responsive titles adapt automatically to the
view sizes of your users' devices. Built-in features allow you to create titles that auto-
matically adapt to different devices and device orientations. This eliminates having to
maintain multiple titles or implement complex branching within a title.
The program immediately opens to a blank canvas with the responsive features
enabled.
For more information about building a responsive titles, including details about using the
responsive features, see Working with responsive content.

Using the Design Wizard to create a title

The Design Wizard makes it easy to get rolling with the program. The Design Wizard
guides you through creating a title from one of the pre-designed title styles. Your
answers to the Wizard's questions will enable the program to create the framework for
the style of title you selected.
From the Getting Started window, click Design Wizard to start the Design Wizard. The
Design Wizard opens.
Use the Design Wizard's three side-tabs (Title Type, Size and Theme, and Organ-
ization ) to quickly configure and design the framework of your title.
Title Type Use the fields on this side-tab to specify the title's name and default
file location, along with specifying whether the title is to be published
to a Learning Management System/Learning Record Store.
If you are publishing your title to a LMS, click the Yes to the Learning
Management System/Learning Record Store question?
Size and Use the fields on this side-tab to specify the title's page size and pre-
Theme defined theme. A theme is a set of design elements that together

- 73 -
 provide a look to your title.
Organization Use the fields on this side-tab to define the title's organizational struc-
ture, along with whether the title should include a test.
Follow the on-screen instructions to build your title. When you have answered all of the
questions, click Build It!. Your new title is displayed in the work area. The outline is dis-
played in the Title Explorer and the first page is displayed in the work space on the right.
See also: Designing your title
Tests, surveys, and questions

Using a template to start your title

Templates are a convenient way to store boilerplate versions of titles that can be used
as a starting point for future titles that are created. For instance, if your organization has a
standard "look and feel" that should be applied to all titles, you can create a template
that contains the layout and all associated text and graphics for that title. You would then
use this template when creating all of your titles.
You can create your own templates by saving a title as a template or altering an existing
template. You can also select from hundreds of pre-designed templates developed and
shared by Trivantis.
To start a title using one of your own templates:
1. Click My Templates from the Getting Started window. The File ribbon is opened to
the Create New Title menu item.
2. Select a template from the list on the right side of the Create New Title window and
click Create from Template.
The template you selected is used to start the new title.
To start a title using a shared template from the Internet:
1. Click Templates Online from the Getting Started window. The File ribbon is
opened to the Create New Title menu item.
2. Use the Search field or open the available template folders to navigate and select
a shared template.
3. Click Create from Template.
The template you selected to used to start the new title.
See also: Using a template
Saving a title as a template
Importing and exporting templates

Opening an existing title

To open an existing title using the Getting Started window, click the name of the title in
the Open box under Recent Titles. The last six titles that you have opened using the

- 74 -
program are listed. If the existing title is not listed, click Browse to navigate and select
the title.
See also: Opening an existing title

Viewing the video tutorials

The video tutorial provide a visual introduction to some of the features and highlights of
the program. From the Getting Started window, select Video Tutorials to select from sev-
eral video tutorials.
Use the list to select an individual video.
See also: Take the self-paced product demonstration

Take the self-paced product demonstration

You can take a tour of the program using the self-paced product demonstration. From the
Getting Started window, select Click and Learn to view a video demonstration of the pro-
gram.
See also: Viewing the video tutorials

Launching the Quick Tour

You can launch a quick tour that introduces you to the program. You will learn about
each part of the interface along with tips for using the Title Explorer, mastering on-page
editing, accessing resources, and more.

Viewing sample titles

You can view sample titles to help you get started. Each sample highlights various fea-
tures and options.
To view sample titles, click Sample Titles from the Getting Started window. The sample
titles are listed, along with descriptions of the features highlighted within each sample.
Click Download to download and use the sample title.

Sharing ideas on the Community Forum

Share and exchange ideas with fellow users and experts. Have a question? Need a tem-
plate to save time? Or do you just want to share experiences with other users? Visit the
Community Forum.
To launch the Community Forum, click Community Forum from the Getting Started win-
dow.
Additional resources: Top 10 Ways to Benefit From the Trivantis Community

Launching the Help

Need help? You can launch the Help from the Getting Started window.
To launch the Help, click Help from the Getting Started window.

- 75 -
See also: Accessing Help

Keeping up to date with the latest news

Check this link often to keep up with the latest news and events surrounding the world of
Lectora. The latest headlines are displayed. Click the read more link for access to the
Everything eLearning Blog. The blog provides posts on a range of topics including ‘how-
to’ product demonstrations, design, innovation and authoring along with ideas on how to
create break-through eLearning content.

Launching a tool
The program comes with the following powerful supplemental applications that you can
launch directly from the Getting Started window:
ReviewLink ReviewLink allows you to share titles with online reviewers and
capture their feedback. Reviewers can add comments and attach
files to reviewed pages to provide feedback. Comments and
attachments are tabulated and presented to both publishers and
reviewers so they can manage the status of the comments and
complete the review cycle. For details about publishing to
ReviewLink, see Publishing to ReviewLink.
Camtasia for Lect- Camtasia allows you to create captivating videos and record
ora screen activity. After you have created the video, you can edit it in
a variety of ways and add it to your title. For details, see Creating
screen recordings using Camtasia
Snagit for Lectora Snagit® allows you to create and edit images and capture and
save a portion of the visual image of your screen. This is valuable
when creating step-by-step software demonstrations, displaying
examples of Web pages, or capturing an event on your system.
After you’ve captured a screen image, you can manipulate it in a
variety of ways and add it to your title. For details, see Creating
screen capture images using Snagit.
Inspire Tools Select this to use applications provided by our Lectora Inspire part-
ners. For details, see Working with the Inspire tools.

Contacting Support
In a jam? You can get support help from the Getting Started window. Click Contact Sup-
port to display our online Support form. Complete the form if you would like to be con-
tacted by one of our support representatives.

Touring the interface

Here's a top-down look at the workspace:
Quick-access toolbar

- 76 -
Contains icons representing common tasks you perform most often, such as managing
the program window, saving your work, and undoing or redoing the last program request.
You can customize the contents of the toolbar or show it below the ribbon.
See also: Using the quick access toolbar
Ribbon bar
Contains ribbons containing task-oriented commands. For example, the Insert tab con-
tains icons representing commands for adding different objects to your title.
See also: Using the ribbon bar
Ribbon area
Contains task-oriented icons for quickly completing commands and selecting tools. For
example, to quickly add a chapter to your title, click the Chapter icon in the Add

Structure group on the Home tab.

See also: Using the ribbon bar
Help menu
Contains links to information that will assist you with your product experience, such as
launching the Help, viewing video tutorials, and viewing sample titles.
See also: Using the Help menu
Title Explorer
Displays the structure of your title and the objects contained within it. Select from two
views: the classic Title Explorer view and a thumbnail view. You can copy and paste
within the Title Explorer, as well as drag-and-drop objects from one level of your title to
another. You can also hide the Title Explorer.
See also: Using the Title Explorer
Work area
Allows you to interactively manage the objects contained within your title. Drag-and-drop
objects to the work area to place them within your title, and double-click objects to
review their properties.
See also: Using the work area
Media Library side-tabs
The Media Library side-tabs are located along the right-side of the work-area. They
provide one-click access to the following three areas of the Media Library: Title
Resources, My Library, Stock Library, and Inspire Tools.
See also: Using the Media Library side-tabs
Status bar

- 77 -
The status bar provides dynamic information on the current position of the mouse cursor
on the page, as well as information about the currently selected object.
See also: Using the status bar

Using the quick-access bar

Load the quick-access bar with your most-used commands to save time and frustration.
The quick-access bar is the area of the title bar in the top-left corner of the workspace
window. The bar contains handy default options to save, undo, and redo, along with the
ability to add and remove options of your choice. You can also move the bar below the
ribbon, if desired.
Click the appropriate graphic on the bar to execute the corresponding command. For
example, to quickly save your title, click the Save graphic.
The following commands are loaded by default:
Command Description
Window Man- Provides commands to manage the workspace window, such as
agement moving, sizing, minimizing and maximizing.
Save Saves your current title
Undo Select this to undo your unsaved changes one-at-a-time.
Redo Select this to redo your unsaved changes one-at-a-time.
View these topics for more information about using the quick-access bar:
l Adding and removing commands
l Moving below the ribbon
See also: Saving a title

Adding and removing commands

You can add and remove commands from the quick-access bar. For example, if you are
creating tables, you can add the popular table commands, like Insert Column and Insert
Row.
To add and remove commands:
1. Click the drop-down list graphic located at the end of the quick-access bar,
enable and disable commands or select More Commands to add more com-
mands. The Options window opens.
2. Select options in the Choose commands from drop-down list to populate the
Commands box.
3. To add a command to the quick-access bar, select the command from the Com-
mands list and click Add. Alternatively, you can right-click on a button or option on
a ribbon and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar. The command you selected is
added to the box on the right.

- 78 -
 4. To remove a command from the quick-access bar, select the command from the
box on the right and click Remove. The command you selected is removed from
the box on the right. The default commands can be removed, if desired.
5. If you need to restore your changes, click Reset.
6. When you are finished adding and removing commands, click OK.
The quick-access bar is updated with your changes.

Moving the quick-access bar below the ribbon

You can move the quick-access bar below the ribbon, if desired.
To move it below the ribbon, click the drop-down list graphic located at the end of the
quick-access bar and select Show Below the Ribbon. The bar is moved below the rib-
bon. To move the bar back, click the drop-down list graphic and select Show Above
the Ribbon.
You can also move the quick-access bar using a control on the quick-access bar options
window. Here's how:
1. Click the drop-down list graphic located at the end of the quick-access bar and
select More Commands. The Options window opens.
2. Enable the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box to show
the bar below the ribbon. Disable the check box to show the bar above the ribbon.
3. Click OK.

Using the ribbon bar

The ribbon bar lists the ask-oriented tabs that contain option icons for quickly completing
commands and selecting tools. Use the ribbon bar to access all the functions of the pro-
gram. Property tabs are highlighted when you select an object in your title.
The ribbon bar consists of the following ribbons:
l File
l Home
l Design
l Insert
l Test & Survey
l Tools
l View
l Properties

Navigating the File ribbon

Use the File ribbon to manage your titles. Select from the following options:
Save

- 79 -
Select this to save the current title. This menu item is available if you have made
changes that need to be saved to the current title. Additional saving options are provided
under Save Options described below.
See also: Saving a title
Save As
Select this to create a copy of the current title. This menu item is available after you open
a title. When you select this item, you are prompted for the new name and folder to which
to save a copy of the current title. After the title is copied, the current title will be closed
and the newly created copy of the title will be opened. Additional saving options are
provided under Save Options described below.
See also: Saving a title
Open Existing Title
Select this to open an existing title. When you select this menu item, the Open Existing
Title window opens. Navigate and select the title.
See also: Opening an existing title
Close Title
Select this to close the current title. If the title contains unsaved changes, you will be
prompted to save the title.
Title Information
Select this to view information regarding the current title, such as the name, path to the
title's folder, the date and time the title was last modified, and the title size. Click to
open the title's folder.
Controls for configuring password protection for the title are also available.
See also: Protecting your title with a password
Save Options
Select this to view additional saving options, such as a saving a copy of the current title
and saving the title as a template, along with controls to configure auto-saving your title.
See also: Saving your title
Setting auto-save preferences
Recent Titles
Select this to view the list of titles you recently opened. Click a title to open it.
Create New Title
Select this to start a new title. You can select from starting from a blank title or a respons-
ive title, starting from a theme or a template, or using the Design Wizard or a title wizard.
See also: Creating a new, blank title

- 80 -
 Creating a title using the Design Wizard
Creating a responsive title
Creating a title using a Title Wizard
Creating a title from a theme
Using a template
Import
Select this to add supported file formats to your title, such as Lectora Online files, XML,
and Zip files.
See also: Importing and exporting content
Export
Select this to export titles in supported formats, such as a Lectora Online package, XML,
and Zip.
See also: Importing and exporting content
Print
Select this to print the current title. the program supports a number of different printing
options such as Storyboard and Outline.
You can also contextually print title content. Right-click on a chapter, section, or page in
the Title Explorer and select Print to open the Print window with the print pages pre-filled
to only print the content within the chapter, section, or page you selected.
Help
Select this to view access to Help information, such as the video tutorials, the Trivantis
community forum, and contacting us, along with important information regarding your ver-
sion of the program.
See also: Accessing Help
Accessing your License Key number and version number
Lectora Preferences
Select this to specify how you want your version of the program to perform. For example,
specify the editor applications used by the program to edit resource files or set when the
program should automatically check for program updates. Preferences must only be set
once, and persist with each title you create.
See also: Setting preferences
Exit
Select this to close the program. If the current title contains unsaved changes, you will be
prompted to save the title.

- 81 -
Navigating the Home ribbon
The Home ribbon contains common and popular commands for accessing clipboard
functions and editing, building title structure, managing textual elements, arranging
objects, and publishing.
Paste

Click this to paste the item or object that you cut or copied to the clipboard. You can also
paste as formatted text or as unformatted text. To paste as formatted text, click the drop-
down list and select Paste Formatted. To paste as unformatted text, click the drop-down
list and select Paste Unformatted. The graphic that is displayed is dynamic; it changes
to the previously selected item.
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+V keyboard shortcut.
Cut
Click this to cut the selected object and store it in the clipboard. Paste the object in
another location using Paste.
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+X keyboard shortcut.
Copy
Click this to copy the selected item or object and store it in the clipboard. Paste the item
or object in another location using Paste.
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+C keyboard shortcut.
Paste As
Click this to paste text that you cut or copied to the clipboard in various formats, such as
Formatted Text (RTF), Unformatted Unicode Text(remove the original unicode format-
ting), Unformatted Text (remove its original formatting), Picture (Enhanced Metafile) or
Picture (Windows Metafile).
AU

Click this to add an assignable unit to your title. For details about adding assignable
units, see Adding an assignable unit.
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+0 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with assignable units
Chapter

Click this to add a chapter to your title.

See also: Working with chapters
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+1 keyboard shortcut.

- 82 -
 Section

Click this to add a section to your title.

See also: Working with sections
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+2 keyboard shortcut.
Page

Click this to add a page to your title. Click the drop-down list to add a page using a page
layout. Page layouts determine how objects are placed on your page. You can use page
layouts to apply a consistent design to multiple pages.
Clicking this ribbon item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+3 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with pages
Using and managing page layouts
Add object

Click this to quickly insert the object that is displayed as the Add object graphic in the
Quick Insert group. The graphic that is displayed is dynamic; it changes to the pre-
viously selected item. To add a different object, click the drop-down list and select a pre-
defined object or click More to display the Insert ribbon.
See also: Working with Quick Insert
Text Style

Click this to apply the previously selected text style to the highlighted text in a text block.
Text styles define text attributes such as the font face, style, size and color. Click the
drop-down list to select a different style and add and remove styles.
See also: Applying a text style
Managing text styles
Text Color

Click this to apply a new font color to the highlighted text in a text block. Select from sev-
eral predefined colors, define a custom color, or use the eye-dropper tool to select a
color from elsewhere within your title. The current color is displayed as the bar in the rib-
bon graphic.
See also: Changing the font color
(Font)

Use this list to apply a new font to the highlighted text in a text block.
See also: Changing the font

- 83 -
 (Font size)

Use this list to apply a new font size to the highlighted text in a text block.
See also: Changing the font size
(Bold)
When unselected, click this to apply bold highlighting to the highlighted text in a text
block. When selected, click this to remove bold highlighting from the highlighted text in a
text block.
See also: Bolding, italics, and underlining
(Italics)
When unselected, click this to apply italic highlighting to the highlighted text in a text
block. When selected, click this to remove italic highlighting from the highlighted text in a
text block.
See also: Bolding, italics, and underlining
(Underline)
When unselected, click this to underline the highlighted text in a text block. When selec-
ted, click this to remove underlining from the highlighted text in a text block.
See also: Bolding, italics, and underlining
(Text Shadow)

When unselected, click this to add shadowing to the text in a text block. When selected,
click this to remove shadowing from the text in a text block. Click the drop-down arrow to
specify the text shadowing attributes.
See also: Changing the shadowing effect of text in a text block
(Superscript)
When unselected, click this to superscript the highlighted text in a text block. When selec-
ted, click this to remove superscript from the highlighted text in a text block.
See also: Superscripting and subscripting
(Subscript)
When unselected, click this to subscript the highlighted text in a text block. When selec-
ted, click this to remove subscript from the highlighted text in a text block.
See also: Superscripting and subscripting
(Highlight)
Click this to apply a highlight color to the selected text in a text block. Select from several
predefined colors, define a custom color, or use the eye-dropper tool to select a color
from elsewhere within your title. The current color is displayed as the pen-tip in the rib-
bon graphic.

- 84 -
See also: Highlighting text
(Symbol)
Click this to insert the symbol into a text block. Click the drop-down list to select more
symbols. The ribbon graphic changes to the recently selected symbol.
See also: Adding a symbol
(Hyperlink)
Click this to configure a hypertext link in the text block.
See also: Adding hyperlinks to text
(Align left)
When unselected, click this to align the text within the text block along the left margin.
When selected, click this to revert to the previously selected alignment.
See also: Justifying text
(Center)
When unselected, click this to center the text within the text block. When selected, click
this to revert to the previously selected alignment.
See also: Justifying text
(Align right)
When unselected, click this to align the text within the text block along the right margin.
When selected, click this to revert to the previously selected alignment.
See also: Justifying text
(Align both)
When unselected, click this to align the text within the text block to both margins, like
newspaper print. When selected, click this to revert to the previously selected alignment.
See also: Justifying text
(Decrease indent)
Click this to decrease the indent of the text within the text block.
See also: Managing indent levels
(Increase indent)
Click this to increase the indent of the text within the text block.
See also: Managing indent levels
(Numbered list)

Click this to insert a numbered list into the text block.

See also: Adding a numbered list

- 85 -
 (Numbered list)
Click this to insert a bulleted list into the text block.
See also: Adding a numbered list
(Paragraph spacing)
Click this to adjust the spacing between the lines of text in a text block.
See also: Changing paragraph spacing
(Show text formatting marks)
When unselected, click this to show text formatting marks. When selected, click this to
hide text formatting marks.
See also: Show text formatting marks
Align

Click this to select from various alignment choices to align the selected text block or
object.
See also: Aligning and positioning objects
Bring Forward
Select this to move the object up one layer. Click the drop-down list to select to move the
object forward or to the front.
See also: Layering objects
Bring Backward
Select this to move the object down one layer. Click the drop-down list to select to move
the object backward or to the back.
See also: Layering objects
Group Selection
Select this to combine the selected objects into a group. Click the drop-down list to
select to group the objects or to ungroup the objects.
See also: Grouping and ungrouping objects
Find
Select this to search for text within your title, including "behind the scenes" text for
menus, hyperlinks, object descriptions, and buttons and actions, for example. When you
select this menu item, the Find window opens. Type the word or phrase you want to find
in the Find what field and click Find to find words or phrases. Enable Title Contents if
you want to search within the contents of your title, enable Notes if you want to search
within the notes in your title, and enable Object Name to search for objects by name.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+F keyboard shortcut.

- 86 -
See also: Finding and replacing text
Find Next
Select this to find the next instance of the word or phrase for which you are searching.
This menu item corresponds to pressing F3.
See also: Finding and replacing text
Replace
Select this to search and replace the text specified in the Find window.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+H keyboard shortcut.
See also: Finding and replacing text
Publish

Select this when you are ready to publish your title. The previously selected publish-to
option is performed. Click the drop-down list to select from supported publish-to options.
See also: Publishing a title

Navigating the Design ribbon

The Design ribbon contains commands and options for configuring your title's setup and
appearance.
Title Options

Click this to specify the type of the title. Selecting the AICC/SCORM option in this win-
dow provides you with the option of using multiple assignable units throughout your title.
You can also enable dynamic text, prepare your title for 508/WCAG 2.0 - Level A Com-
pliancy, and specify whether to retain tracking status between sessions.
See also: Working with assignable units
Designating a title as a dynamic title
Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG)
Resetting tracking status between sessions
Page Size

Click this to specify the page size of the title. Select from today's popular sizes or specify
a custom page size.
See also: Changing the page size
HTML Page Alignment

- 87 -
Click this to specify the HTML page alignment as either left-justified or center. The align-
ment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for
Web-based, published content.
See also: Changing the HTML page alignment
Title Themes

Click the up and down arrows to navigate and select a theme. A theme is a set of design
elements that together provide a look to your title. A preview of each theme is displayed.
You can create custom themes to integrate into the Publisher. For details, refer to
the Creating Custom Themes PDF at http://trivantis.com/e-learning-software-user-
guides/.
See also: Changing the theme
Background Wizard

Click this to use the Background Wizard to specify the title's background color and the
default background image.
See also: Changing the background properties
Color
Click this to specify the default color of the background to apply to the entire title. The cur-
rent color is displayed along the bottom of the ribbon graphic.
See also: Changing the background properties
Image
Click this to specify the default image of the background to apply to the entire title.
See also: Changing the background properties
Sound
Click this to specify the default sound of the background to apply to the entire title.
See also: Changing the background properties
Text Style

Click this to select a text style to apply to the entire title. Text styles automatically set text
attributes such as the font face, style, size and color. Use the drop-down list to select a
new text style and add and remove text styles.
See also: Changing the default text properties
Text Color

- 88 -
Click this to select the default color of the text to apply to the entire title. Use the drop-
down list to select a new text color. Selecting a new text color overrides the text color
defined by the current text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
(Font)

Click this to select the default text font face to apply to the entire title. Use the drop-down
list to select a new text font that overrides the currently selected text style. Selecting a
new font overrides the font defined by the current text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
(Font size)

Click this to select the default text font size to apply to the entire title. Use the drop-down
list to select a new text size that overrides the currently selected text style. Selecting a
new font size overrides the font size defined by the current text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
Hyperlink Color
Click this to select the default color of a hyperlink to apply to the entire title. Use the drop-
down list to select a new color for hyperlinks that overrides the currently selected text
style. Selecting a new hyperlink color overrides the hyperlink color defined by the current
text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
(Bold)
Click this to select the bolding of text by default to apply to the entire title. Selecting the
bolding overrides the bolding defined by the current text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
(Italics)
Click this to select the italicizing of text by default to apply to the entire title. Selecting the
italicizing overrides the italicizing defined by the current text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
(Underline)
Click this to select the underline of text by default to apply to the entire title. Selecting the
underlining overrides the underlining defined by the current text style.
See also: Changing the default text properties
Page Transitions

Click this to select the default page transition to apply to the entire title.

- 89 -
See also: Changing the default transition properties
Content Frames

Click this to select the default content frame style to apply to the entire title.
See also: Changing the default content frame style

Navigating the Insert ribbon

The Insert ribbon contains commands and options for adding sophistication to your title.
Text Block

Click this to insert a text block onto the current page.

See also: Adding a text block and typing the text within the text block
Date/Time
Click this to insert the date and time as a text block onto the current page. Click the drop-
down list to select either the date or the time.
See also: Inserting the date and time
Page Title
Click this to insert a title on to the page. The title, which is based on the name of the
page, is added as a text block.
See also: Adding a title to the page
Page Number
Click this to insert a page number onto the page.The Page Number window opens. Use
this window to configure the page-numbering format.
See also: Numbering pages
Breadcrumb
Click this to insert a breadcrumb page navigation onto the page. The breadcrumb is dis-
played as "[Chapter name] > [Section name] > [Page name]" provided that these title
objects exists in the title.
See also: Adding breadcrumbs
Table
Click this to insert a table onto the current page. Use the menu to select the number of
rows and columns for the table or select Custom Size.
See also: Adding tables
Document
Click this to attach a document to the current page.

- 90 -
See also: Working with documents
Image

Click this to insert an image onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to select an
image from the Media Library, select to insert clip-art, character images, or screen cap-
tures, or create a new image.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Shift+5 keyboard shortcut.
See also:Working with images
Character

Click this to insert a character image onto the current page. Characters are transparent
photo images of a male and female actor in various poses suitable for using in your title.
Access the catalog of character poses using the Media Library.
See also: Working with characters
Shape/Line
Click this to insert shapes and lines onto your title. These objects can be used to place
emphasis on a particular part of a page. The images can be resized without losing qual-
ity. Use the submenu to select from lines, arrows, basic shapes, block arrows, triangles,
and trapezoids and parallelograms.
See also: Adding shapes, lines, and arrows
Chart
Create and customize charts using the Chart Tool. Choose from a variety of charts
based on standard spreadsheet-formatted data. When completed, the chart is added as
an image that you can size and move within the page.
See also: Creating custom charts
Equation
Click this to insert a mathematical equation onto the current page as an image.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Shift+3 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with equations
Audio

Click this to insert an audio onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to select
audio from Media Library, add streaming audio, or record new audio.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Alt+0 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with audio

- 91 -
 Video

Click this to insert a video onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to select video
from Media Library, add streaming video, or record new video.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+1 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with video
Flash
Click this to insert a Flash animation onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to
select a Flash animation from Media Library, or create new Flash animation.
You can create custom Flash animation to integrate into the Publisher. For details,
refer to the Creating Custom Flash Animations PDF at http://trivantis.com/e-learn-
ing-software-user-guides/.
See also: Working with Flash animations
YouTube
Click this to insert a YouTube video onto the current page.
See also: Working with YouTube videos
Animation
Click this to insert an animated GIF onto the current page.
See also: Working with animated GIFs
Button

Click this to insert a button onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to select to
add a custom button that you configure, add a pre-configured stock button, add a trans-
parent button that the user cannot see, or add an image button. Buttons can be used for
navigating within your title or executing other actions.
See also: Working with buttons
Action

Click this to add an action onto the current page or the currently selected object. Actions
add interactivity to your title. The action is added and the action properties are high-
lighted. Use the Action ribbon to configure the action.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+4 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with actions
Table of Contents

- 92 -
Click this to insert a table of contents onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to
select a specific type of table of contents. A table of contents is a menu system that is
automatically generated from your title’s organization in the Title Explorer. The table of
contents will automatically be populated with the chapters, sections, and pages that are
contained within your title. Users will be able to select the chapter, section or page from
the table of contents to navigate directly to that area of the title.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Shift+9 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with tables of contents
Menu
Click this to insert a menu onto the current page.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Shift+7 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with menus
Status Indicator
Click this to insert a status indicator onto the current page.
See also: Working with status indicators
Progress Bar
Click this to insert a progress bar onto the current page.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+9 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with progress bars
Timer
Click this to insert a timer onto the current page.
See also: Working with timers
Web Window

Click this to insert a Web window onto the current page. A Web window is like picture-in-
picture with today's TVs. You can add a min-browser window to your title.
See also: Working the Web windows
Social

Click this to insert content and widgets from a Social Media site onto the current page.
See also: Working with social-media content
RSS Feed
Click this to configure and insert a RSS Feed onto the current page. Click the drop-down
list to add a predefined RSS feed or define a custom feed.
See also: Working with RSS feeds

- 93 -
 HTML Extension
Click this to insert a HTML extension onto the current page. The HTML extension object
is an advanced feature that allows you to extend the functionality and contents of your
title beyond what the program natively supports. Examples include Java applets,
JavaScript, and custom HTML.
See also: Working with HTML extension objects
Group

Click this to group the selected objects. When you group objects, you combine them so
you can work with them as a single unit. Move, lock and unlock all objects in a group as
a single unit. Group properties will enable you to set a transition on the group, applying
the transition to all objects within the group. You can also perform actions on groups.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+5 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Grouping and ungrouping objects
Attachment

Click this to insert an attachment onto the current page. Click the drop-down list to select
to add a file or a folder or view all existing attachments.
See also: Working with attachments
Certificate
Click this to insert a certificate onto the current page. You will be guided through creating
and adding the certificate to the page.
See also: Creating certificates
Reference List
Click this to insert a reference list onto the current page.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Shift+8 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with reference lists
QR Code
Click this to insert a QR code onto the current page.
See also: Working with QR codes

Navigating the Test & Survey ribbon

The Test & Survey ribbon contains commands and options for adding tests, surveys,
and questions to your title. Obtain user feedback from your users about your title. You
can process results and submit them to learning management systems, Google Drive™
addresses or custom databases.

- 94 -
 Question

Click this to configure and add a question to the current page. The graphic that is dis-
played is dynamic; it changes to the previously selected item. Click the drop-down list to
select from several predefined question types, like fill-in-the-blank, true-and-false, and
short answer.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+8 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Tests, surveys, and questions
Test

Click this to add a test to the current page. A test is a special kind of chapter. When a test
contains questions, the program will be able to grade the results. Tests can contain test
sections and pages. Test sections, similar to the section object, are a means of organ-
izing pages within the test. The pages are the physical pages that your users will see,
and will contain the questions that comprise the test.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+6 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Tests, surveys, and questions
Test Section

Click this to add a test section to the current test. Test sections can be used to organize
the pages in a test.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+7 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Tests, surveys, and questions
Survey

Click this to add a survey to the current page.You can process results and submit them
to learning management systems, Google Drive, or custom databases.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Alt+6 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Tests, surveys, and questions
Form

Click this to add a form to the current page. Forms and form objects enable you to add
user controls, such as radio buttons, check boxes and entry fields. Form objects can be
used as standalone components to gather information from the user, or they can be used
inside of a form to be submitted outside of the published title.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+2 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Working with forms

- 95 -
 Radio Button Group
Click this to add a radio button group to the current page. Adding this adds three default
radio buttons automatically. Radio button groups are logical objects because they have
no physical representation on a page. Radio button groups are used to group individual
radio buttons. When a set of radio buttons is placed within a radio button group, the user
will only be able to select one of the radio buttons contained within the group.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+3 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Adding a radio button group
Radio Button
Click this to add a radio button to the current form object or page. Radio buttons are input
objects that enable users to select a specified option. When radio buttons are contained
within a radio button group, users will only be able to select one of the radio buttons.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+4 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Adding a radio button
Check Box
Click this to add a check box to the current form object or page. Check boxes are input
objects that enable users to select and clear a specified option.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+5 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Adding a check box
Entry Field
Click this add an entry field to the current form object or page. Entry fields are input
objects that enable users to type a value.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+6 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Adding an entry field
Drop-Down List
Click this to add a drop-down list to the current form object or page. Drop-down lists are
input objects that enable users to select a value from a list of pre-defined values.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+7 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Adding a drop-down list
List Box
Click this to add a list box to the current form object or page. List boxes are input objects
that enable users to select one or more values from a list of pre-defined values.
This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Alt+8 keyboard shortcut.
See also: Adding a list box

- 96 -
 Text Label

Click this to add the text label of a form object. Label text is the text adjacent to the form
object's component that tells your project's viewers what information to enter or select
(for example, "First Name:," "State/Province:"). A text label is a text block that can be
associated with a form element to provide additional assistive text to the user.

See also: Working with forms and form elements

Associating a text label with a form element
See also: Working with forms
Customize Radio Buttons

Click this to customize the images associated with the radio buttons used throughout the
title. You can choose a selected image and an unselected image.
See also: Customizing radio buttons
Customize Check Boxes

Click this to customize the images associated with the check boxes used throughout the
title. You can choose a selected image and an unselected image.
See also: Customizing check boxes
Import CSV

Click this to import a CSV question file.

See also: Importing and exporting a CSV question file

Navigating the Tools ribbon

The Tools ribbons contains commands and options for selecting tools that create new
objects, manage resources, and enhance the review process.
Screen Capture

Click this to capture and insert a screen capture onto the current page. A screen capture
is an image of a captured window or screen.
See also: Creating screen capture images using Snagit
Screen Recording

Click this to capture and insert a screen recording onto the current page. A screen record-
ing is a video containing a captured sequence of screen activity.
See also: Creating screen recordings using Camtasia

- 97 -
 Inspire Tools

Click this to select from applications provided by our Lectora Inspire partners. From
BranchTrack, design and build branching scenarios with the BranchTrack application.
From the eLearning Brothers, you can enter the eLearning Brothers Library. In there, you
can get ideas and enhance your titles with course starters, games, and interactions from
their Template Library, select from a huge collection of cutout people characters in their
Cutout People library, and access thousands of stock images, audio, and video assets in
their Stock Assets library.
See also: Working with the Inspire tools
Audio Recording

Click this to record, edit, and insert new audio onto the current page.
See also: Recording and editing new audio
Video Recording

Click this to record, edit, and insert new video onto the current page. An attached Web
camera or video camera is required to create new video objects.
See also: Recording and editing video
Image
Click this to create and insert a new image onto the current page.
See also: Working with images
Audio Editor

Click this to launch the audio editor.

See also: Recording and editing new audio
Video Editor

Click this to launch the video editor.

See also: Recording and editing video
Variables

Click this to launch the Variable Manager. Variables are objects within a title that enable
you to store, modify, and test values of numbers or strings during the runtime of a pub-
lished title. You can use variable values to conditionally perform actions in a title or set
the contents of a text block.
See also: Using the Variable Manager

- 98 -
 Resources

Click this to launch the Resource Manager. The Resource Manager gives you access to
all of the resources used in your title, and all of the information for those resources.
See also: Managing resources
Translations

Click this to launch the Translation Manager. Use the Translation Manager to extract and
place text from your title into a rich text format (RFT) file. This enables you to translate
the text into another language using an RTF editor, such as Microsoft Word or WordPad.
The translated text can then be imported into your title
See also: Managing translations
Text Resize
Click this to launch the Text Resize Tool. Use the Text Resize Tool to globally increase
or decrease the font size for all the text in a title.
See also: Globally increasing or decreasing the font size for all the text in a title
From Other Title
Click this to import objects from another existing title. You can import entire titles,
chapters, sections, and pages, as well as individual objects.
See also: Importing objects from existing titles
From PowerPoint
Click this to import a slide from a PowerPoint presentation into the title.
See also: Importing pages from a PowerPoint presentation
Spell Check

Click this to check the spelling of the text in your title,including all text blocks, question
feedback, messages, button text, and menu items.
See also: Checking spelling
Notes Report

Click this to generate a notes report. Use the Notes Report tool to view the notes asso-
ciated with a title.
See also: Working with notes
Add Note

- 99 -
Click this to add a note to the current page.Notes can be added throughout a title to
serve as reminders or provide instructions to title authors. Notes are only displayed in
Edit mode, and do not appear within the published title. You can configure the appear-
ance of your notes as well.
See also: Working with notes
Accessibility Check
Click this to launch the launch the Accessibility Checker. The Accessibility Checker will
help in determining if your title complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act - Para-
graph 1194.22 (a) through (p) and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 for
Web-based Intranet and Internet Information and Applications. The Accessibility
Checker only applies to titles that will be published to a Web-based format (HTML,
CourseMill, AICC/Web-based, and SCORM/Web-based).
See also: Checking for 508/WCAG 2.0 Level A compliance
Error Check
Click this to launch the Error Checker. An error check identifies any logical errors and
warnings within your title. For example, if you neglect to add an Exit Title action to your
title and attempt to publish it to AICC, the program will issue an error. The error will indic-
ate that you must have the Exit Title action defined within the title so that the user returns
to the learning management system. The errors that are displayed are dependent upon
the type of title and publishing format chosen.
See also: Running an error check
Publish to ReviewLink

Click this to publish your title to ReviewLink. ReviewLink is an online review tool
developed by Trivantis. ReviewLink allows you to share titles with online reviewers and
capture their feedback. Reviewers can add comments and attach files to reviewed pages
to provide feedback. Comments and attachments are tabulated and presented to both
publishers and reviewers so they can manage the status of the comments and complete
the review cycle.
See also: Publishing to ReviewLink
Launch ReviewLink

Click this to launch ReviewLink in a browser window. Log in to get started.

See also: Publishing to ReviewLink
Additional resources: Streamline Your Review Cycle with ReviewLink

- 100 -
Navigating the View ribbon
The View ribbon contains commands and options for switching between modes, con-
figuring grids and guides, adjusting the display view, and viewing panes.
Edit

Click this to return to the working mode in which you create your title.
This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F12 key.
See also:Switching between modes
Run

Select this to view your title with all buttons, links, and actions active.
For responsive titles, use the device views on the View tab in Run mode to verify how
your content will be displayed in each view. For details about creating a responsive title,
see Working with responsive design.
This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F10 key.
See also:Switching between modes
Preview

Select this to preview your title in a centered background outside of the interface. All but-
tons, links, and actions are active.
This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F11 key.
See also:Switching between modes
Debug

Select this to view your title with all button, links, and actions active. Actions performed
on a page are recorded in a Debug window along with variable values and additional
information.
See also:Switching between modes
Preview Page in Browser

Select this to preview your title in a chosen browser. All actions on the page are active,
but because only a single page is published, navigation to other pages will not function.
This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F9 key.
See also:Switching between modes
Show Grids

- 101 -
Click this to display the grid in the work area. The grid is an alignment and spacing
guide that is displayed as a page background. When used with Snap to Grid, you can
move objects to the nearest grid increment for proper alignment.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Show Guides
Click this to display guides in the work area. Guides are horizontal and vertical lines that
originate from the ruler and can be placed anywhere on the page for object alignment.
To create a guide, be sure rulers are showing. Then drag the cursor from the top ruler or
from the left ruler onto the work area. The guide appears in the work area. To remove a
guide, hold down the Ctrl key and drag the guide off the work area. When used with
Snap to Guides, you can move objects to the nearest guide increment for proper align-
ment.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Show Rulers
Click this to display the horizontal and vertical rulers to the left and top of the work area.
Displaying the rulers allows for the creation of guides. When used with Snap to Guide,
you can move objects to the nearest guide for proper alignment.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Snap to Grid
Click this to move objects to the nearest grid increment for proper alignment.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Snap to Guides
Click this to move objects to the nearest guide.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Add Guides
Click this to add horizontal and vertical guides.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Clear Guides
Click this to clear the guides from the work area. This removes all the guides in the title.
See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Options

Click this to specify grid and guides preferences.

See also: Specifying grids and guides preferences
Zoom In

- 102 -
Click this to zoom in your view of the work area.
Clicking corresponds to clicking the Ctrl+Space Bar keyboard shortcut.
Zoom Out
Click this to zoom out of your view of the work area.
Clicking corresponds to clicking the Alt+Space Bar keyboard shortcut.
(Percentage)

Click this to specify a zoom level for zoom in or zoom out of the work area.
Refresh

Click this to refresh your view of the current page.

Skin
Click this to switch between program skins.
Timelines
Click this to open the Transitions, Actions, and Media panes.
See also:Using the action pane
Reset Layout
Click this to reset the panes to their original position.

Navigating the Properties ribbon

The Properties ribbon is displayed when you select an object. The commands and
options displayed on the Properties ribbon differ depending on the object.
You can press Tab to navigate and select a control on the ribbon. Additionally, pressing
Shift + Tab will focus on the previous control. To start tabbing navigation, press Alt or
click to select an editable field, such as the Name or Image fields in the Image group on
the Properties ribbon for images.
For details about using the commands and options, see the appropriate object below:
l Chapter, section and page properties
l Paragraph and text block properties
l Object properties
l Test and survey properties
l Forms properties

Using the Title Explorer

The Title Explorer displays the entire structure of your title. Select from a classic Title
Explorer view resembling the table of contents of a book or a thumbnail view that shows

- 103 -
thumbnail images of each title object. Use this pane to access object properties by
double-clicking on the object icon. You can cut, copy and paste objects directly within
the Title Explorer or drag and drop objects to reorganize your title. When an object is
selected in the Title Explorer, focus is placed on that object within the work area to the
right. Hold down the Shift key to select a list of objects, or hold down the Ctrl key to
select multiple objects not in a list.
Click the Title Explorer tab to select the classic Title Explorer view or click the Thumb-
nail View tab to select the thumbnail view.
When an object is selected in the Title Explorer, press F2 to edit the name of the object.
While in Edit mode, use your keyboard's Page Up and Page Down keys to navigate
between pages in your title.
You can dock and hide the Title Explorer. Right-click on the Title Explorer's title bar to
see the docking options:
Floating Place the Title Explorer anywhere, like a pop-up.
Docking Fasten the Title Explorer to a side of the interface.
Auto Hide Hide the Title Explorer in the side of the interface. Clicking the pushpin
icon also hides the window. The Title Explorer will appear as a tab in the
side of the interface. Double-click the tab to open the Title Explorer or
hover over the tab to temporarily view it's contents.
Hide Hide the Title Explorer from view. Use the View menu to re-access the hid-
den window.
To change the docking side of the interface, select the Title Explorer and drag it until
your cursor is over one of the docking graphics displayed on the screen. The window
will then automatically snap into the side you selected. To move a window without snap-
ping it into place, press Ctrl while dragging it.
See also: Showing buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer
Showing visibility check boxes in Title Explorer
Switching between modes

Using the work area

The work area enables you to interactively manage the layout of objects that make up
your title. Drag and drop images, audio, video and other supported media types directly
to the work area. Use your mouse to drag and move items on a page, and double-click
an object to reveal its properties. Each object that is visible within the work area will also
have a representation in the Title Explorer.
When your title is enabled for responsive design, a device selection bar is added to your
display area. The device selection bar contains five graphics representing the views pop-
ular with today's devices.

- 104 -
From left to right, the device views are:
Phone Portrait View

Tablet Portrait View

Desktop View

Tablet Landscape View

Phone Landscape View
The view bar allows you to quickly switch between views to verify how your text and
objects are displayed in each view. When you add objects to the title, the objects are
optimally scaled and moved for each device view. Click a device graphic within the
selection bar to see how your content will look on each device.
The arrows displayed next to the device graphics in the device selection bar represent
the flow of inheritance of the development changes that you make in the current device
view. The arrows indicate the direction of the responsive inheritance flow, starting from
the desktop to the tablet and then to the phone. Additionally, the color of the arrow is rep-
resentative of the device on which a override was made in a particular device view
(green if the override was done/inherited from the tablet view or orange if the override
was done on the phone). For example, the properties for the objects displayed in the
Phone Portrait View are inherited from the current settings of the properties of the objects
in the Tablet Portrait View.
See also Working with responsive content
Supported media types

Using the Media Library side-tabs

The Media Library side-tabs are located along the right-side of the work-area. They
provide one-click access to the following three areas of the Media Library.
Title Resources
Click this to open Title Resources, a special clipboard that holds thumbnails of the exist-
ing objects in your title. Resources can be dragged and dropped onto pages in your title.
My Library
Click this to open a window for searching for and selecting existing custom objects to
add to your title. You can add and remove folders, view the properties of the object, and
share the object with others.
Stock Library

- 105 -
Click this to open a window for searching for and selecting predefined objects to add to
your title.
Inspire Tools
Click this to select from applications provided by our Lectora Inspire partners. Enhance
your titles with Flash and HTML5 interactions and games from the Interaction Builder,
select templates and assets from the Template Library, and design branching scenarios
for your titles with BranchTrack. For more details, see Working with the Inspire tools.
See also: Working with the Media Library

Using the status bar

The status bar provides dynamic information on the current position of the mouse cursor
on the page, as well as information about the currently selected object. You can also
lock and unlock objects, switch modes, and change object alignment, and zoom the
view.
or (Locked or Unlock)
Click this to lock or unlock the selected object.
See also: Locking and unlocking objects
(Object Location)
This area displays the object's current location in the work area. Specify new location
coordinates in the fields to move the selected object to a specific location.
See also: Moving and resizing objects
(Object Size)
This area displays the object's current size. Specify new width and height dimensions in
the fields to resize the selected object to a specific size.
See also: Moving and resizing objects
(Cursor Location)
This area displays the cursor's current location within the work-area.
(Modes)

This area contains graphics for quickly switching between modes.

See also: Switching between modes
(Alignment)
This area contains graphics for aligning objects.
See also: Aligning and positioning objects
(Zoom)

- 106 -
This area displays controls for changing the zoom level of the work area. Click the minus
to decrease the zoom, click the plus to increase the zoom, or move the slider.

Using the Help menu

Open this menu to access links to supplemental information designed to enhance your
product experience. You can access video tutorials and sample titles, contact us with
suggestions, and activate your product, for example.
View these topics for more information:
l Launching the Help
l Launching the Getting Started window
l Viewing Video Tutorials
l Opening the Trivantis Community forum
l Launching Click and Learn
l Taking the Quick Tour
l Viewing Sample Titles
l Contacting Us
l Viewing your License Key and software version information
l Activating the product

Launching the Help

You can launch the Help to find detailed information about the tasks you complete using
the product.
To launch the Help, click to open the Help menu, then click Help.

Launching the Getting Started window

You can launch the Getting Started window .
To launch the Getting Started window, click to open the Help menu, then click Get-
ting Started.

Viewing Video Tutorials

You can view the Video Tutorials for introductions and overviews of the powerful and
time-saving features.
To launch the Video Tutorials, click to open the Help menu, then click Video Tutori-
als.

Opening the Trivantis Community

You can launch the Trivantis Community to ask questions and receive answers within
the community.

- 107 -
To launch the Trivantis Community, click to open the Help menu, then click Trivantis
Community.
Additional resources: Explore the Trivantis Community

Launching Click and Learn

You can launch Click and Learn, a self-paced product demonstration to learn the new
features available in the latest version of the product.
To launch Click and Learn, click to open the Help menu, then click Click and Learn.

Taking the Quick Tour

Take 5 minutes and learn your way around the developer window.
To launch the Quick Tour, click to open the Help menu, then click Quick Tour.

Viewing sample titles

You can view and download sample titles.
To view the sample titles, click to open the Help menu, then click Sample Titles.

Contacting Us
We're here to help. Contact us with your comments and suggestions to help us improve
the product.
To contact us, click to open the Help menu, then click Contact Us.

Viewing your License Key and software version

information
You can view your License Key and the software version of the installed product. This
information is displayed on the About Lectora window.
You can also activate your product and view the public license from the About Lectora
window. For details, see Activating the product and Viewing the public license.
To open the About Lectora window, click to open the Help menu, then click About
Lectora.

Activating the product

You can activate your product after installing the product. There are two ways to activate:
l Click to open the Help menu, then click Product Activation.
l Click to open the Help menu, then click About Lectora.On the About Lectora
window, click Product Activation.
The product is activated.

- 108 -
Building a title
This section explains how to start building your title using the program. If you are a
novice Publisher user, it is a good idea to review the concepts discussed in How the pro-
gram works before building titles. When you understand the essentials behind the pro-
gram, you will find it easier to use the information provided in this chapter.
In this chapter, the following topics are covered:
l Creating a title
l Designing your title
l Saving a title
l Saving a title as a template
l Protecting your title with a password
l Common chapter, section, and page properties
l Working with chapters
l Working with sections
l Working with pages
l Working with assignable units
l Working with responsive content
l Working with tracking
l Using and managing page layouts
l Working with frames
l Switching between modes
l How the program organizes your content
l Importing and exporting content
l Specifying grids and guides preferences
l Running an error check
l Managing resources
l Working with notes
l Managing translations

Creating a title
You must first create a title before you can start adding chapters, sections, pages, and
media objects. This section describes the various methods available for creating titles:

- 109 -
 l Create a title using the Design Wizard
Describes how to use the Design Wizard by defining the title type, size and theme,
and the organization to create a new title.
l Create a title using a Title Wizard
Describes how to use a Title Wizard to guide you through creating a new title. This
is a good place to start if you have already created the storyboard, outline, or topic
layout.
l Create a new blank title (without the Title Wizard)
Walks you through creating a new title from scratch.
l Create a new responsive title
Describes how to create a new, responsive title. Responsive titles adapt auto-
matically to the view sizes of your users' devices.
l Create a title from a theme
Describes how to create a new title using a predefined theme.
l Open an existing title
Describes how to start from an existing title.
l Use a template
Learn how to create a title from a template.
See also: Importing and exporting content

Creating a new, blank title

You can start from a new, blank title.
To create a new, blank title, click New Blank Title from the Getting Started window. If the
Getting Started window is not open, click Create New Title from the File ribbon.
The blank title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete
its functionality.
See also: Switching between modes
Designing your title
Protecting your title with a password

Creating a responsive title

You can start from a new, blank title that is enabled with the features for developing a
responsive title. Built-in features allow you to create titles that automatically adapt to dif-
ferent devices and device orientations. This eliminates having to maintain multiple titles
or implement complex branching within a title.

- 110 -
To create a responsive title, click New Responsive Title from the Getting Started win-
dow. If the Getting Started window is not open, click Create New Title from the File rib-
bon and select Responsive Title.
The blank, responsive title is displayed in Edit mode. Begin adding objects to complete
its functionality and click the responsive views to check how the objects are displayed.
See also: Working with responsive content
Switching between modes
Designing your title
Protecting your title with a password

Creating a title using the Design Wizard

The Design Wizard will guide you through creating a new title by prompting you for
answers to key design questions involving the title type, size and theme, and organ-
ization.
To use the Design Wizard, click Design Wizard from the Getting Started window.
Use the Design Wizard's three side-tabs (Title Options, Size and Theme, and Organ-
ization) to quickly configure and design the framework of your title.
Title Options Use the fields on this side-tab to specify the title's name and default
file location, along with specifying whether the title is to be published
to Learning Management System/Learning Record Store or whether
the title is to be responsive.
Size and Use the fields on this side-tab to specify the title's page size and pre-
Theme defined theme. A theme is a set of design elements that together
provide a look to your title.
You can create custom themes to integrate into the Publisher.
For details, refer to the Creating Custom Themes PDF at
http://trivantis.com/e-learning-software-user-guides/.
Organization Use the fields on this side-tab to define the title's organizational struc-
ture, along with whether the title should include a test.
Follow the on-screen instructions to build your title. When you have answered all of the
questions, click Build It!. Your new title is displayed in the work area. The outline is dis-
played in the Title Explorer and the first page is displayed in the work space on the right.

Creating a title using a Title Wizard

Use a Title Wizard to quickly generate titles with a pre-designed “look and feel”. The
Title Wizards will ask you questions that will enable the program to automatically create
a functional title for you, including pages, buttons, and navigation based a design you
select.
You can filter your search of the available designs by selecting a design category.

- 111 -
Follow these steps to create a title using a Title Wizard:
1. From the File ribbon, select Create New Title.
2. Click one of the following category buttons in the Title Wizard group to filter your
search of the designs. Thumbnails of the available designs in each category are
displayed to the right.
All Displays all the available designs.
Mobile Displays designs that compliment the screen size of mobile
devices.
eLearning Displays designs containing titles commonly used course com-
ponents and structure for creating titles intended for course study
and certification.
Photo Album Displays a design that creates a digital photo album.
Presentation Displays designs for creating titles intended for presentation.
Business Displays designs for creating titles with a professional look-and-
feel.
Multi-Purpose Displays designs that cover a range of purposes and highlight dif-
ferent features of the program.
3. Select a design by clicking the appropriate thumbnail on the right. The wizard win-
dow opens.
4. Respond to the on-screen questions and click Finish to create your title.
The new title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete its
functionality.
See also: Title Wizard gallery

Creating a title from a theme

You can create a new title from a set of predefined themes. A theme is a set of design
elements that provide your title a professional look-and-feel. Previews of the themes are
displayed.
Use a theme to save time and provide inspiration when designing your title.
You can also create a theme of your own and add it to the program's theme gallery. For
details, see the Creating Custom Themes PDF at http://trivantis.com/e-learning-software-
user-guides/.
l When you select a theme for your title, placeholders are automatically inser-
ted for a logo and a course title. Changes made to these placeholders are
retained should you select a different theme.
l To remove a theme, select No Theme from the list.
To create a title from a theme:

- 112 -
 1. If the Getting Started window is displayed, click New Blank Title.
2. From the File ribbon, click Create New Title and click Themes. The gallery of
available thumbnail themes is displayed on the right-side of the window.
3. Select the size of your content as one of the following:
l Size for PCs and tablets (1024 x 768)
l Size for high-resolution wide-screen monitors (1280 x 800)
l Size for smartphones (320x640)
4. Select the appropriate thumbnail and click Create from Theme. Alternatively, you
can select a theme by double-clicking it.
The new theme-based title is opened in the workspace. Edit the title as necessary.

Using a template
Templates are a convenient way to store boilerplate versions of titles that can be used
as a starting point for future titles that are created. For example, if your organization has
a standard "look and feel" for a title that should be applied to all titles, you can create a
template that contains the layout and all associated text and graphics for that title. You
would then use this template when creating additional titles.
You can create and import templates, use one of the many pre-installed templates, or
access online templates. Hundreds of pre-installed templates are available, including a
gallery for the iPhone® and iPod® Touch. Online templates are organized by category.
Descriptions and previews are available when you select a template.
You can start a template using a custom template that you have created or using an
online template.
To start a title using a custom template:
1. If the Getting Started window is displayed, select My Templates. Otherwise, select
Create New Title from the File ribbon and click My Templates. The templates that
you have created are displayed on the right.
2. Double-click the desired template or select the desired template from the list and
click Create from Template.
Your newly created title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to
complete its functionality.
To start a title using an online template:
1. If the Getting Started window is displayed, select Templates Online. Otherwise,
select Create New Title from the File ribbon. (Alternatively, you can type Ctrl + N
to display the Getting Started window.)
2. Click Templates Online.
3. Use the list to select from a gallery of predefined templates available online.

- 113 -
 Double-click the desired folder to display the available templates. The templates
are categorized as follows:
Folder Description
Color Hundreds of templates organized by color-theme categories
Mobile Templates for mobile technology, such as the iPhone and iPod
Tablet Templates for tablet-computer technology, such as the iPad
508 Templates Templates for titles requiring 508 compliancy
800x600 format Templates for devises with 800x600 screen resolution
1024x768 Templates for devises with 1024x768 screen resolution
format
4. Double-click the desired template or select the desired template from the list and
click Create from Template.
Your newly created title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to
complete its functionality.
See also: Saving a title as a template
Sharing templates online
Switch between modes

Opening an existing title

You can open existing titles and resume working on them. You can open existing .titles
from the Getting Started window or from the work space.
If you have recently worked on the existing title, you can open it directly from the Getting
Started window. Recent titles are listed on the right of the Getting Started window.
Follow these steps to resume working on an existing title:
l If the Getting Started window is open, click the filename of the title in the Recent
Titles list if it is a recent title. Otherwise, click the Browse button to navigate and
select the existing title file. Click Open.
l If the work space is displayed, either select Open Existing Title from the File
menu or type Ctrl + O. Navigate and select the existing title file. Click Open.
Your title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete its
functionality.
See also: Switching between modes

Designing your title

Title design involves configuring the overall appearance of your title, including the page
size and alignment, background colors and sounds, and default text styles. Or you can
save time by selecting a title theme which includes predefined settings for these title
characteristics. Other title options include selecting that the title is specifically for a

- 114 -
learning management system or learning records store, enabling dynamic text, and pre-
paring the title for 508 compliancy. When you apply these design settings as described
in the topics below, they will be applied to all pages within your title. These settings can
be changed at any time by revisiting these design settings, or you can specify separate
properties for individual chapters, sections or pages.
Complete the following tasks to configure your title's design:
l Changing the title options
l Changing the default page size
l Changing the default HTML page alignment
l Changing the default background properties
l Creating custom backgrounds
l Changing the default theme
l Changing the default text properties
l Changing the default transition properties
l Changing the default content frame style
See also: Working with chapters
Working with sections
Working with pages
Protecting your title with a password
Setting auto-save preferences

Changing the title options

You can change the title options, such as the name, selecting that the title is specifically
for a learning management system or learning records store, enabling dynamic text, and
preparing the title for accessibility. You can also select the language for the title and
select to reset tracking status between sessions.
View these topics for more information.
l Changing the name of the title
l Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS
l Declaring the language for the title
l Designating a title as a dynamic title
l Preparing a title for accessibility
l Resetting tracking status between sessions
l Designating a title as responsive

Changing the name of the title

To change the name of a title:

- 115 -
 1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Title Options in the Title Setup group. The Title
Options window opens.
3. In the Name field, specify the name of title as you want it to appear in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, click the current name of the title in the Title Explorer so that
it is highlighted. Then click again and retype the new name.
4. Click OK.
The name of the title is changed.

Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS

If you are creating titles that require compliance with AICC/SCORM regulations, you
must change the title type from Standard so that you can insert assignable units into
your title.
Changing to the AICC/SCORM-type automatically adds an assignable unit to your title
and provides the option of later adding multiple assignable units. If you do not set this
option, you will be unable to add assignable units.
See also: Working with assignable units
For Web-based publishing (HTML, CourseMill, AICC, or SCORM), select Use Web
Accessibility Settings to prepare your title for 508 Compliancy. Selecting this option
pre-sets the publishing options that are specific to developing 508 Compliant titles,
including creating ALT tags for images and buttons and disabling the use of Lightbox
windows. If your title contains video objects, this option must be checked to ensure
screen readers, such as Job Access with Speech (JAWS), can read the video's con-
troller buttons.
To specify the type of title as an AICC/SCORM title:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. From the Design ribbon, click Title Options from the Title Setup group.
3. Enable the AICC/SCORM for LMS radio button.
4. Click OK.
See also: Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG)

Declaring the language for the title

You can declare the language for the title. This sets the language attribute inside the
<html> tag.
You can also declare the languages for text blocks and set the language during
publishing to HTML. For details, see Declaring the language for the text block
and Specifying language options.
To select the language for the title:

- 116 -
 1. On the Design ribbon, click Title Options in the Title Setup group. The Title
Options window opens.
2. Use the Language list to select the language for the title.
3. Click OK.
The language is set for the title.

Designating a title as a dynamic title

With dynamic titles, you can update specific text of an HTML-published title without
republishing. When the title is initially published to HTML, the text blocks that you des-
ignate as dynamic text are copied to an associated XML file, named dyntitle.xml. When
the title is displayed in a browser, text within the title is substituted with text found within
dyntitle.xml.
Selecting the Dynamic Title option will enable the Dynamic Text property when con-
figuring text blocks within your title.
To designate a title as a dynamic title:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. From the Design ribbon, click Title Options in the Title Setup group. The Select
Title Type window opens.
3. Enable the Enable Dynamic Text Option check box.
4. Click OK.
See also: Enabling dynamic text for a text block

Preparing a title for accessibility

You can use the program to create titles published to a Web-based format (HTML,
CourseMill, SCORM/Web-based, AICC/Web-based) that comply with the standards set
in Section 508 - 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and the Web Content Accessibility
Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0. These standards govern the requirements that must be met to
enable Web-based content to be accessible to individuals with disabilities. View inform-
ation about these standards at http://www.section508.gov and http://www.w3.or-
g/TR/WCAG20/.
You can designate a title to use Section 508 and WCAG 2.0 settings to prepare it for pub-
lishing. This option sets default 508 and WCAG settings but does not guarantee that
your title will be 508- or WCAG 2.0-compliant. For details about 508-compliant titles, see
Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG).
Selecting to use the pre-defined accessibility settings modifies the following options in
the Publisher:
l Custom radio buttons and check boxes are disabled. For details, see Customizing
radio buttons and Customizing check boxes.
l Lightbox-style is disabled for pop-up windows. For details, see Executing Go To

- 117 -
 actions.
l ALT tags are always published. For details, see Changing the name of an object
and Using an empty ALT tag for an object.
l Video and audio skins are disabled. For details, see Changing the skin of the
video controller.
l Rollover video controllers are disabled. For details, see Displaying the controller
when users roll-over a video object.
l Visual indicators are displayed when an object receives focus. For details, see
Keyboard tabbing order and visual focus.
l Always on Top property for objects is not selected by default. For details, see Pla-
cing an object on the top layer.
l Language declaration for text blocks is enabled. For details, see Declaring the lan-
guage for the text block.
l Reading order for groups is enabled. For details, see Specifying that the group will
be read last.
To designate your title to use Section 508/WCAG 2.0 settings:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. From the Design ribbon, click Title Options from the Title Setup group. The Title
Options window opens.
3. Enable the Use Web Accessibility Settings check box.
4. Use the Focus Color list and the Width field to specify the appropriate color and
thickness that will be used for the visual focus indicator.
5. Click OK.
The title will use the default 508/WCAG 2.0 settings.

Resetting tracking status between sessions

With tracking you can account for which chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections,
and surveys that your users have visited and completed. This allows you to know where
your users have been within your content. The tracking status for the title is retained
between sessions by default. You can determine not to retain the tracking status for the
title in the title options.
For more information about tracking content, see Working with tracking.
To clear the tracking status for the title between sessions:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Title Options in the Title Setup group. The Title
Options window opens.

- 118 -
 3. Disable the Retain tracking status between sessions check box.
4. Click OK.
The tracking status for the title is not retained.

Designating a title as responsive

You can designate a title to be responsive. This enables the responsive design features
within the product that allow you to optimally display content across various devices
within the same title.
For details about creating a responsive title, including details about the built-in features
for responsive titles, see Working with responsive design.
Responsive titles cannot contain content frames. You must remove the custom
frames from the title prior to designating the title to be responsive. For details
about using content frames, see Working with content frames.
To designate the title as responsive:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Title Options in the Title Setup group. The Title
Options window opens.
3. Enable the Enable Responsive Design check box.
4. Click OK.
The title is designated as a responsive title and the responsive design features are
enabled in the product.

Changing the default page size

Each page within your title will use the default page size specified within the design prop-
erties. Consideration should be made for your intended users, and the width of the page
size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors.
To change the page size of your title:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Page Size in the Title Setup group.
3. Select one of the optimized page sizes based on your intended output device
(iPads, Tablets and Most Computers, Other Monitors, or Smartphones) or
select Custom Size to specify custom dimensions for the page. The default page
size takes the 15-pixel vertical scroll bar into account for properly displaying con-
tent. For custom page sizes, specify the new width and height in the Set Size of
Page window.
The page size of your title is changed.

- 119 -
Changing the default HTML page alignment
Each page within your title will use the default HTML page alignment specified within
the Title Properties.
To change the HTML page alignment of your title:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click HTML Page Alignment in the Title Setup group.
3. Select Center to center the text or select Left Justified to justify the text align the
left margin.
The HTML page alignment is changed.

Changing the default theme

A theme is a set of design elements that together provide a look to your title. You can
change a title's theme. When you select a theme, the theme's design elements are auto-
matically added to the title. Use a theme to save time and provide inspiration when
designing your title.
Previews of the themes are provided.
You can create custom themes to integrate into the Publisher. For details, refer to the
Creating Custom Themes PDF at http://trivantis.com/e-learning-software-user-guides/.
l When you select a theme for your title, placeholders are automatically inser-
ted for a logo and a course title. Changes made to these placeholders are
retained should you select a different theme.
l To remove a theme, select No Theme from the list.
To change the title's theme:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, hover over a thumbnail in the Title Themes group to see a
preview of the theme.
3. Click the thumbnail of the desired theme to select the theme. Click the down-scroll
arrow to expand the window to expose more themes if necessary.
The title's theme is changed.

Changing the default background properties

You can change the default background color, the default background image, and the
default background sound used on the pages within your title.
Background images behave differently depending on their size:
l If the dimensions of the background image is equal to or greater than the page
dimensions, the background image will not repeat. The program assumes that the
background is your interface.

- 120 -
 l If only the width of the background image is equal to or greater than the width of the
page, the background image will be repeated vertically and also cropped to the
size of the page. The program assumes that the background is the middle con-
nection between a header and a footer.
l If only the height of the background image is equal to or greater than the height of
the page, the background image will be repeated horizontally and also cropped to
the size of the page. The program assumes that the background is the middle con-
nection between a left panel and a right panel.
l If the background image is smaller than the page size in both dimensions, the tiled
image will be repeated in both directions and not cropped to the page size. The pro-
gram assumes that the background is a tiled pattern.
If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible, unless the
image is transparent.
The background sound restarts as users navigate from one page to the next.
The background sound does not auto-start on mobile devices.

To specify your changes you either use the Background Wizard or manually set the back-
ground's color, image, and sound properties.
For responsive titles, the color of the label in the Design ribbon indicates the device in
which an override was placed. For more information about developing responsive titles
and setting overrides, see Working with responsive content.
To use the Background Wizard:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. Launch the Background Wizard by clicking Background Wizard from the Title
Background group on the Design ribbon. The Background Wizard opens.
3. Follow the prompts and use the controls to configure your background properties.
4. Click Finish when you are done making changes.
To manually configure background properties:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. In the Title Background group on the Design ribbon, click the appropriate back-
ground setting you want to change. Select either Color, Image, or Sound.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.

- 121 -
 4. To change the image settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
5. To change the sounds settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Working with the Media Library

Creating custom backgrounds

You can create custom backgrounds to integrate into your titles. This is accomplished
using the Background Wizard.
Using the Background Wizard, you can:
l Create a customized background for your entire title
l Create a customized background for a chapter, section,page, or test

Creating a background for your entire title

You can use the Background Wizard to create a background for your title. The back-
ground will be applied to your title properties. You can select to change the background
See also: Changing a title's default background properties
To create a background for your entire title:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. From the Design ribbon, click Background Wizard from the Title Background
group. The Background Type window opens.
3. If the scope of the background change window opens, select All pages in the title.
This occurs if you do not have the title selected in the Title Explorer.
4. Select the type of background you want to add to your title and click the Next but-
ton. Choose from the following types of backgrounds:
Stock back- Select this to choose from three categories of backgrounds:
ground HighTech, Natural, and Textiles.
from clipart
Gradient Select this to add a colored gradient background to your title. You
can configure the starting color, ending color, the direction of the
gradient and the percentage of the background the gradient should

- 122 -
 cover.
Beveled Select this to create a background with a 3-dimensional, raised bor-
Border der. You can configure the border color, page color, placement of
the border and the border size.
Shaded Select this to create a background with a shaded border. You can
Border configure the border color, page color, placement of the border and
the border size.
Solid Select this to create a background with a solid border. You can con-
Border figure the border color, page color, placement of the border and the
border size.
Solid Color Select this to create a solid color for your background.
5. Click the Next button to configure the background properties and click Finish to
apply the background to your title.
The background is applied to your title.
See also: Creating a background for a chapter, section, page, or test

Creating a background for a chapter, section, page, or

test
You can use the Background Wizard to create a background for individual chapters, sec-
tions, pages, or a test.
To create a background for a chapter, section, page, or test within your title:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. From the Design ribbon, click Background Wizard from the Title Background
group. The Background Type window opens.
3. Select the scope to which you want to apply the background and click Next. For
example, if you selected a page, select whether to apply the background to the
only current page or all the pages in the title.
4. Select the type of background you want to add to your title and click the Next but-
ton. Choose from the following types of backgrounds:
Stock back- Select this to choose from three categories of backgrounds:
ground HighTech, Natural, and Textiles.
from clipart
Gradient Select this to add a colored gradient background to your title. You
can configure the starting color, ending color, the direction of the
gradient and the percentage of the background the gradient should
cover.
Beveled Select this to create a background with a 3-dimensional, raised bor-
Border der. You can configure the border color, page color, placement of

- 123 -
 the border and the border size.
Shaded Select this to create a background with a shaded border. You can
Border configure the border color, page color, placement of the border and
the border size.
Solid Select this to create a background with a solid border. You can con-
Border figure the border color, page color, placement of the border and the
border size.
Solid Color Select this to create a solid color for your background.
5. Click the Next button to configure the background properties and click Finish to
apply the background to your title.
The background is applied to the individual chapters, sections, pages, or a test.
See also: Creating a background for your entire title

Changing the default text properties

You can change the default properties of text that appears in the text blocks used in the
title. This includes the text style, text color, hyperlink color, font, font size, and font style.
If you are publishing to HTML, the program does not embed the fonts into the pub-
lished work. It is best to use common, Web-friendly fonts such as Arial, Verdana,
or Tahoma.
To change the default text style:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click the drop-down list on Text Style in the Default

Text Styles group.

3. The current text styles are listed. Use the list to select a default text style to be used
within your title. Text blocks created within your title will be automatically formatted
to the selected style. To create a new text style, select Manage Styles and use the
controls in the Text Styles window to configure a new style.
To change the default text color:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. In the Default Text Styles group on the Design ribbon, click the Text
Color pull-down list.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click

- 124 -
 Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the default hyperlink color:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. In the Default Text Styles group on the Design ribbon, click the Hyperlink
Color pull-down list.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the default font face:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. In the Default Text Styles group on the Design ribbon, click the
Font face pull-down list. The available fonts are listed.

3. Select a new font face from the list.

To change the default font size:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. In the Default Text Styles group on the Design ribbon, click the Font size
pull-down list.
3. Select a new font size from the list
To change the default font styles (bold, italics, and underline):
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. In the Default Text Styles group on the Design ribbon, click the font style you
want to change.
3. To bold text by default, click the Bold button. To italicize text by default, click the
Italic button. To underline text by default, click the Underline button.
See also: Managing text styles
Matching colors used within your title

Changing the default transition properties

You can specify how your pages will load within the title. How the page loads (and
unloads) is called a transition. Transitions will produce a special effect as users nav-
igate from one page to another. You can select from over 20 different transitions. You
can also specify to inherit the transition setting, select random transitions, and remove

- 125 -
transitions. There is a Speed slider to specify the speed at which the transition takes
place.
To set your title's default transitions:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Page Transitions from the Default Transition

group. The Page Transitions window opens.

3. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting. Select Inherit to inherit the transition or select
Random to select random transitions. Select None to remove the transitions. Use
the Duration slider to specify the appropriate duration.
4. Click OK.
The transition is added to the Transition pane. Use the Transitions pane to manage the
transitions you have set in the title. The pane provides a layered timeline-view of each
transition. Use the pane to select a transition that you might want to change. You can
choose a different transition and change transition options and effects. You can also edit
the delay and duration and also rename an object from within the Transition pane.
View these topics for more information:
l Choosing a different transition
l Changing the options and effects of a transition
l Changing the delay, duration, and speed of a transition
l Renaming an object from within the Transition pane

Choosing a different transition

You can choose a different transition after you have added it to an object in your title.
To choose a different transition:
1. Select the object either by clicking in the Title Explorer, within the work area, or
from the list in the Transitions panel. The transition is highlighted in the Trans-
ition panel.
2. Use the first pull-down list under Transition Options to change the transition. Use
the Transition Options and Transition Effects lists as necessary. For example,
with the Fly transition, you can specify the direction, such as Bottom, Left or Right
and select the appropriate effect, such as Swing, Elastic, and Bounce.
The transition is updated in the Transitions panel.

Changing the options and effects of a transition

You can select a different option or effect for a transition after you have added the trans-
ition to an object in your title. For example, with the Fly transition, you can specify the

- 126 -
direction, such as Bottom, Left or Right and select the appropriate effect, such as
Swing, Elastic, and Bounce.
Click the Inherit Settings graphic to toggle between showing and hiding inher-
ited objects within the results. Use the slider next to Inherit Settings to adjust the
timeline zoom.
To change the options and effects of a transition:
1. Select the object either by clicking in the Title Explorer, within the work area, or
from the list in the Transitions pane. The transition is highlighted in the Transition
pane.
2. Use the Transition Options and Transition Effects drop-down lists as appro-
priate. The lists are greyed-out if options or effects are not available for the current
transition.
The transition is updated in the Transitions panel.

Changing the delay, duration, and speed of a trans-

ition
The Transition pane lets you change the delay and duration of a transition. You can use
the graphical controls in the timeline view or use the fields within the panel.
Click the Inherit Settings graphic to toggle between showing and hiding inher-
ited objects within the results. Use the slider next to Inherit Settings to adjust the
timeline zoom.
To change the delay before the transition starts:
1. Select the object with the transition you want to change either by clicking in the
Title Explorer, within the work area, or from the list in the Transitions pane. The
transition is highlighted in the Transition pane.
2. To use the graphical controls to change the delay, either click the left red selector
on the timeline or click the left-edge of the transition item in the appropriate row
in the table (indicated by the double-arrow cursor ) and slide it to the desired
position representing the new starting time for the transition. The time of the delay
in seconds is displayed as you slide.
Otherwise, click the expand graphic in the Transitions Options column or
double-click the appropriate transition under the timeline. This opens the Trans-
ition window. Use the Delay before transition field to specify the new delay.
The transition is updated in the Transitions pane.
To change the duration of the transition:

- 127 -
 1. Select the object with the transition you want to change either by clicking in the
Title Explorer, within the work area, or from the list in the Transitions pane. The
transition is highlighted in the Transition pane.
2. To use the graphical controls to change the duration, either click the right red
selector on the timeline or click the low dark-grey line in the row and slide it to
the desired position representing the new duration for the transition. The time of the
duration in seconds is displayed as you slide.
Otherwise, click the expand graphic in the Transitions Options column or
double-click the appropriate transition under the timeline. This opens the Trans-
ition window. Use the Duration slider to specify the new duration.
The transition is updated in the Transitions pane.

Rename an object from within the Transition pane

You can rename an object using the Transition pane.
To do so:
1. Select the object either by clicking in the Title Explorer, within the work area, or
from the list in the Transitions pane. The transition is highlighted in the Transition
pane.
2. Double-click the appropriate name of the object. The name becomes highlighted.
Type the new name and click Enter.
The name of the object is updated in the Transitions pane and in the Title Explorer.

Changing the default content frame style

Using content frames, you can divide your title’s pages into multiple regions, decide
which content will go in which regions, and change the content in each region at dif-
ferent times based on various interactions or automation. This way, one region of the
screen can always contain buttons for navigating through the title, another region on the
screen can hold varying advertisements or instructions, while yet another area of the
screen can be the main area where title information and/or tests are presented. You can
specify a frame style by default.
To specify the default content frame style:
1. Select the title in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Content Frames from the Frames group. The

Content Frames window opens.

3. Select one of the predefined frame styles from the Description of Frames list. The
program will generate a preview of the style in the Preview box. Select from the fol-
lowing predefined frame styles:

- 128 -
 No frames Select this if you do not want to apply a frame style. This option is set
as the default.
Contents Select this to divide the window into a narrow left frame and wide main
frame.
Top Ban- Select this to divide the window into three frames: a narrow top frame,
ner and a narrow left frame, and large main frame. The top frame can be useful
Contents for banner advertisements or logos.
Header Select this to divide the window into two frames: a narrow top frame
and large main frame. The top frame can be useful for navigation but-
tons or for banner advertisement.
Four Select this to divide the window into four frames: a narrow left frame
Pane Split for contents, a narrow top frame for banner advertisements, an upper
left corner frame for a logo, and a large main frame for content.
Footer Select this to divide the window into two frames: a narrow bottom
frame and large main frame. This bottom frame can be useful for ban-
ner advertisements or navigation buttons.
Horizontal Select this to horizontally split the window into two same-size frames
Split on the top and bottom.
Vertical Select this to vertically split the window into two same-size frames on
Split the left and right.
Banner Select this to divide the window into three frames: a narrow left frame
and Con- that runs from top to bottom, a large main frame split near the top, and
tents a narrow frame along the top right portion of the window.
Contents Select this to divide the window into a narrow right frame and wide
on Right main frame.
Side
4. Select the Use Thick Visible Frames check box to display thick borders around
each frame.
5. You can specify the size of the frames directly in pixels or as a percentage of the
total width and height of your pages. The Top Row Height and Left Column
Width fields are enabled based on the frame style you have selected.
If you want to specify the frame size in percentages, select the Specify Size in Per-
centages check box and specify the height percentage in the Top Row Height
field and the width percentage in the Left Column Width field.
If you want to specify the frame size in pixels, uncheck the Specify Size in Per-
centages check box and specify the height in pixels in the Top Row Height field
and the width in pixels in the Left Column Width field.
6. Click OK. Your frames will be visible as icons in the Title Explorer.

- 129 -
The default content frame style is set. You can now add chapters, sections, pages, and
objects into the frames.
See also: Working with frames

Saving a title
The program organizes the files you use to create your title. The My Titles directory is
automatically created on your hard drive when you install the program. Whenever you
create a new title, the program automatically creates a folder specifically for that title in
the My Titles directory. Within your title folder, the program organizes all your media and
image files.
See also: How the program organizes your content
You should save your work on a regular basis. Publishing your title is not the same as
saving, so you should always save before you publish, as well as frequently throughout
title creation.
You can save your title in different ways:
l Click the Save quick-access graphic in the upper-left corner.
l Select Save or Save As from the File ribbon or Save, Save As, Save A Copy, or
Save Title As Template from Save Options also on the File ribbon. These
options all save your entire title, with all of its media files, to the location you spe-
cify. Use Save As to save and close the original title and open the new copy of the
title. Use Save a Copy of Title to save a copy of the title and resume working on
the original title. Use Save Title As Template to save a copy of the title as a tem-
plate.
l Press Ctrl-S on the keyboard.
lEnable auto-save. For details, see Setting auto save preferences.
See also: Saving a title as a template
Using the quick-access bar

Setting auto-save preferences

You can specify how the program automatically saves your work. The Auto Save feature
minimizes the loss of work due to unexpected computer issues or power outages.
Auto Save defaults to on and saves a title every five minutes. The on/off status can be
changed, as well as the amount of minutes between every save occurrence. There is
also a Use recovery file for Auto Save option that is selected by default.
Do not rely on Auto Save as a substitute for regularly saving your work by clicking
the Save quick-access graphic.
To specify your auto save preferences:

- 130 -
 1. Select Save Options from the File ribbon.
2. Ensure that the Enable Auto Save check box is enabled. Use Save every n
minutes to specify how often you want your title to be automatically saved.
3. If the Use recovery file for Auto Save option is selected, the program will not over-
write the original .awt title, but instead save it to a temporary file, which is identified
by a tilde (~), at each time interval specified. When you save the title, the program
deletes the original .awt file in the directory and renames the temporary file.
If Use recovery file for Auto Save option is not selected, the program saves to the
original file at each time interval specified.
Your auto-save preferences are set.
See also: Using the quick-access bar

Saving a title as a template

You can create a template based on the framework and related assets of the current title.
The template you create is added to the list of available templates.
Templates are saved to a Templates directory located in the same location as the pro-
gram was installed, typically C:/Program Files/Trivantis/Lectora. Templates saved to this
directory will automatically appear within the My Templates gallery on the Getting Star-
ted launch pad for easy access. You can also import and export templates for use in cre-
ating titles.
To save the current title as a template:
1. Open the File ribbon.
2. Click Save Options and select Save Title As Template. The Save Title as a Tem-
plate window opens.
3. In the Save Title as a Template window, provide the name of the new template
along with a description and click OK.
The new template is created.
View these topics for more information:
l Importing and exporting templates
l Sharing templates online
See also: Using a template
Using the Getting Started window

Importing and exporting templates

You can import and export templates. This will enable you to add templates for use in
creating titles (import) and save a copy of a template (export) in a location for easy
access for sharing or emailing. Custom template files contain the .awp file extension.
To import a template:

- 131 -
 1. Select Create New Title from the File ribbon.
2. Click My Templates. Your custom templates appear on the right.
3. Click Import to navigate and add a custom template to the list of custom templates.
The imported template is ready to used to create new titles.
To export a template:
1. Select Create New Title from the File ribbon.
2. Click My Templates.
3. Select the template you want to export and click Export. The Save As window
opens.
4. Navigate and save the template to the desired location.
The template is exported to the selected location.
See also: Using a template
Sharing templates online

Sharing templates online

You can store templates online and share them globally with the entire community.
Provide descriptions and keywords for quick retrieval.
You must agree to the terms and conditions specified in the Terms of Use before sharing
a template online.
The templates are screened before they are made available online.
To share a template online:
1. From the File ribbon, select Create New Title. Click My Templates. Your custom
templates are displayed.
2. Select the template you want to share and click Share Online. The Share Tem-
plate Online window opens.
3. Enable the Terms of Use check box and complete the following fields:
Select or Enter a Cat- Select or enter the subcategory in which to place the
egory template.
File name Specify the name of the template file.
Description Specify a short description of the template.
Author Specify the author.
Description Provide a brief description of the template.
Keywords Specify keywords used to find the template.
4. Click Upload.
The template is uploaded.

- 132 -
Protecting your title with a password
You can protect portions of your work from being changed by other users. With Author
Control enabled, you place a restricted lock on one or more items within a title (and by
inheritance, any children items that are related to the item on which the restriction is
placed). When you enable Author Control, an item or its children cannot be modified in
any way within the title unless the Author Control restriction is lifted using the master
Author Control password.
To enable author control:
1. From the File ribbon, select Title Information if it is not already selected.
2. Enable the Enable Author Control check box to enable the feature. The Set
Author Control Password window opens.
3. Type the same password in both fields and click OK. The password for the title is
set.
Once enabled, any item in the title can be placed under author control by clicking the
Author Control graphic in the first group on the Properties ribbon for an individual item.
During a single editing session, an author will only be prompted to enter the Author Con-
trol password once. After the correct password has been given, the author will have full
editing capabilities within the title. If the Author Control password is forgotten, the author
must import the contents of the title into a new title to make any changes to the protected
items.
Click the Change Password button to change the author control password.
See also: Enabling author control on a text block
Enabling author control on an object

Working with responsive content

Responsive titles adapt automatically to the view sizes of your users' devices. Built-in
features allow you to create titles that automatically adapt to different devices and device
orientations. These responsive design features eliminate having to maintain multiple
titles or implement complex branching.
To enable the responsive features and start with a responsive title, click New Respons-
ive Title from the Getting Started window or click Create New Title from the File tab and
select Responsive Title. To enable an existing title, click Title Options on the Design
ribbon and enable the Enable Responsive Title check box. For details, see Desig-
nating a title as responsive.
When your title is enabled for responsive design, a device selection bar is added to your
display area. The device selection bar contains five graphics representing the views pop-
ular with today's devices.

- 133 -
From left to right, the device views are:
Phone Portrait View

Tablet Portrait View

Desktop View

Tablet Landscape View

Phone Landscape View
The view bar allows you to quickly switch between views to verify how your text and
objects are displayed in each view. When you add objects to the title, the objects are
optimally scaled and moved for each device view. Click a device graphic within the
selection bar to see how your content will look on each device.
The arrows displayed next to the device graphics in the device selection bar represent
the flow of inheritance of the development changes that you make in the current device
view. The arrows indicate the direction of the responsive inheritance flow, starting from
the desktop to the tablet and then to the phone. Additionally, the color of the arrow is rep-
resentative of the device on which a override was made in a particular device view
(green if the override was done/inherited from the tablet view or orange if the override
was done on the phone). For example, the properties for the objects displayed in the
Phone Portrait View are inherited from the current settings of the properties of the objects
in the Tablet Portrait View.
A change you make in the non-deskop device view is considered an override to the
responsive inheritance setting from the parent device. To see how overrides on an
object are indicated in the work area, add an object, like an image or text block, change
to a device view, and move the object. Notice also that the color of the adorners around
the object and the color of the label of the property in the ribbon area also change when
you move the object. The color indicates that device in which an override was placed on
the object. Change the device view again and notice how the override is placed in the
view.
If you do not like how an override is displayed, you can quickly undo the override and
reset the object to its original property setting. You can reset the override in the current
view or in all views. To reset an override on an object, click Reset in the Overrides
group on the Properties ribbons (Properties, Style, Position & Size) for the object or
right-click on the object and select Reset Overrides. To reset an override for an
assignable unit, chapter, section, or page, right-click it and select Reset override. For
details, see Resetting overrides on an object in a responsive title, Resetting overrides on

- 134 -
a chapter, section or page in a responsive title, and Resetting overrides on an
assignable unit in a responsive title.
Off-page object placement
For responsive title designs that need to have different objects appear instead of others
on the different devices, you can swap the objects on and off the page. For example, you
may want Image1 to appear on the desktop and tablet, but want Image2 to appear on the
phone. During run mode, only objects on the page will be displayed, meaning if you drag
objects off a page for a specific device, they will not appear during Run Mode and Pre-
view Mode and also during publishing. So in this scenario, you would position Image1
on the page and place Image2 off the page for desktop and tablet views. In the phone
views, you would drag Image2 onto the page and drag Image1 off.
l When you delete an object from a responsive title, the object is deleted from
the Title Explorer and all device views in the title. You will receive a warning
message when deleting the object from non-desktop views. For details, see
Deleting an object in an responsive title.
l You can use conditional actions to place the appropriate images on (or off)
the page. For details, see Specifying conditions.
l Off-page objects are not published. Objects placed off the page in a view are
not referenced in the published content unless there is a Move To action
associated with the object The significance here is that the object’s
resources will not be downloaded to the viewing device.
Quickly moving and resizing objects across all devices views
You can quickly move and resize objects across all the devices without changing to
each view. This will allow you to force-move an object to a desired position/size regard-
less of its inheritance state. While moving or resizing one or several selected objects,
drag while holding down Shift and Ctrl. The objects on all devices are changed accord-
ingly. For more information about moving objects using Ctrl+Shift drag and the rules that
are applied, see Moving and resizing objects.
Responsively scaling objects
By default, most objects are scaled for each device view after insertion using a cal-
culated formula. This involves taking the object’s rectangular information and the current
device the user is in. Upon switching devices, the objects size and position are pro-
portionally scaled based on the width of the two devices using the constants below:
Device View Width Height
Phone Portrait 480 763
Phone Landscape 785 450
Tablet Portrait 785 1000
Tablet Landscape 1009 662

- 135 -
Desktop 1009 662
In non-deskop view, menus and form objects are not scaled. Additionally, there is
no scaling for when the display for audio is a controller or a speaker icon and for
tables of content when the type is drop-down list.
Page height growth rules
For objects that fit within the desktop page height, the page height of other views (in par-
ticular Tablet Landscape and Phone Landscape) grow so that those objects will remain
on the page. (This is also true from TabletLandscape to Phone Landscape.) This applies
to objects that are completely on the page as well as partially on/off the page. If an object
is completely off the page, then the page will not grow for the other devices.
If the width of a text block on desktop view is such that it has to be narrowed - and the
text block vertically grown - on other views, the page height in those other views will also
grow to accommodate the text block.
Responsive rules for objects and text
Here's what to expect when developing with these elements in responsive titles:
Chapters, Sec- l The page width is adjustable in the desktop view only (on both
tions, Pages, the Design ribbon and the Properties ribbon. In the other
and AUs responsive views, the width is always fixed. The page height is
inherited only at the object level. In other words, the page inherits
from the section, the chapter inherits from the title, and so on. The
page height does not get inherited across views (from desktop to
lower views). You can change the page height in all views on the
Design ribbon and the Properties ribbon.
The Inherit Page Size check box on the Properties ribbon
applies to the desktop view only; and appears as Auto Page
Height on the non-desktop views because the page width cannot
be changed.
l The default HTML page alignment for responsive titles is
Centered. Additionally, you cannot adjust the HTML page align-
ment in responsive titles. For existing titles, if a regular (not
responsive) title is enabled to be responsive, then the Centered
HTML page alignment will be applied and the control disabled
(and the responsive rules apply). If a responsive title is changed
a regular title, the HTML page alignment is still Centered and the
control is enabled so you can change it if desired.
Text l For responsive titles, options are available for you to con-
veniently scale the text within a text block. This is helpful when
adjusting how the text in a text block appears within the different
device views for responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an

- 136 -
 override of the default responsive inheritance. (The text scaling
controls are disabled on the desktop view since you cannot cre-
ate overrides in that view. Additionally, the labels in fields will
change colors to reflect the current override values for each
device view).
l In cases where there are multiple text styles in a text block the
base values in the Text panel will show the text style of the first
text in the block and an indicator - ± - that multiple values exist,
for example 12±.
l Buttons have automatic overrides if they contain text and will not
scale for font size. This ensures that the button text appears the
same size across all devices instead of scaling downward from
desktop and becoming smaller in the lower devices.
Buttons Buttons do not scale.
Images l Images have normal scaling upon being inserted into a device. If

the image fits on the page by default, it is also inserted into every
other device as an override so that it is the same exact size.If the
image is larger than the current device’s page either horizontally
or vertically, the image is placed in desktop device then scaled
down for the device views. If the image is larger than the current
device’s page and larger than desktop, the image is placed into
desktop view and scaled down to the boundaries of desktop.
From there it is scaled further down for to your current device.
l Images are not be scaled up.
l For images used in a background, the image is scaled using the
scaling rules. Additionally, if the background image resource on
desktop repeats or tiles, then it will repeat or tile in lower views. If
it does not repeat or tile on desktop, then it is prevented from
repeating or /tiling in lower views.
Shapes l Shapes have normal scaling upon being inserted into a device. If
the shape fits on the page by default, it is also inserted into every
other device as an override so that it is the same exact size.If the
shape is larger than the current device’s page either horizontally
or vertically, the shape is placed in desktop device then scaled
down for the device views. If the image is larger than the current
device’s page and larger than desktop, the image is placed into
desktop view and scaled down to the boundaries of desktop.
From there it is scaled further down for to your current device.
l Shapes are scaled-up to the desktop if it is drawn elsewhere,
then follow the responsive inheritance to flow the size back down

- 137 -
 to lower views. This maintains the original size in the view where
drawn without creating an override.
l For shapes used in a background, the shape is scaled using the
scaling rules. Additionally, if the background shape on desktop
repeats or tiles, then it will repeat or tile in lower views. If it does
not repeat or tile on desktop, then it is prevented from repeating
or /tiling in lower views.
Character Character poses are images and therefore use the same responsive
Poses scaling rules.
Animations l The size is scaled regardless of the of the view and then scaled

responsively.
l The playing continues when a device is rotated.
l The resource is be overridable in other device views.
Audio l Audio objects need separate rules for scaling and size overrides
due to the controllers. The standard audio controller or speaker
icon will not scale and not have an override able size. If using an
image as the controller, the audio object is scaled like other
image objects and allows size overrides.
l The playing continues when a device is rotated.
l The resource is be overridable in other device views.
l On mobile devices, only .mp3 audio file types are supported.
Video l The video size is scaled regardless of the of the view and then
scaled responsively.
l The playing of video continues when a device is rotated.
l The video controller is not overridable. The currently selected
controller or image is applied across all devices and views.
l The video resource is be overridable in other device views.
l On mobile devices, only .mp4 video file types are supported.
YouTube l The playing of video continues when a device is rotated.
Videos l The video controller is not overridable. The currently selected
controller or image is applied across all devices and views.
l The video resource is be overridable in other device views.
Questions, l In responsive titles, questions are inserted with automatic over-
Tests, and Sur- rides on the question's size and position across all devices.
veys l Property changes for questions, tests, and surveys will be propag-
ated to all views. Only unique position and size changes will be
permitted for question element objects (such as text and image
resources).

- 138 -
 l The default width of text blocks are increased within questions so
that when scaled down they will help prevent text from scrunch-
ing or wrapping.
l An additional 10 px is placed between radio buttons/check boxes
and their label text.
l Drag and drop and hot spot questions must include an image
with the question. For this image the image resource drop-down
list on the image’s Properties ribbon is disabled. The image can
only be changed using the Question Creator. As with other ques-
tion changes, this change is applied to the question across all
views.
l For hot spot questions, the spots are automatically adjusted
across the device views.
Menus The menu object is treated like other text-based objects. The size is not
scaled in non-desktop views. You can scale text in non-desktop views
(on the Properties ribbon and Home ribbon). You can increase the
text (Text Increase/Decrease) in all views (on Properties ribbon and
Home ribbon).
Tables of Con- Table of contents objects are treated like other text-based objects. The
tents size of the object is not automatically changed. Text scaling is avail-
able on non-desktop views (on the Properties ribbon and Home rib-
bon). You can increase the text (Text Increase/Decrease) in all views
(on Properties ribbon and Home ribbon).
Progress Bars l For progress bars that contain images, the same image-scaling

rules are applied.

l Currently, only progress bar orientation is overridable.
Form Objects l The size of form objects do not get automatically scaled based on
inheritance..You will need to make them a different size if
desired. This includes the associated text label for check boxes
and radio buttons.
l Text scaling is available on non-desktop views (on the Prop-
erties ribbon and Home ribbon). You can increase the text (Text
Increase/Decrease) in all views (on Properties ribbon and Home
ribbon).
l Scaling the text up or down will not automatically change the size
of the form object. You will need to change the size to be appro-
priate to the text size, if desired.
l Form object properties will not be overridable.
HTML Exten- The container for these objects are scaled by position and size similar
to images.

- 139 -
sions,
RSS Feeds,
and Web Win-
dows
Smart text These include date/time, page title, page number, and breadcrumbs.
objects They are handled the same as a text block when determining the
responsive size and position. You can increase the text (Text
Increase/Decrease) in all views (on Properties ribbon and Home rib-
bon). You can increase the text (Text Increase/Decrease) in all views
(on Properties ribbon and Home ribbon).
Charts Charts are images and therefore use the same responsive scaling
rules.
Equations Equations are images and therefore use the same responsive scaling
rules.
Actions, Trig- l Actions and triggers are not be overridable.

gers, and Vari- l You can use multiple actions and conditional actions to change
ables the behavior between views. Use the Device Rotation trigger to
set actions to occur when a tablet or phone’s orientation is
rotated.
l Page level triggers (On Show, On PageShow) are not refired
when a device is rotated. This prevents objects from hiding or
showing inappropriately or - more importantly - Modify Variable
actions from being doubled-up. If you want an action to occur in
that scenario, use the Device Rotation trigger to accomplish it.
l Actions can be made conditional to allow you to invoke different
behaviors on alternative device views. Use the reserved variable
CurrentView to compare against. The stored values are:
o Desktop
o TabletLandscape
o TabletPortrait
o PhoneLandscape
o PhonePortrait
For example, you can compare that CurrentView “Is Equal to”
TabletLandscape or “Contains” Phone or “Does Not Contain”
Desktop. (You can also shortcut, for example, “Contains” “T”
since only the Tablet choices contain a capital T, or “Contains”
“L” since only the Landscape choices contain a capital L.)
l If a Change Contents action is executed on the page after the ini-
tial load (for example, using a button click), then the resulting con-

- 140 -
 dition/appearance is displayed even when the device is rotated.
For example, if Change Contents A to new value B is executed
on the device in landscape, when the device is rotated to portrait
the new image B will still be shown.
Page Layouts You can add and manage page layouts on the Properties ribbon for
the page.
Page layouts are remapped for each device view for optimal spacing,
while still taking into account the majority of themes. (Some themes
have unusually wide border, header or footer graphics. In those cases
the layout may overlap slightly.)
If you create a page with a layout and then decide to change the layout
for the page. as long as there are no objects yet added (that is, con-
tains empty layout containers), the existing layout is removed and
replaced with the new layout. Note that if objects exist, they are not
applied to the new layout. The newly selected layout is applied to the
page.
Transitions Transitions are not overridable.

For more information, visit these RCD-related submissions in our Trivantis

Community:
l Responsive Course Design in Action: What You Need to Know
l Responsive Course Design in Lectora
l mLearning Mastery: How to Make eLearning for Every Device
(Example Included!)
l From eLearning to mLearning: How to Design and Deliver Courses
That Mobile Learners Love
l Converting a Course To Be Responsive: A Case Study with CTO
John Blackmon

Deleting an object in an responsive title

When you delete an object from a responsive title, the object is deleted from the Title
Explorer and all device views in the title. You will receive a warning message when
deleting the object from non-desktop views.
You can remove or hide an object in a specific device view. Objects that are
removed or hidden in a view do not get published for that view. This preserves
resource space when the title is published in that view. For details, see "Off-page
object placement" in Working with responsive content.
To delete an object in a responsive title:

- 141 -
 1. Select the object you want to delete by pressing Delete or right-clicking and select-
ing Delete.
The Deleting Objects warning message is displayed.
2. Click Delete from title. Otherwise, click Cancel.
The object is deleted from all views in the title.

Common chapter, section and page prop-

erties
Many properties for chapters, sections and pages are the same. You can access these
properties for a chapter, section or page by double-clicking the chapter, section or page
graphic in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can select the chapter, section or page,
right-click, and select Properties.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with chapters, sections
and pages:
l Changing the name of a chapter, section or page
l Changing the page size of a chapter, section and page
l Changing the HTML page alignment of a chapter, section, and page
l Changing inheritance properties for chapters, sections and pages
l Managing page layouts of chapters, sections, and pages
l Changing background properties for chapters, sections, and pages
l Changing text properties for chapters, section and pages
l Changing transition properties for chapters, sections and pages
l Adding an action to chapters, sections and pages
l Enabling author control for chapters, sections and pages
l Resetting overrides on an chapter, section or page in a responsive title

Changing the name of a chapter, section or page

To change the name of a chapter, section or page:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to rename. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. In the Name field, specify the name of your chapter, section or page as you want it
to appear in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, click the current name in the Title
Explorer so that it is highlighted. Then click again and retype the new name.
The name is changed.

- 142 -
Enabling author control of chapters, sections and
pages
You can protect the contents of chapters, sections and pages by enabling Author Con-
trol. With Author Control enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the chapter,
section, or title unless they have the master Author Control password. The master Author
Control password must first be set within the Title Properties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the first group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable author control on a chapter, section, and page:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
The chapter, section, or page is now protected. The graphic changes to the Locked
Control graphic.

Changing the page size of chapters, sections and

pages
When setting the page size, consideration should be made for your intended users, and
the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors.
The page size of a chapter is inherited from the title properties by default. Changes
applied to the page size within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages
contained within the chapter.
The page size of a section is inherited by default from the chapter to which it belongs.
Changes applied to the page size within a section's properties will only be applied to the
pages contained within the section.
The page size of a page is inherited by default from the chapter (or section) to which it
belongs. Changes applied to the page size within your page's properties will only be
applied to the current page.
For responsive titles, the page width is adjustable in the desktop view only (on
both the Design ribbon and the Properties ribbon. In the other responsive views,
the width is always fixed. The page height is inherited only at the object level. In
other words, the page inherits from the section, the chapter inherits from the title,

- 143 -
 and so on. The page height does not get inherited across views (from desktop to
lower views). You can change the page height in all views on the Design ribbon
and the Properties ribbon.
The Inherit Page Size check box on the Properties ribbon applies to the desktop
view only; and appears as Auto Page Height on the non-desktop views because
the page width cannot be changed. Additionally, the color of the Inherit Page
Height label indicates the device in which an override was placed. For more
information about developing responsive titles and setting overrides, see Working
with responsive content.
To change the page size of a chapter, section or page:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. In the Page Size group, disable the Inherit Page Size check box and use the
Width and Height fields to specify the new dimensions of the page in pixels.
The page size is changed.
See also: Understanding inheritance

Changing the HTML page alignment of chapters,

sections and pages
The HTML page alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's
browser window for any Web-based, published content.
The HTML page alignment of a chapter is inherited from the title properties by default.
Changes applied to the HTML page alignment within a chapter's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the chapter.
The HTML page alignment of a section is inherited by default from the chapter to which it
belongs. Changes applied to the page size within a section's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the section.
The HTML page alignment of a page is inherited by default from the chapter (or section)
to which it belongs. Changes applied to the page size within your page's properties will
only be applied to the current page.
To change the HTML page alignment of a chapter, section or page:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. Click Alignment from the HTML Page Alignment group. Select either Left

- 144 -
 Justified or Centered to change the current alignment or select Inherit to accept
the inherited setting for alignment.
The HTML page alignment is changed.

Changing inheritance settings for chapters, sec-

tions and pages
With the inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to the main title will appear on
every page of your title. Furthermore, any objects added directly to a chapter will appear
on every page in that chapter including pages that are inside of a section within the
chapter. Objects added directly to a section will appear on every page in that section and
objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
The inherit settings are available within all chapter, section and page properties. If the
object is excluded within the properties of a chapter, it will not appear on any page within
that chapter. If the object is excluded within the properties of a section, it will not appear
on any page within that section, and if the object is excluded within the properties of a
page, then the object will be excluded from that page.
To exclude an inherited object:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Click Inherit from the Inherit Settings group. The Inheritance Settings window
opens.
3. Use the drop-down list to select from one of the following inheritance options:
ALL objects from parents Places all objects within the Inherited list. These
objects will continue to appear throughout your
chapter, section , or page.
NO objects from parents Places all objects within the Excluded list. These
objects will not appear within the chapter, section, or
page.
Specific objects from par- Allows you to select the objects to inherit or exclude.
ents Select an object in either list and click the arrow but-
tons to move items from one list to the other in the dir-
ection of the buttons. Select several objects by
holding down the Ctrl key while selecting objects.
4. Click OK.

- 145 -
Managing page layouts of chapters, sections,
and pages
Page layouts determine how objects are placed on your page. You can use page lay-
outs to apply a consistent design to multiple pages. For example, if your title will consist
of a number of pages containing an image and corresponding text, you can use a page
layout to ensure that the image and text are always in the same location on those pages.
Page layouts provide a convenient means of creating multiple pages with the same
design and organization. You can apply predefined layouts to your pages or you can cre-
ate your own custom layouts for use within your title.
Select from the following predefined layouts:
l Blank
l Title Only
l Title and Subtitle

l Title and Text

l Title and bullets

l Title and two column text

l Title and two column bullets

l Image and text column

l Image and text row

l Image and bullets columns

l Image and bullets rows

l Title, image and text

l Title, image and bullets

l Video and text column

l Video and text row

l Video and bullets columns

l Video and bullets rows

l Title, Video and text

l Title, Video and bullets

l Animation and text column

l Animation and text row

l Animation and bullets columns

l Animation and bullets rows

l Title, Animation and text

l Title, Animation and bullets

View these topics for more information about using and managing page layouts:
l Adding a page using page layouts
l Applying a page layout to a page
l Creating a custom page layout for chapters, sections, and pages
l Replacing a page layout from chapters, sections, and pages

- 146 -
 l Deleting a custom page layout for chapters, sections, and pages
l Importing and exporting page layouts for chapters, sections, and pages
See also: Working with pages

Adding a page using page layouts

When a new page is added, it will use the layout that is currently selected in the layout
list on the insert toolbar. This enables authors that are creating multiple similar content
pages to create their layout once, and then begin each page with that same layout to
ensure consistency.
To add a page using a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page to which you want to add
the page and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the chapter,
section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Apply and a select a page layout on the pull-

down list.
The page is added using the layout you selected.

Applying a page layout to a page

When you apply a page layout to a page, the program puts placeholders on your page
for the components that comprise the page layout. The placeholders are boxes with dot-
ted lines into which you can add text, images, audio, video or other objects. For
example, if you apply the Image and text column page layout to a page, the program will
create a placeholder for the text, and a placeholder for the image. You can then populate
these areas with your text and image.
To apply a page layout to a page:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page to which you want to apply
the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
chapter, section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the page layout from the list in the top of the Manage Page Layouts window
and click Apply Layout to Current Page.
The page layout for the page you selected is changed and the layout placeholders
appear on the page. If you add additional pages to your title, they will automatically use
the page layout selected.

- 147 -
Creating a custom page layout for chapters, sections,
and pages
You can create a custom page layout based on a page within your title. For example,
suppose you have a page that contains a paragraph of text on the left, an image to the
right of that text, and a textual caption beneath the image. If you create a custom page
layout based off that page, the page layout will contain a place holder for text on the left,
a place holder for an image on the right, and another place holder for text beneath the
image.
Instead of creating a new custom page layout, you can also replace an existing layout
based on a page within your title. For details, see Replacing a page layout from
chapters, sections, and pages.
To create the custom page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page from which you want to cre-
ate the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
chapter, section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Save As. Alternatively, click the Man-

age graphic and click Save Current Page as Layout from the Manage Page Lay-
outs window.
The Save Current Page as Layout window opens.
3. In the Save Current Page as Layout window, specify a name for the new page lay-
out and click OK.
The new layout is added to the list of available page layouts. Custom layouts can be
deleted as necessary. For details, see Deleting a custom page layout for chapters, sec-
tions, and pages.

Replacing a page layout from chapters, sections, and

pages
You can replace an existing page layout with a new page layout that matches the current
page layout.
To update a page layout to match the current page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page from which you want to
replace the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click
the chapter, section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the page layout that you want to replace and click the Apply Layout to

- 148 -
 Current Page button.
4. Click Done.

Deleting a custom page layout for chapters, sections,

and pages
You can delete custom page layouts that you are no longer using. Predefined layouts
that are installed with product cannot be deleted.
To delete a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page from which you want to
delete the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click
the chapter, section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the custom page layout you want to delete and click Delete Layout. The
custom page layout is removed from the list.
4. Click Done.

Importing and exporting page layouts for chapters,

sections, and pages
You can import and export page layouts. This will enable you to add page layouts for
use within your titles (import) and save a copy of a page layout (export) in a location for
easy access for sharing or emailing. Custom layout files contain the .alt file extension.
To import a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page to which you want to
import the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click
the chapter, section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Click Import Layout to navigate and add a custom layout to the list of available
page layouts.
4. Click Done.
To export a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the chapter, section, or page from which you want to
export the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click
the chapter, section, or page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click

- 149 -
 Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window opens.

3. Select the layout you want to export and click Export Layout. The Save As win-
dow opens.
4. Navigate and save the layout to the desired location.
5. Click Done.

Changing background properties of chapters, sec-

tions and pages
The default background color, the default background image, and the default back-
ground sound are automatically inherited. Changes applied to the background color,
image, or sound within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained
within the chapter. Changes applied to the background color, image, or sound within a
section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the section, and
changes applied to the background color, image, or sound within a page's properties will
only be applied to the current page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
You can change the default background color, the default background image, and the
default background sound used on the pages within your title.
Background images are tiled (repeated) by default. Background images that are the
exact same size as the page (height and width) will not be tiled. If the background image
size is different from the page size - either smaller or larger - it will be repeated both hori-
zontally and vertically to cover the entire visible background area within the browser win-
dow. If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible, unless
the image is transparent.
The background sound restarts as users navigate from one page to the next.
The background sound does not auto-start on mobile devices.

To specify your changes you either use the Background Wizard or manually set the back-
ground's color, image, and sound properties.
To use the Background Wizard:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. Launch the Background Wizard by clicking Background Wizard from the Title
Background group on the Design ribbon. The Background Wizard opens.

- 150 -
 3. Follow the prompts and use the controls to configure your background properties.
4. Click Finish when you are done making changes.
To manually configure background properties,
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. In the Background group on the Design ribbon, click the appropriate background
setting you want to change. Select either Color, Image, or Sound.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
4. To change the image settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
5. To change the sounds settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Working with the Media Library

Changing text properties for chapters, sections

and pages
The default text properties are automatically inherited. This includes the text style, text
color, font, font color, font size, hypertext link color, and the text highlighting. Changes
applied to the text properties within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the
pages contained within the chapter. Changes applied to the text properties within a sec-
tion's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the section, and
changes applied to the text style and link color within a page's properties will only be
applied to the current page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
To change the text style:

- 151 -
 1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group for
the chapter, section or page.
3. Click the drop-down list on Text Style in the group.
4. The current text styles are listed. Use the list to select a text style to be used within
your title. Text blocks created within your title will be automatically formatted to the
selected style. To create a new text style, select Manage Styles and use the con-
trols in the Text Styles window to configure a new style.
To change the default text color:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. To change the color setting, click the Text drop-down list. The Color menu is dis-
played. You can select a predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an
existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples dis-
played. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color
window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click Select and
use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color currently
displayed on your desktop.
To change the default font:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. Click the Font list. The list of available fonts is displayed. Select a new font from
the list.
To change the default font size:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.

- 152 -
 3. Click the Font Size list. Select a new font size from the list or type the size in the
Font size field.
To change the default hyperlink color:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the default font styles (bold, italics, and underline):
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. To bold text by default, click the Bold button. To italicize text by default, click the
Italic button. To underline text by default, click the Underline button.
See also: Managing text styles
Matching colors used within your title

Changing transition properties for chapters, sec-

tions and pages
You can specify how your pages will load within the title. Transitions will produce a
visual effect as users navigate from one page to another, and can be applied to a
chapter, section or page.
The transition types are automatically inherited. Changes applied to the transition type
within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the
chapter. Changes applied to the transition type within a section's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the section, and changes applied to the transition
type within a page's properties will only be applied to the current page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
You can select from over 20 different transitions, such as Dissolve, Fade, or Random.
You can also specify to inherit the transition setting, select random transitions, and

- 153 -
remove transitions. There is a Speed slider to determine the speed at which the trans-
ition takes place.
To set transitions:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page you want to change. Alternatively, you can select the
appropriate graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is
displayed.
2. Click Page from the Transition group. The Page Transitions window opens.

3. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting. Select Inherit to inherit the transition or select
Random Transition to select random transitions. Select None to remove the trans-
ition. Use the Speed slider to specify the appropriate speed.
4. Click OK.
The transition is added to the Transition pane. Use the Transitions pane to manage the
transitions you have set in the title. The pane provides a layered timeline-view of each
transition. Use the pane to select a transition that you might want to change. You can
choose a different transition and change transition options and effects. You can also edit
the delay and duration and also rename an object from within the Transition pane.
View these topics for more information:
l Choosing a different transition
l Changing the options and effects of a transition
l Changing the delay, duration, and speed of a transition
l Renaming an object from within the Transition panel

Adding an action to chapters, sections and pages

You can associate an action to be applied on the chapter level. For example, you can
display message, open an attachment, launch a program, send an email and more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions on the chapter, section, and page level as needed.
To add an action:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the chapter , section , or page graphic of
the chapter, section or page. Alternatively, you can select the appropriate graphic,
right-click, and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Add group on the Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action ribbon is

- 154 -
 displayed.
3. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the title level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added.

Resetting overrides on a chapter, section or page

in a responsive title
You can reset the responsive design overrides that you have placed on a chapter, sec-
tion or page. An override is placed on a chapter, section or page when you change the
page size or adjust the background color in a child responsive view, for example. Reset-
ting the override restores the link of the chapter, section or page with its parent device
and normal inheritance flow is restored. The override can be reset on a specific view or
in all views. For more information about designing titles with responsive content, par-
ticularly how to set an override, see Working with responsive content.
View these objects for more information:
l Resetting all overrides on a chapter, section or page in all views
l Resetting all overrides on a chapter, section or page in this view
l Viewing the list of overrides for a chapter, section or page

Resetting all overrides on a chapter, section, or page

in all views
You can reset the overrides on a chapter, section, or page in all the responsive design
views. This restores the link of the chapter, section, or page with its parent device and
normal inheritance flow is restored.
To reset the override on a chapter, section, or page on all views, right-click the chapter,
section, or page in the Title Explorer, select Reset Overrides, and Remove this
object's overrides in all views.
Overrides for the chapter, section, or page are reset on all views.

Resetting all overrides for a chapter, section, or page

for a specific view
You can reset the overrides on a chapter, section, or page in a specific responsive
design view. This restores the link of the chapter, section, or page with its parent device
and normal inheritance flow is restored.
To reset the override on a chapter, section, or page on all views, right-click the chapter,
section, or page in the Title Explorer, select Reset Overrides, and Remove this
object's overrides in this view.
Overrides for the chapter, section, or page are reset on all views.

- 155 -
Viewing the list of overrides for a chapter, section, or
page
You can view the list of overrides for a chapter, section, or page, including specific resize
values and background-setting changes for each responsive display type. You can use
the list to remove individual overrides.
To view the list of overrides on a chapter, section, or page, right-click it in the Title
Explorer, select Reset Overrides, and Show Override List. The Override List is dis-
played.
Rows in the table represent resizings or setting changes for the selected chapter, sec-
tion, or page.
To remove an override in the list, select the override and click Remove. Click OK to
close the list.

Working with chapters

This section describes how to add chapters to your title. Chapters are the largest unit of
organization in a title. Chapters cannot contain other chapters, but they can contain sec-
tions and pages.
See also: Understanding the book metaphor
View these topics for more information about adding chapters:
l Adding a chapter
l Changing the name of a chapter
l Changing the page size of a chapter
l Changing the HTML page alignment of a chapter
l Changing the inheritance settings of a chapter
l Changing the background settings of a chapter
l Changing the text settings of a chapter
l Changing the transition properties of a chapter
l Adding an action to a chapter
l Enabling author control of a chapter

Adding a chapter
To add a chapter to your title, in the Title Explorer, highlight the location in the title where
you want to add the chapter, and do one of the following:
l From the Home ribbon, click Chapter in the Add Structure group.

l Click Add Chapter in the Title Explorer.

- 156 -
 l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Chapter.
l Type Ctrl+1.
When you add the new chapter, a chapter graphic appears in the Title Explorer.
l The new chapter is inserted after the object that was highlighted in the Title
Explorer.
l You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them, and
while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the item within the Title
Explorer to its new location. Once the location is chosen, release the left
mouse button, and the item will be moved.
l The program will attempt to assign a number to the new chapter. If the
sequence is out-of-order, or if you would like to rename the chapter, click on
the text located next to the chapter graphic in the Title Explorer, and enter the
new name for the chapter.

Working with sections

This section describes how to add sections to your title. A section is the second largest
unit of organization in a title. Sections can contain pages or other sections, called sub-
sections.
See also: Understanding the book metaphor
View these topics for more information about adding and working with sections:
l Adding a section
l Changing the name of a section
l Changing the page size of a section
l Changing the HTML page alignment of a section
l Changing the background properties of a section
l Changing the text properties of a section
l Changing the inheritance properties of a section
l Changing the transition properties of a section
l Adding an action to a section
l Enabling author control of a section

Adding a section
To add a section to your title, in the Title Explorer, highlight the chapter (or section) in the
title to which you want to add the section (or sub-section), and do one of the following:
l From the Home ribbon, click Section in the Add Structure group.

l Click Add Section

- 157 -
 in the Title Explorer.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Section.
l Type Ctrl+2.
When you add the new section, a section graphic appears in the Title Explorer in the
chapter (or section) you selected.
l The new section is inserted into the chapter or section that was highlighted
in the Title Explorer.
l You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them, and
while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the item within the Title
Explorer to its new location. Once the location is chosen, release the left
mouse button, and the item will be moved.
l The program will attempt to assign a number to the new section. If the
sequence is out-of-order, or if you would like to rename the section, click on
the text located next to the section graphic in the Title Explorer, and enter the
new name for the section.

Working with pages

This section describes how to add pages to your title. A page is the smallest unit of
organization within your title. The pages are what your users will see when they are view-
ing the published title.
See also: Understanding the book metaphor
View these topics for more information about adding and working with pages:
l Adding a page
l Changing the name of a page
l Changing the size of a page
l Changing the HTML page alignment of a page
l Changing the background properties of a page
l Changing the text properties of a page
l Changing the inheritance properties of a page
l Changing the transition properties of a page
l Adding an action to a page
l Including metadata on a page
l Enabling author control on a page

- 158 -
Adding a page
To add a page to your title, in the Title Explorer, highlight the location in the title to which
you want to add the page, and do one of the following:
l From the Home ribbon, click Page in the Add Structure group.

l Click Add Page in the Title Explorer.

l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Page.
l Type Ctrl+3.
When you add the new page, a page graphic appears in the Title Explorer in the chapter
(or section) you selected.
l The new page is inserted into the chapter or section that was highlighted in
the Title Explorer.
l You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them, and
while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the item within the Title
Explorer to its new location. Once the location is chosen, release the left
mouse button, and the item will be moved.
l The program will attempt to assign a number to the new page. If the
sequence is out-of-order, or if you would like to rename the page, click on the
text located next to the page graphic in the Title Explorer, and enter the new
name for the page.
l When a new page is added, it will use the layout that is currently selected in
the page layout list on the Page drop-down list. This enables authors that are
creating multiple similar content pages to create their layout once, and then
begin each page with that same layout to ensure consistency. For details
about page layouts, see Using and managing page layouts.

Including metadata on a page

You can associate metadata with a page. Metadata is data about data. It typically
includes information such as a description of the object, the author, the date it was cre-
ated, and so on. Search engines look within metadata for relevant information to the term
that was searched. Within objects, the metadata will be published as standard XML
metadata into the accompanying imsmanifest.xml file for any AICC, SCORM, or
CourseMill published titles. Metadata added to objects within a title that is published
strictly to HTML will be written directly to the resulting HTML pages containing the
objects. The metadata can be specified as custom metadata, an external XML file con-
taining metadata, or as name/value pairs using predefined IMS Metadata Data Elements
following the IEEE LTSC LOM standard.
To include metadata on your page:

- 159 -
 1. Double-click the page graphic of the page you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties. The
Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Metadata from the Add group. The Add/Modify Metadata window opens.
3. Select Use Metadata and select one of the following metadata options:
Input Custom Select this to display the Custom Metadata text field for you to dir-
Metadata ectly enter custom metadata.
External Select this to import an external XML file containing metadata.
XMLFile Use the XML File field to specify the file. Click Edit to modify the
Source file.
IMS (IEEE Select this to display a pre-populated list of name value pairs for
LTSC LOM) all the SCORM 1.2 required IMS Metadata data elements. Click
the Add button to open the Metadata Data Element Entry window.
Select a predefined data element from the Name combo box and
specify a data element value from the Value edit/combo box.
Select OK to accept the data element. Select from previously
entered data elements from the Name/Value lists and click Edit or
Remove to edit or remove the selected element.
4. Publish this object’s metadata is checked by default so that the metadata is
included in the published title. Clear this option if you do not want the metadata
included in the published title.
5. Click OK.

Working with assignable units

Assignable units are specific to titles you are preparing for LMS integration (AICC and
SCORM titles). An assignable unit is the largest unit of organization in an AICC and
SCORM-published title. Assignable units cannot contain other assignable units, but they
can contain chapters, sections, tests, and/or pages.
With the addition of multiple assignable units, several new restrictions have been added
to AICC and SCORM-published title materials generated by the program:
l Jumps between assignable units on a Web-published title violate the AICC
guidelines for LMS direction of flow between assignable units.
l There must always be at least one assignable unit defined within the title. When
you select the title type as AICC/SCORM for LMS from the Title Options setting
on the Design ribbon, an assignable unit that encompasses the entire title is gen-
erated. If this option is not selected, and you publish to AICC, SCORM, or
CourseMill, an assignable unit encompassing the entire title is automatically cre-
ated. For details about selecting your title type, see Creating an AICC/SCORM title
for a LMS.

- 160 -
View these topics for more information about adding and working with assignable units:
l Adding an assignable unit
l Changing the name of an assignable unit
l Changing the page size of an assignable unit
l Changing the HTML page alignment of an assignable unit
l Changing the inheritance properties of an assignable unit
l Managing page layouts of assignable units
l Changing the background properties of an assignable unit
l Changing the text properties of an assignable unit
l Changing assignable unit transition properties
l Adding an action to an assignable unit
l Changing assignable unit information
l Enabling author control of an assignable unit
l Resetting overrides on an assignable unit in a responsive title

Adding an assignable unit

You can only add assignable units if you have designated your title type as a title pub-
lished for AICC or SCORM. To do so, select Title Options from the Title Setup group on
the Design ribbon and select the AICC/SCORM for LMS check box in the Select Title
Type window. When this option is set, an assignable unit will automatically appear in the
title. If you choose not to select this option and still publish to AICC, SCORM, your entire
title will be considered the assignable unit.
See also: Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS
When publishing to SCORM, the assignable unit will be converted to a SCO (the
SCORM equivalent).
To add an assignable unit, in the Title Explorer, select the location within the title into
which you want to add the new assignable unit, and do one of the following:
l From the Home ribbon, click AU in the Add Structure group.

l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Assignable
Unit.
l Type Ctrl+0.
When you add the new assignable unit, an assignable unit graphic appears in the Title
Explorer.
l The new assignable unit is inserted after the chapter or assignable unit that
was highlighted in the Title Explorer.

- 161 -
 l You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them, and
while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the item within the Title
Explorer to its new location. Once the location is chosen, release the left
mouse button, and the item will be moved.
l The program will attempt to assign a number to the new assignable unit. If
the sequence is out-of-order, or if you would like to rename the assignable
unit, click on the text located next to the assignable unit graphic in the Title
Explorer, and enter the new name for the assignable unit.

Changing the name of an assignable unit

The name of your assignable unit is used by the AICC/SCORM learning management
system. This is the name that the course will be referred to within the system.
To change the name of the assignable unit:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit you want to rename. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Name field, specify the name of the assignment unit as you want it to appear
in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, click the current name in the Title Explorer so
that it is highlighted. Then click again and retype the new name.
The name is changed.

Enabling author control of an assignable unit

You can protect the contents of chapters, sections and pages by enabling Author Con-
trol. With Author Control enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the chapter,
section, or title unless they have the master Author Control password. The master Author
Control password must first be set within the Title Properties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the Assignable Unit group on the Properties ribbon. The
graphic changes to the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-
protected.
See also: Protecting your title with a password
To enable author control on an assignable unit:
1. Right-click the assignable unit in the Title Explorer.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
The assignable unit is now protected. The graphic changes to the Locked Control
graphic.

- 162 -
Changing the page size of an assignable unit
The page size of the assignable unit is inherited from the title properties by default.
Changes applied to the page size within your assignable unit's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the assignable unit. Consideration should be
made for your intended users, and the width of the page size should match the most com-
mon resolution of users' monitors.
See also: Understanding inheritance
To change the page size of your assignable unit:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the assignable unit. Altern-
atively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Page Size group, disable the Inherit Page Size check box and use the
Width and Height fields to specify the new dimensions of the page in pixels.
The page size is changed.

Changing the HTML page alignment of an

assignable unit
The HTML page alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's
browser window for any Web-based, published content.
The HTML page alignment of an assignable unit is inherited from the title properties by
default. Changes applied to the HTML page alignment within an assignable unit's prop-
erties will only be applied to the pages contained within the assignable unit.
See also: Understanding inheritance
To change the HTML page alignment of your assignable unit, section or page:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Alignment from the HTML Page Alignment group. Select either Left Jus-
tified or Centered to change the current alignment or select Inherit to accept the
inherited setting for alignment.
The HTML page alignment is changed.

Changing the inheritance settings for an

assignable unit
With the inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to the main title will appear on
every page of your title. Furthermore, any objects added directly to a assignable unit will

- 163 -
appear on every page in that assignable unit including pages that are inside of a section
within the assignable unit.
See also: Understanding inheritance
The inherit settings are available within properties of the assignable units. If the object is
excluded within the properties of an assignable unit, it will not appear on any page
within that assignable unit.
To exclude an inherited object:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Inherit from the Inherit Settings group. The Inherit window opens.
3. Use the drop-down list to select from one of the following inheritance options:
ALL objects from parents Places all objects within the Inherited list. These
objects will continue to appear throughout the
assignable unit.
NO objects from parents Places all objects within the Excluded list. These
objects will not appear on any pages within the
assignable unit.
Specific objects from par- Allows you to select the objects to inherit or exclude.
ents Select an object in either list and click the arrow but-
tons to move items from one list to the other in the dir-
ection of the buttons. Select several objects by
holding down the Ctrl key while selecting objects.
4. Click OK.

Managing page layouts of assignable units

Page layouts determine how objects are placed on your page. You can use page lay-
outs to apply a consistent design to multiple pages within assignable units. For example,
if your title will consist of a number of pages containing an image and corresponding
text, you can use a page layout to ensure that the image and text are always in the same
location on those pages. Page layouts provide a convenient means of creating multiple
pages with the same design and organization. You can apply predefined layouts to your
pages or you can create your own custom layouts for use within your title.
Select from the following predefined layouts:
l Blank
l Title Only
l Title and Subtitle
l Title and Text
l Title and bullets

- 164 -
 l Title and two column text
l Title and two column bullets

l Image and text column

l Image and text row

l Image and bullets columns

l Image and bullets rows

l Title, image and text

l Title, image and bullets

l Video and text column

l Video and text row

l Video and bullets columns

l Video and bullets rows

l Title, Video and text

l Title, Video and bullets

l Animation and text column

l Animation and text row

l Animation and bullets columns

l Animation and bullets rows

l Title, Animation and text

l Title, Animation and bullets

View these topics for more information about using and managing page layouts:
l Adding a page using page layouts
l Applying a page layout to a page
l Creating a custom page layout for assignable units
l Replacing a page layout from assignable units
l Deleting a custom page layout for assignable units
l Importing and exporting page layouts for assignable units
See also: Working with pages

Adding a page using page layouts

When a new page is added within an assignable unit, it will use the layout that is cur-
rently selected in the layout list on the insert toolbar. This enables authors that are cre-
ating multiple similar content pages to create their layout once, and then begin each
page with that same layout to ensure consistency.
To add a page using a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit to which you want to add the page
and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the assignable unit to
display the corresponding Properties ribbon.

- 165 -
 2. In the Page Layout group, click Apply and a select a page layout on the pull-

down list.
The page is added using the layout you selected.

Applying a page layout to a page

When you apply a page layout to an assignable unit, the program puts placeholders on
your page for the components that comprise the page layout. The placeholders are
boxes with dotted lines into which you can add text, images, audio, video or other
objects. For example, if you apply the Image and text column page layout to a page, the
program will create a placeholder for the text, and a placeholder for the image. You can
then populate these areas with your text and image.
To apply a page layout to a page:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit to which you want to apply the page
layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the assignable
unit to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the page layout from the list in the top of the Manage Page Layouts window
and click Apply Layout to Current Page.
The page layout for the page you selected is changed and the layout placeholders
appear on the page. If you add additional pages to your title, they will automatically use
the page layout selected.

Creating a custom page layout for assignable units

You can create a custom page layout based on a page within an assignable unit. For
example, suppose you have an assignable unit page that contains a paragraph of text
on the left, an image to the right of that text, and a textual caption beneath the image. If
you create a custom page layout based off that page, the page layout will contain a
place holder for text on the left, a place holder for an image on the right, and another
place holder for text beneath the image.
Instead of creating a new custom page layout, you can also replace an existing layout
based on a page within your title. For details, see Replacing a page layout from
assignable units.
To create the custom page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit page from which you want to create
the page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
assignable unit page to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click

- 166 -
 Save As. Alternatively, click the Manage graphic and click Save Cur-

rent Page as Layout from the Manage Page Layouts window.

The Save Current Page as Layout window opens.
3. In the Save Current Page as Layout window, specify a name for the new page lay-
out and click OK.
The new layout is added to the list of available page layouts. Custom layouts can be
deleted as necessary. For details, see Deleting a custom page layout for assignable
units.

Replacing a page layout from assignable units

You can replace an existing page layout with a new page layout that matches the current
page layout.
To update a page layout to match the current page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit from which you want to replace the
page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
assignable unit to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the page layout that you want to replace and click the Apply Layout to Cur-
rent Page button.
4. Click Done.

Deleting a custom page layout for assignable units

You can delete custom page layouts that you are no longer using. Predefined layouts
that are installed with product cannot be deleted.
To delete a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit from which you want to delete the
page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
assignable unit to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the custom page layout you want to delete and click Delete Layout. The
custom page layout is removed from the list.
4. Click Done.

- 167 -
Importing and exporting page layouts for assignable
units
You can import and export page layouts. This will enable you to add page layouts for
use within your titles (import) and save a copy of a page layout (export) in a location for
easy access for sharing or emailing. Custom layout files contain the .alt file extension.
To import a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit to which you want to import the
page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
assignable unit to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Click Import Layout to navigate and add a custom layout to the list of available
page layouts.
4. Click Done.
To export a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the assignable unit from which you want to export the
page layout and click the Properties ribbon. Alternatively, double-click the
assignable unit to display the corresponding Properties ribbon.
2. In the Page Layout group, click Manage. The Manage Page Layouts window

opens.
3. Select the layout you want to export and click Export Layout. The Save As win-
dow opens.
4. Navigate and save the layout to the desired location.
5. Click Done.

Changing the background properties of an

assignable unit
The default background color, the default background image, and the default back-
ground sound are automatically inherited. Changes applied to the background color,
image, or sound within an assignable unit's properties will only be applied to the pages
contained within the assignable unit.
You can change the default background color, the default background image, and the
default background sound used on the pages within the assignable unit.
Background images are tiled (repeated) by default. Background images that are the
exact same size as the page (height and width) will not be tiled. If the background image

- 168 -
size is different from the page size - either smaller or larger - it will be repeated both hori-
zontally and vertically to cover the entire visible background area within the browser win-
dow. If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible, unless
the image is transparent.
The background sound restarts as users navigate from one page to the next.
The background sound does not auto-start on mobile devices.

To specify your changes you either use the Background Wizard or manually set the back-
ground's color, image, and sound properties.
To use the Background Wizard:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Launch the Background Wizard by clicking Background Wizard from the Back-
ground group on the Properties ribbon. The Background Wizard opens.
3. Follow the prompts and use the controls to configure your background properties.
4. Click Finish when you are done making changes.
To manually configure background properties,
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Background group on the Properties ribbon, click the appropriate back-
ground setting you want to change. Select either Color, Image, or Sound.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
4. To change the image settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
5. To change the sounds settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To

- 169 -
 select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Working with the Media Library

Changing the text properties of the assignable

unit
The default text properties are inherited from the title properties by default. This includes
the text style, text color, font, font color, font size, hypertext link color, and the text high-
lighting. Changes applied to the default text properties within your assignable unit's prop-
erties will only be applied to the pages contained within the assignable unit.
See also: Understanding inheritance
To change the text style:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Assignable Unit
Text Styles group.
3. In the Assignable Unit Text Styles group, click Text Style.
4. The current text styles are listed. Use the list to select a text style to be used within
your title. Text blocks created within your title will be automatically formatted to the
selected style. To create a new text style, select Manage Styles and use the con-
trols in the Text Styles window to configure a new style.
To change the text color:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Assignable Unit
Text Styles group.
3. In the Assignable Unit Text Styles group, click the Text drop-down list.
4. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the default font:

- 170 -
 1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Assignable Unit Text Styles group.
3. Click the Font list. The list of available fonts is displayed. Select a new font from
the list.
To change the font size:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Assignable Unit Text Styles group.
3. Click the Font Size list. Select a new font size from the list or type the size in the
Font size field.
To change the hyperlink color:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Assignable Unit Text Styles group.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the font styles (bold, italics, and underline):
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Assignable Unit Text Styles group.
3. To bold text, click the Bold button. To italicize text, click the Italic button. To under-
line text, click the Underline button.
See also: Managing text styles
Matching colors used within your title

- 171 -
Changing the transition properties for an
assignable unit
You can specify how your pages will load within an assignable unit. Transitions will pro-
duce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another.
The transition type is automatically inherited. Changes applied to the transition type
within the properties of an assignable unit will only be applied to the pages contained
within the assignable unit.
You can select from over 20 different transitions. You can also specify to inherit the trans-
ition setting, select random transitions, and remove transitions. There is a Speed slider
to determine the speed at which the transition takes place.
To set transitions:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Page from the Transition group. The Transitions window opens.
3. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting. Select Inherit to inherit the transition or select
Random Transition to select random transitions. Select None to remove the trans-
ition. Use the Speed slider to specify the appropriate speed.
4. Click OK.

Adding an action to an assignable unit

You can associate an action to be applied on the assignable unit level. For example,
you can display message, open an attachment, launch a program, send an email and
more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions on the chapter level as needed.
To add an action:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable
unit. Alternatively, you can select the graphic, right-click, and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Add group on the Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
3. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the title level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.

- 172 -
The action is added to the assignable unit.

Changing assignable unit information

You can provide AICC/SCORM-related information as it pertains to each assignable
unit.
To specify the information for an assignable unit:
1. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, right-click the graphic of the assignable unit and click Prop-
erties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the Information ribbon.
3. Specify the following information as necessary:
System ID This specifies the system identifier of the assignable unit within
the current title.
Developer ID Specify the developer or author of the assignable unit.
AU Type Specify the short description for the type of assignable unit within
the learning management system. By default, the value is set to
Lesson.
Description Specify a description of the assignable unit. This is the entry that
will appear in most online catalogs for the assignable unit when
the title is published to an AICC/SCORM learning management
system.
Maximum Specify the maximum number of points (score) that a user can
Point Score receive when completing this title. If you leave this field blank, the
program will automatically supply this value with 100 points times
the total number of graded tests within the assignable unit.
Mastery Score Specify the score that marks the threshold where a user will be
(%) considered to have passed the assignable unit. By default, the
value is set to 75% of the maximum score of all tests combined
within the assignable unit.
xAPI Move On Specify the verbs to send for providing credit to the student for
Requirement completing the assignable unit. Select from the following values:
Move On value Title requirements
Passed Must send a xAPI statement action using the
Passed verb
Completed Must send a xAPI statement action using the
Completed verb
Completed and Must send a xAPI statement action using the
Passed cmi5 verb Completed and a statement

- 173 -
 action using the cmi5 verb Passed. The AU
is considered satisfied only when both state-
ments have been received. The order of the
two statements is not important.
Completed or Can either send a Completed xAPI state-
Passed ment verb or a Passed xAPI statement verb
(or both)
Not Applicable No Move On criteria is required. Note that in
this case, registering for the course meets
the Move On criteria.
Time Limit Use the controls in the Time Limit group to specify the maximum
Enable time that you want users to be able to spend within the
assignable unit. Disable the Enable check box if you want to give
users unlimited time to access the assignable unit. Otherwise,
Use the Hours and Minutes fields to specify the time limit. Use
the drop-down list to the right to specify how to notify users when
the time limit is reached.
Prerequisites A title can contain multiple assignable units. If there are multiple
assignable units, prerequisites can be set within the individual
assignable units' properties. The learning management system
will ensure the prerequisites are fulfilled before allowing the stu-
dent to access the assignable unit.
Select the required prerequisite assignable units by checking the
boxes next to the assignable unit names in the list. If more than
two assignable units are checked, select whether All of the fol-
lowing selected Assignable Units or Any of the following
selected Assignable Units are prerequisites for the current
assignable unit.
The assignable unit information is set.

Resetting overrides on an assignable unit in a

responsive title
You can reset the responsive design overrides that you have placed on an assignable
unit. An override is placed on an assignable unit when you change the page size or
adjust the background color in a child responsive view, for example. Resetting the over-
ride restores the link of the an assignable unit with its parent device and normal inher-
itance flow is restored. The override can be reset on a specific view or in all views. For
more information about designing titles with responsive content, particularly how to set
an override, see Working with responsive content.
View these objects for more information:

- 174 -
 l Resetting all overrides on an assignable unit in all views
l Resetting all overrides on an assignable unit in this view
l Viewing the list of overrides for an assignable unit

Resetting all overrides on an assignable unit in all

views
You can reset the overrides on an assignable unit in all the responsive design views.
This restores the link of the an assignable unit with its parent device and normal inher-
itance flow is restored.
To reset the override on an assignable unit on all views, right-click the an assignable
unit in the Title Explorer, select Reset Overrides, and Remove this object's overrides
in all views.
Overrides for the assignable unit are reset on all views.

Resetting all overrides for an assignable unit for a spe-

cific view
You can reset the overrides on an assignable unit in a specific responsive design view.
This restores the link of the assignable unit with its parent device and normal inheritance
flow is restored.
To reset the override on an assignable unit on all views, right-click the assignable unit in
the Title Explorer, select Reset Overrides, and Remove this object's overrides in this
view.
Overrides for the assignable unit are reset on all views.

Viewing the list of overrides for an assignable unit

You can view the list of overrides for an assignable unit, including specific resize values
and background-setting changes for each responsive display type. You can use the list
to remove individual overrides.
To view the list of overrides on an assignable unit, right-click it in the Title Explorer,
select Reset Overrides, and Show Override List. The Override List is displayed.
Rows in the table represent resizings or setting changes for the selected an assignable
unit.
To remove an override in the list, select the override and click Remove. Click OK to
close the list.

Working with tracking

With tracking you can account for which chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections
and surveys that your users have visited and completed. This allows you to know where
your users have been within your content. You can automatically display the tracking

- 175 -
status within the table of contents and menu objects based on your users' interactions
with content.
Status is tracked automatically and you can also select to add status indicator objects to
pages to display tracking information. Additionally, you can execute actions to manually
update the tracking status of chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys
and you can execute conditional actions that are dependent on the tracking status for
specific chapters, sections,pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
The tracking status for the title is retained between sessions by default. You can reset
the tracking status for the title in the title options.
The automated status can be in one of three states:
Not Started (default) A specific page has not been entered, or no pages in the
chapter, section, test, test section, or survey have been
accessed.
In-Progress At least one page in the chapter, section, test, test section, or
survey has been accessed.
Completed A specific page has been entered or all pages in the chapter,
section, test, test section, or survey has been accessed. A
graded test must be submitted and passed to be Completed.
Survey must be submitted to be Completed.
To restrict users from accessing content until other information is completed, you can
use action conditions. For details about configuring action conditions, see Adding an
action.
The title and each chapter, section, page, test, test section or survey will process
all On Show and On Page Show actions prior to automatically setting itself to
"Completed". This allows a user to interact with the page the first time a chapter,
section, page, test, test section, or survey is shown using the "Is Not Started" con-
dition relationship. For example, On Show, hide the Next button if the page is "Is
Not Started" (that is, the first time they enter). The second time the page is
accessed, it would have a status of "Is Completed" and the Next button would
appear.
See also: Resetting the tracking status between sessions
Changing the status indicator image set in the table of contents
Changing the status indicator image set in the menu
Working with status indicators
Selecting an action
Additional resources: Status Tracking with Lectora V11.3 - Trivantis Community

- 176 -
Using and managing page layouts
Page layouts determine how objects are placed on your page. You can use page lay-
outs to apply a consistent design to multiple pages. For example, if your title will consist
of a number of pages containing an image and corresponding text, you can use a page
layout to ensure that the image and text are always in the same location on those pages.
Page layouts provide a convenient means of creating multiple pages with the same
design and organization. You can apply predefined layouts to your pages or you can cre-
ate your own custom layouts for use within your title.
You can also the manage the page layout of chapters, pages, and sections using
the Page Layouts options on the Properties ribbon for chapters, pages, and sec-
tions. For details, see Managing page layouts of chapters, sections, and pages.
Select from the following predefined layouts:
l Blank
l Title Only

l Title and Subtitle

l Title and Text

l Title and bullets

l Title and two column text

l Title and two column bullets

l Image and text column

l Image and text row

l Image and bullets columns

l Image and bullets rows

l Title, image and text

l Title, image and bullets

l Video and text column

l Video and text row

l Video and bullets columns

l Video and bullets rows

l Title, Video and text

l Title, Video and bullets

l Animation and text column

l Animation and text row

l Animation and bullets columns

l Animation and bullets rows

l Title, Animation and text

l Title, Animation and bullets

View these topics for more information about using and managing page layouts:
l Adding a page using page layouts
l Applying a page layout to a page
l Creating a custom page layout

- 177 -
 l Replacing a page layout
l Deleting a custom page layout
l Importing and exporting page layouts
See also: Working with pages

Adding a page using page layouts

When a new page is added, it will use the layout that is currently selected in the layout
list on the insert toolbar. This enables authors that are creating multiple similar content
pages to create their layout once, and then begin each page with that same layout to
ensure consistency.
To add a page using a page layout:
1. In the Title Explorer, highlight the location in the title to which you want to add the
page.
2. From the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and a select a page layout in the Add Page Using Layout group on the
pull-down list.
The page is added using the layout you selected. The graphic displayed for the Page
icon is dynamic. It changes depending on the page layout you previously selected. This
allows you select the graphic if you want to add subsequent pages using the same page
layout.

Applying a page layout to a page

When you apply a page layout to a page, the program puts placeholders on your page
for the components that comprise the page layout. The placeholders are boxes with dot-
ted lines into which you can add text, images, audio, video or other objects. For
example, if you apply the Image and text column page layout to a page, the program will
create a placeholder for the text, and a placeholder for the image. You can then populate
these areas with your text and image.
To apply a page layout to a page:
1. Select the page you want to change in the Title Explorer.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and select Apply Layout to Current Page. Alternatively, you can select
Manage Page Layout and click Apply Layout to Current Page in the Manage
Page Layouts window.
The page layout for the page you selected is changed and the layout placeholders
appear on the page. If you add additional pages to your title, they will automatically use
the page layout selected.

- 178 -
Creating a custom page layout
You can create a custom page layout based on a page within your title. For example,
suppose you have a page that contains a paragraph of text on the left, an image to the
right of that text, and a textual caption beneath the image. If you create a custom page
layout based off that page, the page layout will contain a place holder for text on the left,
a place holder for an image on the right, and another place holder for text beneath the
image.
Instead of creating a new custom page layout, you can also replace an existing layout
based on a page within your title. For details, see Replacing a page layout.
To create the custom page layout:
1. Select the page in the Title Explorer from which you want to create the layout.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and select Save Current Page As Layout. Alternatively, you can select
Manage Page Layout and click Save Current Page as Layout in the Manage
Page Layouts window.
3. In the Layouts Name window, specify a name for the new page layout and click
OK.
The new layout is added to the list of available page layouts. Custom layouts can be
deleted as necessary. For details, see Deleting a custom page layout.

Replacing a page layout

You can replace an existing page layout with a new page layout that matches the current
page layout.
To update a page layout to match the current page layout:
1. Select the page in the Title Explorer from which you want to define the layout.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and select Manage Page Layout. The Page Layouts window opens.
3. Select the page layout that you want to replace and click the Apply Layout to Cur-
rent Page button.
4. Click Done.

Deleting a custom page layout

You can delete custom page layouts that you are no longer using. Predefined layouts
that are installed with product cannot be deleted.
To delete a page layout:
1. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and select Manage Page Layout. The Page Layouts window opens.
2. Select the custom page layout you want to delete and click Delete Layout. The

- 179 -
 custom page layout is removed from the list.
3. Click Done.

Importing and exporting page layouts

You can import and export page layouts. This will enable you to add page layouts for
use within your titles (import) and save a copy of a page layout (export) in a location for
easy access for sharing or emailing. Custom layout files contain the .alt file extension.
To import a page layout:
1. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and select Manage Page Layout. The Page Layouts window opens.
2. Click Import Layout to navigate and add a custom layout to the list of available
page layouts.
3. Click Done.
To export a page layout:
1. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Page in the Add Structure
group and select Manage Page Layout. The Page Layouts window opens.
2. Select the layout you want to export and click Export Layout. The Save As win-
dow opens.
3. Navigate and save the layout to the desired location.
4. Click Done.

Working with content frames

You can incorporate content frames into your title design. Using content frames, you can
divide your title’s pages into multiple regions, decide which content will go in which
regions, and change the content in each region at different times based on various inter-
actions or automation. This way, one region of the screen can always contain buttons for
navigating through the title, another region on the screen can hold varying advert-
isements or instructions, while yet another area of the screen can be the main area
where title information and/or tests are presented.
Responsive titles cannot contain content frames. Content frames must be
removed from the title prior to designating the title to be responsive. For details
about designating the title to be responsive, see Designating a title as
responsive.
For example, a very common title design is to use the Contents frame style, which fea-
tures two frames:
l A narrow vertical left frame: Used for a title-wide or global navigation menu.
l A wide right-side frame: Contains the main body of the title. The content here is

- 180 -
 always changing in response to the selections made in the left frame.
Frames are useful for navigation, logos, banner ads, and more. The possibilities are lim-
itless and the program provides you with a wide variety of frame styles from which to
choose.
You can specify a default content frame style.
See also: Changing the default content frame style
View these topics for more information about working with frames:
l Using frames within your title
l Changing the name of a frame
l Changing the HTML page alignment of a frame
l Changing the background properties of a frame
l Changing the text properties of a frame
l Changing transition properties of a frame
l Adding an action to a frame
l Frames are not AICC- or SCORM-compatible and should not be used for
AICC, CourseMill, or SCORM published titles.
l Frames function in the same way as a chapter or a section. Any objects
added directly to the frame will appear on every page in that frame including
pages that are inside of a chapter or section.
l Frames can also refer to one another. For instance, if one frame contains
your title's navigation, the buttons or links can refer to pages within the main
frame of the title. When creating navigation components, you will be asked to
provide the referring frame.

Using content frames within your title

You can incorporate content frames into your title design. It is best to add frames to your
title before you have created any chapters, sections, or pages, and then add pages
according to where they fit within your frames.
To add content frames to your title:
1. Select the page to which you want to add frames.
2. On the Design ribbon, click Content Frames in the Frames group. The Content
Frames window opens.
3. Select one of the predefined frame styles from the Description of Frames list. Pre-
views of the style are displayed in the Preview box. Select from the following pre-
defined frame styles:
No frames Select this if you do not want to apply a frame style. This option is set

- 181 -
 as the default.
Contents Select this to divide the window into a narrow left frame and wide main
frame.
Top Ban- Select this to divide the window into three frames: a narrow top frame,
ner and a narrow left frame, and large main frame. The top frame can be useful
Contents for banner advertisements or logos.
Header Select this to divide the window into two frames: a narrow top frame
and large main frame. The top frame can be useful for navigation but-
tons or for banner advertisement.
Four Select this to divide the window into four frames: a narrow left frame
Pane Split for contents, a narrow top frame for banner advertisements, an upper
left corner frame for a logo, and a large main frame for content.
Footer Select this to divide the window into two frames: a narrow bottom
frame and large main frame. This bottom frame can be useful for ban-
ner advertisements or navigation buttons.
Horizontal Select this to horizontally split the window into two same-size frames
Split on the top and bottom.
Vertical Select this to vertically split the window into two same-size frames on
Split the left and right.
Banner Select this to divide the window into three frames: a narrow left frame
and Con- that runs from top to bottom, a large main frame split near the top, and
tents a narrow frame along the top right portion of the window.
Contents Select this to divide the window into a narrow right frame and wide
on Right main frame.
Side
4. Select the Use Thick Visible Frames check box to display thick borders around
each frame.
5. You can specify the size of the frames directly in pixels or as a percentage of the
total width and height of your pages. The Top Row Height and Left Column
Width fields are enabled based on the frame style you have selected.
If you want to specify the frame size in percentages, select the Specify Size in Per-
centages check box and specify the height percentage in the Top Row Height
field and the width percentage in the Left Column Width field.
If you want to specify the frame size in pixels, uncheck the Specify Size in Per-
centages check box and specify the height in pixels in the Top Row Height field
and the width in pixels in the Left Column Width field.
6. Click OK. Your frames will be visible as icons in the Title Explorer.
You can now add chapters, sections, pages, and objects into the frames.

- 182 -
Changing the name of a content frame
To change the name of your frame:
1. Double-click the frame graphic of the frame you want to rename in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the frame and select Properties. The
Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Name field, specify the name of the frame as you want it to appear in the
Title Explorer. Alternatively, click the current name in the Title Explorer so that it is
highlighted. Then click again and retype the new name.
The name of the frame is changed.

Changing the HTML page alignment of a content

frame
The HTML page alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's
browser window for any Web-based, published content.
The HTML page alignment of a frame is inherited from the title properties by default.
Changes applied to the HTML page alignment within a frame's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the frame.
To change the HTML page alignment of a content frame:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the content frame in the Title Explorer.
Alternatively, you can right-click the frame and select Properties. The Properties
ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Alignment from the HTML Page Alignment group. Select either Left Jus-
tified or Centered.
The HTML page alignment is changed.

Changing background properties of a content

frame
The default background color, the default background image, and the default back-
ground sound are automatically inherited. Changes applied to the background color,
image, or sound within a content frame's properties will only be applied to the pages con-
tained within the content frame.
See also: Understanding inheritance
You can change the default background color, the default background image, and the
default background sound used on the pages within the content frame.
Background images are tiled (repeated) by default. Background images that are the
exact same size as the page (height and width) will not be tiled. If the background image
size is different from the page size - either smaller or larger - it will be repeated both

- 183 -
horizontally and vertically to cover the entire visible background area within the browser
window. If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible,
unless the image is transparent.
A background sound will play continuously throughout the frame. As long as the frame is
displayed, the sound will continue playing as users navigate throughout the title, and will
repeat.
To specify your changes you either use the Background Wizard or manually set the back-
ground's color, image, and sound properties.
To use the Background Wizard:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the frame in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the content frame and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. Launch the Background Wizard by clicking Background Wizard from the Title
Background group on the Design ribbon. The Background Wizard opens.
3. Follow the prompts and use the controls to configure your background properties.
4. Click Finish when you are done making changes.
To manually configure background properties,
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the frame in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the frame and select Properties. The Properties ribbon
is displayed.
2. In the Background group on the Design ribbon, click the appropriate background
setting you want to change. Select either Color, Image, or Sound.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
4. To change the image and sound settings, you can select a previously imported file,
select a local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting
entirely. Previously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously impor-
ted file. To select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media
Library, select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Working with the Media Library

- 184 -
Changing text properties of a content frame
The default text properties are automatically inherited. This includes the text style, text
color, font, font color, font size, hypertext link color, and the text highlighting. Changes
applied to the text properties within a frame's properties will only be applied to the pages
contained within the frame.
See also: Understanding inheritance
To change the text style:
1. Double-click the frame graphic of the frame in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the frame and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Frame Text Style
group.
3. Click the drop-down list on Text Style in the Frame Text Styles group.
4. The current text styles are listed. Use the list to select a default text style to be used
within your title. Text blocks created within your title will be automatically formatted
to the selected style. To create a new text style, select Manage Styles and use the
controls in the Text Styles window to configure a new style.
To change the default text color:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the content frame in the Title Explorer.
Alternatively, you can right-click the content frame and select Properties. The
Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. To change the color setting, click the Text drop-down list. The Color menu is dis-
played. You can select a predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an
existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples dis-
played. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color
window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click Select and
use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color currently
displayed on your desktop.
To change the default font:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the frame in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the content frame and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. Click the Font list. The list of available fonts is displayed. Select a new font from
the list.
To change the default font size:

- 185 -
 1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the content frame in the Title Explorer.
Alternatively, you can right-click the content frame and select Properties. The
Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. Click the Font Size list. Select a new font size from the list or type the size in the
Font size field.
To change the default hyperlink color:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the content frame in the Title Explorer.
Alternatively, you can right-click the content frame and select Properties. The
Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the default font styles (bold, italics, and underline):
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the frame in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the content frame and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, disable the Inherit check box in the Text Style group.
3. To bold text by default, click the Bold button. To italicize text by default, click the
Italic button. To underline text by default, click the Underline button.
See also: Managing text styles
Matching colors used within your title

Changing transition properties of a content frame

You can specify how your pages will load within the title. Transitions will produce a spe-
cial effect as users navigate from one page to another, and can be applied to a content
frame.
The transition type is automatically inherited. Changes applied to the transition type
within a content frame's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the
content frame.
See also: Understanding inheritance

- 186 -
You can select from over 20 different transitions. You can also specify to inherit the trans-
ition setting, select random transitions, and remove transitions. There is a Speed slider
to determine the speed at which the transition takes place.
To set transitions:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the frame in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the frame and select Properties. The Properties ribbon
is displayed.
2. Click Page from the Transition group. The Transitions window opens.
3. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting. Select Inherit to inherit the transition or select
Random Transition to select random transitions. Select None to remove the trans-
ition. Use the Speed slider to specify the appropriate speed.
4. Click OK.

Adding an action to a content frame

You can associate an action to be applied on the content frame level. For example, you
can display message, open an attachment, launch a program, send an email and more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions on the frame level as needed.
To add an action:
1. Double-click the content frame graphic of the content frame in the Title Explorer.
Alternatively, you can right-click the frame and select Properties. The Properties
ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Add group on the Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
3. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the title level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added.

Switching between modes

The program provides five modes in which to view your title. These modes will enable
you to preview and test your titles before publishing them for distribution.
Edit mode is the working mode in which you create your title and edit
the changes. When you create a new title, it will default to Edit mode.
Edit Mode To view your title in Edit mode, select Edit from the Modes group on
(F12) the View ribbon, click the Edit bottom-bar graphic , or press F12 on

- 187 -
 your keyboard. While in Edit mode, use your keyboard's Page Up and
Page Down keys to navigate between pages in your title.
In Run mode, you can view your title with all buttons, links, and actions
active. For responsive titles, use the device views on the View tab in
Run Mode Run mode to verify how your content will display in each view. In Run
(F10) mode, when you click on the Next button within your title, it will navigate
to the next page, enabling you to run the content of your title, and test its
functionality while having your Title Explorer in view. Run Mode is
Web-based. You can run JavaScript and Web windows directly from
Run mode, for instance. Additionally, you can test CSS and HTML
extensions and preview HTML-based text that renders more closely to
your browser. To view your title in Run mode, select Run from the
Modes group on the View ribbon, click the Run bottom-bar graphic ,
or press F10 on your keyboard. Be sure to switch back to Edit mode
when you want to continue working on the title. For details about cre-
ating a responsive title, including details about the built-in features for
responsive titles, see Working with responsive design.
Preview mode shows your title in a centered background outside of the
interface. All buttons, links, and actions are active. This functions
Preview Mode identically the same as when in Run mode, however, you are no longer
(F11) viewing your title within the interface. To view your title in Preview
mode, select Preview from the Modes group on the View ribbon, click
the Preview bottom-bar graphic , or press F11 on your keyboard. To
exit Preview mode, press Esc on your keyboard.
Debug mode is similar to Run mode. In Debug mode, all buttons, links,
and actions are active, enabling you to run the content of your title, and
Debug Mode test its functionality while having your Title Explorer in view. In addition,
a debug window logs all actions executed and all variable manip-
ulations as you preview the functionality of your title. To view your title
in Debug mode, select Debug from the Modes group on the View rib-
bon. When you close the debug window, you will be returned to Edit
mode.
Additionally, you can change variable values and see the effects on
your title while in Debug mode. You can also control the type of inform-
ation you would like displayed within the debug window, such as the ori-
ginal and new variable values for variables. For details, see Working
with the Debug window.
Preview in Browser mode shows the title in a chosen browser. All
actions on the page are active, but because only a single page is pub-
Preview in lished, navigation to other pages will not function. To view a page
Browser (F9) within your default browser, select the Preview in Browser graphic

- 188 -
 from the Modes group on the View ribbon, click the Preview in Browser
toolbar graphic , or press F9 on your keyboard. To preview the page
in another available browser, click the drop-down list under the Pre-
view in Browser graphic from the Modes group on the View ribbon
and select an available browser.

Working with the Debug window

Using the Debug window, you can save, print, and clear your debug log as well as
manipulate variable values when debugging your title.
Use the Debug window to complete these tasks:
l Setting debug options
l Saving your debug log
l Printing your debug log
l Clearing your debug log
l Changing variable values in debug mode

Setting debug options

You can specify the type of information you would like displayed within the Debug win-
dow, such as the original and new variable values for variables. These options are set
when you debug your title.
If necessary, you can quickly review and change your current variable definitions. For
details see Changing variable values in Debug mode.
To set your debug options:
1. Run your title in debug mode by clicking Debug from the Modes group on the
View ribbon. The Debug window opens.
2. Select the information you would like displayed within the Debug Window. Select
any of the following:
Include all Vari- With this selected, the Debug Window will display the original
able Reads variable values for variables that are associated with objects
on the page. Variable values for questions, form objects,
change contents actions, submit actions and variable modi-
fication actions are displayed within the Debug Window.
See also: Working With Variables
Include all Vari- With this selected, the Debug Window will display new vari-
able Writes able values as they are changed on the page. That is, if the
variable is modified through a question, form object, variable
modification action or other means, the new variable value will
be displayed within the Debug Window.

- 189 -
 See also: Working With Variables
Include all With this selected, the Debug Window will display an "Action
Actions fired!" message every time an action is triggered, along with
Triggered details of what triggered the action.
Include all HTTP This option is only available if you are publishing with Debug
Communications mode enabled. With this selected, any POST or GET methods
used to communicate within the title will be posted to the
debug window when they are executed.
Include all LMS This option is only available if you are publishing with Debug
Communications mode enabled. With this selected, if you load your published
title into a learning management system, the Debug Window
will log all communications with the learning management sys-
tem. This includes the transfer of test results as well as other
communications.
3. Click OK to close the Debug Logging Options window.

Saving your debug log

When testing the functionality of your title, it can be advantageous to save your debug
log, especially if you run into problems. When you save your debug log, all of the mes-
sages contained within the Debug Window are exported to a .log textual file that you can
review.
To save your debug log:
1. Run your title in debug mode by clicking Debug from the Modes group on the
View ribbon.
2. From the Debug window, click the Save button. The Save As window opens.
3. Navigate to the location you want to save your log file and click Save.
The log is saved.

Printing your debug log

You can print the debug log from the Debug Window.
To print your debug log:
1. Run your title in debug mode by clicking Debug from the Modes group on the
View ribbon.
2. From the Debug window, click the Print button.
The log is printed.

Clearing your debug log

While viewing your title in debug mode, you can clear all of the current messages dis-
played within the window.

- 190 -
To clear your debug log:
1. Run your title in debug mode by clicking Debug from the Modes group on the
View ribbon.
2. From the Debug window, click the Clear button. This will clear all of the messages
currently contained in your debug log, and you can begin debugging with an empty
log.

Changing variable values in debug mode

While viewing your title in debug mode, you can change variable values. This allows for
more thorough debugging by manipulating variables as you step through your title.
To change variables in debug mode:
1. Run your title in debug mode by clicking Debug from the Modes group on the
View ribbon or clicking the Debug bottombar graphic .
2. From the Debug window, click the Variables button.
The Watch Variables window opens, displaying the current values for reserved
and user-defined variables. Reserved variables that appear grayed out cannot be
changed.
3. Modify a variable's value by changing the value in the field next to the variable
name and clicking the Update button. Click Refresh to undo your changes.
The variable's value is updated within the title.
4. Close the Variables window to continue viewing your title in Debug mode.
See also: Working with variables

How the program organizes your content

The program organizes the files you use to create your title. The My Titles directory is
automatically created within your My Documents folder when you install the program.
Whenever you create a new title, the program automatically creates a folder specifically
for that title in the My Titles directory. Within your title folder, the program organizes all
your media and image files.
For instance, if your title is called Orientation, a folder called Orientation will be present
in the My Titles directory. Within the Orientation folder, you will find copies of every
image or media file you have used within the title. When you add objects to a title, the
program will copy the imported file into the title directory. Because the program copies all
of its files, you will always have access to your original file, in its original location - as
well as the one used in your title.
Your Orientation title folder, then, may contain a folder named images, another named
media, and so on, as well as the title file, specified by an .awt extension. When you pub-
lish to HTML or for offline use, corresponding folders containing the published content
will also appear in the Orientation folder.

- 191 -
Importing and exporting content
The Publisher enables you to work with data from text files and other programs, includ-
ing importing content from an existing title.
Non-supported object types - such as instances of RealMedia - encountered dur-
ing the import process are removed and replaced with a placeholder image. For
the list of supported media, see Supported media types.
View these topics for more information about importing and exporting content:
l Importing content from an existing title
l Importing and exporting to a comma-separated value (CSV) question file
l Importing and exporting a Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) file
l Importing and exporting to Lectora Online
l Importing and exporting an extensible mark-up language (XML) file
l Importing and exporting a zip file
l Importing a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation
l Exporting to Microsoft Word

Importing content from an existing title

Importing from other titles saves time by eliminating the unnecessary re-development of
content. This is helpful in many instances, such as when you are creating a title that
uses a similar chapter from another title. Simply import the entire chapter into your new
title. You can import entire titles, chapters, sections, and pages, as well as individual
objects.
To import content from an existing title, follow these steps:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to import your content.
2. From the Tools ribbon, select From Other Title in the Import group. The Import
from a Title window opens.
3. Use the Import from a Title window to navigate and select the appropriate .awt title
file from which you want to import content. Click Open. Another Import from a Title
window opens.
4. This Import from a Title window displays expandable Title Explorer components of
the title you selected in step 3. Use the plus [+] and minus [-] signs to expand and
collapse the objects within the title.
5. Select the objects you want to import into the current working title. You can select
the entire title, or an individual component (such as a chapter, section, page, or
test) as well as individual objects. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple objects.

- 192 -
 6. Click Import. The content will appear within your current title. Use the Title
Explorer to reorganize the imported content within your title.
See also: Using the Title Explorer

Importing and exporting a CSV question file

Comma-separated value (CSV) files are delimited text files containing questions that
have been exported from spreadsheets like Microsoft Excel®, Microsoft Access® and
Google Sheets®.
You can import and export the following questions types within CSV files:
l True or false
l Multiple choice
l Multiple response
l Fill in the blank
l Number entry
l Matching
l Rank/sequence
l Short answer
l Essay
The format is similar for each question type:

For the question text, choices and feedback, keep these rules in mind:
l Each question must contain text representing the NAME, TYPE, and
QUESTION TEXT.
l You may use line breaks within fields, such as within a question’s text. (Alt+Enter
using Microsoft Excel. Ctrl+Enter using Google Sheets. Other programs may vary.)
l Separate multiple options or multiple correct choices with a space.
l Repeat the pair of CHOICE TEXT and CHOICE INFO for each answer choice.
l Each question must start on a new line.
Complete each field in the records as follows:
Field (* = required) Description
NAME* Name to be used for the question. This will also be used for
the page name and the variable name.
TYPE* Abbreviation representing the question type as either:
TF True or false

- 193 -
 MC Multiple choice
MR Multiple response
FI Fill in the blank
NE Number entry
MT Matching
RS Rank/sequence
SA Short answer
ES Essay
QUESTION TEXT* Text of the question.
QUESTION OPTIONS Options for questions depending on the question type. Leave
empty to use the default options for the question:
GE Grade each choice. The default is no. Applies to mul-
tiple response, matching, and rank/sequence questions.
PT: Points, where # represents the point value of the ques-
#. tion. The default is 1. Applies to all question types,
except for short answer and essay.
AT The number of attempts allowed for the question. The
:# default is unlimited. If feedback is enabled for the ques-
tion, default attempts feedback will be issued.
FEEDBACK OPTIONS Options for feedback. Leave empty for no feedback:
Y Enable correct/incorrect feedback. Applies to all ques-
tions types.
B Individual feedback by choice. Applies to multiple
choice questions.
P Issue feedback when the question is processed; oth-
erwise, issue immediate feedback. Applies to all ques-
tions types.
You can use B P to indicate a multiple choice question
will have individual feedback by choice, issued when
the question is processed (not immediately).
CORRECT FEEDBACK Custom correct feedback (if feedback is set in
FEEDBACK OPTIONS). If this field is empty, the default cor-
rect feedback will be used (see Specifying publish strings
preferences).
INCORRECT FEEDBACK Custom incorrect feedback (if feedback is set in
FEEDBACK OPTIONS. If this field is empty, the default incor-
rect feedback will be used (see Specifying publish strings
preferences).

- 194 -
CHOICE OPTIONS Options for choices depending on the question type:
CC Correct choice, where # represents the number of the
:#* correct choice. If no choice is entered, the default is
CC:1. For multiple response questions, # should con-
tain the multiple correct choices (for example CC:1
CC:3 CC:4). Applies to true or false, multiple choice,
and multiple response question types.
ALL The correct answer requires all of the choices/rules.
Applies to fill in the blank and number entry questions.
When not used, the default (ANY) will apply for the ques-
tion.
ML Create a multi-line entry field for the question. Applies
to fill in the blank questions.
CS Choices are case sensitive. Applies to fill in the blank
questions.
RC Choices are randomized. Applies to multiple choice,
multiple response, and rank/sequence questions.
TL Text limit where # represents the maximum length of the
:# answer. The default is 4 (TL:4) for number entry ques-
tions, 50 (TL:50) for fill in the blank questions, 40
(TL:40) for short answer questions, and 1024
(TL:1024) for essay questions.
DL Show choices in a drop-list. Applies to multiple choice
and rank/sequence questions.
LB Show choices in a list box. Applies to multiple response
questions.
CHOICE TEXT* The text for each answer choice:
l True or false questions will only use the first two
choices entered. If CHOICE TEXT is left blank, the
default localized strings for True and False are used
(see Specifying publish strings preferences).
l For number entry questions, the CHOICE TEXT field
contains a single value to evaluate against the fol-
lowing relationships:
- Equal
- Not Equal
- Less Than
- Less Than or Equal
- Greater Than

- 195 -
 - Greater Than or Equal
l For number entry questions, the CHOICE TEXT field
contains the two values to evaluate against the rela-
tionships of BETWEEN INCLUDING or
BETWEEN EXCLUDING.
l For matching questions, the CHOICE TEXT field con-
tains the left-column text to match the CHOICE INFO
text (right-column).
l For matching questions, a choice that contains
CHOICE TEXT only will be treated as a left-column dis-
tractor.
CHOICE INFO Extra data used based on the question type:
l For multiple choice questions, the CHOICE INFOfield
contains the text for any customized feedback by
choice. (Feedback option B must be entered.)
l For number entry questions, the CHOICE INFO field
contains one of the following relationship indicators
used to evaluate the CHOICE TEXT value(s):
EQ Equal (default if left blank)
NE Not Equal
LT Less Than
LE Less Than or Equal
GT Greater Than
GE Greater Than or Equal
BI Between Including
BE Between Excluding
For number entry and fill in the blank questions,
you can evaluate combinations of choices. Use
the ALL choice option to indicate the correct
answer requires all of the choices/rules. (For
example: ALL,1,GE,3,LT would mean: all of
the following; greater than or equal to 1 and less
than 3.) When not used, the default (ANY) will
apply for the question.
l For matching questions, the CHOICE INFO field con-
tains the right-column text to match the CHOICE TEXT
(left-column).
l For matching questions, a choice that contains

- 196 -
 CHOICE INFO only will be treated as a right-column
distractor.
For matching questions, at least one choice with
both the CHOICE TEXT and CHOICE INFO is
required.
The pair of CHOICE TEXT and CHOICE INFO is repeated for each answer choice.
To view and download a sample CSV import file, visit the discussion Working with CSV
Question Files in Lectora in our Trivantis Community.
Although a spreadsheet application is recommended, CSV files can also be cre-
ated in text format using a program such as Notepad or Notepad ++. Where
columns are indicated in the sample above, instead insert a comma between each
field. If you are using a text-file version of CSV, text that contains a comma must be
enclosed within quotes. “For example, this sentence contains a comma.”
For text in languages that require special characters, like tildes and accent marks,
be sure the application supports UTF-8.
To import a CSV file:
1. In the Title Explorer, highlight the page after which you want to insert the questions
from the CSV file.
2. From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Import CSV from the CSV Question File
group. The Import CSV Question File window opens.
3. Use the File to Import field to specify the file to import or click the Browse button to
navigate and select the CSV file.
4. Enable the Create as Test check box to create a test and import the question file
within the test.
5. To offset the question on the page, enable the Offset question on page check
box. This enables the X offset and Y offset fields. The X offset is the pixel dis-
tance from the left edge of the page. The Y offset is the pixel distance from the top
edge of the page.
6. In the Font and Color box, use the controls to select the appropriate text style,
font, font size, highlighting, and text color for the questions being imported. For
details, see Working with text.
7. Click OK.
The questions are imported, one per page.
You can also export individual questions from within the title or all of the questions within
a test, test section, or survey.
The total number of questions successfully exported will be reported, along with any
errors or questions unable to be exported.

- 197 -
To export individual questions:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the question. The Properties
tab opens. To select multiple questions, click the first question, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other questions.
2. On the Properties tab, click the graphic below the Variable field in the first
group. The Export to CSV window opens.
3. Navigate to the appropriate location.
4. Name the CSV file and click Save.
The question export file is saved.
Alternatively, in the Title Explorer, highlight the test, test section, or survey to export all of
the questions contained within to a CSV file. Double-click on the object to view the Prop-
erties ribbon.
To export all the questions within a test, test section, or survey:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test, test section, or survey. The
Properties tab opens. To select multiple tests, test sections, or surveys, click the
first test, test section, or survey, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click
the other tests, test sections, or surveys.
2. On the Properties tab, click the Export to CSV graphic in the Test group. The
Export to CSV window opens.
3. Navigate to the appropriate location.
4. Name the CSV file and click Save.
The question export file is saved.
Open the CSV file using your spreadsheet application (recommended) or a text editor.
Additional resources: Private: Bulk Import Questions Using CSV Files

Importing and exporting a QTI file

You can import questions formatted in a Question and Test Interoperability (QTI) file and
export questions to QTI-formatted files. QTI is a test file standard developed by the IMS
Global Learning Consortium.
QTI files are named with an .xml file extension.
To import a QTI file:
1. In the Title Explorer, highlight the page onto which you want to add the contents
from the QTI file.
2. From the File ribbon, select Import. In the Import Options box, select QTI. The
Import from QTI window opens.
3. Navigate and specify the file to import and click Open.

- 198 -
The QTI file is imported.
To export questions to a QTI file:
1. In the Title Explorer, select one of the following:
l A question
l A page containing one or more questions
l A test containing one or more questions
2. From the File ribbon, select Export In the Export Options box, select QTI. The
Export to QTI window opens.
3. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save.
The QTI file is created.

Importing and exporting to Lectora Online

You can import and export a title to use in Lectora Online. For more information about
Lectora Online, visit http://trivantis.com/products/lectora-online-authoring/.
To import a Lectora Online Package file:
1. Save and close the current title on which you are working.
2. From the File ribbon, select Import. In the Import Options box, select Lectora
Online Package.
3. In the Package File to Import field, click the folder icon to navigate and specify the
file to import. In the Directory for Imported Title field, click the folder icon to
change the directory to contain the imported files. Click OK.
The package file is uncompressed and the new title is displayed.
To export a title as a Lectora Online Package file:
1. From the File ribbon, select Export. In the Export Options box, select Lectora
Online Package.
2. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save.
Your current title is saved as a Lectora Online Package.

Importing and exporting a XML file

Extensible Mark-up Language (XML) is a popular import and export file type with today’s
content management software. You can export your title to XML and further import any
titles you have previously exported to XML.
The Lectora XML Specification (downloads as a .doc file) describes the basic structure
of a title represented in XML format.
To import a XML file:

- 199 -
 1. Save and close the current title on which you are working.
2. From the File ribbon, select Import. In the Import Options box, select XML. The
Import from XML window opens.
3. Navigate and specify the file to import and click Open.
To export a XML file:
1. From the File ribbon, select Export. In the Export Options box, select XML. The
Export to XML window opens.
2. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. Your current title is saved in
XML format.

Importing and exporting a zip file

You can share zip-compressed titles from within the application.
To import a zip file:
1. Save and close the current title on which you are working.
2. From the File ribbon, select Import. In the Import Options box, select ZIP. The
Import from ZIP window opens.
3. Navigate and specify the file to import and click Open.
To export a zip file:
1. From the File ribbon, select Export. In the Export Options box, select ZIP. The
Export to ZIP window opens.
2. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. Your current title and its con-
tents are compressed and saved in a ZIP file.
See also: How the program organizes your content

Importing PowerPoint presentations

You can import PowerPoint presentations two ways: importing the entire Microsoft
PowerPoint presentation to create a new title or selecting to import individual pages from
the presentation as new pages in the Publisher.
l Only presentations saved using PowerPoint 2010 or newer are supported.
l Unsupported fonts will be replaced by Lectora's default font (Arial).
l PowerPoint’s emphasis animations and motion paths are not supported and
will not be imported.
The objects in the PowerPoint presentation are imported so that you can continue edit-
ing them in the Publisher.
View these topics for more information:

- 200 -
 l Importing an entire PowerPoint presentation
l Importing pages from a PowerPoint presentation

Importing an entire PowerPoint presentation

You can import an entire PowerPoint presentation into your title.
You can also import individual pages from PowerPoint presentations. For details,
see Importing pages from a PowerPoint presentation.
For more information about importing PowerPoint presentations, visit Importing
Microsoft PowerPoint Content Into Lectora.
To import a PowerPoint presentation:
1. If the Getting Started window is open, click Import PowerPoint. Otherwise, on the
File ribbon, click Import and click PowerPoint.
2. Use the PowerPoint Presentation File to Import from field to navigate and select
the PowerPoint file. Click OK. The Name and Location window opens.
3. Specify the new title name in the Title Name field. Use the Choose Folder button
to navigate and select the location to which you want to save the new title. Click
Next. The PowerPoint Import Options window opens.
4. In the Title Size box, use the drop-down list to select the default page size for the
title to be created from the PowerPoint slides. Select 1009 x 756 (Size for Lect-
ora) for optimal sizing in the Publisher. To specify a custom size, select Specify
Custom Size from the list and enter the page width in the Custom Screen Width
field.
5. Use the Transitions box to specify how you want transitions used within the
presentation to be imported into the title. Choose from the following:
No Trans- Select this to disregard slide transitions included in the Power-
itions Point presentation.
Import Only Select this to only import slide transitions that are supported by the
Supported program.
Transitions
Remap To Select this to import all slide transitions. If the PowerPoint present-
Supported ation contains slide transitions that are not supported by the pro-
Transitions gram, alternate transitions will be applied.
6. In the Images box, use the Format pull-down list to select the format to which you
want images within the presentation converted. Select from PNG, GIF, or JPG
formats.
7. Click Finish.
The converted title is opened.

- 201 -
Importing pages from a PowerPoint presentation
You can import individual pages from a PowerPoint presentation into your title. New
pages are created in your title for each of the presentation pages you import.
You can also import entire PowerPoint presentations. For details, see Importing an
entire PowerPoint presentation.
For more information about importing PowerPoint presentations, visit Importing
Microsoft PowerPoint Content Into Lectora.
To import individual pages of a PowerPoint presentation:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to import the pages from
the PowerPoint presentation.
2. From the Tools ribbon, select From PowerPoint in the Import group. The Import
Slides from PowerPoint window opens.
3. Use the Import Slides from PowerPoint window to navigate and select the appro-
priate PowerPoint file. Click Open. The PowerPoint Slide Selection window
opens.
4. Click the pages you want to import. Hold down Ctrl while clicking to select multiple
slides.
5. Click Next.
6. In the Title Size box, use the drop-down list to select the default page size for the
pages to be created from the PowerPoint slides. Select 1009 x 756 (Size for Lect-
ora) for optimal sizing in the Publisher. To specify a custom size, select Specify
Custom Size from the list and enter the page width in the Custom Screen Width
field.
7. Use the Transitions box to specify how you want the transitions used within the
selected pages of the presentation to be imported into the title. Choose from the fol-
lowing:
No Trans- Select this to disregard slide transitions included in the Power-
itions Point presentation.
Import Only Select this to only import slide transitions that are supported by the
Supported program.
Transitions
Remap To Select this to import all slide transitions. If the PowerPoint present-
Supported ation contains slide transitions that are not supported by the pro-
Transitions gram, alternate transitions will be applied.
8. In the Images box, use the Format pull-down list to select the format to which you
want images within the presentation converted. Select from PNG, GIF, or JPG

- 202 -
 formats.
9. Click Finish.
The pages you selected are displayed in your current title. Use the Title Explorer to reor-
ganize the imported content within your title.

Exporting to Word
You can export the text from the text blocks within your title to a Word document (.doc)
file.
To export to a doc file:
1. From the File ribbon, select Export. In the Export Options box, select Word. The
export window opens.
2. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save.
The text is saved.

Specifying grids and guides preferences

You can specify preferences for grid and guide features. The grid is an alignment and
spacing framework that is displayed as a page background. Guides are horizontal and
vertical lines which originate from the ruler and can be placed anywhere on a page for
object alignment.Grids and guides are useful for precisely aligning objects such as
images, test questions or form objects. The Snap to Grid feature enables you to move
objects to the nearest grid increment. The Snap to Guide feature enables you to move
objects to the nearest guide increment.
To specify grid and guide preferences:
1. On the View ribbon, click Options from the Grids and Guides group. The

Grid and Guides Options window opens.

2. For grid preferences, use the Grid Color drop-down list to select the color to use
for grids.Use the Grid Spacing field to specify the grid spacing in pixels. The
default is 20.
3. Click OK.
Working with rulers
Click Show Rulers in the Grid and Guides group on the View ribbon to show rulers
along the top and left-side of the work area. Click Clear Guides to clear the guides.
The ruler provides measurements in pixels.
Working with the grid
To show the grid in the background of the work area, click Show Grid in the Grid and
Guides group on the View ribbon. Select Snap to Grid to enable the Snap to Grid fea-

- 203 -
ture. When Snap to Grid is enabled, objects you move will be pulled toward the closest
grid point. This is useful for accurate placement of objects.
Working with guides
To show guides in the work area, click Show Guides in the Grid and Guides group.
Click Snap to Guides to enable the Snap to Guides feature. When Snap to Guides is
enabled, objects you move will be pulled toward the closest guide lines. This is useful
for accurate placement of objects.
To add a horizontal guide, click the drop-down list in Add Guide and select Add hori-
zontal guide. To add a vertical guide, click the list and select Add vertical guide. Altern-
atively, you can create new guides by clicking and dragging from the rulers. For example
to create a new vertical guide, place your cursor over the left ruler, click and hold so that
your cursor changes to the double-arrows, and drag to the right to the appropriate loc-
ation for the guide.
To move a guide, click the guide in the ruler area to display its drag handle ( and ).
Click and drag the appropriate handle to move the guide.
To remove a guide, move it back into the appropriate ruler. To clear all guides, click
Clear Guides in the Grid and Guides group.

Running an error check

When you publish your title, the program immediately runs your title through an error
check process. An error check identifies any logical errors within your title. The errors
that are displayed are dependent upon the type of title and publishing format chosen.
You can configure the types of warning messages that are displayed during the pub-
lishing process. For example, you can select to display warnings for the variables and
resources (images, audio, video, and so on) that are not used within the title. This can
occur with resources that were added to the title but then later deleted. The program will
ask during the error-check process if those unused resources and variables should be
removed. This happens during an error check; not the publish process. For details about
configuring the types of warning messages, see Specifying publish messages pref-
erences.
See also: Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS
Publishing a title
Follow these steps to perform an error check on your title:
1. Save your title.
2. From the Tools ribbon, select Error Check from the Review group. the program
rapidly reviews your title for errors and displays the results in the Check Title for
Errors window.
3. Review the errors listed. Common errors include pages with duplicate names,

- 204 -
 pages without objects, and buttons leading to non-existent pages. Double-click
items that are warnings (displayed in blue) or errors (displayed in red) to jump to
the page containing the object that is causing the problem. Error messages (dis-
played in red) must be resolved before the program can successfully publish your
title. You can leave the results window open to resolve additional errors.
4. Make the necessary changes to your title to resolve the errors and click Done. If
you are running the error check during the publishing process, you can click the
Publish button to proceed with publishing your title.
Re-run the error check as necessary until you have eliminated all errors. Some warning
messages (displayed in blue) may never be resolved. These messages will not impede
the publishing process.
See also: Specifying publish messages preferences

Managing resources
The Resource Manager gives you access to all of the resources used in your title, and
all of the information for those resources. Resources in the Publisher are the actual files
that are used for objects such as images, audio and video. The name of the file that the
resource represents can be changed, the resource can be edited, and the Resource Man-
ager window lists all instances of the resource in the title.
To access the Resource Manager, click the Resources graphic on the Tools rib-

bon.
Within the Resource Manager window, you can complete the following:
l Search for a resource
l View a resource's usage
l Change the name of a resource file
l Create a unique resource
l Edit a resource
l Delete a resource
l Converting audio and video

Searching for a resource

You can use the Resource Manager to search for a resource you have added to your
title. Resource information, the locations of use, and a preview of the located resource
are displayed on the right-side of the Resource Manager window.
To search for a resource:

- 205 -
 1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Search for your resource in the following ways:
l Navigate the categories by expanding and collapsing the plus [+] and minus
[-] signs before the resource category names that contain resources.
l Click the Search tab, enter the search terms into the field and click the
Search button. The resulting list is populated with the resources whose file
names contain the search terms provided.
3. Click Close.

Viewing a resource's usage

The Resource Manager will display the details of where your resources are being used
within the title.
To view a resource's usage:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Locate the resource. For details, see Searching for a resource.
3. Select the resource within the list. The resource's usage details are displayed
within the Resource Used box.
The location and object name (name of the object as it appears in the Title
Explorer) of the resource is displayed. For example:
l Chapter 1 > Page 1 > My Image
l Chapter 2 > Section 3 > Page 4 > My Button
Click on any of the locations within the Resource Used box to place focus on the
corresponding object within your title.
4. Click Close.

Changing the name of a resource file

The Resource Manager can be used to change the name of a resource file. This will not
affect the name of the object within your title, but rather will change the file name of the
resource file used for the object.
To change the name of a resource file:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Locate the resource. For details, see Searching for a resource.

- 206 -
 3. Type the new name of the resource file in the Name field and click the Rename
button.
4. Click Close.

Creating a unique resource

If a resource is being used multiple times within your title, you can choose to create a
unique resource file from one of the instances of the resource. For example, suppose
you have an image that is used on multiple pages. If you edit that image, all instances of
the image will be changed within your title. If you only want that image to change on one
of the pages, you will need to create a unique resource for that image, so you can edit it
without affecting the other instances of the image.
To create a unique resource:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Locate the resource. For details, see Searching for a resource.
3. The resource's usage details are displayed within the Resource Used box. Select
the instance of the resource you want to make unique. The option to create a
unique resource is only available if the resource is being used in multiple loc-
ations.
4. Click the Create Unique Resource button. The additional resource is add to the
list of resources on the left, and the location of the resource no longer appears
within the Resource Used box.
5. Click Close.

Editing a resource
Using the Resource Manager, you can directly edit the resources used within your title.
This is not the same as editing your object's properties, but will rather enable you to edit
the image, video or audio file that is used within your title. You can edit the following
types of objects:
l Animations
l Audio

l Buttons (You can edit the images associated with a button.)

l Documents

l Images

l Shapes, Lines and Arrows

l Video

To edit a resource:

- 207 -
 1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Locate the resource. For details, see Searching for a resource.
3. Click the Edit button. The file will be launched using the appropriate editing tool.
See also: Setting editor preferences
4. Make the necessary changes to your resource file, save the file, and close the edit-
ing tool was used to edit it. All instances of the object are updated within your title.
5. Click Close.

Deleting a resource
You can delete unused resources within your title.
To delete a resource:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Click the Unused tab to navigate the categories and select the unused resource
you want to delete.
3. Click Remove.
4. Click Close.
The unused resource is deleted.

Converting audio and video

You can convert your audio objects to MP3 format and video objects to MP4 format. This
allows you to alter the file size based on the compression setting you select when con-
verting the object.
When you convert an audio or video object, all instances of the resource are changed
throughout the title.
To convert an audio or video object in the title:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Resources graphic in the Manage group. The

Resource Manager window opens.

2. Select the object and click the Convert to MP3/MP4 button. The Convert to MP3
window opens for audio objects or the Convert to MP4 window opens for video
objects.
The button is only available for relevant file types.

3. Use the Compression Level slider to select a compression level. Higher

- 208 -
 compression levels will result in smaller files, but the quality of the media will deteri-
orate as compression increases.
4. Click Convert. When the conversion completes, the compression results are dis-
played and you are asked whether to use the new file.
5. Click Yes. Otherwise, click No to restore the file to its original type.
The object is converted.
See also: Supported media types

Working with notes

Notes can be added throughout a title to serve as reminders or provide instructions to
authors with which you are collaborating on a shared title. Notes are only displayed in
Edit mode, and do not appear within the published title. You can generate a notes report
and configure the appearance of your notes by specifying the note's text style.
View these topics for more information about working with notes:
l Adding a note
l Creating a note with a custom notes style
l Creating a notes report

Adding a note
You can add notes throughout a title. You can select a predefined notes style or create a
note using a custom notes style. The note will display your name and the date and time
in which you wrote the note.
When you place notes within your title, the Title Explorer reflects the location of the
notes. Each page containing a note will appear in bold and italicized in the Title
Explorer. If the page is contained in a chapter or section, subsequently the chapter and
section names will also appear in bold in the Title Explorer.
In addition to the text contained within the note, notes display the author name of the
user that created the note, and the date and time it was written. Double-click any note
icon to view its contents.
To add a note:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a note.
2. To create a note using the default or previously selected notes style, click the

Add Note graphic in the Review group on the Tools ribbon or right-click the loc-
ation within the Title Explorer and select Add a note. To select a predefined notes
style,click the arrow under the Add Note graphic and select one of the six pre-

defined styles in the drop-down list. For details about creating a note using a

- 209 -
 custom notes style, see Creating a note using a custom notes style.
3. In the notepad, type the text of the note and close the note by clicking the close but-
ton (X) in the upper-right corner. Expand the window if more room is needed. The
note icon appears on the content page.

Creating a note with a custom notes style

The program comes with six predefined notes, which you can select when adding a
note. However, you can create a note with a custom notes style.
To create a note with a custom notes style:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a note.
2. Click the arrow under the Add Note graphic in the Review group and select

Note Text Style. The Note Text Style window opens.

3. Use the controls in the window to configure the text style and text highlighting of
your note. A preview is displayed.
4. In the notepad, type the text of the note and close the note by clicking the close but-
ton (X) in the upper-right corner. Expand the window if more room is needed. The
note icon appears on the content page.
The custom note is added to the title.

Creating a notes report

Use the Notes Report tool to view the notes associated with a title. The report provides
an at-a-glance summary of the order, location, color, originator, timestamp, and text of
each note. The columns are clickable to re-sort the table entries. You can also print the
Notes Report.
To create a Notes Report, follow these steps:
1. From the Tools ribbon, click the Notes Report graphic in the Review group.

The Title Notes window opens. The notes associated with the title are displayed.
Click a column to re-sort the table entries.
2. Click Print to print the Title Notes window.
3. Click Close to close the Title Notes window and return to the title.

Managing translations
Using the Translation Manager, text from your title can be extracted and saved to a RTF
(rich text format) file. This includes all text within text blocks, text within custom buttons
created using the Button Wizard and text used within Display Message actions. RTF
files can be edited with most word processing applications, and the content of the RTF
file can be translated for importing back into the title.

- 210 -
 To publish the same title in multiple languages, specify the translated RTF files in
the Languages tab when publishing. After your main title is published, the pro-
gram will publish your translated titles using the translation files you provide. For
details, see Publishing a title.
To export text for translation:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Translations graphic in the Manage group.

The Translation Manager window opens.

2. Select Export text to a translation file.
Select the Include Chapters/Section/Page names check box to export the
chapter, section, and page names so that they are included for translation. Select
Include Image and Button names (used for ALT tags) to translate image and
button object names.
3. Select the radio button that describes the scope of the text that will be extracted
from the title. Choose from the following:
l The current page only
l The current chapter only
l The current section only
l The entire title
4. In the Translation File field, specify the location of the exported translation file.
5. Click OK.
The RTF file created will include text that must not be altered. This text is displayed in
red and is similar to the following: ##~~Do not edit this line.45~~##
When the text changes have been made, the altered RTF file can be imported back into
the original title.
To import translated text:
1. On the Tools ribbon, click the Translations graphic in the Manage group.

The Translation Tool window opens.

2. Select Import text from a translation file. The Increase text box size if needed
option allows you to specify whether or not to automatically increase the size of
text blocks if the imported text will not fit into the existing text block. If this option is
not selected, you may have to manually adjust text block sizes after the translated
text is imported.
3. Select the radio button that describes the scope of the text you are importing.
Choose from the following:

- 211 -
 l The current page only
l The current chapter only
l The current section only
l The entire title
4. In the Translation File field, click the Browse button to navigate and select the
RTF file you are importing.
5. Click Open.
The content within your title will change to reflect the imported text from the RTF file.
Additional resources: Translating Content in Lectora and Lectora Online: Tools and
Publishing Features

- 212 -
Working with text
Textual content is created with the use of text blocks. The text block object, like all other
objects, has configurable properties, and can be placed anywhere within your title.
When you have added a text block to a page, you can begin typing your content.
Double-click in the text block to view the cursor tool.
This chapter covers the following text options:
l About adding text to a text block
l Adding text to your title
l Specifying text block properties
l Changing paragraph and text attributes
l Associating references to a text block
l Adding hyperlinks to a text block
l Adding tables to a text block
l Adding images and equations to a text block
l Editing the default text style
l Adding the date and time
l Formatting multiple text blocks at once
l Finding and replacing text
l Checking spelling
l Globally increasing or decreasing the font size for all the text in a title

About adding text

The following are some basic guidelines to follow when working with text:
l You can rotate and flip a text block. For details, see Rotating and flipping a text
block.
l You can declare the language for the text block. For details, see Declaring the lan-
guage for the text block.
l You can globally increase or decrease the font size for all the text a title. For
details, see Globally increasing or decreasing the font size for all the text in a title.
l Text can be pasted inside of a text block. The text block will automatically resize to
accommodate all of the text unless the text block expands beyond the content
page. In this case, the text block will place a (+) in the bottom right corner. Any time
you see the (+) in the bottom right corner of a text block, you can double-click it to
expand the text block to fit all of the text contained within it.
l Not all users will have the same fonts on their machine as you have. Therefore, it is

- 213 -
 best to use common fonts, such as Times New Roman, Helvetica, Arial, and other
Windows standard fonts. Choosing these fonts will preserve the look and feel of
your title.
l Although print media suggests that a serif font, such as Courier or Times New
Roman is best, the exact opposite applies to online documentation. A Serif font
can sometimes appear blurry on a computer monitor, whereas a Sans Serif font,
such as Arial, Tahoma or Verdana will appear crisp and clean.
l You can show text formatting marks within text blocks, such as paragraph returns,
hard and soft returns, spaces, tabs, and page breaks. For details, see Showing text
formatting marks.
Common Text Formatting Shortcuts
Function Keyboard Description
Shortcut
Undo Ctrl+Z Erases the last change done to your title. Use this to delete
misspellings or typos. You can undo the last 20 changes.
Redo Ctrl+Y Reverses the previous undo command. Use this if you unin-
tentionally undo some changes.
Copy Ctrl+C Copies highlighted text to the clipboard. Use this with the
Paste function to repeat text in other places in your title.
Cut Ctrl+X Copies highlighted text to the clipboard and removes it from
your text block. Use this with the Paste function to remove
text and paste it in other places in your title.
Paste Ctrl+V Places cut or copied text from the clipboard at the cursor loc-
ation within the text block.
Paste For- Ctrl+Alt+V Places cut or copied text from the clipboard at the cursor loc-
matted ation with its original formatting.
Paste Ctrl+Shift+V Places cut or copied text from the clipboard at the cursor loc-
Unformatted ation without retaining its original formatting.
Delete Del Deletes highlighted text.
Find Ctrl+F Searches for text within your title.
Find Next F3 Searches for the next instance of the text specified.
Replace Ctrl+H Searches and replaces the text specified.

Adding text to your title

Choose from two methods to add text to your title:
l Copy and paste text from an existing document
l Add a text block and type the text within the text block

- 214 -
Copying and pasting text from an existing doc-
ument
You can add text to a title using the standard copy and paste clipboard functionality. You
can paste the text as formatted text or unformatted text. Additionally, you can paste the
unformatted text as plain unformatted text or unformatted Unicode text. Pasting as format-
ted text will paste the text while maintaining its current formatting (font face, style, size,
and so on) from the application from which it was copied. Pasting as unformatted text will
paste the text while abandoning its current formatting, and will instead use the default
text style selected within the program.
Copied text can be pasted into the program where text is supported, for example, into
text buttons, certificates, questions and more. When pasting text as a new text block, the
text block can be expandable to allow the entire text to be displayed.
The program will automatically create a text block with the pasted text, however, in
most cases, it will need to be resized to fit all of the text. Double-click the text block
to automatically resize it vertically until all the text is displayed. Alternatively, res-
ize the text block by dragging the sides or corners of the text block to the appro-
priate size. See also: Moving and resizing objects
To copy and paste text from an existing document:
1. Open the source document containing the text that you want to add to the title. For
example, if you are copying from a Microsoft Word document, open the document
in Word.
2. Highlight and copy the text according to the options available within the application
hosting the source document. Most allow copying text by highlighting the text and
typing the Ctrl+C keyboard shortcut.
3. Click within the page in to which you want to add the copied text.
4. To paste the text as formatted text, select the arrow under Paste in the Clipboard
group on the Home ribbon and select Paste Formatted or the Ctrl+Alt+V (format-
ted) keyboard shortcut. The formatted text is added to the title.
To paste the text as unformatted text, either select the arrow under Paste and
select Paste Unformatted or select the arrow under Paste As and select
Unformatted Text. The unformatted text is added to the title.
To paste the text as unformatted Unicode text, select the arrow under Paste As
and select Unformatted Unicode Text from the Home tab, or the Ctrl+Shift+V
(unformatted) keyboard shortcut.
The copied text is added to the title.

- 215 -
Adding a text block and typing the text within the
text block
Add a text block to your page. After you add the text block, double-click within the text
block to add text. Then use the options on the Text Properties ribbons (Properties and
Position & Size, and Table) to configure the text block's appearance.
Follow these steps to add a text block to your page:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location into which you want to add text.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, select Text Block from the Add Text group.

l From the Home ribbon, click the down-arrow under Add object in the Quick
Insert group and select the Text Block graphic from the menu.

l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Text
Block.
A text block appears in the upper-left corner of your page and the Text Properties
ribbons are highlighted.
3. Drag the text block to the appropriate location on the page.
4. Double-click the text to access the cursor tool, and begin typing your text.
Access the text block’s properties to add a background color, a border, or specify other
options.
See also:Specifying text block properties

Specifying text block properties

To access the properties of a text block object, right-click on the text block in the Title
Explorer or within your work area and select Properties.
See also: Adding text to your title
View these topics for more information about specifying the properties for text blocks:
l Changing the name of a text block
l Associating a text block with a form object
l Enabling author control of a text block
l Wrapping text around overlapping objects
l Displaying a vertical scroll bar in a text block
l Rendering a text block as an image
l Specifying a description of the text block

- 216 -
 l Viewing the HTML name of a text block
l Making a text block initially invisible
l Placing a text block on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes for a text block
l Changing the transition properties of a text block
l Specifying an empty ALT tag for the text block
l Enabling dynamic text for a text block
l Changing the HTML text type of a text
l Adding an action to a text block
l Adding a table from the Text Properties ribbon
l Adding a variable from the Text Properties ribbon
l Changing the background of a text block
l Changing or removing a border of a text block
l Changing or removing the opacity of a text block
l Changing the margin size of a text block
l Changing the shadowing effect of a text block
l Locking the size and position of a text block
l Changing the position and size of a text block
l Rotating and flipping a text block
l Declaring the language for the text block
You can change the properties at any time by right-clicking on the text block and select-
ing Properties.

Changing the name of a text block

Change the name of your text blocks so you can better recognize and manage them.
To change the name of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Specify the new name of the text block in the Name field in the Text group. Altern-
atively, click the current name of the text block in the Title Explorer so that it is high-
lighted. Then click again and retype the new name.
The name of the text block is changed.

- 217 -
Associating a text block with a form object
You can associate the text block with a form object, such as a drop-down list or an entry
field. This is useful when creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508
- 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)
2.0. After you have added the form object and text block to the page, you can associate
the two to use the text block as a label for the form object.
For information about creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section
508 - 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines
(WCAG) 2.0, see Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG).
To associate a text block with a form object:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Use the Label for drop-down list to select the appropriate form object.
See also: Working with forms

Enabling author control on a text block

Protect the contents of a text block by enabling Author Control. With Author Control
enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the text block unless
they have the master Author Control password. The master Author Control password
must first be set within the Title Properties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the Text group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable author control on a text block:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the text block.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the text block and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
The text block is protected. The graphic changes to the Locked Control graphic.

- 218 -
Wrapping text around overlapping objects
You can have text within a text block automatically flow around objects layered above
the text block. Objects layered below the text block will not affect the contents of the text
block.
To wrap text around overlapping objects:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Enable the Wrap Text check box in the Text group.
See also: Layering objects
Displaying a vertical scroll bar in a text block

Displaying a vertical scroll bar in a text block

For text blocks with more text that can fit within the text block, you can provide a vertical
scroll bar enabling users to view the entire contents. the program will display a plus sign
(+) in the lower-right corner of a text block to indicate that additional text is unable to be
displayed within the text block.
Selecting to show the vertical scroll bar will disable the ability to wrap text around
overlapping objects and rendering text as an image when published.
If a plus-sign is displayed in the text block, double-click the text block to auto-
matically resize the text block to fit all the text. Otherwise, enable the vertical bar so
that users can view the entire content.
To show a vertical scroll bar within the text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Select the Vertical Scroll check box.
See also: Wrapping text around overlapping objects
Rendering a text block as an image

Rendering a text block as an image

When publishing your title, you can select to publish a text block as an image rather than
as text. This can have several advantages. During publishing, word wrapping and line
height can sometimes vary between browsers, or even between versions of the same
browser. If you need to maintain exact word alignment, such as when you are aligning

- 219 -
overlapping images and text, use this setting. Also, use this setting if you use a non-
standard font, and want it to be represented exactly. Some drawbacks of rendering text
as an image are increased download time for images as opposed to text, and that a stu-
dent will not be able to copy text from the text block to the clipboard. This setting cannot
be used if the text block has embedded hyperlinks, is the target of a Change Contents
action or if the text block has a vertical scroll bar.
If a text block is published as an image, the first 128 characters of text is used as
its ALT tag. ALT tags have a limitation of 128 characters.
To render a text block as an image when published:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer or right-
click on the text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Text Prop-
erties tab is displayed.
2. Enable the Convert to Image check box in the Text group.
See also: Specifying an empty ALT tag for the text block
Selecting an action

Specifying a description of a text block

You can provide a description of the text block.
To provide the description:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Click the arrow in the lower-right corner of the Text group. The Description of Text
Block window opens.
3. Specify the description in the box and click OK.
The description is added.
See also: Viewing the HTML name of a text block

Viewing the HTML name of a text block

The HTML name is assigned when you create the text block. The HTML name, which is
used to identify the text block, cannot be changed.
To view the HTML name of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.

- 220 -
 2. Click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner of the Text group. The Description
of Text Block window opens.
The HTML name is displayed in the HTML Name field.
See also: Adding a description of a text block

Making a text block initially invisible

By default, text blocks are set to be initially visible. That is, they appear when users open
the pages on which the text blocks are located. You can initially hide a text block until an
action has been executed to show the text block.
See also: Selecting an action
To make a text block initially invisible:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Enable the Initially Hidden check box in the Appearance group.

Placing a text block on the top layer

You can force a text block to always be on the top layer of the page. This is useful when
you have multiple objects, including the text block, layered on your page.
To force a text block to the top layer:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Enable the Always on Top check box in the Appearance group.
If multiple objects are set to Always on Top, the program will refer to the
ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of the objects
is on the top-most layer. The top-most object listed on the page in the Title
Explorer is on the bottom-most layer of the page.
See also: Layering objects

Specifying the CSS classes for a text block

Multiple cascading style sheet classes allow you to provide multiple looks to a text block
when publishing to HTML.
To specify the CSS classes for a text block:

- 221 -
 1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner of the Appearance group. The
CSS Classes for Text Block window opens.
3. Specify the CSS classes for the text block. Separate the classes with a comma.
The CSS classes are set.
See also: Publishing to HTML

Changing the transition properties of a text block

You can change how the text block loads and disappears on the page. Transitions will
produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another, and can be applied
to a chapter, section or page. You can specify a transition-in when the text block loads
and a transition-out when it closes.
The transition type is automatically inherited. Changes applied to the transition type
within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the
chapter. Changes applied to the transition type within a section's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the section, and changes applied to the transition
type within a page's properties will only be applied to the current page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
You can select from over 20 different transitions. You can also specify to inherit the trans-
ition setting, select random transitions, and remove transitions. There is a Speed slider
to determine the speed at which the transition takes place.
To set transitions:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. To specify the transition when the text block loads, click Transition In from the

Transition group. The Transitions window opens.

3. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting associated with the transition you selected.
Select Inherit to inherit the transition or select Random Transition to select ran-
dom transitions. Select None to remove the transition. Use the Transition Effects
list to select the appropriate effect. Use the Delay before transition field to specify
a delay if necessary. Use the Speed slider to specify the appropriate speed.
4. To specify the transition when the text block closes, click

- 222 -
 Transition Out from the Transition group. The Transitions window opens.

5. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting associated with the transition you selected.
Use the Delay before transition field to specify a delay if necessary. Select None
to remove the transition. Use the Speed slider to specify the appropriate speed.
6. Click OK.

Specifying an empty ALT tag for a text block

You can create an empty ALT tag for a text block. An empty ALT tag will ensure that no
tip text is displayed when the user rests their mouse over the object. Also, assistive tech-
nologies will not recognize or will skip over any objects containing an empty ALT tag.
To use an empty ALT tag for a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Enable the Convert to Image check box in the Text group. This enables the
Empty ALT Tag check box in the Web Options group.
3. Enable the Empty ALT Tag check box in the Web Options group.

Enabling dynamic text for a text block

When you enable dynamic text, you can update specific text of an HTML-published title
without republishing. The text blocks that you designate as dynamic text are copied to an
associated XML file when the title is initially published. The XML file is named dyn-
title.xml. When the published title is displayed in a browser, text within the title is sub-
stituted with text found within dyntitle.xml.
When text is designated as dynamic text, the contents of the text block is associated with
the text block name within the XML file. Therefore all text blocks identified as dynamic
text must have unique names.
Selecting the Dynamic Title title property enables the Dynamic Text property when con-
figuring text blocks within your title. For details about specifying the Dynamic Title prop-
erty, see Designating a title as a dynamic title.
To enable dynamic text for a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Enable the Dynamic Text check box in the Web Options group.

- 223 -
 3. Name the text block with a unique name. For details about naming a text block,
see Changing the name of a text block.

Changing the HTML text type of a text block

You can specify whether the text block should be labeled with an HTML Hn heading
level (H1 through H6), or as normal HTML body text. This selection will not affect the
formatting of the text block, but will define the importance of the text relative to the con-
tent. These headings are used by search engines to find pages containing content
matching the searched keywords.
This setting does not affect the visual appearance of the text block.

To specify the HTML text type of a text block:

1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Use the HTML Text Type list in the Web Options group to select the type of HTML
text. For example, to specify the text as an H2 heading, select Heading 2 <H2>.
The HTML text type is specified.

Adding an action to a text block

You can associate an action to be applied on the text block level. For example, when the
text block is set to appear on a page, you can display message, open an attachment,
launch a program, send an email and more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions on the text block level as needed.
To add an action:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Add group on the Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
3. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the text block level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added.

- 224 -
Adding a table from the Text Properties ribbon
You can add a table from the Text Properties ribbon.
To add a table from the Text Properties ribbon:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Click Table from the Add group. Use the drop-down list to specify the dimen-
sions of the table or click Custom Size to create a custom table.
For details about adding a table to the text block, see Adding tables.

Adding variables from the Text Properties ribbon

You can add variables within text to display their values inline within text blocks. This
allows you to customize the text based on the current values of the variables in a title.
Select from the reserved variables or the variables that you have defined.
The variable you select is used as a placeholder that is replaced with the current value
of the variable when the title is run. For example, a text block with the text "Hello VAR
(myVar)", provided that the value of myVar on page load is "World", the user at run time
would see "Hello World".
l You can also add and display the value of variables inline within text using
the VAR(varName) syntax. For details, see Displaying variables inline
within text blocks.
l If you do not want your VAR expression to be processed, place "\\" before the
VAR expression. (For example, "Hello \\VAR(myVar)" will result in "Hello
VAR(myVar)".)
To select a variable to place inline within text, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Place your cursor within the text block where you want to place the variable place-
holder.
3. Click Variable from the Add group. Use the drop-down list to select the variable to
add to the text.
The VAR(varName) placeholder (where varName is the name of the variable you
selected) is placed within the text block at the position of the cursor. Use Run Mode to
test the results of the variable replacement in the text block.

- 225 -
 Select New Variable within the Variable drop-down list to configure a new vari-
able. For details about creating variables, see Using the Variable Manager.
See also: Switching between modes

Changing or removing the background of a text

block
You can change or remove the background of a text block. For example, you can add a
color or make the background transparent.
To change or remove the background of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Text Style group, use the Background list to select the background. To
change the color setting, you can make the background transparent, select a pre-
defined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing color. To make the back-
ground transparent, select Transparent. To select a predefined color, click one of
the color samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use
the controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing
color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an
existing color currently displayed on your desktop.
The backgrounds of the text blocks you selected are changed.

Changing or removing a border of a text block

You can change or remove the weight, color, and style of the border of a text block.
To change or remove the border weight, color, and style of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Text Style group, use the Border Weight field to select the weight. Select 0

- 226 -
 to remove the border.
Use the Border Color list to select the color. Use the Color list to select a pre-
defined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your
title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel.
Use the Border Style list to select the style.
The text blocks you selected are changed.

Changing or removing the outline of a text block

You can change or remove the outline of a text block.
To change or remove the outline of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Text Style group, use the Outlline list to select the appearance of the out-
line. To remove the outline, select No Outline. To change the color setting, you
can select a predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing color. To
select a predefined color, click one of the color samples displayed. To specify a
custom color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color window to configure
a custom color. To select an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to
click-to-select a new color from an existing color currently displayed on your
desktop.
The outline of the text blocks you selected are changed.

Changing or removing the opacity of a text block

You can change or remove the opacity of a text block. You can make the text block com-
pletely transparent.
For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a text block will not render a shadow or reflec-
tion if the object has reduced opacity (less than 100).
To change or remove the outline of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.

- 227 -
 To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Text Style group, use the Opacity control to select the percentage of opa-
city. Select 0 to make the text block completely transparent.
The opacity of the text blocks you selected are changed.

Changing the margin size of a text block

You can change the margin size of a text block.
To change the margin size of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Text Style group, use the Margin Size control to select the size of the mar-
gin in pixels.
The margins of the text blocks you selected are changed.

Changing the shadowing effect of a text block

You can change the shadow of a text block. You can change the type, color, trans-
parency, blur, angle and distance of the shadow.
You can also change the shadowing effect of the text within a text block. For details, see
Changing the shadowing effect of text in a text block.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a text block will not render a shadow if
the object has been rotated, flipped, or has reduced opacity (less than 100).
For more information, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser Differences with
Effects.
l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, a text block cannot render a shadow if
the browser's document mode is set to 8 or less. For more information, visit
Lectora: A Guide to Browser Differences with Effects.
To change the shadow of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is

- 228 -
 displayed.
To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Effects group, use the Shadow control to select the shadowing of the text
block. Select None to remove the shadow. To change the shadow options, select
Shadow Options from the bottom of the Shadow drop-down list. This opens the
Shadow Options window. Use the controls on the Shadow Options dialog box as
follows:
Shadow Color of the shadow. To change the color setting, you can select a
Color predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select
an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-
select a new color from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Transparency Transparency setting (opacity) of the shadowing in a percentage.
Blur Blur effect of the shadowing.
Angle Angle of the shadowing relative to the object.
Distance Distance of the shadowing in pixels.
The shadows of the text blocks you selected are changed.

Locking the size and position of a text block

You can lock the size and position of a text block. This preserves it from getting acci-
dentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title.
The text block will be locked in size and position within Edit mode.
To lock the position and size of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. Click the Lock graphic in the Position & Size group so that the locked padlock
. graphic is displayed.

You can also lock the size and position of the text block by right-clicking on the text block
within the Title Explorer or within your work area and selecting Size/Position Locked

- 229 -
from the right-click context menu. When the text block is locked, a check mark will
appear to the left of the Size/Position Locked option within the menu.

Changing the position and size of a text block

You can directly set the position and size of a text block.
To specify the position and size of a text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. Specify the following information. All measurements are based on pixels.
Lock/Unlock Specify whether to lock or unlock the object's position and size.
To lock the position and size so that the object cannot be
changed, click the graphic to display the locked lock ( )

graphic in the Position & Size group. This disables the other

position and size controls. To unlock the position and size so
that the object can be changed, click the graphic to display the
unlocked lock ( ) graphic in the Position & Size group. This

enables the other position and size controls.

X Coordinate Specify the horizontal distance of the object relative to the top-
left corner of the page. To do so, updated the number of pixels
specified in the X Coordinate field in the Position group.
Y Coordinate Specify the vertical distance of the object relative to the top-left
corner of the page. To do so, update the number of pixels spe-
cified in the Y Coordinate field in the Position field.
Offset from Specify whether to change the reference point (from the right)
right from which the object is placed. To do so, enable the Offset
from Right check box in the Position group.
Offset from bot- Specify whether to change the reference point (from the bottom)
tom from which the object is placed. To do so, enable the Offset
from Bottom check box in the Position group.
Width Specify the width of the object. To do so, update the number of
pixels in the Width field in the Size group.
Height Specify the height of the object. To do so, update the number of
pixels in the Height field in the Size group.
Rotate Right Rotate the object 90° to the right.
90°

- 230 -
 Flip Vertical Flip the object vertically.
Rotate Left 90° Rotate the object 90° to the left.
Flip Horizontal Flip the object horizontally.
Angle Specify the rotation angle of the object.
You can also specify the position of your text block directly from the status bar.
See also: Using the status bar

Rotating and flipping a text block

You can rotate and flip a text block. You can rotate a text block using the green rotation
handle that is displayed when you select a text block or using the rotation controls in the
Rotation and Mirroring group on the Position & Size ribbon.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a text block will not render a shadow if
the object has been rotated or flipped.
l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, a text block cannot be rotated if the
browser's document mode is set to 9 or less. Additionally, a text block will not
render a horizontal or vertical flip if the browser's document mode is set to 9
or less.
To rotate a text block using the green rotation handle:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Move your cursor over the rotation handle so that your cursor changes to the rota-
tion arrows over the handle.
3. Hold the left mouse button and move your mouse left or right to rotate the text
block. Release the left mouse button to set the rotation.
The text block is rotated using the green rotation handle.
To rotate and flip a text block using the rotation controls in the Rotation and Mirroring
group on the Position & Size ribbon:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
To select multiple text blocks, click the first text block, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other text blocks.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. In the Rotation and Mirroring group, use the controls to rotate and flip the text

- 231 -
 block. Click Rotate Right 90° to rotate the text block 90° to the right. Click Rotate
Left 90° to rotate the text block 90° to the left. Click Flip Vertical to vertically flip the
text block. Click Flip Horizontal to horizontally flip the text block. Use the Angle
field to select the rotation angle.
The text block is rotated using the rotation controls.

Declaring the language for the text block

You can declare the language for the text block. This option is available when Web
Accessibility Settings are enabled in the title options.
You can also declare the languages for the title and set the language during pub-
lishing to HTML. For details, see Declaring the language for the title and Spe-
cifying language options.
To declare the language for the text block:
1. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Use the Language pull-down list in the Text group to select the language for the
text block.
The language is declared.
See also: Preparing a title for accessibility

Changing paragraph and text attributes

When you add a text block, the default text properties are automatically inherited. You
can change the paragraph and text attributes of the text in a text block independently of
the inherited settings if necessary.
View these topic for more information about changing paragraph and text attributes:
l Applying a text style to a text block
l Changing the text color of a text block
l Changing the font in a text block
l Changing the font size in a text block
l Bolding, italicizing, and underlining text in a text block
l Changing the shadowing effect of text in a text block
l Superscripting and subscripting in a text block
l Scaling text in a text block in a responsive title
l Justifying text in a text block
l Highlighting text in a text block

- 232 -
 l Changing the indent levels in a text block
l Adding bullets in a text block
l Adding a numbered list in a text block
l Changing paragraph spacing in a text block
l Adding a symbol in a text block
l Showing text formatting marks in a text block
See also: Managing text styles
Changing the default text properties
Changing text properties for chapters, sections, and pages

Applying a text style to a text block

Text styles automatically set text attributes such as the font face, style, size and color.
You can apply a text style to a text block that is independent of the default style settings.
the program will then format the text to include all attributes that are specified within the
text style.
Three predefined text styles are provided: Title, Subtitle, and Body Text. These text
styles can be customized as necessary. Additionally, custom styles can be created,
imported and deleted as necessary. For details, see Managing text styles.
To apply a text style to your text block:
1. Select the text block you want to change.
2. On the Home ribbon, click Text Style from the Text group and select one of

the text styles.

See also: Changing the default text style
Changing text properties for chapter, sections and pages

Changing the text color of a text block

You can change the color of the text in a text block if necessary. Select from several pre-
defined colors, define a custom color, or use the eye-dropper tool to select a color from
elsewhere within your title or your desktop.
To change the text color of a text block:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. On the Home ribbon, click Text Color from the Text group and select a color.

Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from else-
where within your title or desktop, or select Custom to select a custom color from
the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title

- 233 -
Changing the font in a text block
You can change the font of the text in a text block if necessary.
Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML, the program does not embed the
fonts into the published work. It is best to use common, Web-friendly fonts such as
Arial, Verdana, or Tahoma.
To change the font:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. On the Home ribbon, use the Font list in the Text group to
select a font.
The font is changed.

Changing font size in a text block

You can change the font size of the text in a text block. Font sizes are displayed in
points, as in most standard word processing applications. Change the value in the font
size field or use the increment buttons to adjust the font size.
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a text block. This
is helpful when adjusting how the text block appears within the different device
views for responsive titles. For details, see Scaling text in a text block in a respons-
ive title.
To change the font size:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. On the Home ribbon, use the Font size list in the Text group to select a
font size or type the font size directly in the Font size field. Alternatively, click the
Increase Font button or the Decrease Font button.
The font size of the text in the text block is changed.

Bolding, italics, and underlining text in a text

block
You can make text in a text block bold, italic, or underlined.
To bold, italicize or underline text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Choose from three ways to apply these attributes:

- 234 -
 l Click the appropriate graphic on the Text group on the Home ribbon:
Bold
Italic
Underline
l Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Font submenu:
Font > Bold Bold
Font > Italic Italic
Font > Under- Underline
line
l Type the appropriate keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl+B Bold
Ctrl+I Italic
Ctrl+U Underline

Changing the shadowing effect of text in a text

block
You can add and change the shadowing effect of text in a text block.
For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, text shadowing will not be rendered. For more
information, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser Differences with Effects.
To add a shadowing effect to your text in a text block:
1. Select the text block that you want to change.
2. Choose from the following ways to apply the shadowing attribute:
l To add a shadow, click the Text Shadow graphic on the Text group on
the Home ribbon.
l Right-click and click the Text Shadow graphic from the Font submenu:

The shadowing effect is added to your text.

To change the shadowing attributes:
1. Select the text block that you want to change.
2. Choose from the following ways to change these attributes:
l Click the drop-down arrow next to the graphic and select Text Shadow
Options.

- 235 -
 l Right-click and Click the drop-down arrow next to the graphic and
select Text Shadow Options.
The Shadow Options window opens.
3. Use the controls on the Shadow Options window as follows:
Shadow Color of the shadow. To change the color setting, you can select a
Color predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select
an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-
select a new color from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Transparency Transparency setting (opacity) of the shadowing in a percentage.
Blur Blur effect of the shadowing
Angle Angle of the shadowing relative to the object.
Distance Distance of the shadowing in pixels.
4. Click OK.
The shadowing effects are changed.

Superscripting and subscripting text in a text

block
You can superscript and subscript text in a text block.
To superscript or subscript text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Choose from three ways to apply these attributes:
l Click the appropriate graphic on the Text group on the Home ribbon:
ASuperscript
A
Subscript
l Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Font submenu:
Font > Super- ASuperscript
script
Font > Subscripts A
Subscript
l Type the appropriate keyboard shortcut:
Alt+4 ASuperscript
Alt+5 A
Subscript

- 236 -
Scaling text in a text block in a responsive title
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a text block. This is help-
ful when adjusting how the text in a text block appears within the different device views
for responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an override of the default responsive inher-
itance. (The text scaling controls are disabled on the desktop view since you cannot cre-
ate overrides in that view. Additionally, the labels in fields will change colors to reflect
the current override values for each device view).
For more information about building responsive titles, see Working with responsive con-
tent.
The current scaling factor and size of the font are displayed. Use this information if you
plan on adding similar text blocks to the page.
Scaling the text will not affect the displayed value in the Text Style group. The
Text Style value reflects the base value for the text block. If the base value is
changed, that change will apply across all views and the scaling will be canceled.
To scale the text:
1. Select the text block (or multiple text blocks) that you want to change.
2. In the work area, select one of the responsive views other than desktop.
3. On the Home ribbon, drag the slider or use the appropriate plus or minus button to
scale the text in the current view. The values increase or decrease in 10% incre-
ments. For example, to increase the text size, drag the slider arrow to the right. The
scaling factor (applied to the base) and the resulting effective font size are adjusted
accordingly.
The text is changed for the current view. Additionally, the scaling values are inherited to
the phone views if the current view is a tablet view.

Justifying text in a text block

You can select how the text is to be justified within a text block. Select from aligning left
or right, centering in the middle, or justified left and right.
To justify your text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Choose from two ways to apply these attributes:
l Click the appropriate graphic from the Paragraph group on the Home ribbon:
Align left
Center
Justify left and right
Align right
l Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Paragraph

- 237 -
 submenu:
Paragraph > Align left Align left
Paragraph > Center Center
Paragraph > Justify Justify left and right
Paragraph > Align Align right
right
l Type the appropriate keyboard shortcut:
Alt+8 Center
Alt+9 Align right

Highlighting text in a text block

You can highlight text in a text block. When you highlight text, the color chosen will
appear behind the selected text.
To highlight your text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to highlight.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the Highlight graphic from the Text group and select
the highlight color. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a
color from elsewhere within the title or desktop, or select Custom to select a cus-
tom color from the Color wheel.
See also:Matching colors used within your title

Changing the indent levels in a text block

You can indent text within a text block.
To indent your text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Choose from two ways to apply these attributes:
l Click the appropriate graphic from the Paragraph group on the Home ribbon:
Decrease indent
Increase Indent
l Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Paragraph sub-
menu:
Paragraph > Decrease Indent Decrease indent
Paragraph > Increase Indent Increase Indent

- 238 -
Adding bulleted lists in a text block
You can create bulleted lists within a text block. Select from a variety of bullet types or
create a list that does not contain bullets.
Bulleted lists are formatted using the current HTML standards. This allows screen
reader applications such as JAWS to recognize the text as lists when publishing
to HTML. For more information about creating accessible content, see Creating
Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG).
To add bullets to your text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Choose from two ways to add bullets:
l Click the drop-down list in the Bullets graphic from the Paragraph
group on the Home ribbon.
l Right-click and select Paragraph > Bulleted List.
3. Select the type of bulleted list.
The bulleted list is added to the text block.

Adding a numbered list in a text block

You can create a numbered list within a text block
Numbered lists are formatted using the current HTML standards. This allows
screen reader applications such as JAWS to recognize the text as lists when pub-
lishing to HTML. For more information about creating accessible content, see
Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG).
To add a numbered list to the text:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Choose from two ways to start a numbered list:
l Click the drop-down list in the Numbered List graphic from the Para-
graph group on the Home ribbon
l Right-click, and select Paragraph > Numbered List.
3. Select the type of numbered list.
You can also change the numbering within your numbered list. For details, see
Changing numbered lists.

Changing numbered lists

You can change the numbering used in your numbered list.
To change the numbering used in your numbered list:

- 239 -
 1. Double-click within the text block and highlight the numbered list.
2. Right-click, and select Paragraph > Numbering Options. Use the Starting Num-
ber field to specify a new starting number for the current list item. Use the Num-
bering Style field to select the desired numbering scheme. Choose from the
following numbering schemes:
Numbering Example
Decimal 1., 2., 3.
Uppercase Alpha A., B., C.
Lowercase Alpha a., b., c.
Upper Roman I., II., III.
Lower Roman i., ii., iii

Changing paragraph spacing in a text block

You can change the spacing between lines of text in a text block.
To change paragraph spacing:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change.
2. Either click the Paragraph Spacing graphic from the Paragraph group on the
Home ribbon or right-click, and select Paragraph > Paragraph Spacing. The
Paragraph Spacing window opens. Use the Paragraph Spacing window to specify
the following spacing options for your text:
Space Before Specify a number in points to create space before the currently
Paragraph selected paragraph.
Space After Specify a number in points to create space after the currently selec-
Paragraph ted paragraph.
Line Spacing Select one of the following line spacing options:
l Single
l 1.25 Lines
l 1.5 Lines

l Double

l At Least

l Multiple

If you select At Least, further specify the spacing number in

points. The lines will be spaced at least the value specified and
more if necessary.
If you select Multiple, specify the new line spacing value in the
field.

- 240 -
Adding a symbol in a text block
You can add symbols, such as © for copyright or ™ for trademark. You can also assign a
shortcut key for adding a symbol.
Certain symbols will not display correctly if your current font does not support the
symbol. Switching to a font that supports a wide range of characters will allow
most characters to be displayed, such as Arial Unicode MS.
To add a symbol:
1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor where you want to add the
symbol.
2. From the Home ribbon, click the Symbol graphic from the Text group to add the
previously selected symbol or click the drop-down list to view a menu of commonly
used symbols. Alternatively, select More Symbols to select from additional symbol
sets.
The symbol you selected is added to the text block.
To assign a keyboard shortcut for adding a symbol:
1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor where you want to add the
symbol.
2. Click the right side of the Symbols graphic and select More Symbols.
The Symbols window opens.
3. Select the symbol and click Shortcut Key. The Preferences window opens.
4. Select the symbol key you want to assign from the box under the Categories field.
The Current keys box lists the keyboard shortcuts defined for the symbol key you
selected.
5. Place your cursor in the Press new shortcut key field. Using your keyboard,
press the new shortcut sequence you want to assign to the symbol key. Type a let-
ter to add a Alt keyboard shortcut. Otherwise, press and hold the Ctrl key and type
a letter to add a Ctrl keyboard shortcut.
The key sequence you type is displayed in the Press new shortcut key field.
6. Click Assign.
The new shortcut is added to the Current keys list and the symbol is displayed in
the Current Symbol field.
7. Click OK to return to the Symbols window and click Close to continue working on
the title.

Showing text formatting marks in a text block

You can show text formatting marks within text blocks, such as paragraph returns, hard
and soft returns, spaces, tabs, and page breaks.

- 241 -
To show text formatting marks, enable the Show Text Formatting Marks graphic in the
Paragraph group on the Home ribbon. Alternatively, right-click on a text block and
select Show Text Formatting Marks.
Showing text formatting marks can also be set as a Preference. For details, see Showing
text formatting marks.

Associating references to a text block

You can associate references to a text block.
To associate references to a text block:
1. Highlight the text, right-click, and select Add Reference. The Reference Prop-
erties window opens.
2. Specify the following information:
Author(s) Specify the names of the authors of the item.
Title of Work/Web Specify either the title of the item or the Web page address.
Page Address
Publisher Specify the publisher of the item.
Date of Publication Specify the date of publication of the item.
3. Click OK.

Adding hyperlinks to text

You can add hyperlinks to your text. A hyperlink is specially highlighted text that when
clicked, enable users to navigate to another location within your title, open a pop-up win-
dow, or perform other actions.
See also: Selecting an action
To add a hyperlink:
1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to hyperlink.
2. Choose from two ways to add a hyperlink:
l Click the Hyperlink graphic in the Text group on the Home ribbon.
l Right-click and select Add Hyperlink.
The Text Hyperlink Properties window opens.
3. Select the action you want to execute from the Action drop-down list. Specify addi-
tional information based on the action you select. For example, to create a hyper-
link that allows users to jump to another part of the title when they click on the link,
select Go To from the Action list. Select Chapter, Section, or Page in the Target
list and select the name of the page to which you want to navigate from the Name
list.
4. Click OK.

- 242 -
 To edit the properties of a text hyperlink, double-click the text block containing the
hyperlink and double-click the hyperlink.

Working with tables

Tables can be used to structure data or align textual information. Add tables to the text
blocks in your title.
View these topics for more information about working with tables:
l Adding tables to a text block
l Selecting a table style
l Editing a table
l Formatting cells in a table
l Including a header to a table

Adding tables to a text block

You can create tables within a text block.
To insert a table into a text block:
1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor in the location were you
want to add a table.
2. Do one of the following:
l Click Table from the Add group on the Properties ribbon
l Right-click and select Table > Insert Table
3. Specify the number of row and columns as necessary. Select Custom Size from
the Table pull-down list to create a custom table.
When the table has been created, you can enter the textual content into the individual
cells and format the table as necessary.
See also: Editing a table
Selecting a table style
Including a header in a table
Formatting cells in a table

Selecting a table style

Use a predefined table style to provide a professional look to your text content.
To select a table style for a table:
1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor in the table.
2. On the Table ribbon, select the style from the Table Style group. Expand the list if
necessary to reveal additional styles.
The table is changed to the style you selected.

- 243 -
Editing a table
After you have created a table, you can insert and combine rows and columns or format
the table by adjusting table cell widths, colors and alignment.
To edit a table:
1. Double-click within the text block containing the table and select the rows or
columns of the table you want to format. The Table ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Edit Table from the Table group and select the appropriate menu option as
follows:
Insert Row Adds a new row to the table.
Insert Adds a new column to the table.
Column
Merge Merges the selected cells to form a single cell.
Cells
Split Cells Splits a single cell into two cells.
Delete Provides you with the option to delete a cell, delete an entire column,
Cells or delete an entire row.
The table is changed.

Formatting cells in a table

You can change the appearance of the cells in your table. For example, you can change
the row height, adjust the padding, or alter cell alignment.
View these topics for more information about formatting cells in a table:
l Changing the row height
l Changing the column width
l Changing the cell margin
l Changing the cell borders
l Changing the border colors
l Changing the cell color
l Changing the cell margin
l Changing the alignment of text within a cell

Changing the row height

You can change the row height of cells within a table. You can select one row or multiple
adjoining rows.

- 244 -
Alternatively, you can change the height of a row using your cursor. To do so, select the
table, then move your cursor over the cell border until the cursor changes. Click to move
the cell border to the appropriate height.
To specify the row height:
1. Select the row or rows you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Row Height field in the Cell and Border Style group
to specify the new row height in pixels.
The row height is changed.

Changing the column width

You can directly specify the column width of cells. Select one column or multiple adjoin-
ing columns.
Alternatively, you can change the width of a column using your cursor. To do so, select
the table, then move your cursor over the cell border until the cursor changes. Click to
move the cell border to the appropriate width.
To specify the column width:
1. Select the row or rows you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Column Width field in the Cell and Border Style
group to specify the new column width in pixels.
The column width is changed.

Changing the cell margin

You can change the margin space within a cell. Select one cell or multiple adjoining
cells.
To change the cell margin:
1. Select the cell or cells you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Cell Margin field in the Cell and Border Style group
to specify the new cell margin in pixels.
The cell margin is changed.

Changing the cell borders

You can specify which cell borders to display. Select one cell or multiple adjoining cells.
Select from the following cell border options:
No borders
All borders
Outside borders
Inside borders

- 245 -
 Top borders
Bottom borders
Left borders
Right borders
Inside-horizontal borders
Inside-vertical borders
To change the cell borders:
1. Select the cell or cells you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Cell Border pull-down list in the Cell and Border
Style group to specify the new cell borders.
The cell borders are changed.

Changing the cell border color

You can specify border colors for cells in a table. Select from several predefined colors,
define a custom color, or use the eye-dropper tool to select a color from elsewhere within
your title or desktop.
To specify the cell border color properties:
1. Select the cell or cells you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Border Color drop-down list in the Cell and Border
Style group to select the new cell border color. Select a predefined color, select
the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title or desktop, or
select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title

Changing the cell color

You can change the color of the cells. You can select one cell or adjoining cells. Select
from several predefined colors, define a custom color, or select a color from elsewhere
within your title or desktop.
To change the cell color:
1. Select the cell or cells you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Cell Color pull-down list in the Cell and Border
Style group to specify the color. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper
tool to use a color from elsewhere within the title or desktop, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color wheel.
The cell color is changed.
See also: Matching colors used within your title

- 246 -
Changing the cell margin
You can change the cell margin of cells. The cell margin is the space between the con-
tents and inside edges of a cell. Select one cell or multiple adjoining cells.
To change the cell margin:
1. Select the cell or cells you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, use the Cell Margin field in the Cell and Border Style group
to specify the new cell margin in pixels.
The cell padding is changed.

Changing the alignment of text within a cell

You can specify how the text is to be vertically aligned within cells of a table. Select one
cell or multiple adjoining cells.
Select from the following alignment options.
Align left
Align center
Align right
Align both
Vertically align top
Vertically align middle
Vertically align bottom
To specify the cell alignment:
1. Select the cell or cells you want to change.
2. On the Table ribbon, select the appropriate graphic in the Cell Alignment group to
specify the cell alignment.

Including a header to a table

You can include a header row to a table. When publishing to any Web-based format,
header row text will always be bolded within the table. Header rows are also used by
assistive technologies to associate the data in the table with the headers specified.
For information about creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section
508 - 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines
(WCAG) 2.0, see Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG).
To include a header to a table:
1. Click in the row that you want to designate as the header row.
2. On the Table ribbon, enable the Include Header check box in the Table group.
The header is set.

- 247 -
Adding images and equations to a text block
You can add images and equations to a text block.
To add an image or an equation to a text block:
1. Click within the text block where you want to add the image or equation.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, use the Image graphic to add an image or use

the Equation graphic to add an equation.

l Right-click, select Insert and either Image or Equation.
l Type Ctrl + Shift + 5 to add an image or Ctrl + Shift + 3 to ad an equation.
The image or equation is inserted into the text block.
See also: Working with images
Working with equations

Managing text styles

Text styles define text attributes such as the font face, style, size and color. Three pre-
defined text styles are provided: Title, Subtitle, and Body Text. You can create custom
text styles, edit existing text styles, or delete unused text styles. Instead of manually
formatting text, you can apply a text style to a text block. They can also be applied to
your entire title or to individual chapters, sections, and pages. When a text style is
applied, the program will format the text to include all attributes that are specified within
the text style.
This section covers the following topics:
l Creating a custom text style
l Editing a text style
l Deleting a text style
l Importing and exporting text styles
Additional resources: Using Text Styles in Lectora and Lectora Online

Creating a custom text style

Create new text styles to use within your titles. Edit and delete custom text styles as
necessary.
To create a custom text style:
1. From the Home ribbon or the Design ribbon, click the Text Style drop-down

list and select Manage Styles. The Manage Text Styles window opens.

- 248 -
 2. Click the New button. The Text Style window opens.
3. Specify the name of the new style in the Style Name field, then configure the font
and highlighting attributes for the new style. You can select a Font, Font style,
Size, Color, Underline, and choose the Script type.
4. Click OK to create your new font style. The new text style is listed in the Manage
Text Styles window.
5. Click Done.
To use the new style within the title, select it from the Text Style drop-down list.

See also: Editing a text style

Deleting a text style
Additional resources: Using Text Styles in Lectora and Lectora Online

Editing a text style

You can edit an existing text style. Select from a predefined style or a custom style.
To edit a text style:
1. From the Home ribbon or the Design ribbon, click the Text Style drop-down

list and select Manage Styles. The Manage Text Styles window opens.
2. Select the text style you want to edit and click the Edit button. The Text Style win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Text Style window to modify the font and highlighting attributes. You can
select a Font, Font style, font Size, font Color, Underline, and choose the Script
type. Click OK to apply the changes to your font style.
4. You will be prompted whether to change all text in the current title using the font
style you edited. If you answer Yes, all the text using the current font style will be
changed. If you answer No, text using the current font style is not changed.
5. Click Done.

Deleting a text style

You can delete unused custom text styles.You cannot deleted the predefined text styles.
To delete a custom text style:
1. From the Home ribbon or the Design ribbon, click the Text Style drop-down

list and select Manage Styles. The Manage Text Styles window opens.
2. Select the custom text style you want to delete and click the Delete button.

- 249 -
 The deleted style is removed from Text Styles window and Text Style drop-

down list.
3. Click Done.

Importing and exporting text styles

You can import and export text styles. This will enable you to add text styles for use
within your titles (import) and save a copy of a text style (export) in a location for easy
access for sharing or emailing. Custom text style files contain the .als file extension.
To import a text style:
1. From the Home ribbon or the Design ribbon, click the Text Style drop-down

list and select Manage Styles. The Manage Text Styles window opens.
2. Click Import Styles to navigate and add a custom text style to the list of available
text styles.
3. Click Done.
To export a text style:
1. From the Home ribbon or the Design ribbon, click the Text Style drop-down

list and select Manage Styles. The Manage Text Styles window opens.
2. Select the text style you want to export and click Export Styles. The Save As win-
dow opens.
You can select multiple text styles by holding down the Ctrl key while select-
ing styles.
3. Navigate and save the text style to the desired location.
4. Click Done.
See also: Editing a text style
Deleting a text style
Additional resources: Using Text Styles in Lectora and Lectora Online

Editing the default text style

The default text style used throughout a title is inherited. You can change the default text
style as necessary. You can also limit a style to be applied within a chapter, a section, or
a page. When a text style is specified within the title properties, all text blocks within the
title will automatically be formatted with the attributes of the text style chosen. When a
text style is specified within chapter properties, it will only be applied to text blocks within
that chapter. The same is true for sections. Finally, when a text style is specified within
page properties, only the text blocks on that page will be automatically formatted using
the style chosen.

- 250 -
See also: Understanding inheritance
To change the default text style:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the title, chapter, section or page
you want to change. If you clicked on the title graphic, the Design ribbon is dis-
played. Otherwise, the Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To change the default text settings on the title level, use the controls in the Default
Text Styles group on the Design ribbon. To change the default text settings on
chapter, section, and page levels, you must first disable the Inherit check box in
the text style group for the appropriate title object before you can change the
default text style.
3. Select the text style from the Text Style list and use the controls in the text style
group to edit the text style. To add a new text style or edit an existing font style,
click the Manage Styles from the list. The Text Styles window opens. Use the Text
Styles window to manage your text styles.
See also: Managing text styles
Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML, the program does not
embed the fonts into the published work. It is best to use common, Web-
friendly fonts such as Arial, Verdana, or Tahoma.
At any time during creating your title, you can return to the Properties ribbon to assign a
different text style. The program will reformat all existing text blocks within the title to the
new text style chosen. This reformatting can occur at any organizational level. For
example, use the Properties ribbon of a Chapter to change the default text style for that
chapter only.
See also: Changing the default text properties
Changing text properties for chapters, sections and pages
Additional resources: Using Text Styles in Lectora and Lectora Online

Formatting multiple text blocks at once

You can simultaneously format multiple text blocks.
To format multiple text blocks at once:
1. Select multiple text blocks in one of the following ways:
l While holding down the Ctrl key, select multiple text blocks either from the
Title Explorer or from within your work area.
l Within the work area, click the left mouse button and while holding it down,
draw a rectangular around the text blocks you want to format.
2. When the text blocks are selected, use the Properties ribbon to reformat the text.
Each selected text block will automatically change based on the reformatting
changes you make.

- 251 -
Finding and replacing text
You can find and replace text throughout the title, including title contents, notes, object
names and object descriptions. Find also searches within the Title Explorer. Addi-
tionally, you can narrow your search by specifying in which areas of the title to search.
To search for occurrences of a specific word or phrase:
1. On the Home ribbon, click Find in the Edit group or type Ctrl+F. The Find win-
dow opens.
2. In the Find what field, specify the text for which you are searching.
3. Select Match Case if you want the capitalization to match.
4. Disable the check boxes in the Search box to to narrow the search to a specific
area of the title.
5. Click Find.
6. Click Find Next to find the next instance or click Close to cancel a search in pro-
gress. If the Find window is not open, you can click Find Next in the Edit group
on the Home ribbon to find the next instance.
To replace text based on a search for a specific word or phrase:
1. On the Home ribbon, click Findin the Edit group or type Ctrl+F. Then click the
Replace tab in the Find window opens. Alternatively, you can click Replace in
the Edit group on the Home ribbon. The Find window opens to the Replace tab.
2. Select Match Case if you want the capitalization to match.
3. In the Find what field, enter the text for which you are searching. In the Replace
with field, enter the replacement text.
4. Disable the check boxes in the Search box to to narrow the search to a specific
area of the title.
5. Click Find to find individual occurrences and replace them individually. Click
Replace to replace the occurrence that currently has focus. Click Replace All to
replace all occurrences of the found text, or click Close to exit the Find window.

Checking spelling
You can check the spelling of the text in your title,including within text blocks, question
feedback, messages, button text, and menu items. Additionally, you can add words and
configure options, like ignore domain names and report double words. You can also
select to check the spelling of just the current page or the entire title. Options are avail-
able to ignore types of words and speeding up the search.
To perform a Spell Check, select Spell Check from the Tools ribbon. Click the

drop-down list and select Current Page to check the current page or select Entire Title

- 252 -
to check the entire title. Alternatively, you can check spelling with a text block by high-
lighting the text, right-clicking, and selecting Spell Check. Select an alternative spellings
from the list.
You can also configure your preferences to enable spell check while typing.
See also: Enabling spell check while typing
Spell checks will check for spelling errors within all text blocks, and additional textual
information including question feedback, messages used in display message actions,
button text, and menu items.
You can complete the following for use in checking spelling:
l Add words to your dictionary
l Configure spelling options

Adding words to your dictionary

You can add words to the dictionary. Words that are not recognized to be spelled cor-
rectly appear with a special red underline. Adding words to the dictionary will no longer
identify the added word as a misspelled word when checking spelling.
To add a word to your dictionary:
1. Double-click within the text block containing the word you want to add.
2. Highlight or select the word, right-click and select Add to Dictionary.

Configuring spelling options

You can configure different spelling options, including selecting the main dictionary lan-
guage as well as many other options.
Select from the following spelling options:
l Ignore capitalized words (for example, Canada)
l Ignore all-caps words (for example, ASAP)
l Ignore words with numbers (for example, Win95)

l Ignore words with mixed case (for example, SuperBase)

l Ignore domain names (for example, xyz.com)

l Report doubled words (for example, the the)

l Case sensitive

l Phonetic suggestions (English only)

l Typographical suggestions

l Suggest split words

l Auto correct

Additionally you can specify the main dictionary language and streamline the spelling
suggestions that are displayed.
To configure spelling options:

- 253 -
 1. From Tools ribbon, select the drop-down list under Spell Check and click

Options. The Spelling Options window opens.

2. Configure the spelling options as necessary. Use the Main Dictionary language
field to specify your preferred language for correction suggestions. Select from
American English, British English, or Canada English. Use the Suggestion
box to streamline the suggestions.

Adding the date and time

You can automatically insert the date and time as a text block into your title. You can
also select either the date or the time.
This option uses the timestamp setting currently configured on the local machine.
To add the date and time, click Date/Time in the Add Text group on the Insert rib-
bon. Click the drop-down list to select either the date or the time. The timestamp is
added to your title.

Adding a title to the page

You can insert a title to the page. The title is added as a text block.
To add a title to the page, click Page Title in the Add Text group on the Insert ribbon.
The title is added to your title.

Adding breadcrumbs
Breadcrumbs are an optional navigation aid that allows users to keep track of their loc-
ations within the title. When you add breadcrumbs, a special text block is added to the
top of your title, along with the actions necessary to configure the navigational text that
appears on each page.
To add breadcrumbs to your title, click Breadcrumb from the Add Text on the Insert
ribbon.

Numbering the pages within a title

You can select to number the entire title or limit the scope to a chapter or a section. You
can also include the number of pages, and customize the format and appearance. A pre-
view is provided.
To automatically number the pages:
1. On the Insert ribbon, click Page Number from the Add Text group. The Add
Page Number window opens.

- 254 -
 2. Complete the controls on the Page Numbering Details window as follows:
Scope Select the scope to which you want to apply the page
numbering.
Include the total num- Select this to include the total number of pages within
ber of pages your title. For example, “Page 4 of 12”.
Enter or select format Specify the text representing the page in the numbering,
for example, Slide or Sheet. The default is Page. Use
the second field to specify the text used between the
page number and the total number of pages, for
example, “-“ or “/”. The default is “of”.
Font and Color Use the controls in this group to configure the font char-
acteristics that you want to use for the page numbering.
3. Click Finish.
The program will create a text block and a series of actions at the title level in the Title
Explorer. These objects are necessary for the functionality of the page numbering and
should not be deleted unless you want to remove the page numbering from your title.
The text block and actions are automatically inherited throughout the rest of the title to
display page numbering on every page.

Globally increasing or decreasing the font

size for all the text in a title
You can globally increase or decrease the font size for all the text in a title. A preview is
provided. You can select the percentage to which to increase or decrease the font size of
the text or select a specific font size. This allows you to correct issues caused by open-
ing the title on multiple operating systems with different display settings.
You should create a copy of your title before you make global changes. For
details about saving a copy of title, see Saving a title.
To globally increase or decrease the font size for all the text in title:
1. On the Tools tab, click Text Resize from the Manage group. The Text Resize Tool
window opens.
2. To specify a percentage to which to increase or decrease the font size, select the
first radio button (A percentage of currently used font size(s)) and use the drop-
down list to specify the percentage. To specify a specific font size, select the
second radio (A specific font size) and use the drop-down list to specify the new
font size.
3. Click OK.
The font size for the text is changed.

- 255 -
Working with objects
Add objects to assist in describing topics and use the tools and properties ribbons to edit
and enhance their appearance.
View these topics for more information about working with objects:
l About adding objects
l Adding objects to the title
l Changing common object properties
l Working with images
l Working with audio
l Working with video
l Working with buttons
l Working with characters
l Working with shapes, lines, and arrows
l Working with charts
l Working with certificates
l Working with documents
l Working with Flash animations
l Working with YouTube video objects
l Working with social media content
l Working with Web windows
l Working with RSS feeds
l Working with animations
l Working with HTML extension objects
l Working with tables of contents
l Working with menus
l Working with status indicators
l Working with forms and form elements
l Working with progress bars
l Working with timers
l Working with reference lists
l Working with QR Codes
l Working with equations

- 256 -
 l Grouping and ungrouping objects
l Excluding objects using inheritance
l Moving and resizing objects
l Locking and unlocking objects
l Aligning and positioning objects
l Layering objects
l Working with library objects
l Working with the Media Library
l Working with the Inspire tools

About adding objects

In most cases, when you add an object to your title in any way other than dragging and
dropping, the object's properties ribbons (Properties and Position & Size) are high-
lighted. Controls on these ribbons allow you to configure the appearance of the object on
the page. Each object supports a variety of file types. For example, the animation object
can support Flash files (.swf) or animated GIFs (.gif). For those objects that do not
require a file source, you will either be prompted to configure the object’s properties, or
the object will simply appear within your title.
Any time you add an object to your title, regardless of how you have added it, the pro-
gram creates a copy of the file and places it within the same directory as your title. For
example, if you add an image to your title, the program will make a copy of that image
file, and place it within the images folder that coincides with your title. Only supported file
types can be dragged and dropped into your title, otherwise, the program will prompt you
to add the file as an additional file.
Adding objects outside of the page boundaries
You can place objects completely outside of the page boundaries of the publisher.
These objects will not be viewed by users when the title is published. However, the
object can be moved to or from the page with the Move action. For details about con-
figuring the Move action, see Selecting the action.
See also: Supported media types
Working with the Media Library
Working with documents
How the program organizes your content

Adding objects to a title

Choose from the following ways to add objects to your title:
l From the Insert ribbon, click the appropriate object you want to add from the task-
oriented groups. For example, to add an image, Image from the Add Image group.

- 257 -
 Then navigate and select the image.
l Drag and drop the object from your file system to your work area.
l Insert the object using the Media Library side-tabs (Title Resources, My Library,
and Stock Library).
l Select the object using Quick Insert from the Home ribbon
For additional information view these topics:
l Dragging and dropping an object
l Shortcuts for adding objects
l Working with Quick Insert
l Working with the Media Library

Dragging and dropping an object

You can add objects by dragging and dropping them into the work area from your Win-
dows desktop or from Windows Explorer.
To drag and drop objects into your title:
1. Open a Windows Explorer window containing media files (objects such as images,
Flash, video, and so on) so that it is along side your work area.
2. Select an object or multiple objects within Windows Explorer.
3. Drag the selected objects from your Windows Explorer window into your work
area.
The objects will then appear in your title, where you can arrange them in any way you
choose. The object will appear in both your work area and in the Title Explorer. Double-
click the object or right-click the object and select Properties to access the object's prop-
erties ribbons (Properties and Position & Size).
You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them, and while
holding down the left mouse button, dragging the item within the Title Explorer to
its new location. Once the location is chosen, release the left mouse button, and
the item will be moved.

Shortcuts for adding objects

The following keyboard shortcuts are available for quickly adding objects:
Assignable Unit Ctrl+0
Chapter Ctrl+1
Section Ctrl+2
Page Ctrl+3
Action Ctrl+4

- 258 -
Group Ctrl+5
Test Ctrl+6
Test Section Ctrl+7
Question Ctrl+8
Survey Alt+6
Survey Question Alt+8
Animation Ctrl+9
Audio Ctrl+Shift+0
Button Ctrl+Shift+1
Document Ctrl+Shift+2
Equation Ctrl+Shift+3
External HTML Ctrl+Shift+4
Image Ctrl+Shift+5
Menu Ctrl+Shift+7
Progress Bar Ctrl+Alt+9
Reference List Ctrl+Shift+8
Table of Contents Ctrl+Shift+9
Text Block Ctrl+Alt+0
Video Ctrl+Alt+1
Form Ctrl+Alt+2
Radio Button Group Ctrl+Alt+3
Radio Button Ctrl+Alt+4
Check Box Ctrl+Alt+5
Entry Field Ctrl+Alt+6
Drop-down List Ctrl+Alt+7
List Box Ctrl+Alt+8

Working with Quick Insert

Quick Insert lets you add popular objects from the Home ribbon. Select from the fol-
lowing objects to quickly insert into your title:
Add a text block

Add an image

Add a button

- 259 -
 Add an audio

Add a video

Add an action

Add a question

Add a test

Add a survey

Click More on the bottom on the Quick Insert sub-menu to quickly jump to the Insert rib-
bon.
See also: Working with text
Working with images
Working with buttons
Working with audio
Working with video
Actions and variables
Adding questions
Adding tests
Adding surveys

Changing common object properties

Many properties for objects (images, audio, video and so on) are the same. You can
access these properties for individual objects by double-clicking the object or by select-
ing the object and pressing the Enter key. The object's properties ribbons (Properties
and Position & Size) are highlighted.
View these topics for more information about changing common object properties:
l Changing the name of an object
l Changing the description of an object
l Viewing the HTML name of an object
l Making an object initially hidden
l Placing an object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS class of an object
l Changing the transition properties of an object
l Using an empty ALT tag for an object

- 260 -
 l Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to an object
l Locking the size and position of an object
l Changing the position and size of an object
l Resetting responsive design overrides
l Adding a reference for an object
l Including metadata for an object
l Enabling author control on an object

Changing the name of an object

If the object whose name you want to change relies on a resource file, it is automatically
named from the file in which it originates. That is, if you added MyImage.jpg to your title,
the image will be named MyImage. You can change the name of your objects.
See also: Using resource names as object names
To change the name of an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Specify the new name of the object in the Name field. For images, characters, and
buttons, this is also the name that will be used as the ALT tag when you publish to
the Web.
The object is displayed with the new name in the Title Explorer.

Changing the description of an object

You can change the description of an object.
To change the description of an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner of the first group. The Description
window opens.

- 261 -
 3. Specify the description in the box.
4. Click OK.
The description is added.
See also: Viewing the HTML name of an object

Viewing the HTML name of an object

The HTML name is assigned when you add the object. The HTML name, which is used
to identify the object, cannot be changed.
To view the HTML name of an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner of the first group of controls. The
Description window opens.
The HTML name is displayed in the HTML Name field.
See also: Adding a description of an object

Making an object initially hidden

By default, objects are set to be initially visible. That is, the objects appear when users
open the pages on which the objects are located. You can initially hide an object until an
action has been executed to show the object.
See also: Selecting an action
To make an object initially hidden:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Appearance group, enable the Initially Hidden check box.
The object is set to be initially hidden.

Placing an object on the top layer

You can force an object to always be on the top layer of the page. This is useful when
you have multiple objects layered on your page.

- 262 -
You can change the layer position of objects by sending them backward or bringing
them forward. For details, see Layering objects.
To force an object to the top layer:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Always on Top check box in the Appearance group.
l If multiple objects are set to Always on Top, the program will refer to
the ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of
the objects is on the top layer. The top-most object listed on the page in
the Title Explorer is on the bottom layer of the page.
l The Always on Top setting for buttons is not enabled by default when
Accessibility settings are enabled. For more information about the
Accessibility settings, see Preparing a title for accessibility.
l Always on Top is selected and disabled when Anchor Position is
selected. Anchored objects will always be on top of all other objects,
regardless of where they are ordered in the Title Explorer. (This
includes being treated as on top of other objects marked as "Always on
Top".) For details about the Anchor Position setting, see Changing
the position and size of an object.
The object is forced to the top layer.
See also: Layering objects
Preparing a title for accessibility

Specifying the CSS classes of an object

Multiple cascading style sheet classes allow you to provide multiple looks to an object
when publishing to HTML.
To specify the CSS classes for an object:
1. Double-click the graphic of the object in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can
right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click the object in the work-
area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner of the Appearance group. The
CSS Classes window opens.
3. Specify the CSS classes for the object. Separate the classes with a comma.
The CSS classes are set.

- 263 -
See also: Publishing to HTML

Changing the transition properties of an object

You can specify how an object will load on a page. Transitions will produce a visual
effect as the object appears and disappears. You can specify a transition-in when the
text block loads and a transition-out when it closes.
The transition types for an object are automatically inherited. Changes applied to the
transition type within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained
within the chapter. Changes applied to the transition type within a section's properties
will only be applied to the pages contained within the section, and changes applied to
the transition type within a page's properties will only be applied to the current page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
You can select from over 20 different transitions. You can select random transitions and
remove transitions. There is a Speed slider to determine the speed at which the trans-
ition takes place.
To specify transitions:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. To specify the transition when the object loads, click Transition In from the

Transition group. The Transitions window opens.

3. Specify the following information on the appropriate Transition In or Transition
Out tab:
Transition Select a transition type as one of the following:
l None
l Random
l Random (No Fly)
l Appear
l Bars
l Blinds
l Box
l Checkerboard
l Circle
l Dissolve
l Fade
l Float

- 264 -
 Flyl

Split Horizontal
l

l Split Vertical

l Strips

l Wipe

Transition Options Specify the appropriate option based on the transition you
selected.
Transition Effects Specify the appropriate effect.
Delay before trans- Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition.
ition Select between 0 and 600 seconds.
Speed Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition
should occur.
4. Click OK.

Using an empty ALT tag for an object

You can create an empty ALT tag for an object. An empty ALT tag will ensure that no tip
text is displayed when the user rests their mouse over the object. Also, assistive tech-
nologies will not recognize or will skip over any objects containing an empty ALT tag.
If do you not specify to use an empty ALT tag for buttons with text or shapes or
arrows with text, the text on the object is used for the text in the ALT tag.
To use an empty ALT tag for an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Web Options group, enable the Empty ALT Tag check box.

Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing

You can choose to load an object before the entire Web page is displayed. This option is
selected by default, and will ensure that when the page is displayed, the object to which
this pertains will be visible to the user.
To pre-load an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.

- 265 -
 l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Web Options group, ensure that the Preload check box is enabled.

Adding an action to an object

You can assign actions to objects, such as launching a Web page when an image is
clicked or display a message when a form is displayed.
To add an action to an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Click Action from the Add group. The action is added just below the object in
the Title Explorer and the Action ribbon is displayed.
3. Configure the settings of the action. For example, what specific action should
occur, when should it occur, and under what conditions should it occur. For details,
see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added to the object.
See also: Using the action pane

Adding a reference for an object

You can associate reference information with most objects. You can add information
such as author name and date of publication. Once you specify reference information for
your objects, you can create a complete reference list that will include all of the reference
information for the objects within your title.
See also: Working with reference lists
To specify the reference information:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Add group, click Reference. The Add/Modify Reference window opens.
3. Select the Add a Reference for this Item check box and specify the following

- 266 -
 information:
Author(s) Specify the names of the authors of the item.
Title of Work/Web Specify either the title of the item or the Web page
Page Address address.
Publisher Specify the publisher of the item.
Date of Publication Specify the date of publication of the item.
4. Click OK.

Including metadata for an object

Metadata is data about data. It typically includes information such as a description of the
object, the author, the date it was created, and so on. Search engines look within
metadata for relevant information to the term that was searched. Within objects, the
metadata will be published as standard XML metadata into the accompanying ims-
manifest.xml file for any AICC, CourseMill, or SCORM, published titles. Metadata added
to objects within a title that is published strictly to HTML will be written directly to the res-
ulting HTML pages containing the objects. The metadata can be specified as custom
metadata, an external XML file containing metadata, or as name/value pairs using pre-
defined IMS Metadata Data Elements following the IEEE LTSC LOM standard.
To include metadata for an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Add group, click Metadata. The Add/Modify Metadata window opens.
3. Enable the Use Metadata check box and specify the following information:
Input Custom Select this to enable the Custom Metadata text field for you to
Metadata directly enter custom metadata.
External XML Select this to import an external XML file containing metadata.
File Source Click the Import button to navigate and select the xml file.
IMS (IEEE Select this to display a pre-populated list of name value pairs for
LTSC LOM) all the SCORM 1.2 required IMS Metadata data elements. Click
the Add button to open the Metadata Data Element Entry win-
dow. Select a predefined data element from the Name combo
box and specify a data element value from the Value edit/combo
box. Select OK to accept the data element. Select from pre-
viously entered data elements from the Name/Value lists and
click Edit or Remove to edit or remove the selected element.

- 267 -
 Publish this object’s metadata is checked by default so t-
hat the metadata is included in the published title. Unchec-
k this option if you do not want the metadata included in th-
e published title.
4. Click OK.

Locking the size and position of an object

You can lock the size and position of an object. This preserves it from getting acci-
dentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title.
The object will be locked in size and position within Edit mode.
Items that are locked will not be clickable and will not show the selection rectangle
if clicked in the work area. If they are selected in the Title Explorer, they will show
the selection rectangle.
To lock the position and size of an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Position & Size ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. Click the Lock graphic in the Position & Size group so that the locked padlock
. graphic is displayed.

The position and size of the object is locked.

You can also lock the size and position of the object by right-clicking on the object within
the Title Explorer (or within your work area) and selecting Size/Position Locked from
the right-click context menu. When the object is locked, a check mark will appear to the
left of the Size/Position Locked option within the menu.
See also: Locking and unlocking objects

Changing the position and size of an object

Objects can moved by selecting them in the work-area and moving them using the
mouse. However, you can directly set the position and size of an object from within its
properties.
For responsive titles, the color of the labels for the settings that you can override on the
Position & Size ribbon indicates the device in which an override was placed. For more

- 268 -
information about developing responsive titles and setting overrides, see Working with
responsive content.
To specify the position and size of an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Position & Size ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. Specify the following information. All measurements are based on pixels.
Lock/Unlock Specify whether to lock or unlock the object's position and size.
To lock the position and size so that the object cannot be
changed, click the graphic to display the locked lock ( )

graphic in the Position & Size group. This disables the other

position and size controls. To unlock the position and size so
that the object can be changed, click the graphic to display the
unlocked lock ( ) graphic in the Position & Size group. This

enables the other position and size controls.

X Coordinate Specify the horizontal distance of the object relative to the left
edge of the page. To do so, updated the number of pixels spe-
cified in the X Coordinate field in the Position group.
Y Coordinate Specify the vertical distance of the object relative to the top
edge of the page. To do so, update the number of pixels spe-
cified in the Y Coordinate field in the Position field.
Offset from Specify whether to change the reference point (from the right)
Right from which the object is placed. To do so, enable the Offset
from Right check box in the Position group.
Offset from Bot- Specify whether to change the reference point (from the bottom)
tom from which the object is placed. To do so, enable the Offset
from Bottom check box in the Position group.
Anchor Position Specify whether the object will maintain its location on the
page within the view, even when the view is scrolled. If this
check box is selected, an object at the top - navigation buttons,
a menu, or a table of contents, for example - would stay at the
top of the screen even when users scroll the page up and
down. The anchor graphic is displayed adjacent to anchored
objects when they are selected in the work area.

- 269 -
 l When Anchor Position is selected, Always on
Top is selected and disabled. Anchored objects
will always be on top of all other objects, regardless
of where they are ordered in the Title Explorer.
(This includes being treated as on top of other
objects marked as "Always on Top".) For details
about the Always on Top setting, see Placing an
object on the top layer.
l To anchor objects to the bottom of the page, Offset
from Bottom must be selected for those objects.
l Anchor Position is only maintained on mobile
devices in full view. It is not maintained when the
view is pinched or zoomed.
Width Specify the width of the object. To do so, update the number of
pixels in the Width field in the Size group.
Height Specify the height of the object. To do so, update the number of
pixels in the Height field in the Size group.
Auto Size Click this to automatically size the object to fit the text. The
object is automatically sized to fit the text if the graphic is
changed to . Conversely, the object is not automatically sized
to fit the text if the graphic is changed to .
Maintain Ratio Specify whether to maintain an object's native size ratio . If the
aspect ratio is maintained (locked), and you alter the width of
the object, the height will automatically be adjusted to maintain
the object's original size ratio. The same is true of the object's
width if you alter the height. If the aspect ratio is unlocked, you
can alter the width and height independently. To lock the
aspect ratio of the object, click the graphic to display the locked
( ) graphic in the Maintain Ratio graphic. To unlock the

aspect ratio of the object, click the graphic to display the

unlocked ( ) graphic in the Maintain Ratio graphic.

Reset to Original Specify whether to reset the object to it's original size. The ori-
ginal width and height in pixels are displayed. To reset the
object, click the Reset to Original field.
You can also specify the position of your object directly from the status bar.
See also: Using the status bar
Moving and resizing objects
Aligning and positioning objects

- 270 -
Resetting overrides on an object in a responsive
title
You can reset the responsive design overrides that you have placed on an object. An
override is placed on an object when you move or resize the object or adjust a property
in a child responsive view. Resetting the override restores the link of the object with its
parent device and normal inheritance flow is restored. The override can be reset on a
specific view or in all views. For more information about designing titles with responsive
content, particularly how to set an override, see Working with responsive content.
View these objects for more information:
l Resetting all overrides on an object in all views
l Resetting all overrides on an object in a specific view
l Viewing the list of overrides for an object

Resetting all overrides on an object in all views

You can reset the overrides on an object in all the responsive design views. This
restores the link of the object with its parent device and normal inheritance flow is
restored.
You can find the Reset button, along with the other override options, on each of the prop-
erty ribbons.
To reset the override on an object on all views, do one of the following:
l Right-click the object in the Title Explorer or in the work area and select Remove
this object's overrides in all views.
l Use the Reset button on one of the properties ribbons. To do so:
1. Do one of the following to display the property ribbons for the object: In the
Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Select one of the property ribbons (Properties, Style, Position & Size).
3. Click the Reset button in the Override group and select Reset all Overrides
on all views.
Overrides for the object are reset on all views.

- 271 -
Resetting all overrides on an object for a specific view
You can reset the overrides on an object in a specific responsive design view. This
restores the link of the object with its parent device and normal inheritance flow is
restored.
You can find the Reset button, along with the other override options, on each of the prop-
erty ribbons.
To reset the override for an object in the current view, do one of the following:
l Right-click the object in the Title Explorer or in the work area and select Remove
this object's overrides in this view.
l Use the Reset button on one of the properties ribbons. To do so:
1. Do one of the following to display the property ribbons for the object: In the
Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Select one of the property ribbons (Properties, Style, Position & Size).
3. Click the Reset button in the Override group and select Reset all Overrides
on this view.
Overrides for the object are reset on all views.

Viewing the list of overrides for an object

You can view the list of overrides for an object, including specific move and resize val-
ues for each responsive display type. You can use the list to remove individual over-
rides.
You can find the Reset button, along with the other override options, on each of the prop-
erty ribbons.
To view the list of overrides for an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the property ribbons for the object:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the object and select Prop-
erties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Select one of the property ribbons (Properties, Style, Position & Size).

- 272 -
 3. Click the Reset button in the Override group and select Override List. The Over-
ride List is displayed.
Rows in the table represent moves or resizings for the selected object to the new
positions.
To remove an override in the list, select it and click Remove.
4. Click OK to close the list.

Enabling author control on an object

Protect the object by enabling Author Control. With Author Control enabled, additional
authors will not be able to edit the object unless they have the master Author Control
password. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Prop-
erties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the first group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable author control on an object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
The object is now protected. The graphic changes to the Locked Control graphic.

Working with images

Add and edit images as necessary.
The program supports the following image formats:
l JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg)
l GIF (.gif)

l TIFF (.tif)

l Windows Bitmap (.bmp)

l Windows Enhanced Metafiles (.emf)

l Windows Metafiles (.wmf)

l Portable Network Graphics (.png)

View these topics for more information about working with images:

- 273 -
 l Creating new images
l Creating screen-capture images
l Adding existing image files
l Changing the resource of an image
l Enabling author control on an image
l Editing an image
l Working with clip-art
l Changing the name of an image
l Specifying a description of an image
l Viewing the HTML name of an image
l Making an image initially hidden
l Placing an image on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS class of an image
l Changing the transition properties of an image
l Using an empty ALT tag for an image
l Pre-loading an image for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to an image
l Adding a reference for an image
l Including metadata for an image
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Changing or removing the border of an image
l Adjusting the transparency of an image
l Changing shadowing and reflection effects of an image
l Cropping an image
l Locking the size and position of an image
l Changing the position and size of an image
l Rotating and flipping an image
l Changing the layer of an image
l Grouping and ungrouping images
l Aligning an image

Creating new images

You can create new images and apply professional finishing touches and special
effects. The images can be saved in various formats.

- 274 -
To create a new image:
1. From the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Image in the Add

Image group and select Add Image. The Snagit Editor window opens.
2. Use the Snagit Editor to create and save the new image.
The new image is saved. For detailed information about using the Snagit Editor, click F1
or access the Help pull-down list.
The image is not automatically added to the title. For details about adding the image,
see Adding objects to a title.

Creating screen capture images

You can capture and edit a portion of the visual image of your screen. This is valuable
when creating step-by-step software demonstrations, displaying examples of Web
pages, or capturing an event on your system. After you’ve captured a screen image, you
can manipulate it in a variety of ways and add it to your title.
To create a screen capture image:
1. From the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under under Image in the

Add Image group and select New Screen Capture.

2. Use the Snagit Editor to capture, edit, and save the new screen image.
When you are finished editing the screen image, add the screen image to your title.
For detailed information about using Snagit, click F1 or use the Help pull-down list.
See also:Adding objects to a title

Adding existing image files

You can drag an image onto a page or select it using one of several interface options.
The image can be an image file located on your computer, a custom image in the Media
Library, a stock image file that comes with the program, or an existing image that is
already included in the title.
To add an image file located on your file system:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the image.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Image in the Add

Image group and select Image File. Navigate and select the image file.
l On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down menu under Add object in the
Quick Insert group and select the Add Image graphic. Navigate and

- 275 -
 select the image file.
l Drag and drop a supported image file from a Windows Explorer window to
the work area.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Image.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+5. Navigate and select the image file.
The local image file is added to the title.
To add a custom image file from the Media Library:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the image.
2. Do one of the following :
l From the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Image in the Add

Image group and select My Library.

l Click the My Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area.
3. From the Media Library, double-click the custom image or drag it onto the page.
The custom image file is added to the title.
To add a stock image file:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the image.
2. Click the Stock Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, nav-
igate, and either double-click the image file or drag the appropriate image file onto
the page.
The stock image file is added to the title.
To re-use an image that already exists in the title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the image.
2. Click the Title Resources side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, open
the Images group, and either double-click the image file or drag the image file onto
the page.
The existing image is added to the title.
See also: Working with the Media Library

Changing the resource of an image

You can change the resource file of an image. You can select a resource from several
locations. You can select a previously imported file, select a local file, or select from the
Media Library.
For responsive titles, the color of the label for the Image setting on the Properties ribbon
indicates the device in which an image change override was placed. For more inform-

- 276 -
ation about developing responsive titles and setting overrides, see Working with respons-
ive content.
To change the resource file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the image graphic.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the image graphic and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the image and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the image.
l In the work area, right-click the image and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the image and type Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Image group, use the Image field to select the resource file. Previously
imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To select a
local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library, select
Browse My Media.
The resource file is changed.

Editing an image
You can edit an image after you have created and added it to the title. Additionally, you
can convert and share the image. Images are edited using the Snagit Editor.
When you install Lectora, the Snagit Editor is specified as the default editor for editing
images. You can specify the editor application used by the program to externally edit
resource image files used within a title. For example, you can specify to open Windows
Paint for editing images. For details, see Specifying editor preferences.
To edit an image:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the image graphic, then click the edit
graphic in the Image group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the image graphic and select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the image and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the image and click the Edit graphic in the
Image group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the image and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the image and type Shift + Enter.
The Snagit Editor opens.
2. Use the Snagit Editor to edit and save the image.

- 277 -
For detailed information about using the Snagit Editor, click F1 or use the Help pull-
down list.
When you save your editing changes, the image file is automatically updated in the title.
To select another image to edit from the Properties ribbon, click the Image pull-down
list adjacent to the Edit graphic in the Image group.

Working with clip-art

Clip-art is a collection of predefined graphics and illustrations. Add them to save time cre-
ating artwork on your own.
The clip-art images are stored in the Media Library in topic-based folders and semi-
folders.
After you have added a clip-art image, you can change its appearance using the options
on the Image Properties tabs .
To add clip-art:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a clip-art image.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Image in the Add

Image group and select ClipArt. The Stock Library side-tab opens.
3. Use the Stock Library side-tab to navigate and select the appropriate clip-art
image. Previews of the clip-art images are displayed, along with the corresponding
file name.
4. Click OK.
The clip-art image is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties ribbons (Prop-
erties and Position & Size) to configure the appearance, location and size of the clip-art
image. You can also edit the clip-art image if necessary.
See also: Changing common object properties
Editing an image

Changing or removing the border of an image

You can change or remove the weight, color, and style of the border of an image.
To change or remove the border weight of an image:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object. To select multiple images, click the first image, then press and hold the
CTRL key while you click the other images.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Border Weight field to select the weight. Select
0 to remove the border.
The border weight for the images you selected is changed.

- 278 -
To change the border color of an image:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object. To select multiple images, click the first image, then press and hold the
CTRL key while you click the other images.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Border Color list to select the color. Use the
Color list to select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color
from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the
Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
The border color for the images you selected is changed.
To change the border style of an image:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object. To select multiple images, click the first image, then press and hold the
CTRL key while you click the other images.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Border Style list to select the style.
The border style for the images you selected is changed.

Adjusting the transparency of an image

You can adjust the transparency of an image. This is controlled by the opacity setting of
the image.
For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, an image will not render a shadow or reflec-
tion if the object has has reduced opacity (less than 100).
To adjust the opacity of an image:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object. To select multiple images, click the first image, then press and hold the
CTRL key while you click the other images.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Opacity field to select the opacity of the images.
Select 0 to make the image completely transparent.
The transparency of the images you selected is changed.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

- 279 -
Changing shadowing and reflection effects of an
image
You can change the shadowing and reflection effects of image objects. For shadowing,
you can change the type, color, transparency, blur, angle and distance.
l You cannot add shadowing and reflection effects to images that are embed-
ded in a text block.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, an image will not render a shadow or
reflection if the object has been rotated, flipped, or has reduced opacity (less
than 100). For more information, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser Dif-
ferences with Effects.
l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, an image will not render a shadow or
reflection if the browser's document mode is set to 9 or less. For more inform-
ation, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser Differences with Effects.
To add an effect to an image:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object. To select multiple images, click the first image, then press and hold the
CTRL key while you click the other images.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Effects group, use the Shadow and Reflection fields to select effects for of
the shape, arrow, and line objects. To change the shadow options, select Shadow
Options from the bottom of the Shadow drop-down list. This opens the Shadow
Options window. Use the controls on the Shadow Options window as follows:
Shadow Color of the shadow. To change the color setting, you can select a
Color predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select
an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-
select a new color from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Transparency Transparency setting (opacity) of the shadowing in a percentage.
Blur Blur effect of the shadowing.
Angle Angle of the shadowing relative to the object.
Distance Distance of the shadowing in pixels.
The effects you selected are added to the images.

- 280 -
Cropping an image
You can remove the outer parts of an image. This is called cropping an image. Do this to
improve the framing or to better highlight the subject matter.
To crop an image:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Cropping group, click the Crop graphic. Cropping borders are added

over the image. Move the cropping borders to adjust the new borders for the image.
4. Click the Crop graphic again.
The image is cropped. To remove the cropping, select Remove Crop under the Crop
graphic.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Rotating and flipping an image

You can rotate and flip an image. You can rotate an image using the green rotation
handle that is displayed when you select an image or using the rotation controls in the
Rotation and Mirroring group on the Position & Size ribbon.
l You cannot rotate or flip images that are embedded in a text block.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, an image will not render a shadow or
reflection if the object has been rotated or flipped.
l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, an image will not render a horizontal
or vertical flip if the browser's document mode is set to 9 or less.
To rotate an image using the green rotation handle:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object.
The image is selected and the green rotation handle is displayed along the top of
the image.
2. Move your cursor over the rotation handle so that your cursor changes to the rota-
tion arrows over the handle.
3. Hold the left mouse button and move your mouse left or right to rotate the image.
Release the left mouse button to set the rotation.
The image is rotated using the green rotation handle.

- 281 -
To rotate and flip an image using the rotation controls in the Rotation and Mirroring
group on the Position & Size ribbon.
1. In the Title Explorer, click the image graphic or in the work area, click the image
object.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. In the Rotation and Mirroring group, use the controls to rotate and flip the image.
Click Rotate Right 90° to rotate the image 90° to the right. Click Rotate Left 90° to
rotate the image 90° to the left. Click Flip Vertical to vertically flip the image. Click
Flip Horizontal to horizontally flip the image. Use the Angle field to select the rota-
tion angle.
The image is rotated using the rotation controls.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Working with audio

Create new audio or add existing auido to your title. The program supports audio in .mp3
format.
• To continue the commitment toward responsive titles and mobile delivery, Lect-
ora is ceasing support for audio other than the .mp3 file format. The following
audio file types are not supported in Run and Preview Mode, and might not play
successfully when published:
l Flash Audio (.flv)
l Uncompressed Windows audio (.wav)
l Standard MIDI (.mid)
l MPEG 4 Audio (.m4a)
l Advanced Systems Format (.asf)
l uLaw audio (.au)
l Windows Media audio (.wma)
Converting these file types to .mp3 audio will ensure optimal playback. Media
containing synchronized actions will continue to play in the published content;
however you will need to convert them to .mp3 to edit the events. Synchronized
eventsactions are actions configured to run at specific times while the media
object is playing, like hiding or showing messages or moving a pointer on a dia-
gram. For more information, see Adding and managing the synchronized
eventsactions of an audio object and Adding and managing the synchronized
eventsactions of a video object.
• Selecting the optimal audio bit rate - the rate at which the audio data is trans-

- 282 -
 ferred - directly determines the overall size of the audio object. The higher the bit
rate, the larger the file is that needs to be transferred online. Additionally, long
audio objects recorded with unnecessarily high bit rates can lead to using up
your bandwidth and the bandwidth of your users. Music perfectionists demand
the highest bit rates for music; however, for audio objects containing mostly voice
and talking, lower bit rates - 64kbps to 192kbps can be used (96kbps in mono
recording is recommended). If file size is an issue and the object contains only
voice narration, 64kpbs mono is suggested. For more complex audio objects -
often with sound as a background to voice sections - you might want to increase
to 128kbps to provide extra clarity. Always choose a constant bit rate; variable bit
rates can cause problems and are not recommended. Replay your audio objects
to make sure the quality is achieved while maintaining manageable file sizes.
View these topics for more information about working with audio objects:
l Recording new audio
l Adding an existing audio file
l Changing the name of an audio object
l Changing the resource of an audio
l Enabling author control on an audio object
l Editing an audio object
l Specifying a description of an audio object
l Viewing the HTML name of an audio object
l Making an audio icon or controller initially invisible
l Placing an audio icon or controller on the top layer
l Automatically starting the audio object
l Continuously playing the audio object
l Converting to MP3 audio
l Specifying the type of audio
l Specifying a display type for audio
l Applying a skin to the audio controller
l Specifying the CSS class of an audio
l Locking the size and position of an audio icon or controller
l Adding and managing synchronized eventsactions of an audio object
l Changing the transitions of an audio object
l Adding a reference to an audio object

- 283 -
 l Including metadata for an audio object
l Working with closed-captioning audio objects

Recording a new audio object

You can record a new audio file and add it to the title. The audio is recorded as a .mp3
file and is added to the title after you create it.
To create a new audio object:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the new video
object.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Add Object in the

Quick Insert group and select Add Audio.

l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down menu under Audio in the Add

Media group and select New Audio Recording.

l From the Tools ribbon, click Audio Recording from the Create New

group.
The Audio Editor opens.
3. Click the Setup graphic to select the appropriate microphone from the Audio
device field and click OK.
4. When you are ready to record, click the Record button. When you are finished

recording, click the record button again. The Save Recording window opens.
5. Click Save to save the recording.
The audio recording is prepared and added to the page.
Additional resources: Recording Audio and Video with Built-in Tools in Lectora

Adding existing audio files

You can drag an audio onto a page or select and add it using one of several interface
options. The audio can be an audio file located on your computer, a custom audio in the
Media Library, a stock audio file that comes with the program, or an existing audio that is
already included in the title.
You can convert an audio object to MP3 (.mp3) and compress it, if necessary. When you
convert an object, all instances of the resource are changed throughout your title. For
details about converting to MP3 format, see Converting to MP3 audio.

- 284 -
 For responsive titles, audio files must be converted to MP3 format, especially
when building for the mobile environment.
To add an audio file located on your file system:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the audio.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down menu under Add object in the
Quick Insert group and select the Add Audio graphic. Navigate and

select the audio file.

l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Audio in the Add

Media group and select Audio File. Navigate and select the audio file.
l Drag and drop a supported audio file from a Windows Explorer window to the
work area.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Audio.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+0. Navigate and select the audio file.
3. Click OK.
The local audio file is added to the title.
To add a custom audio file from the Media Library:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the audio.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Audio in the Add

Media group and select My Audio. Navigate and select the audio file then
click OK.
l Click the My Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area. From
the Media Library, navigate and double-click the custom audio or drag it onto
the page.
The custom audio file is added to the title.
To add a stock audio file:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the audio.
2. Click the Stock Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, nav-
igate, and double-click the audio file or drag the it onto the page.
The stock audio file is added to the title.
To re-use an audio that already exists in the title:

- 285 -
 1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the audio.
2. Click the Title Resources side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, open
the Audios group, and either double-click the audio file or drag it onto the page.
The existing audio is added to the title.
See also: Working with the Media Library

Adding streaming audio

Streaming audio is audio that is played back as it is downloaded. To stream audio in a
title, you must specify the Web address of the audio stream. You can preview the audio
stream before adding it to the title.
To add an audio stream:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the audio.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click the arrow under Audio from the Add Media group

and select Streaming Audio. The Add Streaming Audio window opens.
3. Use the Audio Type field to select the appropriate type of audio stream and use
the URL field to specify the Web address of the audio stream.
4. Click Preview to preview the audio stream.
5. Click OK.
The audio stream is added to the title.

Changing the resource of an audio

You can change the resource file of an audio. You can select a resource from several loc-
ations. You can select a previously imported file, select a local file, or select from the
Media Library.
To change the resource file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the audio graphic.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the audio graphic and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the audio and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the audio.
l In the work area, right-click the audio and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the audio and type Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Audio group, use the audio field to select the resource file. Previously impor-
ted files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To select a local

- 286 -
 file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library, select Browse My
Media.
The resource file is changed.

Editing an audio object

You can edit an audio object after you have created and added it to the title. Additionally,
you can convert the audio object.
To edit an audio object:
1. Do one of the following to open the Audio Editor:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object, then click
Edit in the Audio group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the audio object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object and click Edit in the

Audio group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the audio object and type Shift + Enter.
The Audio Editor opens.
2. Use the Audio Editor to edit and save the audio.
For detailed information about using the Audio Editor, click F1 or use the Help pull-
down list.
When you save your editing changes in Audio Editor, the audio file is automatically
updated in the title.
To select another audio to edit from the Properties ribbon, click the Audio pull-down list
adjacent to Edit in the Audio group.

Additional resources: Recording Audio and Video with Built-in Tools in Lectora

Converting to MP3 audio

You can convert an audio object to MP3 (.mp3) and compress it, if necessary.
When you convert an object, all instances of the resource are changed throughout your
title.
Converting to MP3 is only available to relevant file types.
You can also convert relevant file types within the Resource Manager. See Con-

- 287 -
 verting audio and video for more information.
Convert existing audio objects or convert audio objects when you insert them into a title.
To convert an audio object:
1. If you are inserting the object, enable the Convert to MP3 check box. For an exist-
ing audio object, select the object, right-click, and choose Convert to MP3 or do
one of the following to display the Properties ribbon and select Convert to MP3:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
2. Use the Compression Level slider to select a compression level.
Higher compression levels will result in smaller files, but the quality of the media
will deteriorate as compression increases.
3. Click Convert.
The audio object is converted.

Changing the display type of an audio object

When you add audio to your title, you can specify whether to display a speaker icon, a
controller, a custom controller image, or hide the audio object while it plays. The display
image allows users to control playback of the audio.
If you select to display a controller, you can select from several predefined con-
troller skins. See Applying a skin to the controller.
To specify the display type for the audio:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
2. In the Playback Options group, click Display and select one of the following
options:
None (Invis- This makes the audio transparent on the page. Users will have no
ible) control over the audio.
Controller This will display an audio controller so users have the ability to
fast forward, rewind, play, pause, and stop the audio.
Speaker Icon This is the default display for an audio object. the program dis-

- 288 -
 plays a speaker graphic that when clicked, will enable users to
toggle the audio on and off.
Browse for Select this to specify a custom image for use as the speaker icon.
File Navigate and select a custom image.
Browse My Select this to specify an image from the Media Library. Navigate
Media and select a predefined image.

Changing the skin of the audio controller

When you have selected to display an audio object using a controller, you can apply a
predefined or custom skin to the controller or import a skin.
For information about creating a custom skin for the controller, see Creating custom
skins for media.
To apply a skin to the controller:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
2. In the Playback Options group, click Controller and select a skin from the

list. A preview of the skin is displayed.

The skin you selected is applied to the controller.
To import a custom skin:
1. In the Playback Options group, click Controller and select Manage Custom

Skins. The Manage Custom Skins window opens.

2. Click Import skin to navigate and select the custom skin zip file. The imported cus-
tom skin is added to the list in the box. A preview of the skin is displayed.
3. To add the skin to the list of skins to apply, select the skin from the list and click
OK.
The skin is added to the list of skins that can be applied to the controller.
To delete a custom skin:
1. In the Playback Options group, click Controller and select Manage Custom

Skins. The Manage Custom Skins window opens.

2. Select the custom skin you want to delete and click Delete skin.
3. Click OK.

- 289 -
The skin you selected is deleted.

Automatically starting an audio object

You can chose to automatically start an audio object when the page containing the
audio appears to the user.
l Audio objects do not automatically start on mobile devices. Adding a Play
button is recommended.
l A page with 25 or more media configured to automatically start might exper-
ience issues on mobile devices. For more information, see Automatically
playing media on mobile devices.
To automatically start the audio:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Auto Start check box in the Playback Options group.

Continuously playing an audio object

You can have audio object automatically restart when it has reached the end of the play-
back. The audio will loop until the user has exited the page or has selected to stop the
playback.
To continuously play an audio object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Loop check box in the Playback Options group.

Adding and managing the synchronized actions

of an audio object
Synchronized actions are actions configured to run at specific times while the audio
object is playing. For example, you can hide or show text blocks or move a pointer on a
diagram while users interact with the audio object.

- 290 -
 Synchronized actions are only supported with .mp3 audio file types only.

When you add and synchronized actions to an audio file, those actions are saved sep-
arately from the media. This allows you to swap the media without losing the syn-
chronized actions.
View these topics for more information:
l Adding synchronized actions to an audio object
l Viewing the synchronized actions of an audio object
l Editing synchronized actions of an audio object
l Deleting synchronized actions from the synced actions list of an audio object

Adding synchronized events to an audio object

You can add synchronized events directly from the work-area. This involves specifying
the time, synchronized event name, action, and target for each synchronized event.
The Synchronize Events dialog also allows you to view the synchronized events within
the audio object, edit synchronized events, and delete synchronized events.
Synchronized events are only supported with .mp3 audio file types.

To add a synchronized event to an audio object:

1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Audio field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. Use the Play/Pause button or the audio controller to control the playback of

the audio object. At the appropriate time within the audio object, click Event.
This adds an synchronized event to the synchronized events table.

- 291 -
 • You can adjust the timing and the synchronized event name and change
the action and target associated with the synchronized event. For details,
see Editing synchronized events of an audio object.
• Edit the synchronized event names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized event names must be unique.
5. To specify the action and target associated with the synchronized event, select the
synchronized event row and use the controls in the Action and Target box.
For example, to launch a message, click Event to add the synchronized event
to the synchronized event table. In the Action and Target box, select Display Mes-
sage from the action drop-down list and use the Message box to specify the appro-
priate message.
The synchronized event is added to the synchronized events table.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Viewing the synchronized events of an audio object
Deleting synchronized events of an audio file

Adding synchronized actions to an audio object

You can add synchronized actions directly from the work-area. This involves specifying
the time, synchronized action name, action, and target for each synchronized actions.
The Synchronize Actions dialog also allows you to view the synchronized actions within
the audio object, edit synchronized actions, and delete synchronized actions.
Synchronized actions are only supported with .mp3 audio file types.

To add an synchronized action to an audio object:

1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the

- 292 -
 media and use the Audio field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. Use the Play/Pause button or the audio controller to control the playback of

the audio object. At the appropriate time within the audio object, click Syn-
chronized action. This adds an synchronized action to the synchronized actions
table.
• You can adjust the timing and the synchronized action name and change
the action and target associated with the synchronized action. For details,
see Editing synchronized actions of an audio object.
• Edit the synchronized action names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized action names must be unique.
5. To specify the action and target associated with the synchronized action, select the
synchronized action row and use the controls in the Action and Target box.
For example, to launch a message, click Synchronized action to add the syn-
chronized action to the synchronized action table. In the Action and Target box,
select Display Message from the action drop-down list and use the Message box
to specify the appropriate message.
The synchronized action is added to the synchronized actions table.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Viewing the synchronized events of an audio object
Deleting synchronized events of an audio file

Viewing the synchronized events of an audio object

You can view the list of current synchronized events of an audio object. To view the list
of synchronized events , use the Synchronize Events window launched from the object's
Properties ribbon.
To view the synchronized events of an audio object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.

- 293 -
 2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens.
The synchronized events are listed in the synchronized events table. Use the table to
adjust the timing, name, action, and target for each synchronized events. You can also
delete synchronized events. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to
change the name of the media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if
necessary.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized events to an audio object
Editing synchronized events of an audio file
Deleting synchronized events of an audio file

Viewing the synchronized actions of an audio object

You can view the list of current synchronized actions of an audio object. To view the list
of synchronized actions, use the Synchronize Actions window launched from the
object's Properties ribbon.
To view the synchronized actions of an audio object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens.
The synchronized actions are listed in the synchronized actions table. Use the table to
adjust the timing, name, action, and target for each synchronized actions. You can also
delete synchronized actions. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to
change the name of the media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if
necessary.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized actions to an audio object
Editing synchronized actions of an audio file
Deleting synchronized actions of an audio file

- 294 -
Editing synchronized events of an audio object
You can edit the synchronized events of an audio object. To edit synchronized events,
use the Synchronize Events dialog launched from the object's Properties ribbon.
To edit an synchronized events:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Audio field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. To adjust the precise timing of the appropriate synchronized event, click within the
Time column and specify the time to launch the synchronized events. To edit the
name of the synchronized event, click within the Name column and specify the
appropriate name for the synchronized event. All synchronized event names must
be unique. To update the action and target associated with the synchronized
event, select the synchronized event row and use the controls in the Action and
Target box.
Edit the synchronized event names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized event names must be unique.
The synchronized action is updated.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized events to an audio object
Viewing the synchronized events of an audio file
Deleting synchronized events of an audio file

Editing synchronized actions of an audio object

You can edit the synchronized actions of an audio object. To edit synchronized actions,
use the Synchronize Actions dialog launched from the object's Properties ribbon.
To edit an synchronized actions:

- 295 -
 1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Audio field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. To adjust the precise timing of the appropriate synchronized action, click within the
Time column and specify the time to launch the synchronized actions. To edit the
name of the synchronized action, click within the Name column and specify the
appropriate name for the synchronized action. All synchronized action names must
be unique. To update the action and target associated with the synchronized
action, select the synchronized action row and use the controls in the Action and
Target box.
Edit the synchronized action names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized action names must be unique.
The synchronized action is updated.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized actions to an audio object
Viewing the synchronized actions of an audio file
Deleting synchronized actions of an audio file

Deleting synchronized events of an audio object

You can delete synchronized events of an audio object. To delete an appropriate syn-
chronized event, use the Synchronize Events window launched from the object's Prop-
erties ribbon.
To delete a synchronized event of an audio object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select

- 296 -
 Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Event in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens
3. Select the row of the synchronized event you want to delete and click .
The synchronized event is deleted.
See also: Adding synchronized events to an audio object
Editing synchronized events of an audio file
Viewing synchronized events of an audio file

Deleting synchronized actions of an audio object

You can delete synchronized actions of an audio object. To delete an appropriate syn-
chronized action, use the Synchronize Actions window launched from the object's Prop-
erties ribbon.
To delete a synchronized action of an audio object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate audio object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Action in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens
3. Select the row of the synchronized action you want to delete and click .
The synchronized action is deleted.
See also: Adding synchronized actions to an audio object
Editing synchronized actions of an audio file
Viewing synchronized actions of an audio file

Working with closed-captioning audio objects

You can integrate closed-captioning in .mp3, .m4a, and .flv audio objects. The cap-
tioning text is displayed within the audio according to details specified within an asso-
ciated configuration file.

- 297 -
 l When captions are integrated into an audio object, the audio controller
height increases by about 90 pixels to accommodate displaying the cap-
tioning text.
l Hidden audio and audio enabled without a controller will disable cap-
tioning.
l Closed captions can be disabled/off (displayed with the word “None”) or
enabled/on (displayed with the word “English”). Regardless of the lan-
guage in the caption file, the controller will show “None” or “English”.
Select from three supported formats:
l Web Video Text Tracks (WebVTT) - Captioning format for HTML media players
(Recommended)
l SubRip Subtitle (SRT) - Popular standard used for YouTube and Facebook cap-
tioning
l eXtensible Markup Language (XML) - Captioning format for Flash video
Examples of each format are provided below.
Additionally, you can customize the caption styling, including the font and font high-
lighting. The following font properties can be configured within the closed-captioning file:
Font property Description Example
color A general color name or a specific hexa- Red or #FFCC00
decimal color value.
font-family An installed font. Arial
font-size Size of the font in pixels. The default font size is 12
14.
font-style Style of the font. The default is normal. italic
font-weight Weight of the font. The default is normal. bold
text-align Alignment of the caption text as either left, right, Center
or center. The default is center.
text-decoration Enhanced font highlighting. The default is underline
none.
Follow these rules when creating the captioning file:
l Specify the start and end times for each caption set. Time is in the format:
hours:minutes:seconds:hundredths (HH:MM:SS:hhh)
l Specify the text for each caption set. Text can appear on multiple lines, if desired.
l Optionally, customize the font styling using a <span> tag.
l Save the file as a plain text file with the desired name and change the file exten-
sion to the appropriate captioning file format (.vtt, .srt, or .xml).

- 298 -
Sample files are provided to help you quickly get started creating and specifying the
closed captioning file.
To create and specify a closed-captioning file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the audio object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the audio object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the audio object.
l In the work area, right-click the audio object and select Properties.
2. On the Properties ribbon, click Add Captions in the Playback Options group.
The Add Captions window opens.
3. For an existing captioning file, use the Caption File pull-down list to navigate and
select the captioning file. Click Edit to edit the file if necessary. To view a sample
format file that you can copy and paste to a text editor, click one of the three file
formats under Sample caption file formats. The WebVTT format (.vtt) is recom-
mended.
4. Click OK.
Examples
l WebVTT (Recommended)
00:00:00.000 --> 00:00:00.000
<span style="text-align:center"></span>

00:00:08.000 --> 00:00:10.000

VTT Format: This line should appear at 8 seconds

00:00:10.500 --> 00:00:12.500

These two lines should
appear at 10.5 seconds

00:00:17.000 --> 00:00:20.000

These two lines should appear
with styling at <span style="color: #FF0000;font-weight:
bold;">17 seconds</span>!
l SRT
00:00:00.000 --> 00:00:00.000
<span style="text-align:center"></span>

- 299 -
 1
00:00:08.000 --> 00:00:10.000
SRT Format: This line should appear at 8 seconds

2
00:00:10.500 --> 00:00:12.500
These two lines should
appear at 10.5 seconds

3
00:00:17.000 --> 00:00:20.000
These two lines should appear
with styling at <span style="color: #FF0000;font-weight:
bold;">17 seconds</span>!
l XML
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<tt xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2006/10/ttaf1">
<div>
<p begin="00:00:00" end="00:00:00">
<span style="text-align:center"></span>
<p begin="00:00:08" end="00:00:10">
XML Format: This line should appear at 8 seconds
</p>
<p begin="00:00:10.5" end="00:00:12.5">
These two lines should
appear at 10.5 seconds
</p>
<p begin="00:00:17" end="00:00:20">
These two lines should appear
with styling at <span style="color: #FF0000;font-
weight: bold;">17 seconds</span>!
</p>
</div>
</tt>

Additional resources: How to Add Closed Captions to Video and Audio in Lectora and
Lectora Online

Working with video

Create new video or add existing video to your title. The program supports video in .mp4
format.

- 300 -
 l To continue the commitment toward responsive titles and mobile delivery,
Lectora is ceasing support for video formats other than the .mp4 file format.
The following video file types are not supported in Run and Preview Mode,
and might not play successfully when published:
l Apple QuickTime® movie (.mov)
l Advanced Systems Format (.asf)
l Audio Video Interleave (.avi)
l Flash Video (.flv and .f4v)
l Moving Picture Experts Group (.mpg, .mpeg, MPEG-4, .mpg4, .M4V)
l Windows Media Video (.wmv)
Converting these file types to .mp4 video will ensure optimal playback.
Media containing synchronized actions will continue to play in the published
content; however you will need to convert them to .mp4 to edit the events.
Synchronized eventsactions are actions configured to run at specific times
while the media object is playing, like hiding or showing messages or mov-
ing a pointer on a diagram. For more information, see Adding and managing
the synchronized eventsactions of an audio object and Adding and man-
aging the synchronized eventsactions of a video object.
l YouTube Security Warning: YouTube streaming video when published to
HTML and run locally from your hard drive might display a security warning.
The warning is a Flash security warning related specifically to running the
video locally from a machine (as opposed to running it from the Web). When
your title is published to a Web server, this error will not occur and users of
your published title will not see the security warning.
You can also add YouTube video objects into a title. For details, see Working with
YouTube videos.
An attached Web camera or video camera is required to create a new video object.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with video:
l Recording new video objects
l Adding existing video files
l Creating screen recordings using Camtasia
l Adding streaming video objects
l Changing the resource of a video
l Editing a video object
l Enabling author control on a video
l Adding a description of a video object
l Viewing the HTML name of a video

- 301 -
 l Changing the name of a video
l Adding streaming video objects
l Making a video initially invisible
l Placing a video on the top layer
l Automatically starting a video
l Continuously playing a video object
l Displaying the controller when users roll-over the video object
l Applying a skin to the video controller
l Adding and managing the synchronized eventsactions of a video object
l Converting to MP4 video
l Working with closed-captioning video obects
l Changing the transitions of a video object
l Adding an action to a video object
l Adding a reference for a video object
l Including metadata for a video object
l Locking the size and position of a video
l Specifying the position and size of a video

Recording a new video object

You can record a new video file and add it to the title. The video is recorded as a .mp4
file and is added to the title after you create it. An attached Web camera or video camera
is required to create a new video object.
To create a new video object:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the new video
object.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Add Object in the

Quick Insert group and select Add Video.

l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down menu under Video in the Add

Media group and select New Video Recording.

l From the Tools ribbon, click Video Recording from the Create New

group.

- 302 -
 The Video Editor window opens.
3. Click the Setup graphic to select the appropriate audio and video devices. Use
the Audio devices field to the select the appropriate microphone and use the
Video devices field to select the appropriate video camera. Click OK.
4. When you are ready to record, click the record button. When you are finished

recording, click the record button again. The Save Recording window opens.
5. Click Save to save the recording.
The video recording is prepared and added to the page.
Additional resources: Recording Audio and Video with Built-in Tools in Lectora

Adding existing video files

You can drag a video onto a page or select and add it using one of several interface
options. The video can be a video file located on your computer, a custom video in the
Media Library, a stock video file that comes with the program, or an existing video that is
already included in the title.
You can convert a video object to MP4 (.mp4) and compress it, if necessary. When you
convert an object, all instances of the resource are changed throughout your title. For
details about converting to MP4 format, see Converting to MP4 video.
For responsive titles, video files must be converted to MP4 format, especially when
building for the mobile environment.
To add a video file located on your file system:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the video.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Home ribbon, click the down-arrow under Add object in the Quick
Insert group and select the Add Video graphic. Navigate and select the

video file.
l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Video in the Add

Media group and select Video File. Navigate and select the video file.
l Drag and drop a supported video file from a Windows Explorer window to the
work area.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Video.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+1. Navigate and select the video file.
3. Click OK.
The local video file is added to the title.
To add a custom video file from the Media Library:

- 303 -
 1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the video.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Video in the Add

Media group and select My Library. Navigate and select the audio file then
click OK.
l Click the My Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area. .
From the Media Library, navigate and double-click the custom video or drag it
onto the page.
The custom video file is added to the title.
To add a stock video file:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the video.
2. Click the Stock Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, nav-
igate, and double-click the video file or drag the it onto the page.
The stock video file is added to the title.
To re-use a video that already exists in the title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the video.
2. Click the Title Resources side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, open
the Videos group, and either double-click the video file or drag it onto the page.
The existing video is added to the title.
See also: Working with the Media Library

Creating screen recordings using Camtasia

Camtasia allows you to create captivating videos and record screen activity. After you
have created the video, you can edit it in a variety of ways and add it to your title.
When you are finished capturing and editing the video, select Produce or Produce and
share from the File menu to launch the Production Wizard. Select Lectora Output to
save the video as a MP4 video file and then add it to your title.
You can add synchronized actions to videos produced by Camtasia. Ssyn-
chronized actions set within a video file can be used to trigger actions while the
video is playing. This is especially useful when you want to synchronize actions
with audio. For more information, see Adding and managing synchronized actions
in a video object.
For details about adding and managing screen recordings, refer to the documentation
included with Camtasia.
See also: Adding an existing video

- 304 -
Adding streaming video objects
Streaming video is video that is played back as it is downloaded. To stream video in a
title, you must specify the Web address of the video stream. You can preview the video
stream before adding it to the title.
To add a video stream:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the audio.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click the arrow under Video in the Add Media group

and select Streaming Video. The Add Streaming Video window opens.
3. Use the Video Type field to select the appropriate type of video stream and use
the URL field to specify the Web address of the video stream.
4. Click Preview to preview the audio stream.
5. Click OK.
The video stream is added to the title.

Changing the resource of a video

You can change the resource file of a video. You can select a resource from several loc-
ations. You can select a previously imported file, select a local file, or select from the
Media Library.
To change the resource file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the video graphic.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the video graphic and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the video and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the video.
l In the work area, right-click the video and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the video and type Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Video group, use the Video field to select the resource file. Previously impor-
ted files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To select a local
file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library, select Browse My
Media.
The resource file is changed.

Editing a video object

You can edit an video object after you have created and added it to the title. Additionally,
you can convert the video object.

- 305 -
To edit a video object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object, then click
Edit in the Video group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the video object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the video object and click Edit in the

Video group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the video object and type Shift + Enter.
Camtasia opens if the video object is a screen recording created using Camtasia;
otherwise, the Video Editor opens.
2. Use the appropriate editor to update and save the video.
For detailed information about using the Camtasia or the Video Editor, click F1 or use
the Help pull-down list.
When you save your editing change, the video file is automatically updated in the title.
To select another video to edit from the Properties ribbon, click the Video pull-down list
adjacent to Edit graphic in the Video group.

Additional resources: Recording Audio and Video with Built-in Tools in Lectora

Changing the skin of the video controller

You can change the skin of the video controller. You can apply a predefined skin or a
custom skin. Additionally, custom skins can be imported and deleted.
For information about creating a custom skin for the controller, see Creating custom
skins for media.
To apply a skin to the controller:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.

- 306 -
 2. In the Playback Options group, click Controller and select a skin from the

list. A preview of the skin is displayed.

The skin you selected is applied to the controller.
To import a custom skin:
1. In the Playback Options group, click Controller and select Manage Cus-

tom Skins. The Manage Custom Skins window opens.

2. Click Import skin to navigate and select the custom skin zip file. The imported cus-
tom skin is added to the list in the box. A preview of the skin is displayed.
3. To add the skin to the list of skins to apply, select the skin from the list and click
OK.
The skin is added to the list of skins that can be applied to the controller.
To delete a skin:
1. In the Playback Options group, click Controller and select Manage Cus-

tom Skins. The Manage Custom Skins window opens.

2. Select the skin you want to delete and click Delete skin.
3. Click OK to return to the properties window.
The skin you selected is deleted.
See also: Displaying the controller when users roll-over the video object

Displaying the controller when users roll-over a

video object
You can enable the video controller so that it is only displayed when users roll over the
video object with their cursors. Otherwise, the controller is hidden.
For video objects, you can select from predefined skins for the controller. See
Applying a skin to the video controller.
To overlay the controller when users roll over the video:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Rollover check box in the Playback Options group.
The rollover feature is enabled.

- 307 -
Automatically starting a video object
You can chose to automatically start a video object when the page containing the video
object is displayed to the user.
l With seamless play publishing, you can automatically start media on mobile
devices. For more information about seamless play publishing, see Spe-
cifying HTML options.
l A page with 25 or more media configured to automatically start might exper-
ience issues on mobile devices. For more information, see Automatically
playing media on mobile devices.
To automatically start a video object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Auto Start check box in the Playback Options group.
The video object will automatically start.

Continuously playing a video object

You can have a video object automatically restart when it has reached the end of play-
back. The video will loop until the user has exited the page or stopped the playback.
To continuously play a video object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Loop check box in the Playback Options group.
The video object will continuously play.

Adding and managing the synchronized actions

of a video object
Synchronized action are actions synchronized to run at specific times while the video
object is playing. For example, you can hide or show text blocks or move a pointer on a
diagram while users interact with the video object.

- 308 -
 Synchronized actions are only supported with .mp4 video file types.

When you add and synchronize actions to a video file, those synchronized actions are
saved separately from the media. This allows you to swap the media without losing the
synchronized actions.
View these topics for more information:
l Adding synchronized actions to a video object
l Viewing the synchronized actions of a video object
l Editing synchronized actions of a video object
l Deleting synchronized actions of a video object

Adding synchronized events to a video object

You can add synchronized events directly from the work-area. This involves specifying
the time, synchronized event name, action, and target for each synchronized event.
The Synchronize Events dialog also allows you to view the synchronized events within
the video object, edit synchronized events, and delete synchronized events.
Synchronized events are only supported with .mp4 video file types.

To add a synchronized event to a video object:

1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. Use the Play/Pause button or the video controller to control the playback of

the video object. At the appropriate time within the video object, click Event.
This adds an synchronized event to the synchronized events table.

- 309 -
 • You can adjust the timing and the synchronized event name and change
the action and target associated with the synchronized event. For details,
see Editing synchronized events of a video object.
• Edit the synchronized event names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized event names must be unique.
5. To specify the action and target associated with the synchronized event, select the
synchronized event row and use the controls in the Action and Target box.
For example, to launch a message, click Event to add the synchronized event
to the synchronized event table. In the Action and Target box, select Display Mes-
sage from the action drop-down list and use the Message box to specify the appro-
priate message.
The synchronized event is added to the synchronized events table.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Viewing the synchronized events of a video object
Deleting synchronized events of a video file

Adding synchronized actions to a video object

You can add synchronized actions directly from the work-area. This involves specifying
the time, synchronized action name, action, and target for each synchronized actions.
The Synchronize Actions dialog also allows you to view the synchronized actions within
the video object, edit synchronized actions, and delete synchronized actions.
Synchronized actions are only supported with .mp4 video file types.

To add an synchronized action to a video object:

1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if necessary.

- 310 -
 4. Use the Play/Pause button or the video controller to control the playback of

the video object. At the appropriate time within the video object, click Syn-
chronized action. This adds an synchronized action to the synchronized actions
table.
• You can adjust the timing and the synchronized action name and change
the action and target associated with the synchronized action. For details,
see Editing synchronized actions of a video object.
• Edit the synchronized action names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized action names must be unique.
5. To specify the action and target associated with the synchronized action, select the
synchronized action row and use the controls in the Action and Target box.
For example, to launch a message, click Synchronized action to add the syn-
chronized action to the synchronized action table. In the Action and Target box,
select Display Message from the action drop-down list and use the Message box
to specify the appropriate message.
The synchronized action is added to the synchronized actions table.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Viewing the synchronized actions of a video object
Deleting synchronized actions of a video file

Viewing the synchronized actions of a video object

You can view the list of current synchronized actions in a video object. To view the list of
synchronized actions, use the Synchronize Actions dialog launched from the object's
Properties ribbon.
To view the synchronized actions of a video object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens.

- 311 -
The synchronized actions are listed in the synchronized actions table. Use the table to
adjust the timing, name, action, and target for each synchronized action. You can also
delete synchronized actions. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to
change the name of the media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if
necessary.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized actions to a video object
Editing synchronized actions of a video file
Deleting synchronized actions of a video file

Viewing the synchronized events of a video object

You can view the list of current synchronized events in a video object. To view the list of
synchronized events, use the Synchronize Events dialog launched from the object's
Properties ribbon.
To view the synchronized events of a video object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens.
The synchronized events are listed in the synchronized events table. Use the table to
adjust the timing, name, action, and target for each synchronized event. You can also
delete synchronized events. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to
change the name of the media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if
necessary.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized events to a video object
Editing synchronized events of a video file
Deleting synchronized events of a video file

- 312 -
Editing synchronized events of a video object
You can edit the synchronized events of a video object. To edit synchronized events,
use the Synchronize Events window launched from the object's Properties ribbon.
To edit a synchronized event:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. To adjust the precise timing of the appropriate synchronized event, click within the
Time column and specify the time to launch the synchronized event. To edit the
name of the synchronized event, click within the Name column and specify the
appropriate name for the synchronized event. All synchronized event names must
be unique. To update the action and target associated with the synchronized
event, select the synchronized event row and use the controls in the Action and
Target box.
Edit the synchronized event names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized event names must be unique.
The synchronized action is updated.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized events to a video object
Viewing the synchronized events of a video file
Deleting synchronized events of a video file

Editing synchronized actions of a video object

You can edit the synchronized actions of a video object. To edit synchronized actions,
use the Synchronize Actions window launched from the object's Properties ribbon.
To edit a synchronized action:

- 313 -
 1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens.
3. Use the Name field (on the left-side of the dialog box) to change the name of the
media and use the Video field to select a different media file, if necessary.
4. To adjust the precise timing of the appropriate synchronized action, click within the
Time column and specify the time to launch the synchronized action. To edit the
name of the synchronized action, click within the Name column and specify the
appropriate name for the synchronized action. All synchronized action names must
be unique. To update the action and target associated with the synchronized
action, select the synchronized action row and use the controls in the Action and
Target box.
Edit the synchronized action names to references that are meaningful for
you. Synchronized action names must be unique.
The synchronized action is updated.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target
Adding synchronized actions to a video object
Viewing the synchronized actions of a video file
Deleting synchronized actions of a video file

Deleting synchronized events of a video object

You can delete synchronized events from a video object. To delete an appropriate syn-
chronized event, use the Synchronize Events dialog launched from the object's Prop-
erties ribbon.
To delete an synchronized event of a video object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select

- 314 -
 Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Events in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Events win-
dow opens
3. Select the row of the synchronized event you want to delete and click .
The synchronized event is deleted.
See also: Adding synchronized events to a video object
Editing synchronized events of a video file
Viewing synchronized events of a video file

Deleting synchronized actions of a video object

You can delete synchronized actions from a video object. To delete an appropriate syn-
chronized action, use the Synchronize Actions dialog launched from the object's Prop-
erties ribbon.
To delete an synchronized action of a video object:
1. Do one of the following to select the appropriate video object and open the Prop-
erties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the video object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Sync Actions in the Playback Options group. The Synchronize Actions win-
dow opens
3. Select the row of the synchronized action you want to delete and click .
The synchronized action is deleted.
See also: Adding synchronized actions to a video object
Editing synchronized actions of a video file
Viewing synchronized actions of a video file

Converting to MP4 video

You can convert a video object to MP4 (.mp4) and compress it, if necessary.
When you convert an object, all instances of the resource are changed throughout your
title.

- 315 -
 Converting to MP4 is only available to relevant file types.
You can also convert relevant file types within the Resource Manager. See Con-
verting audio and video for more information.
Convert existing video objects or convert video objects when you insert them into a title.
To convert a video object:
1. If you are inserting the object, enable the Convert to MP4 check box. For an exist-
ing object, select the video object, right-click, and choose Convert to MP4 or do
one of the following to display the Properties ribbon and select Convert to MP4:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
2. Use the Compression Level slider to select a compression level.
Higher compression levels will result in smaller files, but the quality of the media
will deteriorate as compression increases.
3. Click Convert.
The video object is converted.

Working with closed-captioning video objects

You can integrate closed-captioning in a video object. The captioning text is displayed
within the video according to details specified within an XML file.
Select from three supported formats:
l Web Video Text Tracks (WebVTT) - Captioning format for HTML media players
(Recommended)
l SubRip Subtitle (SRT) - Popular standard used for YouTube and Facebook cap-
tioning
l eXtensible Markup Language (XML) - Captioning format for Flash video
Examples of each format are provided below.
Additionally, you can customize the caption styling, including the font and font high-
lighting. The following font properties can be configured within the closed-captioning file:
Font prop- Description Example
erty
color A general color name or a specific hexadecimal color Red or
value. #FFCC00
font-family An installed font. Arial
font-size Size of the font in pixels. The default font size is 14. 12

- 316 -
font-style Style of the font. The default is normal. italic
font-weight Weight of the font. The default is normal. bold
text-align Alignment of the caption text as either left, right, or center. Center
The default is center.
text-dec- Enhanced font highlighting. The default is none. underline
oration
Follow these rules when creating the captioning file:
l Specify the start and end times for each caption set. Time is in the format:
hours:minutes:seconds:hundredths (HH:MM:SS:hhh)
l Specify the text for each caption set. Text can appear on multiple lines, if desired.
l Optionally, customize the font styling using a <span> tag.
l Save the file as a plain text file with the desired name and change the file exten-
sion to the appropriate captioning file format (.vtt, .srt, or .xml).
Sample files are provided to help you quickly get started creating and specifying the
closed captioning file.
To specify a closed-captioning file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the video object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the video object.
l In the work area, right-click the video object and select Properties.
2. On the Properties ribbon, click Add Captions in the Playback Options group.
The Add Captions window opens.
3. For an existing captioning file, use the Caption File pull-down list to navigate and
select the captioning file. Click Edit to edit the file if necessary. To view a sample
format file that you can copy and paste to a text editor, click one of the three file
formats under Sample caption file formats. The WebVTT format (.vtt) is recom-
mended.
4. Click OK.
Examples
l WebVTT (Recommended)
00:00:00.000 --> 00:00:00.000
<span style="text-align:center"></span>

00:00:08.000 --> 00:00:10.000

VTT Format: This line should appear at 8 seconds

- 317 -
 00:00:10.500 --> 00:00:12.500
These two lines should
appear at 10.5 seconds

00:00:17.000 --> 00:00:20.000

These two lines should appear
with styling at <span style="color: #FF0000;font-weight:
bold;">17 seconds</span>!
l SRT
00:00:00.000 --> 00:00:00.000
<span style="text-align:center"></span>

1
00:00:08.000 --> 00:00:10.000
SRT Format: This line should appear at 8 seconds

2
00:00:10.500 --> 00:00:12.500
These two lines should
appear at 10.5 seconds

3
00:00:17.000 --> 00:00:20.000
These two lines should appear
with styling at <span style="color: #FF0000;font-weight:
bold;">17 seconds</span>!
l XML
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<tt xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2006/10/ttaf1">
<div>
<p begin="00:00:00" end="00:00:00">
<span style="text-align:center"></span>
<p begin="00:00:08" end="00:00:10">
XML Format: This line should appear at 8 seconds
</p>
<p begin="00:00:10.5" end="00:00:12.5">
These two lines should
appear at 10.5 seconds
</p>
<p begin="00:00:17" end="00:00:20">
These two lines should appear

- 318 -
 with styling at <span style="color: #FF0000;font-
weight: bold;">17 seconds</span>!
</p>
</div>
</tt>

Additional resources: How to Add Closed Captions to Video and Audio in Lectora and
Lectora Online

Working with buttons

Buttons allow users to execute actions, like navigating within a title, launching Web
pages, showing hidden objects, launching programs or documents, and displaying mes-
sages. You can create buttons with the use of images or 4-state images or they can be
designated as transparent buttons.
The process of using buttons in a title takes three steps: create the button, position and
size the button on the page, and configure the button's action.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with buttons:
l Creating buttons
l Assigning an action to a button
l Changing the name of a button
l Enabling author control on a button
l Specifying a description of a button
l Viewing the HTML name of a button
l Changing the resources of a button
l Making a button initially hidden
l Placing a button on the top layer
l Making a button initially disabled
l Specifying the CSS classes of a button
l Changing the transitions of a button
l Using an empty ALT tag for a button
l Preloading a button for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a button
l Adding a reference for a button
l Including metadata for a button
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Changing the shape of a button

- 319 -
 l Changing the shape style of a button
l Changing the shadowing and reflection effects of a button
l Changing the text style of a button
l Scaling button text in a responsive title
l Configuring the states of a custom text button
l Locking the size and position of a button
l Changing the position and size of a button
l Rotating and flipping a button

Creating buttons
Most of the buttons you create will contain text, like Next, Previous, Yes, or No. Buttons
can also contain images, like arrows or shapes. Additionally, buttons can be transparent
for creating hotspots on regions of an image.
You can also create a four-state image button. Four-state image buttons have the four
button states (normal, over, down, and disabled) built into them. You select the images
you want displayed for each state of the button.
To add buttons to your title, you can configure a custom image button, browse the but-
tons available within the Stock Library, add a transparent button, or convert a shape. The
Stock Library contains hundreds of today's popular button images. All Back, Next, Home
and Exit buttons added from the Stock Library are pre-programmed with the cor-
responding action. Custom image buttons allow you to assign images to the four state
properties of the button: normal, as the button exists when the page is displayed, when
the button is clicked, over, when users pass their cursors over the button, down, and dis-
abled, the mouse pointer - when hovered over the button - shows as unclickable and
mouse-related triggers do not execute. Assigning images to the down, over and disabled
states is optional.
You can also set the state of the button using the Set State action. For details,
see Selecting the action.
Transparent buttons do not contain images or text.
Converting a shape to a button instantly creates a four-state image button.
View these topics for more information about creating buttons:
l Creating custom buttons with text
l Creating a stock button
l Creating a transparent button
l Creating a 4-state image button
lConverting a shape to a button
Additional resources: Customize Button States in Lectora and Lectora Online

- 320 -
 Building Finger-friendly Buttons for m-Learning

Creating custom buttons with text

Custom text buttons allow you to assign the images for the four button states:
l Normal, as the button exists when the page is displayed
l Over, when users pass their cursors over the button
l Down, when users click the button
l Disabled, when the button has become unclickable
Assigning images to the down and over states is optional. Select images from your file
system, the Media Library or re-use an existing image. You can also edit the images.
l By default, buttons that you have added to your title are set to be initially
enabled. That is, buttons appear clickable when users open the pages on
which the button are located. You can initially disable a button until an action
has been executed to enable the button. For details, see Making a button ini-
tially disabled.
l If you do not select images for the optional button states (over, down, or dis-
abled), the normal state image will be used. For details about viewing and
changing the images assigned to the states of a button, see Configuring the
states of buttons.
You can create custom buttons that contain text or custom buttons that contain images.
To add a custom text button:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the text button.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the down-arrow under Button in the Add

Navigation and Interaction group and select Text Button.

l On the Home ribbon, click the down-arrow in Quick Insert and select .

The button is added to the title and the Button property ribbons (Properties, Style,
and Position & Size) along with the Action ribbon are made available.
3. Change the text of the button. The default text Click Here is added to the button.
Double-click the text to change it.
If you do not specify to use an empty ALT tag for the button, the text for the
button is used for the text in the ALT tag. For details about specifying an
empty ALT tag for an object, see Using an empty ALT tag for an object.
4. Use the controls on the Properties, Style, and Position & Size ribbons to con-
figure the button, including the various states of the button and use the Action

- 321 -
 ribbon to configure the action associated with the button. See Working with buttons
for details about specifying the properties of a button.
The custom text button is created.
To add a custom image button:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the image button.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click the down-arrow under Button in the Add Nav-

igation and Interaction group and select Image Button.

The Add Image Button window opens.
3. Use the four fields in the Add Image Button dialog box (Normal, Over, Down, and
Disabled) to specify the images to display with each button state. Click Browse
for File to browse for an image on your file system, select Browse My Media to
browse for an image in the Media Library, or select from existing images used in
the title. Click OK.
For example, to specify a file on your device that you created to be displayed for
the Over state, open the Over drop-down list, click Browse for File and navigate to
select the file.
When you click OK, the button is added to the title.
4. Use the controls on the Properties, Style, and Position & Size ribbons to con-
figure the button and use the Action ribbon to configure the action associated with
the button. See Working with buttons for details about specifying the properties of a
button.
The custom image button is added.

Creating buttons from the Stock Library

You can select from a gallery of stock buttons to add to your title. All Back, Next, Home
and Exit buttons within the gallery are pre-programmed with the corresponding action.
To create a button from the Stock Library:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a button.
2. Do one of the following to open the Stock Library:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the down-arrow under Button in the Add

Navigation and Interaction group and select Stock Button.

l Click the Stock Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work-area.
Next, double-click the Buttons folder.
The Stock Library opens to the button gallery.
3. Navigate and select the button you want to add. Hold down your Ctrl key to select

- 322 -
 multiple buttons.
4. Drag the buttons to the work-area.
The buttons are added to the title. If necessary, use the button properties to assign an
action to the button. See Working with buttons for details about specifying the properties
of a button.

Creating a transparent button

You can create a transparent button to add to your title. Transparent buttons are useful
for creating hotspots on regions of an image.
To create a transparent button:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the button.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click the down-arrow under Button in the Add Nav-

igation and Interaction group and select Transparent.

The transparent button is added to the title. Move and size the button and use the Action
ribbon to assign an action to the button.
Creating 4-state image buttons
You can create 4-state image buttons for your title. Four-state image buttons have the
four button states built into them:
l Normal, as the button exists when the page is displayed
l Over, when users pass their cursors over the button
l Down, when users click the button
l Disabled, when the button has become unclickable
You select the images you want displayed for each state of the button. The normal state
is required; the other states are optional.
l By default, buttons that you have added to your title are set to be initially
enabled. That is, buttons appear clickable when users open the pages on
which the button are located. You can initially disable a button until an action
has been executed to enable the button. For details, see Making a button ini-
tially disabled.
l If you do not select images for the optional button states (over, down, or dis-
abled), the normal state image will be used. For details about viewing and
changing the images assigned to the states of a button, see Configuring the
states of buttons.
To create a 4-state image button:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the button.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click the down-arrow under

- 323 -
 Button in the Add Navigation and Interaction group and select Image But-

ton. The Add Image Button window opens.

3. Use the controls on the Add Image Button window to select the images for the four
button states. Click the drop-down list and select Browse for File to browse for an
image on your file system, select Browse for Media to browse for an image in the
Media Library or select from existing images used in the title.
4. Click OK.
The image button is added to your title.

Converting a shape to a button

You can convert shapes to buttons. Doing so instantly converts the shape into a custom
button.
To convert a shape to a button:
1. Right-click the shape and select Convert to Button.
The shape object is replaced by the button object and the Button property ribbons
(Properties, Style, and Position & Size) along with the Action ribbon are made
available.
2. To add text, place the cursor over the center of the button and double-click. This
changes the outline of the button and places the cursor is ready for input.
If you do not specify to use an empty ALT tag for the button, the text for the
button is used for the text in the ALT tag. For details about specifying an
empty ALT tag for an object, see Using an empty ALT tag for an object.
The button is created. Use the controls on the Properties, Style, and Position & Size
ribbons to configure the button, including the various states of the button and use the
Action ribbon to configure the action associated with the button. See Working with but-
tons for details about specifying the properties of a button.

Making a button initially disabled

By default, buttons that you have added to your title are set to be initially enabled. That
is, buttons appear clickable when users open the pages on which the button are located.
You can initially disable a button until an action has been executed to enable the button.
See also: Selecting an action
To make a button initially disabled:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the button.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.

- 324 -
 l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Appearance group, enable the Initially Disabled check box.
The button is set to be initially disabled.

Assigning an action to a button

You can assign an action to a button. When clicked, buttons can display messages,
open Web pages, change variables, and much more. You can change the button's trig-
ger and set conditions when the action is to occur.
To assign an action to a button:
1. Do one of the following to display the Action ribbon for the button:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action that is asso-
ciated with the button object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the button object; then, click the Action ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the button object, select Properties and click the
Action ribbon.
2. Use the Action drop-down list in the Action and Target group to select the action
to execute when the users click the button. For details about selecting an action,
see Selecting an action.
The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. Specify additional
information as necessary. For details about selecting an action's target, see Select-
ing an action's target.
3. Select the action's trigger. The action is triggered by the mouse click by default.
This is indicated by Mouse Click in the Trigger group. Use the Trigger drop-

down list to change the trigger and specify a delay if necessary. For details about
selecting the trigger, see Selecting an action's trigger.
4. Specify the action's conditions. The action will always occur by default. This is
indicated by Always in the Conditions group. Click Always to specify the

conditions under which the action is to occur. For details about using the controls
on the Set Action Conditions window to specify conditions, see Specifying con-
ditions.
The action is updated and assigned to the button.
See also: About actions

- 325 -
Changing the shape of the button
You can change the shape of the button. Select from the variety of different shapes, such
as the basic shapes, block arrows, and stars, for example.
The clickable area for users to select the button is limited to the area of the
shape; not the rectangle you see in Edit mode. For example, if you change to the
diamond shape, users must click within the diamond's actual area to properly
select the button.
To change the shape of the button object:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object. To select multiple button objects, click the first object, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Click Type in the Shape group and use the drop-down list to change the shape of
the button object. For example, to change to a trapezoid, open the list and click the
desired trapezoid.
The shape of the button is changed.

Changing the resources of a button

You can change the image resources for the three states of image and stock buttons.
The images can be edited as well. The three states are : normal, as the button exists
when the page is displayed, down, when the button is clicked, and over, when the users
pass their cursors over the button. Assigning images to the down and over states is
optional. Select images from your file system, the Stock Library, the Media Library or re-
use an existing image.
To change the resources of a button:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Click the States button. The Button States window opens.
4. Use the controls in the Button States window as follows. They are the same for
each state tab (Normal, Over, Down and Disabled).
Shape Select this to change the shape of the button. Select from the vari-
ety of different shapes, such as the basic shapes, block arrows,
and stars, for example.
Fill Style Fill style, such as color, gradient, texture or picture. To change
the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a cus-
tom color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined

- 326 -
color, click one of the color samples displayed. To specify a cus-
tom color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color win-
dow to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color
from an existing color currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the gradient, click or hover on Gradient and click a
gradient type from the sub-menu. To change the gradient settings
such as the direction, color, and angle, click More Gradients.
This opens the Gradient dialog. Use controls on the Gradient dia-
log as follows:
Color Color of the gradient. To change the color set-
ting, you can select a predefined color, spe-
cify a custom color, or select an existing color.
To select a predefined color, click one of the
color samples displayed. To specify a custom
color, select Custom and use the controls in
the Color window to configure a custom color.
To select an existing color, click Select and
use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new
color from an existing color currently dis-
played on your desktop.
Type Type of gradient.
Direction Direction of the gradient relative to the object.
Angle Angle of the gradient relative to the object.
Gradient Stops Use the Add Stop and Delete Stop buttons
to manage the stops for the gradient. Click
Reverse Gradient to reverse the color order
in the gradient. Use the Stop Color control to
select the color of each stop on the gradient.
Use the Position control to set the position
percentage of the gradient.
To change the texture, click or hover on Texture and click a tex-
ture type from the sub-menu. To select a local file that contains a
compatible texture, select Browse from File. To select a texture
from the Media Library, select Browse My Media.
To change the picture, click or hover on Picture and click the loc-
ation from which to choose the picture. To select a local file that
contains a compatible picture, select Browse from File. To
select a picture from the Media Library, select Browse My Media.
Browse and select the picture. The picture is cropped within the

- 327 -
 shape. Additionally, the resource drop-down list in the Shape
Style group is populated with the name of the fill picture. Use the
resource drop-down list to change the fill picture.
Outline Weight Thickness of the outline from 0 (none) to 10.
Opacity Transparency of the object from 0 (invisible) to 100 (completely
opaque).
Outline Color Color of the outline. To change the color setting, you can select a
predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to
click-to-select a new color from an existing color currently dis-
played on your desktop.
Outline Style Style of the outline.
Shadow Shadowing effects of the button object. For shadowing, you can
change the type, color, transparency, blur, angle and distance.
Reflection Reflection effects of the button object.
Text Style Text style of the button object. Select a text style, change the font,
or alter the font size, for example.
5. To customize an individual state, click the corresponding state tab (Normal, Over,
Down, or Disabled) and click the button in the Style group so that the Cus-

tom graphic is displayed. Change the appropriate properties as necessary.

6. When you are finished customizing each state, click OK.

Changing the shape style of the button

You can change the style of a button object. Adjust the opacity; bulk up the outline
weight, or select a different fill style, for example.
You can select multiple button objects to change when necessary.
To change the shape style of a button object:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object. To select multiple button objects, click the first object, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Use the controls in the Shape Style group to change the style of the button object
as follows:
Fill Style Fill style, such as color, gradient, texture or picture. To change the

- 328 -
color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color,
click one of the color samples displayed. To specify a custom
color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color window to
configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click Select
and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an
existing color currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the gradient, click or hover on Gradient and click a
gradient type from the sub-menu. To change the gradient settings
such as the direction, color, and angle, click More Gradients.
This opens the Gradient dialog box. Use controls on the Gradient
dialog box as follows:
Color Color of the gradient. To change the color set-
ting, you can select a predefined color, specify
a custom color, or select an existing color. To
select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color,
select Custom and use the controls in the
Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use
the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color
from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Type Type of gradient.
Direction Direction of the gradient relative to the object.
Angle Angle of the gradient relative to the object.
Gradient Stops Use the Add Stop and Delete Stop buttons to
manage the stops for the gradient. Click
Reverse Gradient to reverse the color order
in the gradient. Use the Stop Color control to
select the color of each stop on the gradient.
Use the Position control to set the position
percentage of the gradient.
To change the texture, click or hover on Texture and click a tex-
ture type from the sub-menu. To select a local file that contains a
compatible texture, select Browse from File. To select a texture
from the Media Library, select Browse My Media.
To change the picture, click or hover on Picture and click the loc-
ation from which to choose the picture. To select a local file that
contains a compatible picture, select Browse from File. To select

- 329 -
 a picture from the Media Library, select Browse My Media.
Browse and select the picture. The picture is cropped within the
shape. Additionally, the resource drop-down list in the Shape
Style group is populated with the name of the fill picture. Use the
resource drop-down list to change the fill picture.
Outline Thickness of the outline from 0 (none) to 10.
Weight
Opacity Transparency of the object from 0 (invisible) to 100 (completely
opaque).
For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a button will not render
a shadow or reflection if the object has reduced opacity
(less than 100).
Outline Color Color of the outline. To change the color setting, you can select a
predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to
click-to-select a new color from an existing color currently dis-
played on your desktop.
Outline Style Style of the outline.
The style of the button is changed.

Changing the shadowing and reflection effects of

the button
You can change the shadowing and reflection effects of button objects. For shadowing,
you can change the type, color, transparency, blur, angle and distance.
l For Internet Explorer 8 users, a button will not render a shadow and will not
render a reflection if the object has been rotated, flipped, or has reduced opa-
city (less than 100). For Internet Explorer 9 users, a button will not render a
shadow or reflection if the object has been rotated, flipped, or has reduced
opacity (less than 100). For more information, visit Lectora: A Guide to
Browser Differences with Effects.
l For Internet Explorer 9 users, a button will not show a modified color if the
Distance is set to 0. For more information, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser
Differences with Effects.
l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, a button will not render a shadow or
reflection if the browser's document mode is set to 9 or less. For more inform-
ation, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser Differences with Effects.

- 330 -
To add or change an effect:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object. To select multiple button objects, click the first object, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Effects group, use the Shadow and Reflection fields to select effects for the
button objects. To change the shadow options, select Shadow Options from the
bottom of the Shadow drop-down list. This opens the Shadow Options window.
Use the controls on the Shadow Options dialog box as follows:
Shadow Color of the shadow. To change the color setting, you can select a
Color predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select
an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-
select a new color from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Transparency Transparency setting (opacity) of the shadowing in a percentage.
Blur Blur effect of the shadowing
Angle Angle of the shadowing relative to the object.
Distance Distance of the shadowing in pixels.
The effects you selected are added to the button objects.
Additional resources: Building Finger-friendly Buttons for m-Learning

Changing the text style of the button

You can change the text style of a button object. Select a text style, change the font, or
alter the font size, for example.
You can select multiple button objects to change when necessary.
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a button. This is
helpful when adjusting how the text in a button appears within the different device
views for responsive titles. For details, see Scaling button text in a responsive title.
To change the text style of a button object:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object. To select multiple button objects, click the first object, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.

- 331 -
 3. Use the controls in the Text Style group to change the text style of a button object
as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to apply to the objects. Text
styles automatically set text attributes such as the font face,
style, size and color. Use the drop-down list to select a new
text style and add and remove text styles. For details about
managing text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the text font face to apply to the objects. Use
(Font) the drop-down list to select a new text font that overrides the
currently selected text style. Selecting a new font overrides the
font defined by the current text style.
(Font size) Click this to select the text font size to apply to the objects. Use
the drop-down list to select a new text size that overrides the
currently selected text style. Selecting a new font size over-
rides the font size defined by the current text style.
Text Click this to select the color of the text to apply to the objects.
Color Use the drop-down list to select a new text color. Selecting a
new text color overrides the text color defined by the current
text style.
(Bold) Click this to select the bolding of text to apply to the objects.
Selecting the bolding overrides the bolding defined by the cur-
rent text style.
(Italics) Click this to select the italicizing of text to apply to the objects.
Selecting the italicizing overrides the italicizing defined by the
current text style.
(Underline) Click this to select the underline of text to apply to the objects.
Selecting the underlining overrides the underlining defined by
the current text style.
Click this to align the text to the left.
Click this to align the text to the center.
Click this to align the text to the right.
Click this to increase the size of the font.
Click this to decrease the size of the font.
The style is changed.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

- 332 -
Scaling button text in a responsive title
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a button. This is helpful
when adjusting how the text in a button appears within the different device views for
responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an override of the default responsive inher-
itance. (The text scaling controls do not appear on the desktop view since you cannot
create overrides in that view.)
The current scaling factor and size of the font are displayed. Use this information if you
plan on adding similar buttons to the page.
Scaling the text will not affect the displayed value in the Text Style group. The
Text Style value reflects the base value for the text block. If the base value is
changed, that change will apply across all views and the scaling will be canceled.
For more information about building responsive titles, see Working with responsive con-
tent.
To scale the button text:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object. To select multiple button objects, click the first object, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the work area, select one of the responsive views other than desktop.
4. Drag the slider or use the appropriate plus or minus button to scale the text in the
current view. For example, to increase the text size, drag the slider arrow to the
right. The scaling factor (applied to the base) and the resulting effective font size
are adjusted accordingly.
The button text is changed for the current view.

Configuring the states of buttons

You can configure the four states of buttons and save the button state as the new default
button style when adding a button. The four button states are: Normal, as the button
exists when the page is initially displayed, Over, when the users pass their cursors over
the button, Down, when the button is clicked, and Disabled, when the button is disabled.
For each state, you can change the shape style, alter the effects, and modify the text
style.
You can customize the individual states or select to update each state automatically
based on configuration of the Normal state.
l By default, buttons that you have added to your title are set to be initially
enabled. That is, buttons appear clickable when users open the pages on
which the button are located. You can initially disable a button until an
action has been executed to enable the button. For details, see Making a

- 333 -
 button initially disabled.
l You can also set the state of the button using the Set State action. For
details, see Selecting the action.
l Assigning images to the over, down, and disabled states is optional. If you
do not select images for the optional button states, the normal state image
will be used.
To configure the button states:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Click the States button. The Button States window opens.
4. Use the controls in the Button States window as follows. Aside from the Shape
field, the controls are the same for each state tab (Normal, Over, Down and Dis-
abled).
Shape Select this to change the shape of the button. Select from a vari-
ety of different shapes, such as the basic shapes, block arrows,
and stars, for example.
Shape Style The style of the shape of the button. Use the controls in the
Shape Style group as follows:
Fill Style Fill style, such as color, gradient, texture or pic-
ture. To change the color setting, you can
select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a
predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color,
select Custom and use the controls in the
Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use
the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color
from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
To change the gradient, click or hover on
Gradient and click a gradient type from the
sub-menu. To change the gradient settings
such as the direction, color, and angle, click
More Gradients. This opens the Gradient dia-
log. Use controls on the Gradient dialog as fol-
lows:

- 334 -
Color Color of the gradient. To
change the color setting,
you can select a pre-
defined color, specify a cus-
tom color, or select an
existing color. To select a
predefined color, click one
of the color samples dis-
played. To specify a cus-
tom color, select Custom
and use the controls in the
Color window to configure
a custom color. To select
an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-
dropper to click-to-select a
new color from an existing
color currently displayed
on your desktop.
Type Type of gradient.
Direction Direction of the gradient rel-
ative to the object.
Angle Angle of the gradient rel-
ative to the object.
Gradient Stops Use the Add Stop and
Delete Stop buttons to
manage the stops for the
gradient. Click Reverse
Gradient to reverse the
color order in the gradient.
Use the Stop Color control
to select the color of each
stop on the gradient. Use
the Position control to set
the position percentage of
the gradient.
To change the texture, click or hover on Tex-
ture and click a texture type from the sub-
menu. To select a local file that contains a com-
patible texture, select Browse for File. To
select a texture from the Media Library, select

- 335 -
 Browse My Media.
To change the picture, click or hover on Pic-
ture and click the location from which to
choose the picture. To select a local file that
contains a compatible picture, select Browse
for File. To select a picture from the Media
Library, select Browse My Media. Browse and
select the picture. The picture is cropped
within the shape. Additionally, the resource
drop-down list in the Shape Style group is pop-
ulated with the name of the fill picture. Use the
resource drop-down list to change the fill pic-
ture.
The Color, Gradient, Texture, and Pic-
ture fills are mutually exclusive. Select-
ing these will cancel/replace any
previous selection or gradient.
Outline Weight Thickness of the outline from 0 (none) to 20.
Click the arrows to select the weight.
File of the image used for the fill. Click the
down arrow to open and select a new image
fill file. To select a local file that contains a com-
patible picture, select Browse for File. To
select a picture from the Media Library, select
Browse My Media. Browse and select the pic-
ture. To select a picture from the stock buttons,
select Browse Stock Buttons. Browse and
select the button. Existing buttons used within
the title are listed.
Outline Color Color of the outline. To change the color set-
ting, you can select a predefined color, specify
a custom color, or select an existing color. To
select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color,
select Custom and use the controls in the
Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use
the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color
from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Opacity Transparency of the object from 0 (invisible) to

- 336 -
 100 (completely opaque). Use the arrows to
select the appropriate setting.
Outline Style Style of the outline. Click the down arrow to
select a new style. Select from solid, dashed,
or dotted style.
Effects The effects of the button. Use the controls in the Effects group as
follows:
Shadow Shadowing effects of the button object. For shad-
owing, you can change the type, color, transparency,
blur, angle and distance.
Reflection Reflection effects of the button object.
Text Style The style of the text associated with the button. Use the controls
in the Text Style group as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to apply to the
objects. Text styles automatically set text
attributes such as the font face, style, size
and color. Use the drop-down list to select a
new text style and add and remove text
styles. For details about managing text
styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the text font face to apply
(Font) to the objects. Use the drop-down list to
select a new text font that overrides the cur-
rently selected text style. Selecting a new
font overrides the font defined by the current
text style.
(Font size) Click this to select the text font size to apply
to the objects. Use the drop-down list to
select a new text size that overrides the cur-
rently selected text style. Selecting a new
font size overrides the font size defined by
the current text style.
Text Click this to select the color of the text to
Color apply to the objects. Use the drop-down list
to select a new text color. Selecting a new
text color overrides the text color defined by
the current text style.
(Bold) Click this to select the bolding of text to apply
to the objects. Selecting the bolding over-

- 337 -
 rides the bolding defined by the current text
style.
(Italics) Click this to select the italicizing of text to
apply to the objects. Selecting the italicizing
overrides the italicizing defined by the current
text style.
(Underline) Click this to select the underline of text to
apply to the objects. Selecting the under-
lining overrides the underlining defined by
the current text style.
Click this to align the text to the left.
Click this to align the text to the center.
Click this to align the text to the right.
Click this to increase the size of the font.
Click this to decrease the size of the font.
5. To customize an individual state, click the corresponding state tab (Normal, Over,
Down, or Disabled) and click the button in the Style group so that the Cus-

tom graphic is displayed. Change the appropriate properties as necessary.

6. When you are finished customizing each state, click OK.
The button states are configured.
To save this button state as the new default button style when adding a button, either:
l In the Button Template group, click Save As Default
l Right-click on the button and select Save button as default template
Saving the style as the new default will only apply that default style when adding
text buttons. New image buttons will not be affected. Image buttons will use the
images of the states.
To reset the default style to the product default, click Reset Default in the Button Tem-
plate group.
Additional resources: Customize Button States in Lectora and Lectora Online

Rotating and flipping a button

You can rotate and flip a button. You can rotate a button using the green rotation handle
that is displayed when you select an image or using the rotation controls in the Rotation
and Mirroring group on the Position & Size ribbon.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a button will not render a shadow or
reflection if the object has been rotated or flipped.

- 338 -
 l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, a button cannot be rototed if the
browser's document mode is set to 9 or less.
To rotate a button using the green rotation handle:
1. Do one of the following to select the button:
l In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic.
l In the work area, click the button.
The button is selected and the green rotation handle is displayed along the top of
the button.
2. Move your cursor over the rotation handle so that your cursor changes to the rota-
tion arrows over the handle.
3. Hold the left mouse button and move your mouse left or right to rotate the button.
Release the left mouse button to set the rotation.
The button is rotated using the green rotation handle.
To rotate and flip a button using the rotation controls in the Rotation and Mirroring
group on the Position & Size ribbon.
1. In the Title Explorer, click the button graphic or in the work area, click the button
object. To select multiple button objects, click the first object, then press and hold
the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. In the Rotation and Mirroring group, use the controls to rotate and flip the button.
Click Rotate Right 90° to rotate the button 90° to the right. Click Rotate Left 90° to
rotate the button 90° to the left. Click Flip Vertical to vertically flip the button. Click
Flip Horizontal to horizontally flip the button. Use the Angle field to select the rota-
tion angle.
The button is rotated using the rotation controls.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Working with characters

Add characters that can display a variety of images of people in different poses. Char-
acters are transparent photo images of a male and female actor in various poses suit-
able for using in your title. Access the catalog of character poses using the Media
Library.
Once you have added the character image to your title, you can configure the action Set
Character Pose to update the current pose of the character. The character object and
Set Character Pose action enable you to execute actions that cause the character to
change poses. This feature can be used with question feedback.

- 339 -
 You can create custom characters to integrate into the Publisher. For details, refer
to the Creating Custom Characters Poses PDF at http://trivantis.com/e-learning-
software-user-guides/.
View these topics for more information:
l Adding a character
l Using an action to change the pose
l Changing the name of a character
l Changing the character and the pose
l Enabling author control on a character
l Editing a character
l Specifying a description of a character
l Viewing the HTML name of a character
l Making a character initially hidden
l Placing a character on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS class of a character
l Changing the transition properties of a character
l Using an empty ALT tag for a character
l Pre-loading a character for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a character
l Adding a reference for a character
l Including metadata for a character
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Locking the size and position of a character
l Changing the position and size of a character

Adding a character
Perform the following steps to add a character to your title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the character.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click Character in the Add Image group. Alternatively,

you can click the Stock Library side-tab and click the Character Poses folder.
The Stock Library opens.
3. Use the Stock Library to navigate and select the appropriate folder to reveal the
available poses. Previews of the poses are displayed, along with the cor-

- 340 -
 responding file name.
4. Click the character pose file you want to add and click OK.
The character pose is added to your title. Move the character to the appropriate location
on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the size and
appearance of the character.
See also: Using an action to change the pose

Using an action to change the pose

After you have added a character to your title, you can configure the action Set Char-
acter Pose to set the new pose of the character. The character object and Set Char-
acter Pose action enable you to execute actions that cause the character to change
poses. Set the character to change to one of the following poses:
l Arms crossed
l Happy
l OK Sign

l Pointing down left

l Pointing down right

l Pointing middle left

l Pointing middle right

l Pointing up left

l Pointing up right

l Sad

l Thinking

l Thumbs Down

l Thumbs Up

l Waving

l Writing

To assign a pose to a character image:

1. Apply an action to the character image by doing one of the following.
l From the Insert ribbon, select Action from the Add Navigation and Inter-
action group
l From the Properties tab, select Action from the Add group
l Type Ctrl+4
2. In the Action Properties window, click the Trigger drop-down list to select the appro-
priate action trigger.
3. Select Set Character Pose from the Action drop-down list. This enables the Tar-
get field.
4. Use the Target field to select the appropriate character image. This enables the
New Pose drop-down list.
5. Use the New Pose list to select the appropriate pose.

- 341 -
The action is configured to update the current pose.
See also: Adding a character
Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target

Editing a character
You can edit a character image after you have added it to the title.
When you install Lectora, the Snagit Editor is specified as the default editor for editing
images. You can specify the editor application used by the program to externally edit
resource image files used within a title. For example, you can specify to open Windows
Paint for editing images. For details, see Specifying editor preferences.
To edit an image:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the character graphic and select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the character and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, right-click the character and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the character and type Shift + Enter.
The Snagit Editor opens.
2. Use the Snagit Editorto edit and save the image.
For detailed information about using the Snagit Editor, click F1 or use the Help pull-
down list.
When you save your editing changes, the character file is automatically updated in the
title.
To select another image to edit from the Properties ribbon, click the Image pull-down
list adjacent to the Edit graphic in the Image group.

Changing the character and the pose

After you have added the character to your title, you can change to a different character
or to a different pose.
Changing the character or the pose will automatically change the name to the default
character name that is associated to the current pose.
To change the character or the pose:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the character graphic or in the work area, click the
character object. The Properties ribbon opens.
2. To change the character, click the down-arrow in the Character field and select a
new character. The character is updated.

- 342 -
 3. To change the pose, click the down-arrow in the Pose field and select a new pose.
The pose are updated.
The name is appropriately changed.

Working with shapes, lines, and arrows

Various shapes, lines, and arrows can be added to a title when you need simple line-art
drawings. These objects can be used to draw your users’ attention to a particular part of
a page. The images are created in Enhanced Metafile format (.emf) enabling you to res-
ize them without losing quality.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with shapes, lines, and
arrows:
l Adding shapes, lines and arrows
l Changing the name of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Enabling author control on a shape, line, or arrow object
l Changing the description of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Viewing the HTML name of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Making a shape, line, or arrow object initially hidden
l Placing a shape, line, or arrow object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Changing the transition properties of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a shape, line, or arrow object
l Pre-loading a shape, line, or arrow object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a shape, line, or arrow object
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Adding text to a shape or arrow object
l Scaling text in a shape or arrow in a responsive title
l Changing the type of shape, line, or arrow object
l Changing the style of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Changing the shadowing and reflection effects of a shape, arrow, or line object
l Changing the text style of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Locking the size and position of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Changing the position and size of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Maintaining the aspect ratio of a shape, line, or arrow object
l Rotating and flipping a shape, line, or arrow object

- 343 -
Adding shapes, lines and arrows
Add shapes, lines, and arrows to draw attention to a part of a page or a part of an image.
Additionally, use the adjustment adorners to fine-tune to the desired shape.
To add shapes, lines or arrows to a title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a shape, line or
arrow.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click Shape/Lines in the Add Image group and select the
desired shape, line or arrow. Select from Lines and Arrows, Basic Shapes,
Block Arrows, Triangles, Trapezoids, Parallelograms, Stars, and Callouts.
Your cursor changes to the drawing cursor.
3. Using the drawing cursor, draw a rectangle within your work area by clicking, and
while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the cursor to define a rect-
angle. The rectangle you draw defines the size of the shape, line, or arrow you are
adding. When you release the left mouse button, the shape, line, or arrow will
appear in the work-area. To draw a straight line, select a line in the Lines and
Arrows group, press and hold Shift, and then use the mouse as usual to draw the
line.
4. Use the adjustment adorners to stretch, resize, flip, and rotate the object. To stretch
the object, hover-over the appropriate square side adorner until the cursor changes
to the double-arrows. Then click-down and move the adorner in the appropriate dir-
ection. To resize the object, hover-over the corresponding round corner adorner
until the cursor changes to the double-arrows. Then click-down and move the
adorner in the appropriate direction. To flip the object, hover-over the cor-
responding corner round adorner until the cursor changes to the double-arrows.
Then click-down and move the adorner over the object and to the desired flipped
position. To rotate the object, hover-over the top green adorner until the cursor
changes to the circular arrows. Then click-down and move the adorner in the appro-
priate direction.
The shape, line, or arrow is added to the title.
See also: Changing the type of shape, line, or arrow object
Changing the style of a shape, line, or arrow object
Converting a shape to a button
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Changing the type of shape, line, or arrow object

You can change the type of shape, line or arrow object you initially selected to add to the
title. When you select a new type, the name of the object will change to correspond to
the new type of shape, line, or arrow object you selected.

- 344 -
To change the type of shape, line or arrow object:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape, line, or arrow graphic or in the work area,
click the shape, line, or arrow object. To select multiple shape, line, or arrow
objects, click the first object, then press and hold the Ctrl key while you click the
other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Click Type in the Shape group and use the drop-down list to change the type of
shape, line, or arrow object. For example, to change to a trapezoid, open the list
and click the desired trapezoid.
The type is changed.

Changing the style of a shape, line, or arrow

object
You can change the style of a shape, line or arrow object. Adjust the opacity; bulk up the
outline weight, or select a different fill style, for example.
You can select multiple shape, line, or arrow objects to change when necessary.
To change the style of a shape, line or arrow object:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape, line, or arrow graphic or in the work area,
click the shape, line, or arrow object. To select multiple shape, line, or arrow
objects, click the first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the
other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Use the controls in the Shape Style group to change the style of a shape, line, or
arrow object as follows:
Fill Style Fill style, such as color, gradient, texture, or picture. To change
the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a cus-
tom color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color,
click one of the color samples displayed. To specify a custom
color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color window to
configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click Select
and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an
existing color currently displayed on your desktop.
The Color, Texture, and Picture fills are mutually exclus-
ive. Selecting these will cancel/replace any previous selec-
tion or gradient.
To change the gradient, click or hover on Gradient and click a
gradient type from the sub-menu. To change the gradient settings
such as the direction, color, and angle, click More Gradients.

- 345 -
 This opens the Gradient dialog box. Use controls on the Gradient
dialog box as follows:
Color Color of the gradient. To change the color set-
ting, you can select a predefined color, specify
a custom color, or select an existing color. To
select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color,
select Custom and use the controls in the
Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use
the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color
from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Type Type of gradient.
Direction Direction of the gradient relative to the object.
Angle Angle of the gradient relative to the object.
Gradient Stops Use the Add Stop and Delete Stop buttons to
manage the stops for the gradient. Click
Reverse Gradient to reverse the color order
in the gradient. Use the Stop Color control to
select the color of each stop on the gradient.
Use the Position control to set the position
percentage of the gradient.
To change the texture, click or hover on Texture and click a tex-
ture type from the sub-menu. To select a local file that contains a
compatible texture, select Browse from File. To select a texture
from the Media Library, select Browse My Media.
To change the picture, click or hover on Picture and click the loc-
ation from which to choose the picture. To select a local file that
contains a compatible picture, select Browse from File. To select
a picture from the Media Library, select Browse My Media.
Browse and select the picture. The picture is cropped within the
shape. Additionally, the resource drop-down list in the Shape
Style group is populated with the name of the fill picture. Use the
resource drop-down list to change the fill picture.
Outline Thickness of the outline from 0 (none) to 10.
Weight
Opacity Transparency of the object from 0 (invisible) to 100 (completely
opaque).

- 346 -
 For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a shape, arrow, or line
object will not render a shadow or reflection if the object has
reduced opacity (less than 100).
Outline Color Color of the outline. To change the color setting, you can select a
predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To
select an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to
click-to-select a new color from an existing color currently dis-
played on your desktop.
Outline Style Style of the outline.
The style is changed.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Changing the shadowing and reflection effects of

a shape, arrow, or line object
You can change the shadowing and reflection effects of shape, arrow, and line objects.
For shadowing, you can change the type, color, transparency, blur, angle and distance.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a shape, arrow, or line object will not
render a shadow or reflection if the object has been rotated, flipped, or has
reduced opacity (less than 100). For more information, visit Lectora: A Guide
to Browser Differences with Effects.
l For Internet Explorer 10 and 11 users, a shape, arrow, or line will not render
a shadow or reflection if the browser's document mode is set to 9 or less. For
more information, visit Lectora: A Guide to Browser Differences with Effects.
To add an effect:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape, line, or arrow graphic or in the work area,
click the shape, line, or arrow object. To select multiple shape, line, or arrow
objects, click the first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the
other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Effects group, use the Shadow and Reflection fields to select effects for of
the shape, arrow, and line objects. To change the shadow options, select Shadow
Options from the bottom of the Shadow drop-down list. This opens the Shadow
Options window. Use the controls on the Shadow Options dialog box as follows:

- 347 -
 Shadow Color of the shadow. To change the color setting, you can select a
Color predefined color, specify a custom color, or select an existing
color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color samples
displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the
controls in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select
an existing color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-
select a new color from an existing color currently displayed on
your desktop.
Transparency Transparency setting (opacity) of the shadowing in a percentage.
Blur Blur effect of the shadowing
Angle Angle of the shadowing relative to the object.
Distance Distance of the shadowing in pixels.
The effects you selected are added to the shape, arrow, and line objects.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Adding text to a shape or arrow object

You can add text to a shape or arrow object. You can also select and change the text
style of the text.
To add text:
1. In the work area, double-click the shape or arrow object. A square with dashed
lines appears around the object.
2. Type your text at the cursor.
The text is added to the object.
l For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a shape or
arrow. This is helpful when adjusting how the text in a shape or arrow
appears within the different device views for responsive titles. For details,
see Scaling text in a shape or arrow in a responsive title.
l If you do not specify to use an empty ALT tag for the shape or arrow with text,
the text for the shape or arrow object is used as the text in the ALT tag. For
details about specifying an empty ALT tag for an object, see Using an empty
ALT tag for an object.
To change the text style of the text, follow these steps. You can select multiple shape,
line, or arrow objects to change when necessary.
1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape, line, or arrow graphic or in the work area,
click the shape, line, or arrow object. To select multiple shape, line, or arrow
objects, click the first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the
other objects.

- 348 -
 2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. Use the controls in the Text Style group to change the text style of a shape, line, or
arrow object as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to apply to the objects. Text
styles automatically set text attributes such as the font face,
style, size and color. Use the drop-down list to select a new
text style and add and remove text styles. For details about
managing text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the text font face to apply to the objects. Use
(Font) the drop-down list to select a new text font that overrides the
currently selected text style. Selecting a new font overrides the
font defined by the current text style.
(Font size) Click this to select the text font size to apply to the objects. Use
the drop-down list to select a new text size that overrides the
currently selected text style. Selecting a new font size over-
rides the font size defined by the current text style.
Text Click this to select the color of the text to apply to the objects.
Color Use the drop-down list to select a new text color. Selecting a
new text color overrides the text color defined by the current
text style.
(Bold) Click this to select the bolding of text to apply to the objects.
Selecting the bolding overrides the bolding defined by the cur-
rent text style.
(Italics) Click this to select the italicizing of text to apply to the objects.
Selecting the italicizing overrides the italicizing defined by the
current text style.
(Underline) Click this to select the underline of text to apply to the objects.
Selecting the underlining overrides the underlining defined by
the current text style.
Click this to align the text to the left.
Click this to align the text to the center.
Click this to align the text to the right.
Click this to increase the size of the font.
Click this to decrease the size of the font.
The style is changed.

- 349 -
Scaling text in a shape or arrow in a responsive
title
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a shape or arrow. This is
helpful when adjusting how the text in shapes and arrows appears within the different
device views for responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an override of the default
responsive inheritance. (The text scaling controls do not appear on the desktop view
since you cannot create overrides in that view.)
The current scaling factor and size of the font are displayed. Use this information if you
plan on adding similar shapes and arrows to the page.
Scaling the text will not affect the displayed value in the Text Style group. The
Text Style value reflects the base value for the text block. If the base value is
changed, that change will apply across all views and the scaling will be canceled.
For more information about building responsive titles, see Working with responsive con-
tent.
To scale the text:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape or arrow graphic or in the work area, click
the shape, or arrow object. To select multiple shape or arrow objects, click the first
object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the work area, select one of the responsive views other than desktop.
4. Drag the slider or use the appropriate plus or minus button to scale the text in the
current view. For example, to increase the text size, drag the slider arrow to the
right. The scaling factor (applied to the base) and the resulting effective font size
are adjusted accordingly.
The text is changed for the current view.

Maintaining the aspect ratio of a shape, line, or

arrow object
You can specify whether to maintain an object's native size ratio. If the aspect ratio is
maintained (locked), and you alter the width of the object, the height will automatically be
adjusted to maintain the object's original size ratio. The same is true of the object's width
if you alter the height. If the aspect ratio is unlocked, you can alter the width and height
independently.
You can select multiple shape, line, or arrow objects to change when necessary.
To maintain the aspect ratio of a shape, line or arrow object:

- 350 -
 1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape, line, or arrow graphic or in the work area,
click the shape, line, or arrow object. To select multiple shape, line, or arrow
objects, click the first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the
other objects.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. To lock the aspect ratio of the object, click the graphic to display the locked ( )

graphic in the Maintain Ratio graphic. To unlock the aspect ratio of the object,
click the graphic to display the unlocked ( ) graphic in the Maintain Ratio

graphic.
The aspect ratio is changed.

Rotating and flipping a shape, line, or arrow

object
You can rotate and flip a shape, line or arrow object.
You can select multiple shape, line, or arrow objects to change when necessary.
For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, a shape, arrow, or line object will not render a
shadow or reflection if the object has been rotated or flipped.
To rotate and flip a shape, line or arrow object:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the shape, line, or arrow graphic or in the work area,
click the shape, line, or arrow object. To select multiple shape, line, or arrow
objects, click the first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the
other objects.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. Use the controls in the Rotation and Mirroring group to change the shape, line, or
arrow object as follows:
Rotate Right 90° Click this to rotate the object 90° to the right.
Flip Vertical Click this to flip the object vertically.
Rotate Left 90° Click this to rotate the object 90° to the left.
Flip Horizontal Click this to flip the object horizontally.
Angle Use the list to specify the rotation angle.
The object is changed.
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

- 351 -
Working with charts
Charts allow you to graphically illustrate your data. the program provides a chart tool for
creating four types of charts based on the data you supply. Charts created using the
chart tool can be edited directly within the program. Additionally, the chart images are
created in Enhanced Metafile format (.emf) enabling you to resize them without losing
quality.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with charts:
l Adding a chart
l Editing a chart
l Changing the name of a chart object
l Enabling author control on a chart object
l Changing the description of a chart object
l Viewing the HTML name of a chart object
l Making a chart object initially hidden
l Placing a chart object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a chart object
l Changing the transition properties of a chart object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a chart object
l Pre-loading a chart object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a chart object
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Locking the size and position of a chart object
l Changing the position and size of a chart object

Adding a chart
Create and customize charts using the Chart Tool. Choose from a variety of charts
based on standard spreadsheet-formatted data. When completed, the chart is added as
an image that you can size and move within the page.
To use the Chart Tool:
1. Select the page in the Title Explorer on which you want to add the chart.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click Chart from the Add Image group. The Chart Tool
window opens.
3. Use the Chart Type drop-down list to select the type of chart. A preview is dis-
played to the right.
4. Use the scrollable spreadsheet to specify the labels and data that comprise your

- 352 -
 chart. Double-click within the cells of the spreadsheet to edit the cells. Click Clear
Data if you need to erase the data from the chart.
5. Click the Title & Legend tab to configure the chart title and legend, if applicable.
Use the Chart Title field to specify the chart title. The title is displayed above the
chart. To display the legend, enable the Show Legend box and use the drop-
down list to select the location of the legend on the page.
The current fonts for the Chart Title and Legend are displayed. Click the Font but-
tons to change the font settings. The Font window opens. Use the controls on the
Font window to specify the font settings for the chart. Click OK to apply your font
settings.
6. Click the OK button to add the chart to your title.
The chart is added to your title as an image object.

Editing a chart
When you create a chart using the Chart Tool, you can make changes to your chart by
editing it.
To edit a chart:
1. Do one of the following to open the Chart Tool:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the chart object, then click
Edit in the Chart group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the chart object and select
Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the chart object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the chart object and click Edit in the Chart
group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the chart object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the chart object and type Shift + Enter.
The Chart Tool is launched with your chart loaded in the work area.
2. Make the appropriate changes to your chart, save your changes, and close the
Chart Tool. All instances of the chart object are updated within the title.

Working with certificates

Use certificates to recognize course completion, personal achievements, and express
appreciation.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with certificates:
l Adding a certificate
l Changing the name of a certificate object

- 353 -
 l Enabling author control on a certificate object
l Changing the description of a certificate object
l Viewing the HTML name of a certificate object
l Making a certificate object initially hidden
l Placing a certificate object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a certificate object
l Changing the transition properties of a certificate object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a certificate object
l Pre-loading a certificate object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a certificate object
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Locking the size and position of a certificate object
l Changing the position and size of a certificate object

Adding a certificate
Create and customize certificates using the Certificate Wizard. The tool guides you
through customizing a certificate to add to your title. When completed, the certificate is
added as a page within your title.
To use the Certificate Wizard to add a certificate:
1. Select the page in the Title Explorer after which you want to add the certificate.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click Certificate from the Add More group.The Certificate
Wizard window opens.
3. Select the style of certificate from the drop-down list. A preview of the selected
style is displayed to the right of the list.
4. Click the Font buttons to change the font settings for the certificate text. The Font
window opens. Use the controls on the Font window to specify the font settings for
your certificate. Click OK to apply your font settings.
5. Click Next to continue. The Header window opens.
6. Enter the text you want to use as the header for your certificate and click the Next
button.
7. Enter the text you want to use as the body for your certificate, appearing above the
name of the certificate recipient. If you want to use a variable value for the name
appearing on the certificate, select the Use variable to set student name check
box and select the Variable to use from the list. This can be the AICC_Student_
Name variable (if publishing to a learning management system) or any other vari-
able used within your title containing the appropriate name for the certificate. If you

- 354 -
 have not created the variable you want to use, click the New Variable submenu
item on the Target list and add a new variable. For details, see Creating a
variable.
8. Click the Next button and enter the text that should appear below the certificate
recipient's name. Select if you want to Include date course was completed or
Print the certificate when the page is shown.
9. Click the Finish button to complete creating the certificate. The certificate is added
as a page to your title.

Working with documents

You can embed textual documents into your title. Documents will appear in an opaque,
scrollable window within your title.
The program supports Rich Text Format (.rtf) files of up to 1MB and text (.txt) files.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with documents:
l Adding a document
l Changing the name of a document object
l Changing the resource of a document object
l Enabling author control on a document object
l Changing the description of a document object
l Viewing the HTML name of a document object
l Making a document object initially hidden
l Placing a document object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a document object
l Changing the transition properties of a document object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a document object
l Pre-loading a document object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a document object
l Adding a reference for a document object
l Including metadata for a document object
l Resetting overrides in a responsive title
l Locking the size and position of a document object
l Changing the position and size of a document object

Adding a document
You can add a supported document by dragging and dropping it onto the page or by
using one of several interface options.

- 355 -
To add a document to a title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a document.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, click Document on the Add Text group.
l Click the Title Resources side-tab and drag an existing document onto the
page
l Click the My Library side-tab, locate a custom document and drag it onto the
page
l Drag and drop a supported document file from a Windows Explorer window
to the work area.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+2
The document appears within your work area.

Changing the resource of a document object

You can change the resource file of a document object. You can select a resource from
several locations. You can select a previously imported file, select a local file, or select
from the Media Library.
To change the resource file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the document graphic.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the document graphic and select Prop-
erties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the document and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the document.
l In the work area, right-click the document and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the document and type Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Document group, use the File field to select the resource file. Previously
imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To select a
local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library, select
Browse My Media.
The resource file is changed.

Working with attachments

You can add files that you want to launch that are not natively supported by the program
(for example, PDF files). Specifying the files enables you to publish them along with all

- 356 -
other imported resources. Attachment files require that users have the corresponding
application on their computers that will open the file. For example, if you have added a
PDF as an attachment file, accessing the PDF would require that the user have a PDF
reader installed on their computer.
When you add an attachment file to a page, you can select to create a hyperlink on the
page to the attachment. Additionally, you can select to add a copy of the file to an attach-
ment folder located within the title directory or you can externally link to the attachment
as to where it resides locally on your file system. If you select to link to the attachment, a
copy will be imported during publishing.
To add an attachment:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the attachment.
2. Do one of the following:
l Drag and drop the file or folder directly onto the page. If the file is not a sup-
ported media type, the program will prompt you with a message asking if the
file should be added as an additional file.
l On the Insert ribbon, click Attachment from the Add More group.

Select whether to add a file or a folder. The Add a resource to the Title win-
dow opens. Navigate and select the appropriate file or folder. To create a
hyperlink to appear on the page, enable the Create hyperlink to attachment
on page check box. To externally link to the attachment, enable the Link to
attachment (imports at publish) check box.
The attachment is added to the title.
See also: Supported media types
Managing resources

Working with Flash animation objects

Flash animation objects are animated movie clips containing captivating motion effects
by varying the size, color, and rotation of content. Flash animations can be added to
titles, just like images, audio, and video.
l You can create custom Flash animation to integrate into the Publisher. For
details, refer to the Creating Custom Flash Animations PDF at http://trivantis.-
com/e-learning-software-user-guides/.
l If you are experiencing JavaScript errors when locally running a Flash anim-
ation of an HTML-published title, it is most likely due to the security priv-
ileges of the Flash Player. To allow your Flash Player to be run locally
perform the following steps.
For the latest versions of Flash:
1. Locally open the title in the browser, right-click on the Flash Animation

- 357 -
 and select Global Settings to open the Flash Player Settings Man-
ager.
2. In the Flash Player Settings Manager, open the Advanced tab and
click Trusted Local Settings.
3. Add the folder for your title. (Note: If you specify the root of your My
Titles folder, the titles nested under this folder will run with the appro-
priate security privileges.)
4. Restart your browser.
For earlier versions of Flash:
1. Go to the Adobe Website (http://www.adobe.com) in the browser that is
experiencing the JavaScript errors.
2. Go to the Flash Player Settings Manager page and click on Global
Security Settings Panel.
3. Add the folder for your title. (Note: If you specify the root of your My
Titles folder, the titles nested under this folder will run with the appro-
priate security privileges.)
4. Restart your browser.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with Flash animations:
l Enabling author control on a Flash animation object
l Adding a description to a Flash animation
l Viewing the HTML name of a Flash animation
l Adding existing Flash animation objects
l Specifying additional files for a Flash animation object
l Specifying required variables for a Flash animation object
l Specifying Flash parameters
l Editing a Flash animation object
l Automatically starting a Flash animation object
l Making a Flash animation object transparent
l Making a Flash animation object initially hidden
l Placing an object on the top layer
l Changing the transition properties of an object
l Using an empty ALT tag for an object
l Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing
l Sizing the Flash animation object to fit to browser
l Adding an action to a Flash animation object

- 358 -
 l Including metadata for a Flash animation object
l Locking the size and position of a Flash animation object
l Changing the position and size of a Flash animation object

Changing the resource of a Flash animation

You can change the resource file of a Flash animation. You can select a resource from
several locations. You can select a previously imported file, select a local file, or select
from the Media Library.
To change the resource file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the Flash animation graphic.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the Flash animation graphic and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the Flash animation and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the Flash animation and type Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Flash group, use the Animation field to select the resource file. Previously
imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To select a
local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library, select
Browse My Media.
The resource file is changed.

Adding existing Flash animation files

You can drag a Flash animation (.swf) file onto a page or select and add it using one of
several interface options. The .Flash animation can be a .swf file located on your com-
puter, a custom .swf in the Media Library, a stock .swf file that comes with the program, or
an existing .swf that is already included in the title.
To add a Flash animation file located on your file system:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the Flash anim-
ation object.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Flash in the Add
Media group and select Flash File. Navigate and select the video file.
l Drag and drop a supported Flash animation file from a Windows Explorer

- 359 -
 window to the work area.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and Flash.
The local Flash animation file is added to the title.
To add a custom .swf file from the Media Library:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the video.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Flash in the Add
Media group and select My Flash.
l Click the My Library side-tab located on the right-side of the work area.
The Media Library opens.
3. From the Media Library, navigate and double-click the custom .Flash animation or
drag it onto the page.
The custom Flash animation file is added to the title.
To add a stock Flash animation file:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the Flash anim-
ation object.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list under Flash in the Add Media
group and select Flash Activity or click the Stock Library side-tab located on the
right-side of the work area. Navigate, and double-click the Flash animation file or
drag the it onto the page.
The stock Flash animation file is added to the title.
To re-use a Flash animation that already exists in the title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the Flash anim-
ation object.
2. Click the Title Resources side-tab located on the right-side of the work area, open
the Animations group, and either double-click the Flash animation file or drag it
onto the page.
The existing Flash animation object is added to the title.
See also: Working with the Media Library

Specifying additional files for a Flash animation

object
Some Flash animation objects might require additional files and folders.
To attach additional files and folders:

- 360 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Flash animation
object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation object.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation object and select Properties.
2. Click Additional Files in the Settings group. The Flash Settings window
opens.
3. Click Add File to add an additional file; otherwise, click Add Folder to add an addi-
tional folder. Navigate and select the file or folder. The file or folder is added to the
Additional Files and Folders list. Click the corresponding to remove files or
folders if necessary.
4. Click OK.
The additional files and folders are attached.

Specifying required variables for a Flash anim-

ation object
Some Flash animation objects might require additional variables to be defined and asso-
ciated to the object.
For details about define variables, see Working with variables.
To specify additional variables:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Flash animation
object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation object.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation object and select Properties.
2. Click Required Variables in the Settings group. The Flash Settings window
opens.
3. To add an existing variable, select the variable from the Variable list and Add. To
define a new variable, click New Variable and use the Add Variable window to
configure the new variable. Click the corresponding to remove variables if
necessary.
4. Click OK.
The additional variables are associated with the Flash animation object.

- 361 -
Specifying Flash parameters
You can specify additional parameters in the HTML declaration for Flash objects. Spe-
cify parameters such as making the background of your object appear transparent. You
can also edit and remove parameters.
For additional information about the different parameters you can specify, visit Adobe's
knowledge base on Flash OBJECT and EMBED tag attributes.
The parameters are only used when a title is published to HTML.
See Specifying Flash animation parameters for information about the parameters
associated with the Flash animations available in the Media Library.
To specify Flash parameters for a Flash animation:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Flash animation
object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation object.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation object and select Properties.
2. Click Flash Parameters in the Settings group. The Flash Settings window
opens.
3. Use the Name field to specify the name of the parameter and use the Value field to
specify the value of the parameter. To select a resource, enable the Use
Resource check box. This enables the Import list. Use the Import list to select the
resource. Select Browse for File to navigate and select a resource from your local
file system. Select Browse My Media to navigate and select a resource from the
Media Library. Click Add parameter to add the new variable.
The variable is added to the Parameter list. Click the corresponding to remove
parameters if necessary.
4. Click OK.
The Flash parameters are associated with the Flash animation.

Specifying Flash animation parameters

The Media Library's Stock Library contains configurable Flash animations you can add
to enhance your title. The animations contain parameters that you configure as neces-
sary.
An animation wizard starts when you insert the animation into your title. The wizard
guides you through configuring the animation. The configuration changes you make are
displayed on the right. You can change default settings, browse and select custom

- 362 -
resources, and record audio, when necessary. To change the settings after completing
the wizard, double-click the animation and click Edit to relaunch the wizard.
You can create and add custom Flash animations to the program's collection of
Flash animations. See the PDF Creating Custom Flash Animations for information
about adding custom Flash animations to the Media Library.
Select from the following Flash animations and configure the parameters as necessary:
Animation Filename Description
Analog AnalogClock.swf Displays an analog clock in a number of dif-
Clock ferent styles.
Arrow High- ArrowHighlight.swf Displays an animated arrow pointing in a cus-
light tom direction.
Audio AudioExplanation.swf Build a speaking animated character with
Explanation mouth movements and simple hand gestures.
Select from 15 different male characters or 15
different female characters.
The following functions within the Flash
animation can be executed using the
Flash command Call Function Action.
For more information about using the
Flash command, see Executing Flash
commands.
Variable Description
mute Mutes the character's audio.
unmute Unmutes the character's
audio.
pause Pauses the character.
resume Resumes playback of the
character.
Basketball Basketball.swf Displays a basketball shooting contest.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions

- 363 -
 answered correctly.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Bowling Bowling.swf Displaying a bowling game.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Bullets BulletsSyncWithAudio.swf Build a speaking animated character that
Sync with speaks as he or she displays a bulleted list.
Audio You must include one audio file per bullet as
the character presents each bullet. Each bullet
requires its own audio file. Select from 15 dif-
ferent male characters or 15 different female
characters.
The following functions within the Flash
animation can be executed using the
Flash command Call Function Action.
For more information about using the
Flash command, see Executing Flash
commands.
Variable Description
mute Mutes the character's audio.
unmute Unmutes the character's
audio.
pause Pauses the character.
resume Resumes playback of the
character.
Bullets with BulletsWithOneAudio.swf The character speaks one audio file and
One Audio presents multiple bulletsBuild a speaking anim-
ated character that speaks as he or she dis-

- 364 -
 plays a bulleted list. You must include one
audio file for the entire list as the character
presents each bullet. Select from 15 different
male characters or 15 different female char-
acters.
The following functions within the Flash
animation can be executed using the
Flash command Call Function Action.
For more information about using the
Flash command, see Executing Flash
commands.
Variable Description
mute Mutes the character's audio.
unmute Unmutes the character's
audio.
pause Pauses the character.
resume Resumes playback of the
character.
Flash Card CardFlip.swf Displays a flash card that flips-over when
clicked.
Categories Categories.swf Displays a quizshow-type question and
answer game.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
percentage Percentage of questions
answered correctly based
on the total number of ques-
tions.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Question CharacterRace.swf Displays a game in which the user answers

- 365 -
Character True/False questions to move a game char-
Race acter forward. The user is racing against
another character that will move forward after
every question except for the number of
allowed wrong answers. This provides a
degree of difficulty.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1
signifies a loss.
percentage Percentage of questions
answered correctly based
on the total number of ques-
tions.
Crazy Cans Crazycans.swf Displays the carnival game where you try to
knock down the arrangement of cans with a
ball.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1 sig-
nifies a loss.

- 366 -
Digital DigitialClock.swf Displays an digital clock in a number of dif-
Clock ferent styles.
Dunking Dunkingbooth.swf Displays a dunking booth carnival game.
Booth
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Golf Hole In GolfHoleInOne.swf Displays a golfing contest.
One
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Hangman Hangman.swf Displays the classic game in which the user
tries to spell a word or a phrase one letter at a
time.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions

- 367 -
 answered correctly.
percentage Percentage of questions
answered correctly based
on the total number of ques-
tions.
Horse Race Horserace.swf Displays the horse race squirt-gun carnival
game.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1 sig-
nifies a loss.
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
Jigsaw JigsawPuzzleGame.swf Users assemble a jigsaw puzzle of an image
puzzle you supply.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win.
The following functions within the Flash
animation can be executed using the
Flash command Call Function Action.
For more information about using the
Flash command, see Executing Flash
commands.

- 368 -
 Variable Description
solve Will solve the puzzle.
Matching MatchingPairGame.swf Displays a game in which the user matches
Pair Game flash cards. Up to eight matching pairs are sup-
ported.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win.
numWrong Number of wrong attempts.
Million Dol- MillionDollarQuestion.swf Displays a question-and-answer game.
lar Ques-
The following variables' value within the
tion
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
percentage Percentage of questions
answered correctly based
on the total number of ques-
tions.
prize Prize amount won.
prizeNum Number version of the
prize.
Mountain Mountainclimb.swf Displays a climber reaching the top of the
Climb mountain if the question is answered correctly.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using

- 369 -
 the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1 sig-
nifies a loss.
Photo PhotoViewer.swf Displays photos in a manner similar to cover
Viewer flow on an iPod. Up to 20 photos are sup-
ported.
Reveal Reveal.swf Displays a game in which the user tries to
reveal an image by correctly answering ques-
tions on tiles that cover the image.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies that all questions
have been answered.
percentage Percentage of questions
answered correctly based
on the total number of ques-
tions.
Slot Slotmachine.swf Displays a slot machine. A correct answer res-
Machine ults in a winning combination on the slot
machine.

- 370 -
 The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Soccer Pen- SoccerPenaltyShot.swf Displays a soccer penalty shot contest.
alty Shot
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
points Number of accumulated
points.
Text Anim- TextAnimation.swf Displays animated user-specified text in a num-
ation ber of ways.
Tic Tac Toe TicTacToeGame.swf Displays a Tic Tac Toe game. Users answer
True/False questions. Correct answers allow
them to place an X on the Tic Tac Toe grid. A 0
is placed in the grid when the answer is incor-
rect.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description

- 371 -
 score Number of questions
answered correctly.
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1
signifies a loss.
percentage Percentage of questions
answered correctly based
on the total number of ques-
tions.
Walk The Walktheplank.swf Displays a game in which a pirate must walk
Plank the plank if the user answers the questions
incorrectly.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
score Number of questions
answered correctly.
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1 sig-
nifies a loss.
Word WordScramble.swf Displays a game in which the user tries to
Scramble unscramble a word or a phrase.
The following variables' value within the
Flash animation can be retrieved using
the Flash command Get Variable
Action. For more information about using
the Flash command, see Executing
Flash commands.
Variable Description
result Result of the game. The
default is 0. A value of 1 sig-
nifies a win; a value of -1 sig-

- 372 -
 nifies a loss.

Editing a Flash animation object

You can edit a Flash animation after you have created and added it to the title.
To edit a Flash animation:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the Flash animation graphic, then click
the edit graphic in the Flash group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the Flash animation graphic and select
Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the Flash animation and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation and click the Edit
graphic in the Flash group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the Flash animation and type Shift + Enter.
2. Use the appropriate editor to update and save the Flash animation object.
To select another Flash animation object to edit from the Properties ribbon, click the
Animation pull-down list adjacent to the Edit graphic in the Flash group.

Automatically starting a Flash animation object

You can chose to automatically start the Flash animation when the page containing the
Flash animation object is displayed to the user.
To automatically start a Flash animation object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Flash animation
object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation object.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation object and select Properties.
2. Ensure that the Auto Start check box in the Appearance group is enabled.
The Flash animation object will automatically start.

Making a Flash animation object transparent

You can chose to make a Flash animation object transparent when the page containing
the Flash animation object is displayed to the user.

- 373 -
To make a Flash animation object transparent:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Flash animation
object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation object.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation object and select Properties.
2. Enable that the Transparent check box in the Appearance group is enabled.
The Flash animation object will be transparent.

Sizing the Flash animation object to fit to browser

You can chose to size a Flash animation object to fit to the dimensions of the browser
when the Flash animation object is published to the Web.
To size a Flash animation object to fit to the browser:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Flash animation
object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the Flash animation object.
l In the work area, right-click the Flash animation object and select Properties.
2. Enable that the Fit To Browser check box in the Web Options group is enabled.
The Flash animation object will be transparent.

Working with YouTube videos

You can add YouTube videos into the title. YouTube is a popular video-sharing site on
the Internet.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with YouTube video:
l Adding a YouTube video object
l Changing the name of a YouTube video object
l Changing the Web address of a YouTube object
l Enabling author control on a YouTube video
l Changing the description of a YouTube video object
l Viewing the HTML name of a YouTube video object
l Making a YouTubve video initially invisible
l Placing a YouTube video on the top layer

- 374 -
 l Automatically starting a YouTube video
l Continuously playing a YouTube video object
l Displaying the controller when users roll-over the YouTube video object
l Applying a skin to the YouTube video controller
l Changing the transitions of a YouTube video object
l Adding an action to a YouTube video object
l Adding a reference for a YouTube video object
l Including metadata for a YouTube video object
l Locking the size and position of a YouTube video object
l Specifying the position and size of a YouTube video object

Adding YouTube video objects

You can add YouTube videos into the title. To add a YouTube video in a title, you must
specify the Web address of the YouTube video stream. You can preview the YouTube
video stream before adding it to the title.
To add a YouTube video:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location onto which you want to add a video.
2. On the Insert ribbon, click YouTube from the Add Media group. The Add a
YouTube Video window opens.
3. In the URL field, specify the Web address of the YouTube video.
4. To preview the YouTube video, click the Play button in the middle of the window or
click Preview.
5. Click OK.
The YouTube video object is added to the title.

Changing the Web address of a YouTube object

You change the Web address of an existing YouTube object.
To change the Web address:
1. Do one of the following to open the properties:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the YouTube object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the YouTube object and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the YouTube object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the YouTube object.

- 375 -
 l In the work area, right-click the YouTube object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the YouTube object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Video group, use the URL field to specify the new Web address of the
YouTube object. All instances of the YouTube object are updated within the title.

Working with social media content

You can add several components from today's popular social media outlets, such as
Facebook's Like button and the Twitter Feed widget. Add these buttons and widgets to
popularize your titles and drive traffic to your content.
View these tasks for more information about working with social media content:
l Adding the All in One Share button
l Adding the Twitter's Tweet button
l Adding the Twitter's Feed widget
l Adding the Facebook Like button
l Adding the Facebook Send button
l Adding the Facebook Comments widget
l Adding the Facepile widget
l Adding the Google +1 button
l Editing a Twitter Feed object
l Changing the name of a social media object
l Enabling author control on a social media object
l Changing the description of a social media object
l Viewing the HTML name of a social media object
l Making a social media object initially hidden
l Placing a social media object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a social media object
l Changing the transition properties of a social media object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a social media object
l Pre-loading a social media object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a social media object
l Adding a reference for a social media object
l Including metadata for a social media object

- 376 -
 l Locking the size and position of a social media object
l Changing the position and size of a social media object

Adding the All in One Share button

Add the All in One Share button and have all the social network buttons or box counters
included in the title.
To add the All in One Share button:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click the down arrow associated with Social in the

Add Web Object group and select All in One Share Button.
The All in One Share button is added to the title. Move the button to the appropriate loc-
ation on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appear-
ance of the button.

Working with the Tweet button

Add the Tweet button so Twitter users can share a link to your title on Twitter. When
added, this button displays the Tweet counter representing the number of all Tweets and
retweets of your content.
To add the Tweet button:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click the down arrow associated with Social in the

Add Web Object group and select Tweet Button.

The Tweet button is added to the title. Move the button to the appropriate location on the
page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the but-
ton.

Working with the Twitter Feed widget

Add the Twitter Feed widget so Twitter users can see your favorite tweets within the title.
To add the Tweet Feed widget:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the widget.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click the down arrow associated with Social in the

Add Web Object group and select Feed Widget. The Twitter Feed window opens.
3. Specify your Twitter username and click OK.
The Twitter Feed widget is added to the title. Move the widget to the appropriate location
on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of
the widget.

- 377 -
See also: Editing a Twitter Feed object

Working with the Facebook Like button

Add the Facebook Like button so Facebook users can like your title on Facebook.
To add the Facebook Like button:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Social in the Add Web Object group and select

Facebook Like Button.

The Facebook Like button is added to the title. Move the button to the appropriate loc-
ation on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appear-
ance of the button.

Working with the Facebook Send button

Add the Facebook Send button so Facebook users can send the title to their Facebook
friends.
To add the Facebook Send button:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Social in the Add Web Object group and select

Facebook Send Button.

The Facebook Send button is added to the title. Move the button to the appropriate loc-
ation on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appear-
ance of the button.

Working with the Facebook Comments widget

Add the Facebook Comments button so Facebook users can send comments about the
title to their Facebook wall.
To add the Facebook Comments widget:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the widget.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Social in the Add Web Object group and select

Facebook Comments Widget.

The Facebook Comments widget is added to the title. Move the widget to the appropriate
location on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the
appearance of the widget.

- 378 -
Working with the Facepile widget
Add the Facepile widget so Facebook users can see the Facebook users who have
liked the title.
To add the Facepile widget:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the widget.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Social in the Add Web Object group and select

Facepile widget
The Facepile widget is added to the title. Move the widget to the appropriate location on
the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the
widget.

Working with the Google +1 button

Add the Google +1 button so users can recommend the title to their fellow Google users.
To add the Google +1 button:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Social in the Add Web Object group and select

Google +1 Button.
The Google +1 button is added to the title. Move the button to the appropriate location on
the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the
button.

Editing a Twitter Feed object

When you add a Twitter Feed social media object, you can make changes to the Twitter
Feed username.
To edit a Twitter Feed object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the social media object,
then click Edit in the Social Object group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the social media object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the social media object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the social media object and click Edit in

the Social Media group on the Properties ribbon.

- 379 -
 l In the work area, right-click the social media object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the social media object and type Shift + Enter.
The Twitter Feed window opens.
2. Use the Twitter Username field to change the username if necessary. Click OK to
save your change and close the window. All instances of the Twitter Feed object
are updated within the title.

Working with Web windows

Web windows allow users to view Web content directly within a title. Select from win-
dows containing Google Drive documents, pages in the title, local Web-based content,
and more. You can preview the content before adding it to the title.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with Web windows:
l Adding a Web window object
l Editing a Web window object
l Changing the name of a Web window object
l Enabling author control on a Web window object
l Changing the description of a Web window object
l Viewing the HTML name of a Web window object
l Making a Web window object initially hidden
l Placing a Web window object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a Web window object
l Changing the transition properties of a Web window object
l Adding an action to a Web window object
l Changing the style of a Web window object
l Locking the size and position of a Web window object
l Changing the position and size of a Web window object

Adding a Web window

Add a Web window to allow users to view external or live Web resources within a title.
Select from the following Web sources:
l Web Address
l Local Web-based content
l Page in Title
l Google Maps Location
l Wikipedia Entry
l Google Document

- 380 -
You can preview the display of the intended Web site before you add the window to the
title.
Web Windows that display external Web-based content are not displayed if you
publish your title for offline use. For details about publishing, see Publishing a
title.
To add a Web window:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a document.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Web Window in the Add Web Object group. The
Add Web Window window opens.
3. Use the Window Source drop-down list select the type of Web resource for the
window and complete the option field that is displayed based on the Web
resource. Click Preview to preview the Web window.
4. Click OK.
A placeholder for the Web Window is added to the title. Select the placeholder window
to size and move it as necessary. Use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change
its appearance.

Editing a Web window

When you add a Web window object, you can make changes to the Web window's
source type and URL address.
To edit a Web window:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Web window object,
then click Edit in the Web Window group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the Web window object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the Web window object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the Web window object and click Edit in

the Web Window group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the Web window object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the Web window object and type Shift + Enter.
The Add Web Window window opens.
2. Make the appropriate changes to the Window Source and URL fields. When you
are finished, click OK to save your changes and close the editing window. All
instances of the Web window object are updated within the title.

- 381 -
Changing the style of a Web window
You can change the style of a Web window by adjusting the margin sizes, adding to the
border weight and color, and configuring the display of the scroll bar. You can also make
the Web window transparent.
To adjust the style of a Web window:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the Web window object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the Web window object and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the Web window object and type Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the Web window object.
l In the work area, right-click the Web window object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the Web window object and type Enter.
The Properties tab for the Web window opens.
2. Click Style to open the Style tab.
3. Use the controls on the Style tab as follows:
Border Weight Use the up and down arrows to specify the weight of the bor-
der.
Border Color Click the button to adjust the color of the border. To change the
color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a cus-
tom color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined
color, click one of the color samples displayed. To specify a
custom color, select Custom and use the controls in the Color
window to configure a custom color. To select an existing
color, click Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a
new color from an existing color currently displayed on your
desktop.
Margin Size Use the up and down arrows to specify the size of the margin.
Scrollbar Use the list to select when to display the scrollbar. Select Auto
to specify that the scrollbar be displayed only when needed.
Select Yes to specify that the scrollbar be displayed even
when no necessary. Select No to specify that the scrollbar not
be displayed.
Transparent Enable this check box to specify that the Web window be trans-
parent.
The style of the Web window is adjusted.

- 382 -
Working with RSS feeds
Short for Rich Site Summary or Really Simple Syndication, RSS feeds deliver content
this is frequently updated, such as blog entries, news headlines, sports scores and more.
Select from today's popular feeds or add a custom feed.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with RSS feeds:
l Adding a RSS feed object
l Editing a RSS feed object
l Changing the name of a RSS feed object
l Enabling author control on a RSS feed object
l Changing the description of a RSS feed object
l Viewing the HTML name of a RSS feed object
l Making a RSS feed object initially hidden
l Placing a RSS feed object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a RSS feed object
l Changing the transition properties of a RSS feed object
l Adding an action to a RSS feed object
l Locking the size and position of a RSS feed object
l Changing the position and size of a RSS feed object

Adding a RSS feed

Add a RSS feed to the title to provide users with the latest news, tech trends, or quick
knowledge or define a custom feed not found in the list of predefined feeds. Select from
the predefined feeds:
l BBC News
l CNN Top Stories

l Dictionary.com Word of the Day

l Engadget

l ESPN

l New York Times

l Quote of the Day

l Slashdot

l Sports Illustrated

l Yahoo News

To add a predefined feed:

1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list on RSS Feed in the Add Web
Object group and select a predefined feed from the list.

- 383 -
The feed is added to the title. Move the feed window to the appropriate location on the
page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the win-
dow.
To add a custom feed:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the button.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click RSS Feed in the Add Web Object group or open
the drop-down list and select Custom RSS Feed. The Add Custom RSS Feed win-
dow opens.
3. Specify the Web address of the RSS Feed in the RSS Feed field and click OK.
The custom feed is added to the title. Move the feed window to the appropriate location
on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of
the window.
See also: Editing a RSS feed object

Editing a RSS feed object

When you add a RSS feed object, you can change the RSS feed.
To edit a RSS feed:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the RSS feed object, then
click Edit in the RSS feed group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the RSS feed object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the RSS feed object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the RSS feed object and click Edit in the

RSS feed group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the RSS feed object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the RSS feed object and type Shift + Enter.
The Add Custom RSS Feed window opens.
2. Use the RSS Feed field to change the feed address. When you are finished, click
OK to save your changes and close the window. All instances of the RSS feed
object are updated within the title.

Working with animation objects

An animation is a type of image that uses a sequence of various frames to make the
image appear to change or move. the program supports animation as GIF (.gif) files.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with animation:

- 384 -
 l Adding an animation
l Editing an animation
l Changing the name of an animation object
l Changing the resource of an animation object
l Enabling author control on an animation object
l Changing the description of an animation object
l Viewing the HTML name of an animation object
l Making an animation object initially hidden
l Placing an animation object on the top layer
l Automatically starting an animation object
l Specifying the CSS classes of an animation object
l Changing the transition properties of an animation object
l Using an empty ALT tag for an animation object
l Pre-loading an animation object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to an animation object
l Adding a reference for an animation object
l Including metadata for an animation object
l Locking the size and position of an animation object
l Changing the position and size of an animation object

Adding an animation
Animations can draw attention to your content and add interest to a title. A preview of the
animation is displayed before you add it to the title.
To add an animation to your title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the animation
object.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Animation in the Add Media group. The Add an
animation to the Title window opens.
3. Navigate and select the supported animation file.
The animation is added to the title. Move the animation object to the appropriate location
on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of
the image.

- 385 -
Changing the resource of an animation object
You can change the resource file of an animation. You can select a resource from sev-
eral locations. You can select a previously imported file, select a local file, or select from
the Media Library.
To change the resource file:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the animation graphic.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the animation graphic and select Prop-
erties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the animation and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the animation.
l In the work area, right-click the animation and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the animation and type Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Animation group, use the Animation field to select the resource file. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media.
The resource file is changed.

Editing an animation object

When you add an animation object, you can edit the animation by making changes to
the individual frames that make up the animation. This is done using the Image Editor.
To edit an animation object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the animation object, then
click Edit in the Animation group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the animation object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the animation object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the animation object and click Edit in the
Animation group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the animation object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the animation object and type Shift + Enter.

- 386 -
 The Image Editor opens.
2. Use the Image Editor to edit and save the image.
For detailed information about using the Image Editor, click F1 or use the Help pull-
down list.
When you save your editing changes in the Image Editor, the image file is automatically
updated in the title.
To select another image to edit from the Properties ribbon, click the Animation pull-
down list adjacent to the Edit graphic in the Animation group.

Automatically starting an animation object

You can specify whether to automatically start an animation object. Animation objects
are set to automatically start by default. If you disable auto-starting the animation object,
you will need to configure an action's trigger to start the animation object, like Show or
Mouse Click. For details about configuring the action, see Adding an action.
Animations do not automatically start on mobile devices. Adding a Play button is
recommended.
To automatically start an animation object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the animation object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the animation object and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the animation object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the animation object and click Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the animation object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the animation object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Appearance group, ensure that the Auto Start check box is enabled.
The animation object will automatically start.

Working with HTML extension objects

The HTML extension object is an advanced feature that allows you to extend the func-
tionality and contents of your title beyond what the program natively supports.
With the HTML extension object, you can extend the functionality of a title by adding the
following:
ASP .NET Use this object type to insert your own ASP .NET script. Your custom code
(.aspx) will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The

- 387 -
 HTML page will be published with an extension of .aspx.
ASP script Use this object type to insert your own ASP script. Your custom code will
be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The HTML
page will be published with an extension of .asp.
Bottom of Use this object type to insert your own code or comments at the bottom of
file script- the file. Your custom code or comments will be placed below and outside
ing the </HTML> tags of the HTML page.
Cascading Use this object type to apply a cascading style sheet. Cascading style
Style Sheet sheets will not cascade to text that the program produces, and should only
be used to format objects.
ColdFusion Use this object type to insert your own ColdFusion script. Your custom
code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page.
The HTML page will be published with an extension of .cfm.
Custom Use this object type to insert your own free-form, custom HTML. Your cus-
DIV tom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML
page.
Header Use this object type to insert your own JavaScript. When this is selected,
Scripting your custom script will be placed within the <script> tags in the head of
the HTML page.
Java Use this object type to import a Java class or Jar file. If you use a Jar file,
Applet you must also specify the class name you would like to use within the Jar
file.
JSP script Use this object type to insert your own JSP script. Your custom code will
be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The HTML
page will be published with an extension of .jsp.
Meta tags Use this object type to insert meta tags. Meta tags will follow the <title>
tags within the head of the HTML page. An example of a meta tag is:
<META NAME="Author" CONTENT="Your name">
PHP Script Use this object type to insert your own PHP script. Your custom code will
be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The HTML
page will be published with an extension of .php.
Shockwave Use this object type to import a Shockwave file.
Movie
Top of file Use this object type to insert your own code or comments at the top of the
scripting file. Your custom code or comments will be placed above and outside the
<HTML> tags of the HTML page.

l ASP, JSP, PHP, ColdFusion and ASP .NET object types cannot be used on
the same page within your title.
l You can use tokens within an external HTML object and a Run JavaScript

- 388 -
 action for replacement and manipulation within your custom Javascript. For
details, see Token replacements for custom JavaScript.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with HTML
extension objects:
l Adding a HTML extension object
l Editing a HTML extension object
l Changing the type of HTML extension object
l Specifying additional files of a HTML extension object
l Specifying required variables of a HTML extension object
l Specifying Java applet parameters of a HTML extension object
l Changing the name of a HTML extension object
l Enabling author control on a HTML extension object
l Changing the description of a HTML extension object
l Viewing the HTML name of a HTML extension object
l Making a HTML extension object initially hidden
l Placing a HTML extension object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a HTML extension object
l Changing the transition properties of a HTML extension object
l Adding an action to a HTML extension object
l Locking the size and position of a HTML extension object
l Changing the position and size of a HTML extension object

Adding a HTML extension object

Perform the following steps to add a HTML extension object to your title. External HTML
objects are only valid if you are publishing to the Web.
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a HTML exten-
sion object.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, click HTML Extension in the Add Web Object
group.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+4
A placeholder for the HTML extension object is added to the title. Select the placeholder
window to size and move it as necessary. Use the controls on the Properties ribbon to
make changes to the external object, such as changing the type of the HTML

- 389 -
extension object, editing the code associated with the HTML extension, specifying addi-
tional files, and adding an action.

Editing a HTML extension object

You can edit the code associated with a HTML extension object. For example, if you are
working with a Coldfusion extension, you can specify your own ColdFusion script to be
placed within the body of the HTML page.
To edit the code associated with a HTML extension object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the HTML
extension object, then click Edit in the HTML Extension group on the

Properties ribbon.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the HTML extension object
and select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the HTML extension object and type Shift +
Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the HTML extension object and click Edit

in the HTML Extension group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the HTML extension object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the HTML extension object and type Shift + Enter.
The Edit the code associated with the HTML extension window opens.
2. Use the window to specify the code and click OK to save the changes.
When you save your code, the HTML extension object is automatically updated in the
title.

Changing the type of the HTML extension object

Select from the following types of HTML extension objects:
ASP .NET Use this object type to insert your own ASP .NET script. Your custom code
(.aspx) will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The
HTML page will be published with an extension of .aspx.
ASP script Use this object type to insert your own ASP script. Your custom code will
be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The HTML
page will be published with an extension of .asp.
Bottom of Use this object type to insert your own code or comments at the bottom of
file script- the file. Your custom code or comments will be placed below and outside
ing the </HTML> tags of the HTML page.

- 390 -
Cascading Use this object type to apply a cascading style sheet. Cascading style
Style Sheet sheets will not cascade to text that the program produces, and should only
be used to format objects.
ColdFusion Use this object type to insert your own ColdFusion script. Your custom
code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page.
The HTML page will be published with an extension of .cfm.
Custom Use this object type to insert your own free-form, custom HTML. Your cus-
DIV tom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML
page.
Header Use this object type to insert your own JavaScript. When this is selected,
Scripting your custom script will be placed within the <script> tags in the head of
the HTML page.
Java Use this object type to import a Java class or Jar file. If you use a Jar file,
Applet you must also specify the class name you would like to use within the Jar
file.
JSP script Use this object type to insert your own JSP script. Your custom code will
be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The HTML
page will be published with an extension of .jsp.
Meta tags Use this object type to insert meta tags. Meta tags will follow the <title>
tags within the head of the HTML page. An example of a meta tag is:
<META NAME="Author" CONTENT="Your name">
PHP Script Use this object type to insert your own PHP script. Your custom code will
be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. The HTML
page will be published with an extension of .php.
Shockwave Use this object type to import a Shockwave file.
Movie
Top of file Use this object type to insert your own code or comments at the top of the
scripting file. Your custom code or comments will be placed above and outside the
<HTML> tags of the HTML page.

ASP, JSP, PHP, ColdFusion and ASP .NET object types cannot be used on the
same page within your title.
To change the type of the HTML extension object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the HTML
extension object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the HTML extension object
and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.

- 391 -
 l In the work area, double-click the HTML extension object.
l In the work area, right-click the HTML extension object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the HTML Extension group, use the Type pull-down list to select the type of the
HTML extension object. Use the File field to specify the file required for the type
you specified.
The HTML extension object is automatically updated in the title.

Specifying additional files used by a HTML exten-

sion object
The custom code within your HTML extension object can link to a variety of file types.
Each file that your custom code references must be added as an additional file.
To specify additional files used by a HTML extension object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the HTML
extension object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the HTML extension object
and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the HTML extension object.
l In the work area, right-click the HTML extension object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, click Additional Files in the Additional Settings
group. The Additional Settings window opens.
3. Click Add File to navigate and select a file. Click Add Folder to expand and select
a folder. The additional files and folders appear within the Additional Files and
Folders list.
To remove unnecessary files and folders, select the file or folder within the list and
click .
4. Click OK.
The additional files and folders are associated with the HTML extension.

- 392 -
Specifying required variables for a HTML exten-
sion object
The custom code within your HTML extension object can require additional variables.
You can specify existing variables or define new variables.
To specify the required variables used by a HTML extension object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the HTML
extension object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the HTML extension object
and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the HTML extension object.
l In the work area, right-click the HTML extension object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, click Required Variables in the Additional Settings
group. The Additional Settings window opens.
3. Use the Variables list to select an existing variable and click New Variable to con-
figure a new variable. The variables appear within the Required Variables list.
To remove unnecessary variables, select the them within the list and click .
4. Click OK.
The required variables are associated with the HTML extension.

Specifying Java applet parameters for a HTML

extension object
You can pass parameters from the HTML page to the Java applet that is included on
your page as a HTML extension object.
To specify Java applet parameters:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the HTML
extension object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the HTML extension object
and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.

- 393 -
 l In the work area, double-click the HTML extension object.
l In the work area, right-click the HTML extension object and select
Properties.
l In the work area, select the HTML extension object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. On the Properties ribbon, click Java Applet Parameters in the Additional Set-
tings group. The Additional Settings window opens.
3. Use the Name and Value fields to define the Java parameters and click Add para-
meter to add the parameter to the Name/Value list. Repeat as necessary.
To remove unnecessary variables, select the variable within the list and click .
4. Click OK.
The HTML extension object is automatically updated in the title.

Working with tables of contents

A table of contents is a menu system that is automatically generated from your title’s
organization in the Title Explorer. The table of contents will automatically be populated
with the chapters, sections, and pages that are contained within your title. Users will be
able to select the chapter, section or page from the table of contents to navigate directly
to that area of the title. The table of contents can also display status indicators that show
which chapters, sections, tests, test sections, and surveys that your users have visited
and completed.
View these topics for more information:
l Adding a table of contents
l Changing the name of a table of contents
l Specifying the scope of a table of contents
l Enabling author control on a table of contents
l Specify the frame of reference for a table of contents
l Specifying a description of a table of contents
l Viewing the HTML name of a table of contents
l Removing chapters, sections, and pages from a table of contents
l Removing pages from a table of contents
l Specifying the type of a table of contents
l Removing frames in HTML
l Removing icons from a table of contents
l Changing the status indicator image set in a table of contents

- 394 -
 l Specifying the text style of a table of contents
l Scaling the text in a table of contents in a responsive title
l Making a table of contents initially invisible
l Placing a table of contents on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS class of a table of contents
l Changing the transition properties of a table of contents
l Locking the size and position of a table of contents
l Specifying the position and size of a table of contents

Adding a table of contents

Follow these steps to add a table of contents:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the table of con-
tents.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Table of Contents from the Add Navigation and
Interaction group or type Ctrl + Shift + 9. Alternatively, click the drop-down list to
select a specific type of table of contents as one of the following:
Drop-down A drop-down list will present the table of contents in a single list
List from which users can select the chapter, section or page to which
they want to navigate.
Indented List An indented list will display all of the chapters, sections and
pages included in the table of contents. The sections and pages
within the list are indented from the chapter or section to which
they belong. Users click on the chapter, section or page in the list
to which they want to navigate.
Tree View A tree view will display all of the chapters, sections and pages
included in the table of contents, organized in a tree, similar to the
functionality of the Title Explorer. Chapters and sections will have
a [+] sign next to them, enabling users to expand the chapter or
section to select a page to which they want to navigate.
The table of contents is added to the title.
Resize and move the table of contents to the appropriate location on the page and use
the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the table of contents.

Specifying the type of a table of contents

The table of contents object can have three different appearances.
To specify the type of a table of contents:

- 395 -
 1. Double-click the table of contents within the Title Explorer or within your work area.
The Properties ribbon for the table of content object is displayed.
2. Click Type from the Layout group. Choose from the following options:
Drop-down A drop-down list will present the table of contents in a single list
List from which users can select the chapter, section or page to which
they want to navigate.
Indented List An indented list will display all of the chapters, sections and
pages included in the table of contents. The sections and pages
within the list are indented from the chapter or section to which
they belong. Users click on the chapter, section or page in the list
to which they want to navigate.
Tree View A tree view will display all of the chapters, sections and pages
included in the table of contents, organized in a tree, similar to the
functionality of the Title Explorer. Chapters and sections will have
a [+] sign next to them, enabling users to expand the chapter or
section to select a page to which they want to navigate.

Specifying the scope of a table of contents

A table of contents can be generated to include the scope of the entire title, the current
chapter, or the current section.
To specify the scope of a table of contents:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the Scope (when available) from the Table of Contents group. Choose from
the following options:
For the entire The table of contents will include all chapters, sections and
title pages in the entire title.
For this The table of contents will only include the sections and pages
chapter contained in the current chapter.
For this section The table of contents will only include the sub-sections and

- 396 -
 pages contained in the current section.

Specifying the frame of reference for a table of

contents
If you are using frames within your title, a table of contents can be generated in one
frame while it is used to navigate within the chapters, sections and pages of another
frame.
See also: Working with frames
To specify the frame of reference for a table of contents:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Table of Contents group, use the Frame list to select the frame of reference
for the table of contents.

Removing chapters, sections and pages from a

table of contents
By default, all chapters, sections and pages within your title are included in a table of
contents. However, if you do not want a specific chapter, section or page to appear
within the table of contents, it can be removed.
To remove a chapter, section, or page from a table of contents:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.

- 397 -
 The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Table of Contents group, click Included Pages. The Included Pages

window opens.
3. Expand the contents of the title by clicking the plus sign graphics to reveal the
chapter, section, or page that you want to remove.
4. Click the corresponding Show graphic so that it changes to the Exclude
graphic. This will exclude the chapter, section, or page from the table of contents.
5. Click OK.

Removing pages from a table of contents

You can specify to have only the chapters and sections of your title appear in a table of
contents. Users can then only directly navigate to the chapters and sections within the
title. When users navigate to a chapter or section, they will be directed to the first page of
that chapter or section.
To remove all pages from a table of contents:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Table of Contents group, click Included Pages. The Included Pages

window opens.
3. Clear the Show Pages check box.
4. Click OK.
See also:Specifying the type of a table of contents

Removing frames in HTML

If you are using frames within your title, a table of contents can be generated without the
frames when publishing to HTML.
See also: Working with frames
To hide the frames from a table of contents:

- 398 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Layout group, disable the Frameless in HTML check box.

Removing icons from a table of contents

If the appearance of your table of contents is Indented List or Tree View, you can
remove the icons from the table of contents. The table of contents will then only display
the names of the chapters, sections, and pages within your title, and not the cor-
responding chapter, section and page icons.
To remove the icons from a table of contents:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Layout group, disable the Use Icons check box.
See also: Specifying the type of a table of contents

Specifying the status indicator image set in a

table of contents
With tracking, you can specify the tracking status of chapters, sections, tests, test sec-
tions, and surveys using a status indicator image set within a table of contents. This is
available if the appearance of your table of contents is Indented List or Tree View. The
status indicator image set in a table of contents is not displayed by default.
For more information about tracking content, see Working with tracking.

- 399 -
To specify the status indicator image set:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the three drop-down lists (Completed, In Progress, and Not Started) from
the Status Indicator group to select the new image for each state. Click Browse
from File to navigate and select a local image, click Browse My Media to select
an image from the Media Library, click Browse Stock Status Indicators to select
a new stock image, or select a new image from the list.
3. To edit an image assigned to one of the states of the status indicator, click the cor-
responding Edit graphic. Your default image editor opens. Use the editor to alter
and save the image.
The status indicator image set is specified.

Specifying the text style of a table of contents

You can alter the appearance of the text of a reference list, such as changing the font or
underlining the text.
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a table of contents.
This is helpful when adjusting how the text in a table of contents appears within
the different device views for responsive titles. For details, see Scaling the text in a
table of contents in a responsive title.
To specify the text style of a form element:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the table of contents.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the table of contents and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the table of contents and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.

- 400 -
 The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To specify the text style of the table of contents, use the controls in the Style group
as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to format the table of contents.
The current text styles are listed. To create a new text style,
select Manage Styles and use the controls in the Text Styles
window to configure a new style. For details about adding
and managing text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the font for the text of the table of contents.
Click this to select the font size for the text of the table of con-
tents.
Text Click this to select the color for the text of the table of con-
tents. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to
use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom
to select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Click this to bold the text of the table of contents.
Click this to italicize the text of the table of contents.
Click this to underline the text of the table of contents.
Background Click this to select the color of the background of the table of
contents. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper
tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select
Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Click this to increase the size of the font.
Click this to decrease the size of the font.

Scaling the text in a table of contents in a

responsive title
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a table of contents. This
is helpful when adjusting how the text in a table of contents appears within the different
device views for responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an override of the default
responsive inheritance. (The text scaling controls are disabled on the desktop view
since you cannot create overrides in that view. Additionally, the labels in fields will
change colors to reflect the current override values for each device view).
For more information about building responsive titles, see Working with responsive con-
tent.

- 401 -
The current scaling factor and size of the font are displayed. Use this information if you
plan on adding similar text blocks to the page.
Scaling the text will not affect the displayed value in the Text Style group. The
Text Style value reflects the base value for the table of contents. If the base value
is changed, that change will apply across all views and the scaling will be can-
celed.
To scale the text:
1. Select the table of contents that you want to change.
2. In the work area, select one of the responsive views other than desktop.
3. On the Properties ribbon, drag the slider or use the appropriate plus or minus but-
ton in the Text Scale group to scale the text in the current view. The values
increase or decrease in 10% increments. For example, to increase the text size,
drag the slider arrow to the right. The scaling factor (applied to the base) and the
resulting effective font size are adjusted accordingly.
The text is changed for the current view. Additionally, the scaling values are inherited to
the phone views if the current view is a tablet view.

Working with menus

You can create menu objects for use in navigating throughout a title or for executing
other actions. The menus can also display status indicators that show which chapters,
sections, tests, test sections, and surveys that your users have visited and completed.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with menu objects:
l Adding a menu object
l Editing a menu object
l Changing the name of a menu object
l Enabling author control on a menu object
l Changing the description of a menu object
l Viewing the HTML name of a menu object
l Creating a menu from the table of contents
l Including pages in the menu
l Specifying the status indicator image set in a menu
l Making a menu object initially hidden
l Placing a menu object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a menu object
l Changing the transition properties of a menu object
l Adding an action to a menu object

- 402 -
 l Locking the size and position of a menu object
l Changing the position and size of a menu object

Adding a menu
Add menus using the Menu Creator. You can create a menu from the table of contents or
create a custom menu and define actions to trigger for each menu item. The Menu
Creator provides a preview as you build the menu.
To add a menu to your title.
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add a menu.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, click Menu from the Add Navigation and Inter-
action group.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+7
The Menu Creator opens.
3. To create a menu from the table of contents of the title, enable the Create Menu
from Table of Contents check box. If the title contains pages and you want to
include them in the menu, enable the Include Pages check box. The menu will
automatically launch the corresponding chapters and pages when users click the
corresponding menu and submenu items.
To create a custom menu, use Add Item to specify the selectable items within the
menu. To create a submenu item, add the item using Add Item and click the green
arrow buttons to move and indent the item under its corresponding main menu
item. To assign actions to menu items, select the menu item and use the Action
pull-down list and the corresponding fields in the Menu Item Action group to con-
figure the action. Click Add Separator to add a separator line between groups of
menu items. Click Delete to remove menu items if necessary. For details about con-
figuring actions, see Adding an action.
4. To configure the appearance of the menu items, click the Menu Style tab. To con-
figure the appearance of the submemu items, click the Submenu Style tab. Use
the controls on these two tabs as follows:
Orientation For menu items, select whether the menu items are to be oriented
horizontally or vertically.
Style For submenu items, select whether to copy the menu style for the
submenu items or unlock the submenu style controls to specify a
unique style for submenu items.
Text Style Use the controls in this section to configure the appearance of the
menu and submenu text as follows:

- 403 -
 Click this to select a text style to format
the menu and submenu items. The cur-
rent text styles are listed. To create a
new text style, select Manage Styles
and use the controls in the Text Styles
window to configure a new style. For
details about adding and managing
text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the font for the text
of the menu and submenu items.
Click this to select the font size for the
text of the menu and submenu items.
Text Click this to select the color for the text
of the menu and submenu items.
Select a predefined color, select the
eye-dropper tool to use a color from
elsewhere within your title, or select
Custom to select a custom color from
the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within
your title
Click this to bold the text of the menu
and submenu items.
Click this to italicize the text of the
menu and submenu items.
Click this to underline the text of the
menu and submenu items.
Click one of these to select how the
menu and submenu items text is to be
aligned. The first button will align the
text to the left. The second button will
align the text to the center. The third
button will align the text to the right.
Rollover Click this to select the color to which
the text will change when the user
places the cursor over the menu and
submenu items. Select a predefined
color, select the eye-dropper tool to
use a color from elsewhere within your
title or desktop, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color

- 404 -
 wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within
your title
Item HeightThe height of each menu option will fit based on the text of the
menu and submenu items by default. You can specify additional
margin height using the Margin field. To specify the item height
not based on the text, disable the Fit to Text check box and spe-
cify the height in the Height field.
Item Width The width of the menu option will fit based on the text of the menu
and submenu items by default. You can specify additional margin
width using the Margin field. To specify the item width not based
on the text, disable the Fit to Text check box and specify the width
in the Width field.
Background Use the controls in this section to specify the background prop-
erties as follows:
Menu Image Click this to select the background
image to use for the menu and sub-
menu items. Select Browse for File to
navigate and select an image from
your local file system. Select Browse
My Media to select an image from the
Media Library. Select None to not dis-
play an image.
Menu Color Click this to select the background
color to use for the menu and sub-
menu items. Select Transparent for a
transparent background, select a pre-
defined color, select the eye-dropper
tool to use a color from elsewhere
within your title or desktop, or select
Custom to select a custom color from
the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within
your title
Rollover Color Click this to select the rollover color to
user when users rolls their cursors
over the menu and submenu items.
Select Transparent for a transparent
background, select a predefined color,
select the eye-dropper tool to use a

- 405 -
 color from elsewhere within your title
or desktop, or select Custom to select
a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within
your title
Frames and Frame/Outline Use this list to specify the style for
Outlines frames and outlines. Select from
None, Windows 3D Style, Frame
Entire Menu, or Outline Each Item.
(Separator Color) Click this to select the color of the sep-
arator. Select a predefined color,
select the eye-dropper tool to use a
color from elsewhere within your title
or desktop, or select Custom to select
a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within
your title
(Outline Color) Click this to select the color of the out-
line. Select a predefined color, select
the eye-dropper tool to use a color
from elsewhere within your title or
desktop, or select Custom to select a
custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within
your title
5. Click OK.

Editing a menu object

You can edit the menu object and make changes using the Menu Creator.
To edit the menu object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the menu object, then click
Menu Creator in the Layout group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the menu object and select
Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the menu object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the menu object and click

- 406 -
 Menu Creator in the Layout group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the menu object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the menu object and type Shift + Enter.
The Menu Creator opens.
2. Use the Menu Creator to specify the changes and click OK to save the changes.
When you save your changes, the menu object is automatically updated in the title.

Creating a menu from the table of contents

You can create a menu based on the table of contents included in the table. Disabling
this option allows you to create a custom menu.
To create a menu from the table of contents:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the menu.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the menu and select Prop-
erties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the menu and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.
l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Ensure that the Create from TOC check box is enabled. Disable this check box if
you plan on creating a custom menu.
The menu is created based on the table of contents.

Including pages in a menu

You can select to include the pages in the menu. Doing so will automatically launch the
corresponding chapters and pages when users click the menu and submenu items.
To include the pages in the menu:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the menu.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the menu and select Prop-
erties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the menu and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the table of contents.

- 407 -
 l In the work area, right-click the table of contents and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the table of contents and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Enable the Include pages check box.
The pages are included in the menu.

Specifying the status indicator image set in a

menu
With tracking, you can specify whether to show the tracking status of chapters, sections,
tests, test sections, and surveys using a status indicator image set within a menu. You
can specify the image set from the Properties ribbon for the menu or from the Menu
Creator provided the table of contents style for the menu is selected.
The status indicator image set in a menu is not displayed by default.
For more information about tracking content, see Working with tracking.
To specify the status indicator image set from the Properties ribbon:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the menu.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the menu and select Prop-
erties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the menu and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the menu.
l In the work area, right-click the menu and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the menu and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Layout group, enable the Create from TOC check box to create the menu
based on a table of contents.
3. Use the three drop-down lists (Completed, In Progress, and Not Started) from
the Status Indicator group to select the new image for each state. Click Browse
from File to navigate and select a local image, click Browse My Media to select
an image from the Media Library, click Browse Stock Status Indicators to select
a new stock image, or select a new image from the list.
4. To edit an image assigned to one of the states of the status indicator, click the cor-
responding Edit graphic. Your default image editor opens. Use the editor to alter
and save the image.
The status indicator image set is specified.
To specify the status indicator image set from the Menu Creator:

- 408 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the menu.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the menu and select Prop-
erties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the menu and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the menu.
l In the work area, right-click the menu and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the menu and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Menu Creator. The Menu Creator is displayed.

3. Enable the Create Menu from table of contents check box to create the menu
based on a table of contents.
4. Use the three drop-down lists (Completed, In Progress, and Not Started) from
the Status Indicator group to select the new image for each state. Click Browse
from File to navigate and select a local image, click Browse My Media to select
an image from the Media Library, click Browse Stock Status Indicators to select
a new stock image, or select a new image from the list.
The status indicator image set is specified.

Working with status indicators

A status indicator is a graphic - presented in various states - that allows you to display
the tracking status of chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
Although tracking the content visited by your users is automatic, you can manually add a
status indicator to display the tracking status. Select from stock status indicators or cre-
ate a custom status indicator that displays your own images.
For more information about tracking content, see Working with tracking.
View these topics for more information:
l Creating a stock status indicator
l Creating a custom status indicator
l Changing the name of a status indicator
l Changing the target of a status indicator
l Enabling author control on a status indicator
l Specifying a description of a status indicator
l Viewing the HTML name of a status indicator
l Changing the images for the states of a status indicator

- 409 -
 l Making a status indicator initially invisible
l Placing a status indicator on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS class of a status indicator
l Changing the transition properties of a status indicator
l Using an empty ALT tag for a status indicator
l Pre-loading a status indicator for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a status indicator
l Changing or removing the border of a status indicator
l Locking the size and position of a status indicator
l Specifying the position and size of a status indicator
Additional resources: Status Tracking with Lectora V11.3 - Trivantis Community

Creating a stock status indicator

You can add one or several status indicators to your page.
Follow these steps to add a status indicator:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the status indic-
ators.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Status Indicator from the Add Navigation and Inter-
action group to add a stock status indicator. Alternatively, click the drop-down list
to select the type of status indicator as Stock Status Indicator.
To add more than one status indicator to add to a page, click Status Indicator or
open the drop-down list and select Stock Status Indicator. The Media Library
opens. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to select more than one indicator image.
The status indicator is added to the title.
3. Move the status indicator to the appropriate location on the page and use the con-
trols on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the status indicator.
The status indicator is added to the page.
See also: Changing the images for the states of a status indicator

Creating a custom status indicator

You can create a custom status indicator. Select the images to use for each state of the
status indicator. The Completed state is required; the In Progress and Not Started
states are optional.
To create a custom status indicator:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer in which you want to add the status indic-
ator.

- 410 -
 2. From the Insert ribbon, click the drop-down list next to Status Indicator and select
Custom Status Indicator. The Add Status Indicator window opens.
3. For each state (Not Started, In Progress, and Completed), use the pull-down list
to select an image to display. Select Browse for File to navigate and select a local
file, select Browse My Media to navigate and select a file from the Media Library,
or select an image from the list.
4. Click OK.
The custom status indicator is added.

Changing the target of a status indicator

You can change the target of a status indicator. The target is the chapter, section, page,
test or test section on which the state of the status indicator is based.
To change the target:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the status indicator.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the status indicator and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the status indicator and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the status indicator.
l In the work area, right-click the status indicator and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the status indicator and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the Target drop-down list from the Status Indicator group to select the new
target.
Graded tests cannot be the target of a Set Tracking Status action. Graded
tests will be automatically set to "Completed" when they are passed; oth-
erwise, graded tests will remain "Not Started" or "In Progress" as appro-
priate.
The target is changed.

Changing the images for the states of a status

indicator
You can change the images used to display the three states (Not Started, In Progress,
and Completed) of a status indicator. You can select a new image or edit the exiting
image.
To change the images of a status indicator:

- 411 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the status indicator.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the status indicator and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the status indicator and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the status indicator.
l In the work area, right-click the status indicator and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the status indicator and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the three drop-down lists (Completed, In Progress, and Not Started) from
the Resources group to select the new image for each state. Click Browse from
File to navigate and select a local image, click Browse My Media to select an
image from the Media Library, click Browse Stock Status Indicators to select a
new stock image, or select a new image from the list.
3. To edit an image assigned to one of the states of the status indicator, click the cor-
responding Edit graphic. Your default image editor opens. Use the editor to alter
and save the image.
The images of the status indicator are changed.

Changing or removing the border of a status

indicator
You can change or remove the weight, color, and style of the border of a status indicator.
To change or remove the border weight:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the graphic of the status indicator or in the work area,
click the status indicator object. To select multiple status indicator objects, click the
first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Border Weight field to select the weight. Select
0 to remove the border.
The border weight for the status indicators you selected is changed.
To change the border color:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the graphic of the status indicator or in the work area,
click the status indicator object. To select multiple status indicator objects, click the
first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Border Color list to select the color. Use the

- 412 -
 Color list to select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color
from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the
Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
The border color for the status indicators you selected is changed.
To change the border style:
1. In the Title Explorer, click the graphic of the status indicator or in the work area,
click the status indicator object. To select multiple status indicator objects, click the
first object, then press and hold the CTRL key while you click the other objects.
2. Click the Style ribbon.
3. In the Image Style group, use the Border Style list to select the style.
The border style for the status indicators you selected is changed.

Working with forms and form elements

Forms and form elements enable you to add user controls, such as radio buttons, check
boxes and entry fields. Form objects can be used as standalone components to gather
information from the user, or they can be used inside of a form to be submitted outside of
the published title.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with forms and form
elements:
l Working with forms
l Working with form elements

Working with form objects

Forms are special objects that provide a mechanism to communicate outside the title.
You can configure forms to send and receive a collection of data using a CGI-sub-
mit/receive command for both offline- and Web-published titles.
Create a form on a page and then add each form object into the form.
Forms are logical objects because they have no physical representation on a page but
can contain form objects. The information contained in the form objects of a form can be
submitted using a CGI program through a Submit Form action. You can specify if form
results should be submitted to a Google Drive public document or a custom script.
See also: Selecting an action
The following form objects can be created within a form:
l Radio button groups
l Radio buttons
l Check boxes

- 413 -
 l Entry fields
l Drop-down lists
l List boxes
View these topics for more information about adding and working with form objects:
l Adding a form object
l Retaining form information between sessions
l Enabling author control on a form object
l Specifying a description of a form object
l Viewing the HTML name of a form object
l Specifying form submission properties
l Changing the transition properties of a form object
l Adding an action to a form object

Adding a form object

Follow these steps to add a form object to a title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the page onto which you want to add a form.
2. Do one of the following:
l On the Test & Survey ribbon, click Form in the Add Form Element

group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+2
The form object is added to the title. Populate the form object with form elements and
use the controls on the Properties ribbon to configure data submission and appearance
of the form object.

Retaining form information between sessions

You can choose to retain the information captured through the form elements within a
form after the session is closed. If the user returns to the form in a future session, the val-
ues from the previous session will be loaded into the form elements. If this option is not
selected, the form element objects will be loaded with their initial values for each new
session.
To retain form information between sessions:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the form object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the form object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the form object and press Enter.

- 414 -
 l In the work area, double-click the form object.
l In the work area, right-click the form object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the form object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Enable the Retain ALL Values Between Sessions check box in the Value group.
Form information is retained between sessions.

Specifying form submission properties

You can specify if form results should be submitted to a Google Drive public document
or a custom script.
Form results are not automatically sent to learning management systems.

To specify form submission properties:

1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the form object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the form object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the form object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the form object.
l In the work area, right-click the form object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the form object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Enable the Submit Form check box to specify that form results are to be submitted
and use the Submit To drop-down list to select the data submission target as
either Custom Script or Google Drive.
For Custom Script, click Settings to specify the CGI application to which to sub-
mit the form results and whether the submission is done using a Post or Get
method. The GET method can only support the submission of 256 characters of
data. If you have a large test or are submitting a large amount of variable data, use
the POST method instead. (For additional information, see Submitting test, survey
and form results to CGI.) To store the response from the custom script in a variable,
enable the Receive Response check box in the Response group and use the
Variable to receive response drop-down list to select the variable. Alternatively,
select New Variable from the drop-down list to create a new variable in which to
store the CGI response. The response is stored as a text string in the specified vari-
able. For more information about variables, see Working with variables.
3. Click Additional Values to specify additional form values. The Form Properties

- 415 -
 window opens. Use the Name and Value fields to define the additional form para-
meters and click Add parameter to add the parameter to the Name/Value list.
Repeat as necessary. To remove unnecessary variables, select the variable within
the list and click .
4. Enable the Include ALL Variable Values (Test and Title) check box to include all
defined variables with the form data that is submitted. The name of each variable
and its value at the time of submission is sent. For more information about vari-
ables, see Working with variables.
5. Enable the Show Message When Submitted check box to present a success
message to the user upon successful submission of the form data.
See also: Submitting test, survey, and form results to Google Drive

Working with form elements

Form elements are special objects that enable the user to provide information. Form ele-
ments can be used within a form or by themselves. When form elements are contained in
a form, the data captured by the form element can be submitted using a specified CGI
program or to a Google Drive public document.
See also: Adding a form
Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI
You can add the following form elements to your title:
l Radio button groups
l Radio buttons
l Check boxes

l Entry fields

l Drop-down lists

l List boxes

l Text Label

Radio buttons, check boxes, entry fields, drop-down lists and list boxes are input objects
that have physical representations that can be added to any form or page. A radio button
group is a logical input object that does not have a physical representation. It is used to
group a set of radio buttons together to enable only one radio button of the group to be
selected at a time.
Associate a text label with a form element to provide additional assistive text when
necessary.
Form elements have one additional attribute that other objects do not have. They have
an associated variable. This variable provides a place for the program to store the input
data for the form object. This variable can then be accessed from anywhere in the title.
Additionally, multiple form elements can use the same variable.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with form elements:

- 416 -
 l Adding a radio button group
l Adding a radio button
l Adding a check box
l Adding an entry field
l Adding a drop-down list
l Adding a list box
l Adding a text label
l Specifying a description of a form element
l Viewing the HTML name of a form element
l Associating a text label with a form element
l Enabling author control on a form element
l Specifying a description of a form element
l Changing the associated variable name of a form element
l Retaining form element information between sessions
l Enabling author control on a form element
l Specifying the text style of a form element
l Scaling the text in a form object in a responsive title
l Making a form element initially hidden
l Placing a form element on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a form element
l Changing the transition properties of a form element
l Adding an action to a form element
l Locking the size and position of a form element
l Changing the position and size of a form element

Adding a radio button group element

Radio button groups are logical objects because they have no physical representation
on a page. Radio button groups are used to group individual radio buttons. When a set
of radio buttons is placed within a radio button group, the user will only be able to select
one of the radio buttons contained within the group.
To add a radio button group:
1. Select the form or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the radio but-
ton group.
2. and do one of the following:

- 417 -
 l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Radio Button Group in the
Add Form Element group
l Type Ctrl+Alt+3
A radio button group object is added to the title, along with a set of three radio button
objects. Use the controls on the Properties ribbon to configure data submission and the
appearance of the form object.
View these topics for additionally information about adding and working with a radio but-
ton element:
l Changing the name of a radio button group
l Changing the description of a radio button group
l Viewing the HTML name of a radio button group
l Changing the associated variable name of a radio button group
l Retaining radio button group information between sessions
l Making a radio button group initially hidden
l Placing a radio button group on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a radio button group
l Specifying the conditions of a radio button group
l Changing the transition properties of a radio button
l Adding an action to a radio button
l Enabling author control on a radio button group
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Adding a radio button element

Radio buttons are input elements that enable users to select a specified option. Radio
buttons can be added to any form or page. When radio buttons are contained within a
radio button group, users will only be able to select one of the radio buttons.
See also: Adding a radio button group
To add a radio button element:
1. Select the radio button group, form, or page in the Title Explorer to which you want
to add the radio button.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Radio Button from the Add Form
Element group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+4

- 418 -
 A radio button element is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties rib-
bon to configure data submission and the appearance of the form element.
View these topics for additionally information about adding and working with a radio but-
ton element:
l Changing the name of a radio button
l Specifying the label for a radio button
l Changing the description of a radio button
l Viewing the HTML name of a radio button
l Changing the associated variable name of a radio button
l Specifying a radio button to be initially selected by default
l Retaining radio button information between sessions
l Specifying the text style of a radio button
l Scaling the text in a radio button in a responsive title
l Making a radio button initially hidden
l Placing a radio button on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a radio button
l Changing the transition properties of a radio button
l Adding an action to a radio button
l Locking the size and position of a radio button
l Changing the position and size of a radio button
l Enabling author control on a radio button
l Customizing radio buttons
See also:Answer and response variable value formats
Specifying the label for a radio button
You can specify the textual label to appear with the radio button. This is the text that will
appear next to the radio button. By default, the label is placed to the right of the radio but-
ton, however you can also place it to the left of the radio button.
You cannot add a label to a radio button if the radio button appears within a ques-
tion.
To specify the label for a radio button:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the radio button element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the radio button element and
select Properties.

- 419 -
 l In the Title Explorer, select the radio button element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the radio button element.
l In the work area, right-click the radio button element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the radio button element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Radio group, use the Label field to specify the label for the radio button.
3. To place the label on the left of the radio button, enable the Label on Left check
box.
The label for the radio button is specified.
Specifying a radio button to be initially selected by default
You can set a radio button to be initially selected. The radio button is selected as on
when the control is displayed to the user.
To set a radio button to be initially selected by default:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the radio button element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the radio button element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the radio button element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the radio button element.
l In the work area, right-click the radio button element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the radio button element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Value group, enable the Initially Selected (On) check box.
The radio button is initially selected as on.
Customizing radio buttons
You can customize the default appearance of radio button elements. Select from several
predefined images or import images from your file system or from the Media Library. Pre-
views of the images you select are displayed. You can choose a selected image and an
unselected image.
To customize your radio buttons:
1. From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Radio Buttons from the Customize

Controls group. The Customize Radio Buttons & Check boxes window opens.
2. Use the Selected Image and Unselected Image pull-down lists to select the

- 420 -
 images. Select Browse for File to navigate and select a file from your local file sys-
tem or select Browse My Media to navigate and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. Click OK.
Radio buttons used in the title are customized with the images you selected.
Additional resources: Building Finger-friendly Buttons for m-Learning

Adding a check box object

Check boxes are input objects that enable users to select and clear a specified option.
Check boxes can be added to any form or page.
To add a check box:
1. Select the form or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the check
box.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Check Box from the Add Form Ele-
ment group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+5
A check box element is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties rib-
bon to configure data submission and the appearance of the form element.
View these topics for additionally information about adding and working with a check
box element:
l Changing the name of a check box
l Specifying the label for a check box
l Changing the description of a check box
l Viewing the HTML name of a check box
l Changing the associated variable name of a check box
l Specifying a check box to be initially selected by default
l Retaining check box information between sessions
l Specifying the text style of a check box
l Scaling the text in a check box in a responsive title
l Making a check box initially hidden
l Placing a check box on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a check box
l Specifying the conditions of a check box
l Changing the transition properties of a check box

- 421 -
 l Adding an action to a check box
l Locking the size and position of a check box
l Changing the position and size of a check box
l Enabling author control on a check box
l Customizing check boxes
See also:Answer and response variable value formats
Specifying the label for a check box
You can specify the textual label to appear with the check box. This is the text that will
appear next to the check box. By default, the label is placed to the right of the check box,
however you can also place it to the left of the check box.
You cannot add a label to a radio button if the radio button appears within a ques-
tion.
To specify the label for a check box:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the check box element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the check box element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the check box element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the check box element.
l In the work area, right-click the check box element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the check box element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Check box group, use the Label field to specify the label for the check box.
3. To place the label on the left of the check box, enable the Label on Left check
box.
The label for the check box is specified.
Specifying a check box to be initially selected by default
You can set a check box to be initially selected. The check box is selected as on when
the control is displayed to the user.
To set a check box to be initially selected by default:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the check box element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the check box element and
select Properties.

- 422 -
 l In the Title Explorer, select the check box element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the check box element.
l In the work area, right-click the check box element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the check box element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Value group, enable the Initially Selected (On) check box.
The check box is initially selected as on.
Customizing check boxes
You can customize the default appearance of check box elements. Select from several
predefined images or import images from your file system or from the Media Library. Pre-
views of the images you select are displayed. You can choose a selected image and an
unselected image.
To customize your check boxes:
1. From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Check Boxes from the Customize

Controls group. The Customize Radio Buttons & Check Boxes window opens.
2. Use the Selected Image and Unselected Image pull-down lists to select the
images. Select Browse for File to navigate and select a file from your local file sys-
tem or select Browse My Media to navigate and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. Click OK.
Check boxes used in the title are customized with the images you selected.
Additional resources: Building Finger-friendly Buttons for m-Learning

Adding an entry field object

Entry fields are input objects that enable users to type a value. Entry fields can be added
to a form or page.
To add an entry field:
1. Select the form, or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the entry
field.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Entry Field from the Add Form Ele-
ment group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+6
An entry field element is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties rib-
bon to configure data submission and the appearance of the form element.

- 423 -
View these topics for additionally information about adding and working with an entry
field element:
l Changing the name of an entry field
l Changing the description of an entry field
l Viewing the HTML name of an entry field
l Changing the associated variable name of an entry field
l Specifying the initial text for an entry field
l Retaining entry field information between sessions
l Specifying the maximum number of characters for an entry field
l Creating a multi-line entry field
l Creating a password entry field
l Creating a number-only entry field
l Creating a read-only entry field
l Specifying the text style of an entry field
l Scaling the text in an entry field in a responsive title
l Making an entry field initially hidden
l Placing an entry field on the top layer
l Specifying a background color for an entry field
l Specifying the CSS classes of an entry field
l Specifying the conditions of an entry field
l Changing the transition properties of an entry field
l Adding an action to an entry field
l Locking the size and position of an entry field
l Changing the position and size of an entry field
l Enabling author control on an entry field
See also:Answer and response variable value formats
Specifying the initial text for an entry field
You can specify the initial text for an entry field. The initial text will appear within the
entry field when the control is displayed to the user. Additionally, you can also specify a
variable.
To specify default text for an entry field:

- 424 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.
l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Value group, use the Initial field to specify the initial text or value for the
entry field. If you need more room, click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner
of the field. The Initial Text/Value window opens. Use this window to specify addi-
tionally text or value for the entry field.
See also: Working with variables
Specifying the maximum number of characters for an entry
field
You can specify the maximum number of characters users can type into an entry field.
Select a limit of up to 2048 characters.
To specify the maximum number of characters for an entry field:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.
l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Behaviors group, use the Max Characters field to specify the maximum
number of allowable characters. Users will not be able to type more than the max-
imum number of characters in the field.
Creating a multi-line entry field
You can enable your entry field to accept multiple lines of text. Instead of only being able
to type a single line of text, users will be able to supply multiple lines or an entire para-
graph.

- 425 -
To create a multi-line entry field:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.
l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Behaviors group, enable the Multi-Line check box.
Creating a password entry field
You can specify that your entry field will be used for a password. When you select this
option, an asterisk (*) will be displayed for every character the user types within the entry
field. The value of the associated variable will reflect the actual characters typed into the
field.
See also: Changing the associated variable name of an entry field
To create a password entry field:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.
l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Behaviors group, enable the Password field check box.
Creating an number-only entry field
You can set an entry field to require numbers only. Users will be unable to enter non-
number characters.
To create a number-only entry field:

- 426 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.
l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Behaviors group, enable the Number check box.
Creating a read-only entry field
You can set an entry field to be read-only. That is, users will be able to see the value
within the entry field, but they will not be able to change it.
To create a read-only entry field:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.
l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Behaviors group, enable the Read Only check box.
Specifying a background color for an entry field
To specify a background color for an entry field:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the entry field element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the entry field element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the entry field element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the entry field element.

- 427 -
 l In the work area, right-click the entry field element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the entry field element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Appearance group, click the Background pull-down list to select a back-
ground color. The default color is white. Select a predefined color, select the eye-
dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title

Adding a drop-down list object

Drop-down lists are input objects that enable users to select a value from a list of pre-
defined values. Drop-down lists can be added to any form or page.
To add a drop-down list:
1. Select the form or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the drop-
down list and do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Drop-down List from the Add
Form Element group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+7
A drop-down list element is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties
ribbon to configure data submission and the appearance of the form element.
View these topics for additionally information about adding and working with a drop-
down list element:
l Changing the name of a drop-down list
l Changing the description of a drop-down list
l Viewing the HTML name of a drop-down list
l Changing the associated variable name of a drop-down list
l Retaining drop-down list information between sessions
l Adding items to a drop-down list
l Specifying the text style of a drop-down list
l Scaling the text in a drop-down list in a responsive title
l Making a drop-down list initially hidden
l Placing a drop-down list on the top layer
l Specifying a background color for a drop-down list
l Specifying the CSS classes of a drop-down list
l Specifying the conditions of a drop-down list

- 428 -
 l Changing the transition properties of a drop-down list
l Adding an action to a drop-down list
l Locking the size and position of a drop-down list
l Changing the position and size of a drop-down list
l Enabling author control on a drop-down list
See also:Answer and response variable value formats
Adding items to a drop-down list
You specify the list of items from which users can choose within a drop-down list. You
can add as many or as few items as you want, select the initially selected item, and reor-
ganize and delete items from the list.
To add items to a drop-down list:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the drop-down list ele-
ment.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the drop-down list element
and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the drop-down list element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the drop-down list element.
l In the work area, right-click the drop-down list element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the drop-down list element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Initial Values group, click within the box to open the Edit List window. Use
this window to add, position, and remove items. To add an item, click Add and spe-
cify the item in the Initial Values window. To remove an item from the list, select the
item and click Remove. To move an item up in the list, select the item and click
Move Up. To move an item down in the list, select the item and click Move Down.
To specify which of the drop-down list's values should be initially selected, select
the check box next to the appropriate value within the list of possible values. Only
one item can be specified as the default.
3. Click OK.
Specifying a background color for a drop-down list
To specify a background color for a drop-down list:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the drop-down list ele-
ment.

- 429 -
 l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the drop-down list element
and select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the drop-down list element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the drop-down list element.
l In the work area, right-click the drop-down list element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the drop-down list element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Appearance group, click the Background pull-down list to select a back-
ground color. The default color is white. Select a predefined color, select the eye-
dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title

Adding a list box object

List boxes are input objects that enable users to select one or more values from a list of
pre-defined values. List boxes can be added to any form or page.
To add a list box:
1. Select the form, or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the list box.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click List Box from the Add Form Ele-
ment group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+8
A list box element is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties ribbon to
configure data submission and the appearance of the form element.
View these topics for additionally information about adding and working with a list box
element:
l Changing the name of a list box
l Changing the description of a list box
l Viewing the HTML name of a list box
l Changing the associated variable name of a list box
l Enabling multiple selections within a list box
l Retaining list box information between sessions
l Adding items to a list box
l Specifying the text style of a list box
l Scaling the text in a list box in a responsive title

- 430 -
 l Making a list box initially hidden
l Placing a list box on the top layer
l Specifying a background color for a list box
l Specifying the CSS classes of a list box
l Specifying the conditions of a list box
l Changing the transition properties of a list box
l Adding an action to a list box
l Locking the size and position of a list box
l Changing the position and size of a list box
l Enabling author control on a list box
See also:Answer and response variable value formats
Enabling multiple selections within a list box
You can enable the selection of multiple items within a list box. When this is enabled,
users will be able to select multiple items in the list box while holding down the Ctrl key.
To enable multiple selections within a list box:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the list box element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the list box element and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the list box element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the list box element.
l In the work area, right-click the list box element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the list box element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Value group, enable the Allow multiple Selections check box.
Adding items to a list box
You specify the list of items that users can choose from within a list box. You can add as
many or as few items as you want, and you can further reorganize and delete items from
the list.
To add items to a list box:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the list box element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the list box element and

- 431 -
 select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the list box element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the list box element.
l In the work area, right-click the list box element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the list box element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Initial Values group, click within the box to open the Edit List window. Use
this window to add, position, and remove items. To add an item, click Add and spe-
cify the item in the Initial Values window. To remove an item from the list, select the
item and click Remove. To move an item up in the list, select the item and click
Move Up. To move an item down in the list, select the item and click Move Down.
To specify which of the drop-down list's values should be initially selected, select
the check box next to the appropriate value within the list of possible values. Only
one item can be specified as the default.
3. Click OK.
Specifying a background color for a list box
To specify a background color for a list box:
1. Double-click the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. The List Box Properties
window opens. Click the General tab if the List Box Properties window is not
already opened to this tab.
2. Select a background color from the Default background color list. The default
color is white. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color
from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the
Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
3. Click OK.

Adding a text label

A text label is a text block that can be associated with a form element to provide addi-
tional assistive text to the user. You can add the text label of a form object. Label text is
the text adjacent to the form object's component that tells your project's viewers what
information to enter or select (for example, "First Name:," "State/Province:").
You can associate the text block with a form object, such as a drop-down list or an entry
field. This is useful when creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508
- 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)
2.0. for details see: Associating a text label with a form element.
To add a text label:

- 432 -
 1. Select the form or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the text label.
2. From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Text Label in the Add Form Element

group.
The text block is added.

Associating a text label with a form element

You can associate the text block with a form object, such as a drop-down list or an entry
field. This is useful when creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508
- 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)
2.0. After you have added the form object and text block to the page, you can associate
the two to use the text block as a label for the form object.
For information about creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section
508 - 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility Guidelines
(WCAG) 2.0, see Creating Web-based, accessible content (Section 508/WCAG).
To associate a text block with a form object:
1. Add the text block. For details, see Adding text to your title.
2. Double-click the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the graphic and select Properties or right-click on the
text block in the work-area and select Properties. The Properties ribbon is dis-
played.
3. Use the Label for drop-down list to select the appropriate form object.
See also: Working with forms

Changing the associated variable name of a form ele-

ment
The associated variable of a form element takes on the value specified for the form ele-
ment chosen by the user. For example, if a radio button group's associated variable
name is Age_Range, and within it are 5 radio buttons with the options Under 21, 21-30,
31-45, 45-60, and Over 60, then when the user selects from the available radio buttons,
the Age_Range variable will take on the value of that radio button. Suppose the user
selects 21-30, then Age_Range = 21-30. If no selection is made, the variable remains
empty (has no value).
To change the associated variable name of a form element:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the form element.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the form element and select
Properties.

- 433 -
 l In the Title Explorer, select the form element and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the form element.
l In the work area, right-click the form element and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the form element and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Specify the associated variable name in the Variable Name field in the Value
group. The variable will be used to store the user’s selection within the cor-
responding form element. The variable can be accessed from anywhere in the title.
The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email, a CGI script, or
Google Drive is the form element's associated variable name and its value.
See also: Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI
Answer and response variable value formats

Retaining form element information between sessions

You can choose to retain the information captured through form elements after the ses-
sion is closed. If the user returns to the form element in a future session, the values from
the previous session will be loaded into the form element. If this option is not selected,
the form element object will be loaded with its initial values for each new session.
To retain form element information between sessions:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the form element object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the form element object and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the form element object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the form element object.
l In the work area, right-click the form element object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the form element object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. For radio button groups, enable the Retain value between sessions check box in
the Value group. For the other form elements, enable the Retain Value check box
in the Value group.
Information for the form element is retained between sessions.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Specifying the text style of a form element

You can alter the appearance of the text of a form element, such as changing the font or
underlining the text. The appearance of the text on form elements is inherited by default.

- 434 -
To specify the text style of a form element:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the form element object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the form element object and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the form element object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the form element object.
l In the work area, right-click the form element object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the form element object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To specify the text style of the form element, disable the Inherit check box and use
the controls in the Text Style group as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to format the form element. The
current text styles are listed. To create a new text style, select
Manage Styles and use the controls in the Text Styles win-
dow to configure a new style. For details about adding and
managing text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the font for the text of the form element.
Click this to select the font size for the text of the form ele-
ment.
Text Click this to select the color for the text of the form element.
Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a
color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Click this to bold the text of the form element.
Click this to italicize the text of the form element.
Click this to underline the text of the form element.
The text style of the form element is changed.
Scaling the text in a form object in a responsive title
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a form object. This is
helpful when adjusting how the text in the form object appears within the different device
views for responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an override of the default responsive
inheritance. (The text scaling controls are disabled on the desktop view since you can-
not create overrides in that view. Additionally, the labels in fields will change colors to
reflect the current override values for each device view).

- 435 -
For more information about building responsive titles, see Working with responsive con-
tent.
The current scaling factor and size of the font are displayed. Use this information if you
plan on adding similar text to the page.
Scaling the text will not affect the displayed value in the Text Style group. The
Text Style value reflects the base value for the form object. If the base value is
changed, that change will apply across all views and the scaling will be canceled.
To scale the text:
1. Select the form object that you want to change.
2. In the work area, select one of the responsive views other than desktop.
3. On the Properties ribbon, drag the slider or use the appropriate plus or minus but-
ton in the Text Scale group to scale the text in the current view. The values
increase or decrease in 10% increments. For example, to increase the text size,
drag the slider arrow to the right. The scaling factor (applied to the base) and the
resulting effective font size are adjusted accordingly.
The text is changed for the current view. Additionally, the scaling values are inherited to
the phone views if the current view is a tablet view.

Working with progress bars

A progress bar can serve as a timer or as a visual representation of the user’s progress
through a title.
Additionally, you can configure actions that work with progress bars. For details, see the
Set Progress Bar Position and Step Progress Bar Position action in Selecting the
action.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with progress bars:
l Adding a progress bar
l Change the name of a progress bar
l Specify the type of progress bar
l Emptying a progress bar as progress increases
l Enabling author control on a progress bar
l Specifying a description of a progress bar
l Viewing the HTML name of a progress bar
l Specifying the layout of a progress bar
l Changing the variable name associated with the progress bar
l Making a progress bar initially hidden
l Placing a progress bar on the top layer

- 436 -
 l Changing the transition properties of a progress bar
l Adding an action to a progress bar
l Locking the size and position of a progress bar
l Changing the position and size of a progress bar

Adding a progress bar

Follow these steps to add a progress bar to your title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location onto which you want to add the progress
bar.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, click Progress Bar from the Add Navigation and
Interaction group.
l Type Ctrl+Alt+9
The progress bar is added to the title. Move the progress bar to the appropriate loc-
ation on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the
appearance of the progress bar.

Specifying the type of progress bar

You can select from three types of progress bars that you can add to your title. Each type
is different in its functionality.
To specify the type of progress bar:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the progress bar.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the progress bar and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the progress bar and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the progress bar.
l In the work area, right-click the progress bar and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the progress bar and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Type group, click Type to select the type of progress bar from the list.
Choose from the following options:
Custom Creates a custom progress bar with a specified range and
step size. Use the Range field to specify the total range of the
progress bar. Use the Step Size field to specify the increment

- 437 -
 size within the progress bar. To associate a variable with the
progress bar, make a selection using the Variable list. The
variable will contain the current value of the slider and
whether the slider will use this value for its initial value when
the progress bar is created. Additionally, the variable can be
retained so that the progress bar maintains its state between
sessions. You can select to associate this progress bar with
an existing variable, a new variable, or no variable. Custom
progress bars must be set or incremented manually using the
Set Progress and Step Progress actions.
See also: Selecting an action
Timer Creates a progress bar based on time with a specified total
time and increment. Use the Total Time field to specify the
total time for the progress bar. This is the amount of time it will
take to completely fill or empty the progress bar. Use the Incre-
ment field to specify the frequency with which the progress
bar will increment. For example, if the increment value is 2, the
progress bar will increment every 2 seconds. The progress bar
can be set to automatically start or can be started using the
Play action. Enable the Auto Start check box to automatically
start the progress bar. It can be stopped using the Stop action,
and an On Done Playing action can be added to the progress
bar to execute once the Total Time has elapsed.
See also: Selecting an action's trigger
Table of Con- Creates a progress bar that automatically tracks progress
tents through a title in accordance with the chapters, sections, and
pages that are included in a table of contents. That is, the pro-
gress bar will increment on every page that is included in a
table of contents. It is not necessary for a table of contents to
exist within a title for use of this functionality.
See also: Working with tables of contents

Changing the variable name associated with the

progress bar
The associated variable of a progress bar takes on the value specified for the progress
bar chosen by the user. For example, if a progress bar's associated variable name is
Test1_Progress, then the Test1_Progress variable will take on the value of the step rep-
resenting the current progress of the progress bar.
To change the associated variable name of a form element:

- 438 -
 1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the progress bar.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the progress bar and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the progress bar and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the progress bar.
l In the work area, right-click the progress bar and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the progress bar and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Specify the associated variable name in the variable name drop-down list in the
Type group. The variable will be used to store the user’s selection within the cor-
responding progress bar. The variable can be accessed from anywhere in the title.
Use the Initial Value field to specify the initial value setting for the associated vari-
able. This is the default value of the variable when the published title is launched.
Click to edit the variable name, change it's initial value, or select to retain the
variable value between sessions.
Enable Retain Value to retain the variable's value through subsequent launches of
the published title. With this selected, if the variable value has changed, the next
time the user launches the published title, the variable will load with the previously
modified value.
The variable name is changed.
The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email, a CGI script, or
Google Drive is the progress bar's associated variable name and its value.
See also: Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI
Answer and response variable value formats

Emptying a progress bar as progress increases

The typical functionality for a progress bar as progress increases is for it to fill left-to-right
(for horizontal orientation) or bottom-to-top (for vertical orientation). You can specify to
empty a progress bar as progress increases instead. This will cause the bar to "drain"
right-to-left (for horizontal orientation) or top-to-bottom (for vertical orientation).
To empty a progress bar as progress increases:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the progress bar.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the progress bar and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the progress bar and press Enter.

- 439 -
 l In the work area, double-click the progress bar.
l In the work area, right-click the progress bar and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the progress bar and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Progress Bar group, enable the Empty Bar check box.

Specifying the layout of a progress bar

You can customize the orientation, style and colors used within your progress bar. Addi-
tionally, you can include tick marks, include an image and select to show an empty pro-
gress bar as progress increases.
For responsive titles, the color of the label for the Orientation setting on the Properties
ribbon indicates the device in which an orientation override was placed. For more inform-
ation about developing responsive titles and setting overrides, see Working with respons-
ive content.
To specify the layout of a progress bar:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the progress bar.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the progress bar and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the progress bar and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the progress bar.
l In the work area, right-click the progress bar and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the progress bar and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To specify the orientation, use the Orientation list in the Progress Bar group.
Select between Horizontal or Vertical orientation for the progress bar.
3. To show the progress bar as emptying as progress increases, enable the Empty
Bar check box in the Progress Bar group.
4. To specify the default image for use within the progress bar, click the Default
Image drop-down list in the Style and Layout group. When an image is selected,
the progress bar will fill using the image. Each increment of the progress bar will
replicate the image selected. Select a previously imported image from the list, click
the Browse from File button to navigate and select an image, or click Browse My
Media to navigate and select an image from the Media Library. Click to edit the
image.
5. To select the color to fill the progress bar when no image is selected, click Fill in

- 440 -
 the Style and Layout group. Use the Color list to select a predefined color, select
the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Cus-
tom to select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
6. To select the background color for the progress bar, click Background from the
Style and Layout group. Use the Color list to select a predefined color, select the
eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom
to select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
7. To configure the borders for the progress bar, click the Border Weight field to
adjust the weight of the border and click the Border drop-down list to select the
border color. Use the Color list to select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper
tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a
custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
8. To select to show tick marks within the progress bar, enable the Tick Marks check
box.

Working with timers

Add a timer to create a count down or count up effect within a title. Additionally, you can
configure an action to trigger when the timer expires, such as displaying a message,
sending an email, or stopping media from playing. The action associated with the timer
is automatically added when you add a timer object.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with timers:
l Adding a timer
l Changing the type of timer object
l Enabling author control on a timer object
l Specifying a description of a timer object
l Viewing the HTML name of a timer object
l Changing the time of a timer object
l Changing the layout of a timer object
l Automatically starting a timer object
l Changing the text properties of a timer object
l Scaling the text in a timer in a responsive title
l Configuring the action that is associated with the timer
l Making a timer object initially hidden

- 441 -
 l Placing a timer object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a timer object
l Changing the transition properties of a timer object
l Adding an action to a timer object
l Locking the size and position of a timer object
l Changing the position and size of a timer object

Adding a timer
The timer object can count down or count up. You can delay the start of timer and con-
figure an action to trigger when the timer expires.When you add a timer, an action is also
added for configuring a result when the time expires. For details about configuring the
action, see Adding an action.
To add a timer object:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the timer object.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click Timer in the Add More group.
The timer is added to the title. Move the timer object to the appropriate location on the
page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the appearance of the win-
dow. Use the Action ribbon to configure the action.

Changing the type of timer

You can select the type of timer as either a count-down timer or a count-up timer. For
count-down timers, the timer expires when the time reaches 0 starting from the time you
specify. For count-up timers, the timer expires when the time reaches the time you spe-
cify. For details about changing the time of a timer, see Changing the time of a timer.
To select the type of timer:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the timer object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the chart object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the timer object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the timer object and click Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the timer object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the timer object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Timer group, use the Type pull-down list to select either Count Down or
Count Up.
The type of timer is set.

- 442 -
Changing the time of a timer object
You can select the time of timer object. For a count-down timer, the time you specify is
the start time of the timer. For a count-up timer, the time you specify is the termination
time of the timer. To specify the type of the timer as either a count-down timer or count-up
timer, see Changing the type of the timer object.
To select the time of a timer object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the timer object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the chart object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the timer object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the timer object and click Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the timer object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the timer object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Timer group, use the Time fields to specify the time of the timer. The first
field represents the number of hours; the second field represents the number of
minutes; the third field represents the number of seconds.
The type of timer is set.

Changing the layout of a timer object

You can customize the layout of a timer object. For example, you can hide the hours por-
tion of the timer layout, hide the minutes portion of a timer layout, or hide the seconds por-
tion of a timer layout. You cannot hide all three portions at once.
To change the layout of a timer object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the timer object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the chart object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the timer object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the timer object and click Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the timer object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the timer object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Layout group, disable the Hours check box to hide the hours portion.

- 443 -
 Disable the Minutes check box to hide the minutes portion. Disable the Seconds
check box to hide the seconds portion.
The layout of the timer is set.

Automatically starting a timer object

You can specify whether to automatically start a timer object. Timers are set to auto-
matically start by default. If you disable auto-starting the timer, you will need to configure
an action's trigger to start the timer, like Show or Mouse Click. For details about con-
figuring the action, see Adding an action.
To automatically start a timer object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the timer object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the timer object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the timer object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the timer object and click Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the timer object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the timer object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Timer group, ensure that the Auto Start check box is enabled.
The timer will automatically start.

Changing the text properties of a timer object

You can customize the text properties of a timer object. For example, you can change
the font, text color, or the background color.
For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a timer. This is
helpful when adjusting how the text in a timer appears within the different device
views for responsive titles. For details, see Scaling the text in a table of contents in
a responsive title.
To change the text style used within timer:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the timer object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the chart object and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the timer object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the timer object and click Properties.

- 444 -
 l In the work area, right-click the timer object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the timer object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To specify the text style of the table of contents, use the controls in the Style group
as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to format the timer. The current
text styles are listed. To create a new text style, select Man-
age Styles and use the controls in the Text Styles window to
configure a new style. For details about adding and man-
aging text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the font for the text of the timer.
Click this to select the font size for the text of the timer.
Text Click this to select the color for the text of the timer. Select a
predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color
from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a
custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Click this to bold the text of the timer.
Click this to italicize the text of the timer.
Click this to underline the text of the timer.
Background Click this to select the color of the background of the timer.
Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a
color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Click this to increase the size of the font.
Click this to decrease the size of the font.
See also: Managing text styles
Matching colors used within your title

Scaling the text in a timer in a responsive title

For responsive titles, you can conveniently scale the text within a timer. This is helpful
when adjusting how the text in a timer appears within the different device views for
responsive titles. Scaling the text creates an override of the default responsive inher-
itance. (The text scaling controls are disabled on the desktop view since you cannot cre-

- 445 -
ate overrides in that view. Additionally, the labels in fields will change colors to reflect
the current override values for each device view).
For more information about building responsive titles, see Working with responsive con-
tent.
The current scaling factor and size of the font are displayed. Use this information if you
plan on adding similar text blocks to the page.
Scaling the text will not affect the displayed value in the Text Style group. The
Text Style value reflects the base value for the timer. If the base value is changed,
that change will apply across all views and the scaling will be canceled.
To scale the text:
1. Select the timer that you want to change.
2. In the work area, select one of the responsive views other than desktop.
3. On the Properties ribbon, drag the slider or use the appropriate plus or minus but-
ton in the Text Scale group to scale the text in the current view. The values
increase or decrease in 10% increments. For example, to increase the text size,
drag the slider arrow to the right. The scaling factor (applied to the base) and the
resulting effective font size are adjusted accordingly.
The text is changed for the current view. Additionally, the scaling values are inherited to
the phone views if the current view is a tablet view.

Configuring the action that is associated with a

timer object
When you add a timer object, an action is automatically added and associated with the
timer object. When the time expires, timers can display messages, open Web pages,
change variables, and much more. You can change the timer's trigger and set conditions
when the timer's action is to occur.
To configure the action that is associated with the timer object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Action ribbon for the button:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action that is asso-
ciated with the button object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the timer object; then, click the Action ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the timer object, select Properties and click the
Action ribbon.
The Action ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the Action drop-down list in the Action and Target group to select the action

- 446 -
 to execute when the timer expires. For details about selecting an action, see Select-
ing an action.
The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. Specify additional
information as necessary. For details about selecting an action's target, see Select-
ing an action's target.
3. Select the action's trigger. The action is triggered when the timer expires by
default. This is indicated by Done Playing in the Trigger group. Use the Trig-

ger drop-down list to change the trigger and specify a delay if necessary. For
details about selecting the trigger, see Selecting an action's trigger.
4. Specify the action's conditions. The action will always occur by default. This is
indicated by Always in the Conditions group. Click Always to specify the

conditions under which the action is to occur. For details about using the controls
on the Set Action Conditions window to specify conditions, see Specifying con-
ditions.
The action is updated and assigned to the timer object.
See also: About actions

Working with reference lists

You can create a reference list within your title. A reference list will compile all of the ref-
erence information from objects within your title to create a complete list of all your ref-
erences.
See also: Adding a reference for an object
View these topics for more information about adding and working with reference lists:
l Adding a reference list object
l Specifying the scope of a reference list
l Changing the name of a reference list object
l Enabling author control on a reference list object
l Changing the description of a reference list object
l Viewing the HTML name of a reference list object
l Specifying the text style of a reference list
l Making a reference list object initially hidden
l Placing a reference list object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a reference list object
l Changing the transition properties of a reference list object

- 447 -
 l Locking the size and position of a reference list object
l Changing the position and size of a reference list object

Adding a reference list

Follow these steps to add a reference list:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the reference list.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, click Reference List from the Add More group.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+8
The reference list is added to the title. Move the reference list to the appropriate loc-
ation on the page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the
scope and appearance of the reference list.

Specifying the scope of a reference list

You can specify whether the reference list should include information for objects within
your entire title, the current chapter, the current section, or just the current page.
To specify the scope of a reference list:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the reference list.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the reference list and select
Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the reference list and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the reference list.
l In the work area, right-click the reference list and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the reference list and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Reference List group, use the Scope drop-down list to select the appro-
priate scope from the list. Choose from the following four options:
All References in the Title Will include reference information for all objects
within the title.
References in this Will include reference information for only the objects
chapter contained in the current chapter.
References in this section Will include reference information for only the objects
contained in the current section.
References in this page Will include reference information for only the objects
contained on the current page.

- 448 -
Specifying the text style of a reference list
You can alter the appearance of the text of a reference list, such as changing the font or
underlining the text.
To specify the text style of a form element:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the reference list object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the reference list object and
select Properties.
l In the Title Explorer, select the reference list object and press Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the reference list object.
l In the work area, right-click the reference list object and select Properties.
l In the work area, select the reference list object and press Enter.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To specify the text style of the reference list, use the controls in the Text Style
group as follows:
Text Style Click this to select a text style to format the reference list. The
current text styles are listed. To create a new text style, select
Manage Styles and use the controls in the Text Styles win-
dow to configure a new style. For details about adding and
managing text styles, see Managing text styles.
Click this to select the font for the text of the reference list.
Click this to select the font size for the text of the reference
list.
Text Click this to select the color for the text of the reference list.
Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a
color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to
select a custom color from the Color wheel.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Click this to bold the text of the reference list.
Click this to italicize the text of the reference list.
Click this to underline the text of the reference list.
Background Click this to select the color of the background of the ref-
erence list. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper
tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select
Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel.

- 449 -
 See also: Matching colors used within your title

Working with QR Codes

A QR Code® is a special image that directs the user's browser to various forms of inform-
ation when scanned with a mobile phone with the QR scanner application. The
QR Code can contain the following:
l Plain Text
l Web Page

l Email Address

l Text Message (SMS)

l Contact Information

l Calendar Event

l Phone Number

l Geographic Location

View these topics for information about adding and working with QR Codes:
l Adding a QR Code object
l Editing a QR Code object
l Changing the name of a QR Code object
l Enabling author control on a QR Code object
l Changing the description of a QR Code object
l Viewing the HTML name of a QR Code object
l Making a QR Code object initially hidden
l Placing a QR Code object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a QR Code object
l Changing the transition properties of a QR Code object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a QR Code object
l Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a QR Code object
l Adding a reference for a QR Code object
l Including metadata for a QR Code object
l Locking the size and position of a QR Code object
l Changing the position and size of a QR Code object

Adding a QR Code
Follow these steps to add a QR Code:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the QR Code.
2. From the Insert ribbon, click

- 450 -
 QR Code from the Add More group. The QR Code Generator window opens.
3. Use the Contents list to select the type of information to encode in the QR Code
and complete the option fields associated with the content item. Select from the fol-
lowing:
l Plain Text
l Web Page
l Email Address

l Text Message (SMS)

l Contact Information

l Calendar Event

l Phone Number

l Geographic Location

4. Click OK.
The QR Code is added to the title. Move the QR Code to the appropriate location on the
page and use the controls on the Properties ribbon to change the scope and appear-
ance of the QR Code.

Editing a QR Code object

You can edit the QR Code object and make changes using the QR Code Generator. For
example, if the QR Code contains a calendar event, you can update the details of the cal-
endar event.
To edit the QR Code object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the QR Code object, then
click Edit in the QR Code group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the QR Code object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the QR Code object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the QR Code object and click Edit in the

QR Code group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the QR Code object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the QR Code object and type Shift + Enter.
The QR Code Generator opens.
2. Use the QR Code Generator to specify the changes and click OK to save the
changes.
When you save your changes, the QR Code object is automatically updated in the title.

- 451 -
Working with equations
You can create mathematical equations for use in your title. The Trivantis Equation
Editor can be used to create your equations. All equations are published as images.
View these topics for more information about adding and working with equations:
l Adding an equation
l Editing an equation
l Changing the name of an equation object
l Enabling author control on an equation object
l Changing the description of an equation object
l Viewing the HTML name of an equation object
l Making an equation object initially hidden
l Placing an equation object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of an equation object
l Changing the transition properties of an equation object
l Using an empty ALT tag for an equation object
l Pre-loading an equation object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to an equation object
l Locking the size and position of an equation object
l Changing the position and size of an equation object

Adding an equation
Perform the following steps to add an equation to the title.
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add an equation.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Insert ribbon, click Equation in the Add Image group.
l Type Ctrl+Shift+3
The Trivantis Equation Editor window opens.
3. Select one of the 19 template buttons and select the appropriate symbol to insert
within your equation. The cursor will blink inside the equation template box on the
content page.

4. Enter the appropriate values inside of the equation template boxes within the

- 452 -
 content page.
5. Click the X at the top-right of the window to close the Trivantis Equation Editor and
insert the equation into the title.
The new equation is added to the page.

Editing an equation
When you create an equation using the Trivantis Equation Editor, you can make
changes to your equation by editing it.
To edit an equation:
1. Do one of the following to open the Equation Editor:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the equation object, then
click Edit in the Equation group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the equation object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the equation object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the equation object and click Edit in the
Equation group on the Properties ribbon.
l In the work area, right-click the equation object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the equation object and type Shift + Enter.
The Trivantis Equation Editor is launched with your equation loaded in the work
area.
2. Make the appropriate changes to your equation, save your changes, and close the
Trivantis Equation Editor. All instances of the equation object are updated within
the title.

Working with BranchTrack objects

BranchTrack objects are simulations created using the BranchTrack editor. The
BranchTrack editor makes it easy to add and manage scenario-based simulations for
your title.
• For details about getting started with BranchTrack simuations, see Starting
BranchTrack.
• When viewing BranchTrack simulations in Internet Explorer, Internet Explorer 9
or newer is required.
View these topics for information about adding and working with BranchTrack objects:
l Adding a BranchTrack object
l Editing a BranchTrack object
l Changing the name of a BranchTrack object

- 453 -
 l Enabling author control on a BranchTrack object
l Changing the description of a BranchTrack object
l Viewing the HTML name of a BranchTrack object
l Making a BranchTrack object initially hidden
l Placing a BranchTrack object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a BranchTrack object
l Changing the transition properties of a BranchTrack object
l Using an empty ALT tag for a BranchTrack object
l Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing
l Adding an action to a BranchTrack object
l Adding a reference for a BranchTrack object
l Including metadata for a BranchTrack object
l Locking the size and position of a BranchTrack object
l Changing the position and size of a BranchTrack object
Additional resources: Behind the Scenes Look at Branching Scenarios

Adding a BranchTrack object

Follow these steps to launch the BranchTrack editor and add a BranchTrack object:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location in which you want to add the BranchTrack
object.
2. To launch the BranchTrack editor from within the Publisher, click Inspire Tools
and select BranchTrack on the Tools ribbon or click the Inspire Tools side-tab
and select BranchTrack. This launches the BranchTrack editor in the Inspire
Tools side-tab.
3. To get started, click New simulation to start a new simulation or navigate and
select an existing simulation. For more information or to sign in, visit
https://www.branchtrack.com/explore.
The simulations downloaded from the BranchTrack editor are integrated into your title as
objects called BranchTrack objects. Use the controls on the Properties, Style, and Pos-
ition & Size ribbons to configure the object.
A simulation can have a score of an empty string if the first scene in the simulation
does not have a score value.

Editing a BranchTrack object

You can edit the BranchTrack object and make changes using the BranchTrack editor.

- 454 -
 • For BranchTrack objects, the name of the object in the Title Explorer will also be
the name of the variables for that scenario. For example, if the name is changed
from "BranchTrack Scenario ABC" to "ABC", the variables associated with that
scenario are also changed to "BT_Path_ABC" and "BT_Score_ABC". For more
information, see Working with variables.
• A simulation can have a score of an empty string if the first scene in the sim-
ulation does not have a score value.
To edit theBranchTrack object:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the BranchTrack object,
then click Edit in the BranchTrack group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the BranchTrack object and
select Edit.
l In the Title Explorer, select the BranchTrack object and type Shift + Enter.
l In the work area, double-click the BranchTrack object and click Edit in

the BranchTrack group on the Properties ribbon.

l In the work area, right-click the BranchTrack object and select Edit.
l In the work area, select the BranchTrack object and type Shift + Enter.
The BranchTrack editor opens.
2. Use the BranchTrack editor to specify the changes and click OK to save the
changes.
When you save your changes, the BranchTrack object is automatically updated in the
title.

Grouping and ungrouping objects

When you group objects, you combine them so you can work with them as a single unit.
Move, lock and unlock all objects in a group as a single unit. Group properties will
enable you to set a transition on the group, applying the transition to all objects within
the group. You can also perform actions on groups. For example, using a group as a tar-
get on a show or hide action will show or hide all components of the group.
You can also specify the group's reading order to last.
Groups can contain all kinds of objects, images, text blocks, audio, and actions. When a
group consists entirely of actions, it is referred to as an Action Group. You can use a
single command to run all of the actions inside of an action group.
See also: Selecting an action
You can ungroup a group of objects at any time and then regroup them later.

- 455 -
When a group object is deleted, all objects within that group are deleted as well.
View these topics for more information about grouping and ungrouping objects:
l Grouping objects
l Ungrouping objects
l Changing the name of a group object
l Specifying that the group will be read last
l Enabling author control on a group object
l Changing the description of a group object
l Viewing the HTML name of a group object
l Making a group object initially hidden
l Placing a group object on the top layer
l Specifying the CSS classes of a group object
l Changing the transition properties of a group object
l Adding an action to a group object
l Locking the size and position of a group object
l Changing the position and size of a group object

Grouping objects
You can group objects in one of two ways:
l Add a group to your title and add objects to the group
l Select a set of objects and group them

Adding a group
Perform the following steps to add a group to your title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location onto which you want to add a group.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Home ribbon, click Group Selection from the Arrange group.

l From the Insert ribbon, click Group from the Add More group.

l From the Position & Size ribbon, click Group from the Arrange group.

l Type Ctrl+5
The group is added to the title. Use the controls on the Properties ribbon to
change the appearance of the group.

- 456 -
To add an existing object to the group, drag and drop the existing object from the Title
Explorer into the group. Complete this by selecting the object and while holding down
the left mouse button, drag the object until the cursor is positioned over the group object
and the name of the group is highlighted. Release the left mouse button to add the object
to the group.
You can select multiple objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting
objects.

Selecting objects and grouping them

If you have a set of objects within your title that you want to group, you can select the
objects and group them.
To select objects and group them:
1. Complete one of the following to select objects within your title:
l Select the objects within the Title Explorer. Hold down the Ctrl key to select
multiple objects.
l Select the objects within your work area. Hold down the Ctrl key to select
multiple objects.
l Using your mouse, draw a rectangle within your work area by clicking, and
while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the cursor to define a rect-
angle. All objects within the rectangle will be selected.
2. With the objects selected, right click within the Title Explorer or within your work
area and select Group from the right-click context menu.

Ungrouping objects
You can ungroup objects. To ungroup objects, right-click the group graphic of the group
of objects you want to ungroup and select Ungroup from the right-click context menu.

Specifying that the group will be read last

You can control the order in which objects are announced for users who rely on screen
readers while viewing published content.
Reading order is established by the order of objects as they are listed in the Title
Explorer. Objects at the top of the Title Explorer list are announced first, while objects at
the bottom of the Title Explorer list are announced last. For every page, the announce-
ment of objects begins with title-level inherited objects, one by one, top to bottom, as
they are listed. Then, chapter-level inherited objects, followed by section-level inherited
objects. The page-level objects are read last, top to bottom, as they are listed beneath
the page within the Title Explorer.
You can create groups at the title, chapter, and section levels whose reading order can
be specifically set to be read last, after all page-level objects have been announced.
This option is enabled when Accessibility Settings within the Title Options is enabled.

- 457 -
 l Selecting this option will disable the setting for the Always on Top property
in the Appearance group for the group and all objects within it.
l If this option is selected for multiple groups at the section-, chapter-, or title-
levels, section-level groups will be amongst the first objects read last, fol-
lowed by chapter-level grouped objects, and then title-level grouped objects.
To specify that the group will be read last:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the group object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic of the group and select Prop-
erties.
2. Enable the Set Reading Order to Last check box in the Group group.
The group's reading order is set to last.
See also: Preparing a title for accessibility

Excluding objects using inheritance

With the inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to the main title will appear on
every page of your title. Furthermore, any objects added directly to a chapter will appear
on every page in that chapter including pages that are inside of a section within the
chapter. Objects added directly to a section will appear on every page in that section and
objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page.
The Inherit button in the Inherit Settings group is available within all chapter, sec-

tion and page properties. If the object is excluded within the properties of a chapter, it will
not appear on any page within that chapter. If the object is excluded within the properties
of a section, it will not appear on any page within that section, and if the object is
excluded within the properties of a page, then the object will simply be excluded from
that page.
See the following sections for additional information:
l Specifying inheritance properties for chapters, sections and pages
l Specifying an assignable unit's inheritance properties

Moving and resizing objects

While working in Edit mode, you can easily move and resize objects within your title.
Select the object you want to move or resize within your work area and do one of the fol-
lowing:
To move an object:

- 458 -
 l Use your keyboard’s arrow keys to reposition the object horizontally or vertically.
The object will move 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow key pressed. You can also
perform these steps while holding your keyboard’s Shift key. Doing so will move
the object in increments of 10 pixels, in the chosen direction.
l Click the object and while holding down the left mouse button, drag the object to its
new location. To move the object to a new position that is directly above, below or
to either side of its current position, hold down the Shift key while dragging the
item to its new location. This will cause the object to move straight, either up,
down, left, or right.
For titles enabled for responsive design, objects that are moved or resized
using the Ctrl+Shift + drag key combination, the position of the object will
be moved proportionally across all device views regardless of whether you
set an override position for the object. For details about working with
responsive design, including enabling your title for responsive design, see
Working with responsive content.
These rules are applied when using the Ctrl+Shift + drag key combination:
o If the object is inheriting its position/size, that will still be the case; an
override for its new position/size is not created.. If the object already
has an override, the override for the objects in the current working
view (non-desktop) are maintained .
o Border detection logic is built into the Ctrl+Shift drag function so that
moving objects in the current view will not cause the objects - moved
relatively - to fall off the page in another view.
o If the entire object is moved completely off of the page in the cur-
rent/working view, then we will make the assumption that the user
wants the object off the page in all views and will move it accordingly.
o If multiple objects are selected, all objects stop moving as soon as the
first object reaches a border in order to preserve the original layout.
(However, it an object is moved off the page in the working view, as
stated above it will move off the page in other views.)
o Any current object that is already partially or completely off the page
will be ignored during the Ctrl+Shift drag action.
l Manually set the position of the object by altering the X and Y position within the
Position and Size tab of the object’s properties.
To resize an object:
l Click on any corner or side of the object, and while holding down the left mouse
button, drag the corner or side of the object to resize it. Holding your keyboard’s
Shift key while performing these steps will ensure that the object is resized pro-
portionally.

- 459 -
 l Use adjustment adorners and handles on shapes, images, and text buttons to
stretch, resize, rotate and flip these objects.
l Manually set the size of the object by altering the Width and Height of the object
within the Position and Size tab of the object’s properties.
See also: Specifying an object's position and size
Using the status bar
Additional resources: Using Image, Shape and Button Effects in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Locking and unlocking objects

You can lock the position of several objects at once. This preserves them from getting
accidentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title. You can also unlock
the position of several objects at once.
The selected objects will be locked in size and position within Edit mode.
To lock the position and size of multiple objects:
1. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one object on a page.
2. Click the lock graphic in the lower-left corner or right-click and select Size/Pos-
ition Locked. When enabled, the graphic changes to the locked graphic and a
check mark appears next to the Size/Position Locked menu item.
To unlock the position and size of multiple objects:
1. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one object on a page.
2. Click the lock graphic in the lower-left corner or right-click and select Size/Pos-
ition Locked. When disabled, the graphic changes to the lock graphic and the
check mark disappears from the Size/Position Locked menu item.
See also: Locking the size and position of an object

Aligning and positioning objects

You can align objects to the same top, bottom, left and right positions, center objects hori-
zontally or vertically on a page, space objects evenly, and make objects the same size.
This section presents additional information on the following topics:
l Aligning objects
l Centering objects on a page
l Spacing objects evenly
l Making objects the same size
To directly specify the position or size of an object, you can also modify the object's prop-
erties.

- 460 -
See also: Changing the position and size of an object
Using the status bar

Aligning objects
You can use the alignment functions to align several objects along their top, bottom, left
and right sides, or align them to their horizontal or vertical centers.
To align objects:
1. Hold down your Ctrl key and select the objects you want to align. Multiple objects
must be selected to activate the following alignment options.
2. Select from the following alignment options. You can align objects by clicking the
appropriate status bar graphic.
Align Left: Moves two or more selected objects so that the left edge of each is
aligned with the left edge of the selected object which is furthest left on the page
(the lowest X coordinate value).
Align Center: Moves two or more selected objects so that the horizontal (left-to-
right) centers are aligned (the center line of the objects have the same X coordin-
ate). The center line is determined using the left-most and right-most edges of the
objects.
Align Right: Moves two or more selected objects so that the right edge of each
is aligned with the right edge of the selected object that is furthest right on the
page.
Align Top: Moves two or more selected objects so that the top edge of each is
aligned with the top edge of the selected object that is furthest up on the page (the
lowest Y coordinate value).
Align Middle: Moves two or more selected objects so that the vertical (top-to-
bottom) middles are aligned (the middle line of the objects have the same Y
coordinate). The center line is determined using the top-most and bottom-most
edges of the objects.
Align Bottom: Moves two or more selected objects so that the bottom edge of
each is aligned with the bottom edge of the selected object that is furthest down
on the page.
Center Horizontal on Page: Moves one or more selected objects so that the
horizontal (left-to-right) center is in the center of the page (the center line of the
objects have the same X coordinate as the center line of the page width).
Center Vertical on Page: Moves one or more selected objects so that the ver-
tical (top-to-bottom) center is in the middle of the page (the center line of the
objects have the same Y coordinate as the center line of the page height).
Space Evenly Horizontal: Moves three or more selected objects so that hori-
zontal distance (the left-to-right, X-axis space) between the objects is equal;

- 461 -
 regardless of the size of each object. It leaves the left edge of the left-most object
(lowest X coordinate) unchanged, and the right edge of the right-most object
unchanged, and then spaces the other objects in between. It does not change the
Y coordinate (top-to-bottom) of the objects.
Space Evenly Vertical: Moves three or more selected objects so that vertical
distance (the top-to-bottom, Y-axis space) between the objects is equal; regard-
less of the size of each object. It leaves the top edge of the upper-most object (low-
est Y coordinate) unchanged, and the bottom edge of the lower-most object
unchanged, and then spaces the other objects in between. It does not change the
X coordinate (left-to-right) of the objects.
Make Same Width: Resizes two or more selected objects so that their width is
equal to the width of the first selected object; regardless of their height.
Make Same Height: Resizes two or more selected objects so that their height
is equal to the height of the first selected object; regardless of their width.
Make Same Width and Height: Resizes two or more selected objects so that
they are equally sized for both width and height to the width and height of the first
selected object.

Centering objects on a page

You can center your objects on a page. Centering the objects will place the objects in
the horizontal or vertical center of the page.
To center objects on a page:
1. Select the object you want to center. Select multiple objects by holding down your
Ctrl key.
2. Select from the following centering options. You can center objects by clicking the
appropriate status bar graphic.
Centering Status bar graphic
Centers objects horizontally on the page.
Centers objects vertically on the page.

Spacing objects evenly

You can space several object evenly on a page either across or down.
To evenly space objects:
1. Hold down your Ctrl key and select the objects you want to evenly space. Multiple
objects must be selected to activate the following spacing options.
2. Select from the following spacing options. You can space objects by clicking the
appropriate status bar graphic.
Spacing Status bar graphic

- 462 -
 Space objects evenly across
Space objects evenly down

Making objects the same size

You can easily resize objects so they are the same size. Set objects to the same width,
height or both.
To make objects the same size:
1. Hold down your Ctrl key and select the objects you want to resize. Multiple objects
must be selected to activate the following resizing options.
2. Select from the following resizing options. You can resize objects by selecting the
resizing option from the Layout menu, or by clicking the toolbar graphic. Objects
will be resized according to the size of the first object you selected.
Resizing Status bar graphic
Make objects the same width
Make objects the same height.
Make objects the same width and height.
If Keep original aspect ratio is selected for any of the selected objects, the
objects may not be resized the way you intended.
See also: Specifying the position and size of an object

Layering objects
You can layer objects within your title. The layering affects how the objects will appear to
your users, and if objects are overlapping, will determine which object is in the forefront
and which object is in the background. The layering of objects is determined by the order
of your objects as they are listed in the Title Explorer. When you select any of the lay-
ering options for an object, the object's position will be changed accordingly in the Title
Explorer.

- 463 -
The example on the right shows three
images layered on a page. Notice the
order of the objects in the Title
Explorer. The top-most object listed in
the Title Explorer is on the bottom layer
of the page, while the bottom-most
object listed in the Title Explorer is on
the top layer.
You can change the layering of an
object using the controls on the right-
click menu or the Home ribbon.
To change the layering of an object
using the right-click menu:
1. Select the object that you want to
layer differently.
2. Right-click the object, select Lay-
ering, and select the appropriate
layering option. Choose from the
following options:
Bring to Front Places the
object on the
top layer.
Send to Back Places the
object on the
bottom layer.
Up one layer Moves the
object one
layer closer
to the top.
Down one layer Moves the
object one
layer closer
to the bot-
tom.
To change the layering of an object
using the controls on the Home ribbon:
1. Select the object that you want to
layer differently.
2. In the Arrange group on the

- 464 -
 Home ribbon,click Bring For-
ward to bring the object forward
one layer. Click Bring to Front
under Bring Forward to bring the
object to the front layer. Click
Send Backward to send the
object backward one layer. Click
Send to Back under Send Back-
ward to send the object to the
back layer.
You can also force an object to the top
layer.
See also: Placing an object on the top
layer

Working with library objects

The program makes it easy for you to organize various objects in one location for reuse.
Library objects can be reused within other titles and shared online with the entire com-
munity. A Library folder is provided in which to save these objects and easily share them
with others. The default location of the Library folder is C:\ Program Files\Trivantis\Lect-
ora <product>\MediaLib\Custom. This location can be changed and kept on a shared net-
work drive.
A library object can be a single object or a set of objects. It can also be an entire chapter,
section or page. Library objects are saved with an .awo extension and can contain as
few or as many objects as you want.
See these topics for more information:
l Creating a library object
l Inserting a library object
l Sharing a library object online

Creating a library object

A library object can be a single object or a set of objects. It can also be an entire chapter,
section or page. Library objects are saved with an .awo extension and can contain as
few or as many objects as you want.
To create a library object:
1. Select the object you want to save as a library object. Hold down your Ctrl key to
select multiple objects.
2. Right-click in your work area and select Save as Library Object.

- 465 -
 The Save As window appears.
3. Name the object and click Save.
The object is saved as a library object with the extension of .awo.

Sharing a library object online

You can share library objects with the entire community. Library objects must be saved
with an .awo extension and can contain as few or as many objects as you want.
You must agree to the terms and conditions specified in the Terms of Use before sharing
library objects online.
To share a library object online:
1. Create the library object. For details, see Creating a library object.
2. Click the My Library side-tab located along the right-side of the work area.
3. Navigate and select the library object .awo file and click Share.
The Share Media online window opens.
4. Enable the Terms of Use check box and complete the fields as follows:
Select or Enter a Select the subcategory in which to place the library object.
Category
Author Specify the author.
File name Specify the name of the library object file.
Description Specify a short description of the library object.
Keywords Specify keywords used to find the library object.
5. Click Upload.
The library object is shared online.

Inserting a library object

You can insert a library object that was saved to a file or shared online by other users.
To insert a library object from a file:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a library object.
2. Click the My Library side-tab located along the right-side of the work area.
3. Open the Library Object folder.
4. Double-click or drag-and-drop the Library Object onto your page.
The library object is inserted into your title.
To insert a library object that is shared online:
1. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a library object.
2. Click the Stock Library side-tab located along the right-side of the work area.

- 466 -
 3. Navigate to the Media Online subdirectory and select the Library Objects folder.
You can also search for library objects using a keyword. Specify the keyword in the
Search field and click the search graphic or press Enter.
The results are displayed.
4. Double-click or drag the library object onto the page.
The library object is inserted into your title.

Working with the Media Library

Use the Media Library to find and share digital media files that included in your title,
stored in your private library, or installed with the program. The Media Library is located
along the right-side of the work area and is divided into four main categories:
Title Media included in the current title. Drag an object to re-use it within the
Resources title, or right-click an object to edit it, show it in the Resource Manager,
or show its use within the title.
My Library Media that you have saved to your private library from the current title
and other titles. Add files from your local computer system and store
them into custom categories for easy retrieval, double-click or drag them
onto the work area to re-use them into the current title, or share with
online.
Stock Library Media that is installed with the program for use in your titles. This
includes folders for buttons, character poses, clip-art, Flash activities,
media online, music, and status indicators.
Inspire Tools Lectora Inspire provides integration with tools produced by the eLearn-
ing Brothers and BranchTrack. From the eLearning Brothers, you can
enhance your titles with Flash and HTML5 interactions and games from
the Interaction Builder, select templates and assets from the Template
Library. From BranchTrack, design branching scenarios with the
BranchTrack application.
Click or hover-over a side-tab to open one of the categories. You can use the Media
Library pinned to the side of the application or float it as a separate window. To float the
Media Library as a separate window, open it and double-click the top bar. To pin it open,
click the pin in the upper-right corner.
You can control how you can open the Media Library. By default, the Media Library
opens when you hover over the Media Library buttons. You can enable the ability
to open the Media Library with a click, instead of hovering. For details, see Click-
ing to open the Media Library.
Before working with the Media Library, you should specify the location of your Media
Library. By default, this location is set to your ClipArt folder (C:\Program
Files\Trivantis\Lectora <product>\ClipArt), however it can be changed to a shared folder

- 467 -
or a folder on a network drive. For details, see Specifying the location of your media lib-
rary.
View these topics for more information about using the Media Library:
l Working with Title Resources
l Working with My Library
l Working with the Stock Library
l Working with the Inspire tools
Additional resources: What’s in Your Media Library?

Working with Title Resources

The Title Resources side-tab contains media that is included in the current title. Use
this side-tab to re-use media to other locations within a title.
Click or hover-over the Title Resources side-tab to open and view its contents.
To re-use an object from the Title Resources, open to the location within the title and
drag the object from the Title Resources side-tab onto the work area. The object is
added to the title.
You can also edit objects, view their usage within the title, and show them within the
Resource Manager. To edit an object, right-click an object within Title Resources and
select Edit. The object opens in its appropriate editor. To view an object's usage within
the title, right-click an object and select Show in Title. To show the object within the
Resource Manager, right-click an object and select Show in Resource Manager.

Working with My Library

The My Library side-tab contains media that you have saved to your private library from
the current title and other titles. You can add files from your local computer system and
store them into custom categories for easy retrieval, double-click or drag them onto the
work area to re-use them into the current title, or share with online. You can also specify
the object's properties.
View these topics for more information about working with My Library:
l Copying objects to My Library
l Sharing media online
l Managing custom media categories
l Searching for media
l Specifying properties
l Opening the folder in Windows Explorer

- 468 -
Copying objects to My Library
You can copy objects to the My Library to re-use throughout a title. You can select an
object currently in a title or select an object from your computer system. You can select
multiple objects if necessary.
To copy an object currently in a title to My Library:
1. Select the object you want to copy to the Media Library. Hold down your Ctrl key to
select multiple objects.
2. Right-click in your work area and select Copy to My Library.
3. Name the object and click OK.
The object is copied to the My Library.
To copy an object from your computer system:
1. Click or hover-over the My Library side-tab to open it.
2. Click Add File. The Add media to Media Library window opens.
3. Navigate and select the file. Hold down your Ctrl key to select multiple objects.
4. Click Open.
The object is copied to the My Library.

Sharing media online

You can share media from My Library with fellow content developers.
To share a media online:
1. Copy the object to the media library. For details, see Copying objects to My
Library.
2. Click or hover-over the My Library side-tab located along the right-side of the work
area.
3. Navigate and select the object file and click Share. Alternatively, you can right-
click the object and select Share Online.
The Share Media online window opens.
4. Enable the Terms of Use check box and complete the fields as follows:
Select or Enter a Select the subcategory in which to place the library object.
Category
Author Specify the author.
File name Specify the name of the library object file.
Description Specify a short description of the library object.
Keywords Specify keywords used to find the library object.
5. Click Upload.

- 469 -
The media object is shared online.

Managing custom media categories

You can add and delete custom categories to better organize your Media Library.
To add a custom media category:
1. Click or hover-over the My Library side-tab to open it.
2. Click Category.
3. Type the name of the new category.
You can now add media to the new custom category.
To delete a custom media category:
1. Click or hover-over the My Library side-tab to open it.
2. Select the custom category, right-click and select Delete Media.
The custom category and its contents are deleted.
See also: Adding objects to My Library
When you create custom media categories, you are actually creating new folders
within the location of your media library. The folder structure you see for the loc-
ation of your media library within Windows Explorer should be the same as the cat-
egory structure you see within the Media Library.

Searching for media

You can search for media within the My Library side-tab. Filters are provided to narrow
your search.
To search for media:
1. To specify filters to narrow your search, click the search setup graphic located
at the end of the search field. Enable the check boxes corresponding to the objects
to which you are searching.
2. Specify the search criteria in the Search field and click (or press Enter).

Specifying properties
Once you have added custom media to your My Library, you can specify the properties
of the media.
To specify the properties, select the object and click Properties.
Specify the properties as follows:
General Click this tab to specify the name, type, description and keywords
relating to searching for the object.
Add/Modify Metadata is data about data. It typically includes information such as
Metadata

- 470 -
 a description of the object, the author, the date it was created, and so
on. Search engines look within metadata for relevant information to
the term that was searched. Within objects, the metadata will be pub-
lished as standard XML metadata into the accompanying ims-
manifest.xml file for any AICC, CourseMill, or SCORM published
titles. Metadata added to objects within a title that is published strictly
to HTML will be written directly to the resulting HTML pages con-
taining the objects. The metadata can be specified as custom
metadata or as name/value pairs using predefined IMS Metadata
Data Elements following the IEEE LTSC LOM standard.
Metadata added to media within your Media Library will be carried
over when the media object is added to a title.
Enable the Use metadata check box and specify the following
information:
Input Custom Select this to display the Custom Metadata
Metadata text field for you to directly enter custom
metadata.
IMS (IEEE LTSC Select this display a pre-populated list of
LOM) name value pairs for all the SCORM 1.2
required IMS Metadata data elements. Click
the Add button to open the Metadata Data Ele-
ment Entry window. Select a predefined data
element from the Name combo box and spe-
cify a data element value from the Value edit/-
combo box. Select OK to accept the data
element. Select from previously entered data
elements from the Name/Value lists and click
Edit or Remove to edit or remove the selec-
ted element.
Custom Metadata Use this box to specify custom metadata.
Parameters Click this tab to specify additional parameters name/value pairs to
include in the HTML declaration for Flash files. Click Add to add a
name/value pair. Select a name/value pair and click Edit to edit an
parameter. Select a name/value pair and click Remove to remove a
name/value pair.

Opening the folder in Windows Explorer

You can open the folder containing the file in Windows Explorer.
To open the folder in Windows Explorer:

- 471 -
 1. Click or hover-over the My Library side-tab to open it.
2. Navigate and select the file. Right-click and select Show in Windows Explorer.
Windows Explorer opens.

Working with the Stock Library

The Stock Library side-tab contains hundreds of media objects that are installed with
the program.
Click or hover-over the Stock Library side-tab to open it.
Use the following categories to access media within the Stock Library:
Buttons Predefined buttons with the appropriate action already configured.
Character Poses Character poses are transparent photo images of a male and
female actor in various poses suitable for using in your title.
ClipArt Clip-art images
Flash Activities Configurable Flash animations you can add to enhance your title.
The animations contain parameters that you configure as neces-
sary.
Media Online Media that has been shared online.
Music Music installed with the program.
Status Indicators Image sets designed specially to indicate status.
Use the Search field to search for media within the Stock Library. To search for media:
1. To specify filters to narrow your search, click the search setup graphic located
at the end of the search field. Enable the check boxes corresponding to the objects
to which you are searching.
2. Specify the search criteria in the Search field and click (or press Enter).

Working with the Inspire Tools

Lectora Inspire provides integration with tools produced by the eLearning Brothers and
BranchTrack. From BranchTrack, design and build branching scenarios with the
BranchTrack application. From the eLearning Brothers, you can get ideas and enhance
your titles with course starters, games, and interactions from their Template Library,
select from a huge collection of cutout people characters in their Cutout People library,
and access thousands of stock images, audio, and video assets in their Stock Assets lib-
rary.
View these topics for more information:
l Entering the eLearning Brothers Library
l Starting BranchTrack

- 472 -
Entering the eLearning Brothers Library
The eLearning Brothers Library provides access to thousands of templates, games and
interactions that you can integrate into your title. This includes course starters and lay-
outs, audio and video assets, and much more.
You can open the eLearning Brothers Library from the Getting Started window or from
within the Publisher.
l To launch the eLearning Brothers Library from the Getting Started window, click
Inspire Tools and select eLearning Brothers Library under Launch in the lower-
right section of the window.
l To launch the eLearning Brothers Library from within the Publisher, click Inspire
Tools and select eLearning Brothers Library on the Tools ribbon or click the
Inspire Tools side-tab and select eLearning Brothers Library.
This launches the eLearning Brothers Library in the Inspire Tools side-tab.
Click Login to log in and get started. Use the tabs in the upper-right to access the appro-
priate library. Scroll the page for additional information.
The assets downloaded from the eLearning Brothers Library are integrated into your title
as Lectora template files (.awp) and can be integrated into your title. For more inform-
ation about templates, see Using a template.

Starting BranchTrack
The BranchTrack application by BranchTrack is a browser-based editor for designing
and building branching scenarios that integrate with your Lectora title. No programming
skills are needed.
When viewing BranchTrack simulations in Internet Explorer, Internet Explorer 9 or
newer is required.
You can launch the BranchTrack editor from the Getting Started window or from within
the Publisher.
l To launch the BranchTrack editor from the Getting Started window, click Inspire
Tools and select BranchTrack under Launch in the lower-right section of the win-
dow.
l To launch the BranchTrack editor from within the Publisher, click Inspire Tools
and select BranchTrack on the Tools ribbon or click the Inspire Tools side-tab
and select BranchTrack.
This launches the BranchTrack editor in the Inspire Tools side-tab.
To get started, click New simulation to start a new simulation or navigate and select an
existing simulation. For more information or to sign in, visit https://www.branchtrack-
.com/explore.

- 473 -
The simulations downloaded from the BranchTrack editor are integrated into your title as
objects called BranchTrack objects. Use the controls on the Properties, Style, and Pos-
ition & Size ribbons to configure the object. To update your BranchTrack simuation in
the BranchTrack editor, click Edit. The user's score and path through the scenario are
stored in the BranchTrack reserved variables BT_Score_<object name> and BT_Path_
<object name>.
See also: Working with BranchTrack objects
Reserved variables

- 474 -
Tests, surveys and questions
You can add tests and surveys containing a number of different question types to your
title. Add tests and surveys to gauge your audience, gather feedback, and share ideas.
You can also create tests and surveys and add questions by importing questions
from a comma-separated value (CSV) file. For details, see Importing and exporting
a CSV question file.
In this chapter, the following topics are covered:
l Adding tests
l Common test and survey properties
l Adding questions
l Specifying question properties
l Adding surveys

Adding tests
Use the program to create interactive tests containing various question types. You can
process results and submit them to learning management systems, eMail addresses or
custom databases.
View these topics for more information:
l About tests
l Creating a test
l Adding sections to a test
l Customizing with test results

About tests
Tests are special chapters in the program. They are special in that when they contain
questions, the program will be able to grade them. Tests can contain test sections and
pages. Test sections, similar to the section object, are a means of organizing pages
within the test. The pages are the physical pages that your users will see, and will con-
tain the questions that comprise the test.
See also: Understanding the book metaphor

Creating a test
Creating a test is similar to creating a chapter. When added to your title, a test is dis-
played in the Title Explorer as a new chapter following the currently selected chapter. A
Page 1 and a Last test page will be added by default to the test.

- 475 -
Standard navigation buttons (Cancel, Back, Next, and Done) are automatically added
to the pages of your test. You can remove these controls and add your own custom nav-
igation, if desired.
The Done button that is added to the test's last page is programmed with the Sub-
mit/Process Test action. This action is necessary at the end of the test so the res-
ults will be submitted and the appropriate completion action is taken. If you add
your own custom navigation to the test, the button on the last page of the test that
navigates users out of the test must have this action.
If you later randomize your test, the Done button should be removed and replaced
with the same button used to navigate forward within the test.
Additional pages can be inserted, and questions can then be added to the pages of the
test.
You can also create tests by importing questions from a comma-separated value
(CSV) file. For details, see Importing and exporting a CSV question file.
To create and add a test:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the page after which you want the test to appear.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Test from the Add Test or Survey
group
l Type Ctrl+6
l Select Add Test from the Quick Insert group on the Home ribbon
The test is added to the title and the Test Properties ribbons (Properties, Behavior,
and Results) and the Action ribbon are highlighted.
View these topics to customize the test:
l Changing the name of a test
l Enabling author control of a test
l Changing the page size
l Changing the HTML page alignment
l Specifying inheritance settings
l Changing the background properties
l Changing the text properties
l Setting the transition properties
l Adding an action
l Removing a test from the table of contents
l Showing feedback for each question

- 476 -
 l Making each question mandatory
l Retaining answers between sessions
l Grading the test and specifying the passing score
l Showing test results
l Submitting results
l Prompting for the student's name
l Setting the resulting action when a test is passed or completed
l Setting the resulting action when a test is failed or canceled
l Randomizing the questions
l Timing the test
See also: Adding sections to a test
Adding questions
Working with Quick Insert

Showing feedback for each question

You can specify whether to enable the display of feedback on a per-question basis for all
questions in the test. Feedback allows users to gauge their personal development by
identifying the areas in which they need to improve.
To show feedback for each question:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to change. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, enable the Use Question Feedback check box in the
Question group.
Feedback is enabled.

Setting the resulting action when a test is passed

or completed
You can specify the action to take when the test is completed or completed with a
passing score if the test is being graded. For example, you can open a specific page or
open a different title.
The passing score is specified in the Results ribbon in the Grading group.
To set the resulting action when a user completes or passes a test:
1. Double-click the test graphic of the test in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can
right-click the test in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, select the appropriate target for the Go To action from the

- 477 -
 Target drop-down list in the On Completed/Passed group. Specify the appro-
priate target options based on the target you selected.
The resulting action is set.
See also: Selecting an action's target
Grading the test and specifying the passing score

Setting the resulting action when a test is failed

or canceled
You can specify the action to take when the test is canceled or completed with a failing
score if the test is being graded. For example, you can open a specific page, open a new
title, or launch a Web page.
The passing score is specified in the Results tab of your test's properties.
To set the resulting action when a user cancels or fails a test:
1. Double-click the test graphic of the test in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can
right-click the test in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, select the appropriate target for the Go To action from the
Target drop-down list in the On Canceled/Failed group. Specify the appropriate
target options based on the target you selected.
The results action is set.
See also: Selecting an action's target
Grading the test and specifying the passing score

Timing the test

You can set a maximum time limit for the test. When the time limit expires, the test will be
submitted, the test results will display (if enabled), and the test will execute the Com-
pleted/Passed or Canceled/Failed navigation. All unanswered questions are considered
incorrect.
To specify a time limit:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can
right-click the test in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, enable the Timed Test check box in the Timed group.
This adds a test timer to the test.
3. Double-click the graphic of the test timer in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the test timer in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
4. Use the up and down arrows or enter numeric values to specify the appropriate
time limit in Hours:Minutes:Seconds in the Timed Interval group.
The time limit is set.

- 478 -
See also: Setting the resulting action when a test is passed
Setting the resulting action when a test is failed

Randomizing test pages

You can specify to randomize the selection of pages within the test or test section. Spe-
cify the number of pages to use within the test or test section. The student will be presen-
ted with the specified number of randomly selected pages from all the pages in the test
or test section.
When standard navigation is added to a test, the Done button that is added to the
last page of the test is programmed with the Process Test/Survey action. This
action is necessary at the end of the test so the results will be submitted and the
appropriate completion action is taken. If you add your own custom navigation to
the test, the button on the last page of the test that navigates users out of the test
must have this action.
If you later randomize your test, the Done button should be removed and replaced
with the same button used to navigate forward within the test.
A Process Test/Survey action cannot be used in any randomized test or
randomized test section.
To randomize the test pages:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or test section in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the test or test section in the Title Explorer and select
Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, enable the Randomly Select Pages check box in the
Random group. This enables the Pages From Test field.
3. Use the up and down arrows in the Pages From Section field to specify the appro-
priate number of pages.
The test pages will be randomly selected.
See also: Setting the resulting action when a test is passed or completed
Setting the resulting action when a test is failed

Grading the test and specifying the passing

score
You can specify that a test is graded, along with specifying the lowest passing score.
This then allows resulting actions to be configured if the test is passed or failed.
To specify that a test is graded:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can
right-click the test in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Results ribbon, enable the Grade The Test check box in the Grading

- 479 -
 group. This enables the Lowest Passing Score (%) field.
3. Use the up and down arrows in the Lowest Passing Score (%) field to specify the
appropriate passing score.
4. For AICC/SCORM for LMS-type titles with multiple tests, disable Include test
score in overall score if you do not want the score from this test to be included in
the reserved variable AICC_Score to pass to the LMS. AICC_Score contains the
average of the included test scores in the title.
The test will be graded.
See also: Setting the resulting action when a test is passed
Setting the resulting action when a test is failed
Reserved variables

Showing test results

Results of a test are hidden from users by default. You can specify that the results of a
test are displayed when users complete the test. The test results page content is gen-
erated dynamically based on the questions within your test and the test results content
properties that you specify. For details about how to set test results content properties,
see Setting test results content properties.
To show the test results:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you can
right-click the test in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Results ribbon, enable the Show Test Results check box in the Test Res-
ults group. This adds a test results page to the Title Explorer, along with the results
object.
The test results object must be on the final page in the test to have the res-
ults to display.
The Results Designer is enabled on the Properties ribbon for the results object.
Use the Results Designer to specify the appearance of the test results, including
the contents and format of the correct questions, the incorrect questions, and the
unanswered questions, should you choose to include them. A preview of the test
results page based on the current property settings is also displayed.
You can disable the displaying of Correct Questions (that is, questions answered
correctly), Incorrect Questions (questions answered incorrectly), and
Unanswered Questions (questions that were not answered) check boxes in the
Show Questions group to remove the questions from the sequence of the test res-
ults. (This can also be done within the Results Designer).
The test results will be displayed.
See also: Customizing the test results

- 480 -
Prompting for the student's name
You can require that students taking the test must submit their name to identify the test. If
enabled, users are prompted at the beginning of the test to enter their name. The user's
name is submitted with the test results data.
When running on a LMS, enabling prompting for the student's name is not neces-
sary. The LMS will identify the user.
To enable prompting for the student's name:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test. Alternatively, you can
right-click the test in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Results ribbon, enable the Prompt for Student's Name check box in the
Student Settings group.

Including variables values with the results

You can include all defined variables to be included with the test results data when the
results are submitted. The name of each variable and its value at the time of submission
are sent.
To enable including variable values with the test results:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test. Alternatively, you can right-click the test in the
Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Results ribbon, enable the Custom Results Submission check box in the
Results Submission group.
3. Enable the Include ALL Variable Values check box in the Student Setting
group.
See also: Submitting results
About variables

Displaying a success message when the test is

submitted
You can enable the title to display a success message to the student when the custom
test results have been submitted.
To enable the success message:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test. Alternatively, you can right-click the test in the
Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Results ribbon, enable the Custom Results Submission check box in the
Results Submission group.
3. Enable the Show Message When Submitted check box in the Student Settings
group.

- 481 -
Customizing the test results
If the Show Test Results check boxes is enabled on the Results ribbon of the Test
properties, a test results page is added to the bottom of the test in the Title Explorer.
Included with the test results page is the test results object.
For details about changing the properties of the test results page, like changing the back-
ground and changing the page size, see Working with pages.
Similar to other objects in your title, the contents of the test results object can be cus-
tomized by setting its properties.
View these topics for more information about customizing the test results:
l Changing the name of the test results object
l Changing test results content properties
l Making the test results initially hidden
l Placing the test results object on the top layer
l Adding a vertical scroll to the test results object
l Adding an action to the test results object
See also: Adding questions

Changing the name of the test results object

To change the name of the test results object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test results object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the test results object.
l In the work area, right-click the test results object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon opens.
2. In the Name field, specify the name of your test results object as you want it to
appear in the Title Explorer.
The name of the test results object is changed.
See also: Showing test results

Setting test results content properties

You can specify properties relating to the content of your test results, such as whether to
show the test score, the pass or fail status, and the questions answered both correctly
and incorrectly. You can also add custom images, a horizontal rule, and separators. The
information you choose to display will be displayed for all questions in the test.

- 482 -
The test results page content is generated dynamically based on the questions within
your test and the test results content properties that you specify. When you add a new
question to your test, the program will subsequently add the corresponding test results
information to your test results page.
Use the Results Designer to specify the appearance of the test results, including the con-
tents and format of the correct questions, the incorrect questions, and the unanswered
questions, should you choose to include them. A preview of the test results page based
on the current property settings is also displayed.
The Results Designer is new in Lectora 16.1. If the Results Designer encounters
custom test results from a previous version, base properties will be set accordingly
when you initially launch the Results Designer. The custom formatting applied to
individual questions will not be retained.
To add a test results page and set test results content properties:
1. On the Results ribbon for Test properties, enable the Show Test Results check
box in the Test Results group. This adds a test results page to the Title Explorer,
along with the results object.
l If you choose to not show test results, disable the Show Test Results
check box.
l The test results object must be on the final page in the test to have the
results to display.
2. Double-click the graphic of the results object in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the results object in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
3. Click Results Designer in the Show Questions group. The Results Designer
opens.
4. On the General Settings ribbon, use the fields in the Results Display box to spe-
cify how the results are to be displayed, as follows:
Horizontal rule/Separator Enable this check box to display a horizontal rule or
separator between each question. Use the Line
Color drop-down to select the color of the hori-
zontal rule and the Weight to specify its thickness.
5. Use the fields in the Test Information box to select the sequence of items to
include in the results, such as the test name, followed by the test score percentage,
and pass or fail status. To get started, use the drop-down lists in the Items to
Include column to select the items that you want to include on the results page.
For each item you select to include, use the formatting fields in the Text Style box
below to specify the formatting. The current format of each item is displayed in the
Format column. The settings are inherited from the page properties. Disable the
Inherit check box to specify a new format. For example, if you want to include the

- 483 -
name of the test in large Arial text, select Test Name in the list, disable Inherit and
then use the appropriate fields in the Text Style box to select the Arial font in a lar-
ger point size.
Select from the following overall items to include:
Correct-over-total-count Number of questions answered correctly based on
the total number of questions.
Custom image Specify a custom image. Use the Image Selector
box to select the image.
Fail status Status as to whether the student failed the test (in
other words, did not achieve the minimum passing
score). The displayed text can be modified in the
preference settings for Publish Strings. For details,
see Specifying publish strings preferences.
Including both the Fail status and the Pass
status is recommended. Fail status is only
displayed if the student does not achieve the
passing score.
Lowest passing score Lowest score for passing the test as defined in the
Lowest Passing Score (%) field in the Grading
group on the Results ribbon for tests. For details,
see Grading the test and specifying the passing
score.
Pass status Status as to whether the student passed the test (in
other words, did achieve the minimum passing
score). The displayed text can be modified in the
preference settings for Publish Strings. For details,
see Specifying publish strings preferences.
Including both the Pass status and the Fail
status is recommended. Pass status is only
displayed if the student does achieve the
passing score.
Questions placeholder Placeholder representing where in the sequence
the questions will appear.
Student name Student name according to the LMS or as entered
when Prompt for Student Name is selected.
Test name Name of the test.
Test score % Score of the test in percentage.
Use the grab dots in the first column to move an item in the sequence and use the
delete buttons in the last column to delete an item.

- 484 -
 6. If you are including the Questions Placeholder in the sequence, use the Correct
Questions, Incorrect Questions, and Unanswered Questions ribbons to specify
the items to include for the questions. Disable the initial check box on the top of
each of these ribbons if you do not want to show the corresponding items. For
example, if you do not want to show items for the questions answered incorrectly,
disable the Show questions answered incorrectly check box. You can also dis-
able showing each type of question in the results using the Show Correct Ques-
tions, Show Incorrect Questions, and Show Unanswered Questions check
boxes in the Show Questions group on the Properties ribbon for results.
Use the drop-down lists in the Items to Include column to select the items that you
want to include on the results page. For each item you select to include, use the
formatting fields in the Text Style box below to specify the formatting. The current
format of each item is displayed in the Format column. Disable the Inherit check
box to specify a new format. The settings are inherited from the page properties.
Select from the following items to include:
Answer choices Choices for the answer to the question. This will
only be displayed for true or false, multiple choice,
and multiple response questions.
Correct answer Correct answer to the question.
Custom image Specify a custom image. For example, display a
check mark if the question is answered correctly.
Use the Image Selector box to select the image.
Display message feedback The feedback text when displaying message feed-
back is enabled for the question and Show Feed-
back for Each Question is enabled on the
Behavior ribbon for test properties.
Link to first page of test Link to the first page of the test.
Link to question in test Link to the question in the test.
Question names Names of the question.
Question numbers Numbers corresponding to each question.
Question status Status as to whether the student's answer is correct
or incorrect.
Question text Text of the question.
Student's answer Answer selected by the student.
Use the grab dots in the first column to move items in the sequence and use the
delete buttons in the last column to delete items.
7. Click OK to set the properties for the test results.
The test results properties are set.

- 485 -
Making the test results initially hidden
By default, test results objects are set to be initially visible. That is, the test results
appear when users open the pages on which the test results are located. You can ini-
tially hide a test results object until an action has been executed to show the test results.
See also: Selecting an action
To make a test results object initially hidden:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. In the Appearance group, enable the Initially Hidden check box.
The object is set to be initially hidden.

Placing the test results object on the top layer

You can force a test results object to always be on the top layer of the page. This is use-
ful when you have multiple objects layered on your page.
You can change the layer position of objects by sending them backward or bringing
them forward. For details, see Layering objects.
To force a test results object to the top layer:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test results object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the test results object.
l In the work area, right-click the test results object and select Properties.
2. Enable the Always on Top check box in the Appearance group.
l If multiple objects are set to Always on Top, the program will refer to
the ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of
the objects is on the top layer. The top-most object listed on the page in
the Title Explorer is on the bottom layer of the page.
l The Always on Top setting for buttons is not enabled by default when
Accessibility settings are enabled.
The test results object is forced to the top layer.
See also: Layering objects
Preparing a title for accessibility

- 486 -
Adding a vertical scroll to the test results object
You can add a vertical scroll to the test results objects. Enabling the vertical scroll adds
a scroll bar to the test results object and prevents the page from automatically growing
based on the content in the results. This is essential for titles that might contain single-
image backgrounds.
When Vertical Scroll is disabled, the test results object and the page height will auto-
matically grow to fit the results content. Go To, Next Page actions from this page will
navigate to the Target pages defined on the Test Behavior ribbon.
To show a vertical scroll bar within the test results object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Properties ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test results object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the test results object.
l In the work area, right-click the test results object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon opens.
2. Enable the Vertical Scroll check box in the Appearance group.
The vertical scroll bar is added to the test results.

Adding an action to the test results object

You can associate an action to be applied on the test results level. For example, you can
display message, open an attachment, launch a program, send an email and more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions on the test results level as needed.
To add an action:
1. In the Add group on the Test Results Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action
ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the title level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added to the test results.

Adding sections to a test

Test sections can be used to organize the pages in a test. Unlike regular chapter sec-
tions, test sections cannot contain subsection, and can only contain pages. Test sections

- 487 -
can be configured to randomly present a specified number of pages within the section,
and individual test section scores can be presented to the user.
You can create tests and add questions by importing questions from a comma-sep-
arated value (CSV) file. For details, see Importing and exporting a CSV question
file.
Follow these steps to create a test section:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the test to which you want to add a new section and do
one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, select Test Section from the Add Test or
Survey group
l Type Ctrl+7
The Test Section appears within the test in the Title Explorer.
2. Configure the test section properties. To do so, double-click the graphic of the test
section in the Title Explorer. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
View these topics for more information about configuring test section settings:
l Changing the name of a test section
l Enabling author control of a test section
l Changing the page size
l Changing the HTML page alignment
l Changing the inheritance settings
l Changing the background properties
l Changing the text properties
l Changing the transition settings
l Adding an action
l Randomizing the pages within the test section
See also: Adding questions

Changing the name of a test section

You can change the name of a test section, along with providing a description
To change the name of your test section:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test section in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the test section in the Title Explorer and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Name field in the Test Section group, specify the new name as you want it
to appear in the Title Explorer. The program will create a variable using the test

- 488 -
 name and test section name to store the user’s test section score. For example, if
the test name is Lab Safety Test, and the test section name is Equipment Safety,
the test section score variable will be named Lab_Safety_Test_Equipment_
Safety_Score.
To provide a description, click the open-group graphic in the lower-right corner of
the Test Section group. Provide the description in the Description window.
The name of the test is changed.

Enabling author control for a test section

You can protect the contents of a test section by enabling Author Control. With Author
Control enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the contents unless they have
the master Author Control password. This includes all objects on the test results page.
The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the first group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable Author Control for a test section:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test section.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the test section.
l In the work area, right-click the test section and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
Author control is enabled. The graphic changes to the Locked Control graphic.

Changing the page size

The page size of your test section is inherited from the test properties by default.
Changes applied to the page size within your test section's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the test section. Consideration should be made for
your intended users, and the width of the page size should match the most common res-
olution of users' monitors.
To change your test section's page size:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test section page in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test section page in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.

- 489 -
 2. In the Page Size group, disable the Inherit Page Size check box and use the
Width and Height fields to specify the new dimensions of the page in pixels.
The page size is changed.

Changing the HTML page alignment

The HTML page alignment of your test section is inherited from the test properties by
default. Changes applied to the page alignment within your test section's properties will
only be applied to the pages contained within the test section. The alignment will determ-
ine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based,
published content.
To change your test section HTML page alignment:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test section in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the test section in the Title Explorer and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Alignment from the HTML Page Alignment group. Select Inherit to inherit
the settings or either Left Justified or Centered.
The HTML page alignment is changed.
See also: Understanding inheritance

Specifying inheritance settings

With the program's inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to a test will appear
on every page in that test including pages that are inside of a test section within the test.
Objects added directly to a test section will appear on every page in that section and
objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
The Inherit Settings group is available within all test, test section and page properties. If
the object is excluded within the properties of a test, it will not appear on any page within
that test. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test section, it will not appear
on any page within that test section, and if the object is excluded within the properties of
a page, then the object will be excluded from that page.
By default, all objects are excluded from a test results page.
To specify a test section's inheritance properties:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test section in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the test section in the Title Explorer and select Properties. The Prop-
erties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Inherit in the Inherit Settings group. The Inherit window opens.

- 490 -
 3. Use the drop-down list to select from one of the following inheritance options:
ALL objects from parents Places all objects within the Inherited list. These
objects will continue to appear throughout your
chapter.
NO objects from parents Places all objects within the Excluded list. These
objects will not appear on any pages within your
chapter.
Specific objects from par- Allows you to select the objects to inherit or exclude.
ents Select an object in either list and click the arrow but-
tons to move items from one list to the other in the dir-
ection of the buttons. Select several objects by
holding down the Ctrl key while selecting objects.
4. Click OK.
The inheritance settings are changed.

Changing the background properties

The default background color, the default background image, and the default back-
ground sound of a test section are inherited from the title properties by default. Changes
applied to the background color, image, or sound within your test section properties will
only be applied to the pages contained within the test section.
Background images are tiled (repeated) by default. Background images that are the
exact same size as the page (height and width) will not be tiled. If the background image
size is different from the page size - either smaller or larger - it will be repeated both hori-
zontally and vertically to cover the entire visible background area within the browser win-
dow. If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible, unless
the image is transparent.
The background sound restarts as users navigate from one page to the next.
To specify your changes you either use the Background Wizard or manually set the back-
ground's color, image, and sound properties.
To use the Background Wizard:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test section. Alternatively, you
can right-click the test section in the Title Explorer and select Properties. The
Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Launch the Background Wizard by clicking Background Wizard from the Back-
ground group. The Background Wizard opens.
3. Follow the prompts and use the controls to configure your background properties.
4. Click Finish when you are done making changes.
To manually configure background properties,

- 491 -
 1. In the Background group on the Properties ribbon, click the appropriate back-
ground setting you want to change. Select either Color, Image, or Sound.
2. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
3. To change the image and sound settings, you can select a previously imported file,
select a local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting
entirely. Previously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously impor-
ted file. To select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media
Library, select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
The background properties are changed.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Working with the Media Library
Changing the title's background properties

Changing the text properties

The default text properties of a test section are inherited from the test properties by
default. Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your page's
properties will only be applied to the Test Section page.
If you are publishing to HTML, the program does not embed the fonts into the pub-
lished work. It is best to use common, Web-friendly fonts such as Arial, Verdana,
or Tahoma.
To change the text style:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test section page in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the test section page in the Title Explorer and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Test Section Text Style group.
3. Click Text Style in the Test Section Text Style group. The current text styles

are listed.
4. Use the list to select a text style to be used within your title. Text blocks created
within your title will be automatically formatted to the selected style. To create a
new text style, select Manage Styles and use the controls in the Text Styles win-
dow to configure a new style.
To change the text color:

- 492 -
 1. Double-click the graphic of the Test Section page in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the Test Section page in the Title Explorer and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Test Section Text Style group.
3. Click Text. The color options are displayed.
4. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the hyperlink color:
1. Double-click the graphic of the Test Section page in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the Test Section page in the Title Explorer and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Test Section Text Style group.
3. Click Hyperlink. The color options are displayed.
4. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the font:
1. Double-click the graphic of the Test Section page in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the Test Section page in the Title Explorer and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Test Section Text Style group.
3. Select a new font from the font list.

To change the font size:

1. Double-click the graphic of the Test Section page in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the Test Section page in the Title Explorer and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Test Section Text Style group.
3. Select a new font size from the font size list

To change the font styles (bold, italics, and underline):

- 493 -
 1. Double-click the graphic of the Test Section page in the Title Explorer. Altern-
atively, you can right-click the Test Section page in the Title Explorer and select
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the Test Section Text Style group.
3. To bold text, click the (Bold) button. To italicize text, click the (Italic) button. To
underline text, click the (Underline) button.
See also: Managing text styles
Understand inheritance
Matching colors used within your title

Changing the transition properties

The transition type is inherited from the test properties by default. Changes applied to the
transition type within your page's properties will only be applied to the test results page.
Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another.
You can select from over 20 different transitions. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determ-
ine the speed at which the transition takes place.
To set your test results page's transition:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test results page in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test results page in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Page from the Transition group. The Transition window opens.
3. In the Transition window, use the Transition list to select a transition. Select
Inherit to accept the inherited transition. Adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly.
4. Click OK.
See also: Understanding inheritance

Adding an action
You can associate an action to be applied on the test section level. For example, you
can display message, open an attachment, launch a program, send an email and more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions on the test section level as needed.
To add an action:
1. In the Add group on the Test Section Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action
ribbon is displayed.

- 494 -
 2. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the title level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added to the test section.

Randomizing the pages within the test section

You can specify to randomize the selection of pages within the test or test section. Spe-
cify the number of pages to use within the test section. The student will be presented
with the specified number of randomly selected pages from all the pages in the test sec-
tion.
• If you select to randomize at the test level, randomizing is disabled at the sec-
tion level. For details about randomizing the pages of the test, see Randomizing
test pages.
• If more than one section exists, not all of the sections have to be randomized.
This allows you to have a combination of randomized and non-randomized
questions as long as you turn on randomize for one of the sections. Be sure to
have the last section properly configured to send the data to the LMS.
When standard navigation is added to a test, the Done button that is added to the
last page of the test is programmed with the Process Test/Survey action. This
action is necessary at the end of the test so the results will be submitted and the
appropriate completion action is taken. If you add your own custom navigation to
the test, the button on the last page of the test that navigates users out of the test
must have this action.
If you later randomize your test, the Done button should be removed and replaced
with the same button used to navigate forward within the test.
A Process Test/Survey action cannot be used in any randomized test or
randomized test section.
To randomize the pages within the test section:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test section in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the test section in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, enable the Randomly Select Pages check box in the
Random group. This enables the Pages From Test field.
3. Use the up and down arrows in the Pages From Section field to specify the appro-
priate number of pages.
The test section's pages will be randomly selected.
See also: Setting the resulting action when a test is passed or completed
Setting the resulting action when a test is failed

- 495 -
Common test and survey properties
Many properties for test and surveys in the program are the same. You can access these
properties for a test or survey by double-clicking the test or survey graphic in the Title
Explorer.
The following can be completed within test and survey properties:
l Changing the name of a test or survey
l Enabling author control
l Changing the page size
l Changing the HTML page alignment
l Changing the inheritance properties
l Changing background properties
l Changing the text properties
l Changing transition properties
l Adding an action
l Making each question mandatory
l Removing a test or survey from the table of contents
l Retaining answers between sessions
l Submitting results

Changing the name of a test or survey

Tests and surveys are provided simple default names when you add them to your title.
You can change the name of a test or survey to something more recognizable or mean-
ingful.
To change the name of a test or survey:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to
change. Alternatively, you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and
select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Name field, specify the new name as you want it to appear in the Title
Explorer. For tests, the program will create a variable using the test name to store
the user's test score. For example, if the test name is Lab Safety Test, the test
score variable will be named Lab_Safety_Test_Score. Surveys are not scored.
The name is changed.

Enabling author control

You can protect the contents of a test or survey by enabling Author Control. With Author
Control enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the test/survey

- 496 -
unless they have the master Author Control password. This includes all pages within the
test/survey and all objects on those pages. The master Author Control password must
first be set within the Title Properties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the first group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable Author Control for a test or survey:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
Author control is enabled. The graphic changes to the Locked Control graphic.

Changing the page size

The page size of your test or survey is inherited from the title properties by default.
Changes applied to the page size within your test or survey's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the test or survey. Consideration should be made
for your intended users, and the width of the page size should match the most common
resolution of users' monitors.
To change the page size of your test or survey:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to
change. Alternatively, you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and
select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Page Size group, clear the Inherit Page Size check box. This enables the
Width and Height fields. Use these fields to specify the new width and height of
the test or survey's pages. If Inherit Page Size is selected, the page size you spe-
cified in the title properties will apply.
The page size is changed.
See also: Changing a Title's Page Size

Changing the HTML page alignment

The alignment of your test or survey is inherited from the title properties by default.
Changes applied to the alignment within your test or survey's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the test or survey. The alignment will determine

- 497 -
how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based, pub-
lished content.
To change the HTML page alignment of your test or survey:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to
change. Alternatively, you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and
select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the HTML Page Alignment group, click Alignment and select an alignment
option from the list. Select Center to center the text or select Left Justified to jus-
tify the text align the left margin. The Default page alignment is inherited from the
title properties.
The HTML page alignment is changed.
See also: Changing the default HTML page alignment

Changing the inheritance properties

With the program’s inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to a test or survey
will appear on every page in that test/survey including pages that are inside of a test/sur-
vey section within a test/survey. Objects added directly to a test/survey section will
appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear
only on that page.
See also: Understanding inheritance
The Inheritance settings are available within all test, test section, survey and page prop-
erties. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test/survey, it will not appear on
any page within that test/survey. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test
section or a section contained in a survey, it will not appear on any page within that
test/survey section, and if the object is excluded within the properties of a page, then the
object will be excluded from that page.
By default, all objects are excluded from a test and survey.
To specify the inheritance properties of a test or survey:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to
change. Alternatively, you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and
select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Inherit in the Inherit Settings group. The Inherit window opens.

- 498 -
 3. Select from one of the following inheritance options:
NO objects from parents This will place all objects within the Excluded
list. These objects will not appear on any pages
within your test or survey.
ALL objects from parents This will place all objects within the Inherited
list. These objects will continue to appear
throughout your test or survey
Specific objects from parents Select this to move objects from one list to the
other. Select an object in either list and click the
arrow buttons to move items from one list to the
other in the direction of the buttons.
You can select several objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting
multiple objects.
4. Click OK.

Changing the background properties

The default background color, the default background image, and the default back-
ground sound are inherited from the title properties by default. Changes applied to the
background color, image, or sound within your test or survey's properties will only be
applied to the pages contained within the test or survey.
Background images are tiled (repeated) by default. Background images that are the
exact same size as the page (height and width) will not be tiled. If the background image
size is different from the page size - either smaller or larger - it will be repeated both hori-
zontally and vertically to cover the entire visible background area within the browser win-
dow. If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible, unless
the image is transparent.
The background sound restarts as users navigate from one page to the next.
To specify your changes you either use the Background Wizard or manually set the back-
ground's color, image, and sound properties.
To use the Background Wizard:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to
change. Alternatively, you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and
select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Launch the Background Wizard by clicking Background Wizard from the Back-
ground group. The Background Wizard opens.
3. Follow the prompts and use the controls to configure your background properties.
4. Click Finish when you are done making changes.
To manually configure background properties,

- 499 -
 1. In the Background group on the Properties ribbon, click the appropriate back-
ground setting you want to change. Select either Color, Image, or Sound.
2. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
3. To change the image settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
4. To change the sounds settings, you can select a previously imported file, select a
local file, select from the Media Library, or remove the current setting entirely. Pre-
viously imported files are listed. Select one to select a previously imported file. To
select a local file, select Browse from File. To select from the Media Library,
select Browse My Media. Otherwise, select None to remove the setting.
See also: Matching colors used within your title
Working with the Media Library
Changing the default background properties

Changing the text properties

The default text style and link color are inherited from the title properties by default.
Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your test or survey's
properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test or survey.
To change the text style:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the text style group for the test or survey.
3. Click Text Style. The current text styles are listed.

4. Use the list to select a text style to be used within your title. Text blocks created
within your title will be automatically formatted to the selected style. To create a
new text style, select Manage Styles and use the controls in the Text Styles win-
dow to configure a new style.
To change the text color:

- 500 -
 1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the text style group for the test or survey.
3. Click Text. The color options are displayed.
4. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the hyperlink color:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the text style group for the test or survey.
3. Click Hyperlink. The color options are displayed.
4. To change the color setting, you can select a predefined color, specify a custom
color, or select an existing color. To select a predefined color, click one of the color
samples displayed. To specify a custom color, select Custom and use the controls
in the Color window to configure a custom color. To select an existing color, click
Select and use the eye-dropper to click-to-select a new color from an existing color
currently displayed on your desktop.
To change the font:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the text style group for the test or survey.
3. Select a new font from the font list.

To change the font size:

1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the text style group for the test or survey.
3. Select a new font size from the font size list

To change the font styles (bold, italics, and underline):

- 501 -
 1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey in the Title Explorer. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Disable the Inherit check box in the text style group for the test or survey.
3. To bold text, click the (Bold) button. To italicize text, click the (Italic) button. To
underline text, click the (Underline) button.
See also: Managing text styles
Understand inheritance
Matching colors used within your title

Setting transition properties

The transition type is inherited from the title properties by default. Changes applied to the
transition type within your test or survey's properties will only be applied to the pages
contained within the test or survey. Transitions will produce a special effect as users nav-
igate from one page to another. You can select from over 20 different transitions. There
is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place.
To set your test/survey's transitions:
1. In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to
change. Alternatively, you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and
select Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Page from the Transition group . The Transitions window opens.
3. Select a transition from the Transition list and use the Transition Options list to
select the appropriate option setting. Select Inherit to inherit the transition or select
Random to select random transitions. Select None to remove the transitions. Use
the Speed slider to specify the appropriate speed.
4. Click OK.
See also: Understanding inheritance
Changing the default transition properties

Adding an action
You can associate an action to be applied on the test or survey level. For example, when
the test or survey is started, you can display message, open an attachment, launch a pro-
gram, send an email and more.
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information. For details about configure actions and working
with variables, see Actions and variables.
Configure and add as many actions as needed.
To add an action:

- 502 -
 1. In the Add group on the Properties ribbon, click Action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to configure the action you want to apply on
the title level. For details, see About actions and Adding an action.
The action is added.

Making each question mandatory

You can specify that students must answer each question in the test or survey. When
this option is enabled, students cannot navigate from the test or survey page without
answering each question on each page.
To set that students must answer each question:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to change. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, enable the Student Must Answer Each Question check
box in the Questions group for tests. On the Behavior & Results ribbon, enable
the Student Must Answer Each Question check box in the Questions group for
surveys.
Each question must be answered.

Removing a test or survey from the table of con-

tents
A table of contents is a menu system that is automatically populated with the chapters,
sections and pages within your title. Users can use the table of contents to navigate to
the different areas of your title. By default, all chapters, sections, and pages are included
in a table of contents, however you can specify not to include individual chapters, sec-
tions or pages. When you remove a test or survey from the table of contents, neither the
test/survey nor any of the pages within the test/survey will appear within the table of con-
tents. Users will not be able to navigate to the test or survey using the table of contents.
See also: Working with tables of contents
Working with progress bars
To remove a test, test section, or survey from the table of contents:
1. Double-click the graphic of the table of contents object that you want to change in
the Title Explorer. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Included Pages in the Included Pages group. The Set pages to include win-
dow opens.
3. Locate the test, test section, or survey that you want to remove and clear the cor-
responding check box.
4. Click OK.

- 503 -
The test, test section, or survey you selected is removed from the table of contents.

Retaining answers between sessions

You can enable the program to retain students' question answers after the session is
closed. When students return to the same computer to finished the test in a future ses-
sion, their questions will retain the answers that were previously supplied.
To retain answers between sessions:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey you want to change. Alternatively,
you can right-click the test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior ribbon, enable the Retain Answers Between Sessions check
box in the Questions group for test. On the Behavior & Results ribbon, enable
the Retain Answers Between Sessions check box in the Questions group for
surveys.
Answers will be retained.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Submitting results
You can enable the program to submit the results of a test or survey using a custom CGI
script program or directly to Google Drive, Google's online storage system. If the title
resides within a learning management system (LMS), results are automatically submitted
to the LMS, and no additional information is needed here.
When submitting test or survey data to a CGI program, the CGI program can issue a
response. You can specify whether you want to enable the program to receive a
response from the CGI program. If enabled, the response is received and stored as a text
string in the specified variable.
To custom-configure how results are submitted:
1. Double-click the graphic of the test or survey. Alternatively, you can right-click the
test or survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. For tests, enable the Custom Results Submission check box in the Results Sub-
mission group on the Results ribbon. For surveys, enable the Custom Results
Submission check box in the Results Submission group on the Behavior & Res-
ults ribbon.
3. Use the Submit To field to select the destination of your results as either Custom
Script or Google Drive and click Settings to configure your submission settings.
For custom scripts, specify the CGI application to which you are submitting results
in the Submit To field on the Submit to Custom Script window and select whether
the submission is done using a POST or GET method.
The GET method can only support the submission of 256 characters of data.

- 504 -
 If you have a large test or are submitting a large amount of variable data, use
the POST method instead.
To configure the program so that a response is issued from CGI submission,
enable the Receive Response check box in the Response group. Use the Vari-
able to Receive Response drop-down list to select the variable into which you
want to store the response. Alternatively, click the New Variable sub-menu option
to create a new variable in which to store the CGI response. The response is
stored as a text string in the specified variable.
For submitting to Google Drive, specify the URL for the location within Google
Drive in the Submit to Google Drive window.
The results are submitted when the test or survey is completed.
See also: Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI
About variables
Including variable values with the results
Displaying a success message when a test is submitted

Adding questions
Questions can be added to any page of your title, whether it is inside or outside of a test
or survey. Questions on pages contained in a test can issue feedback back to the user,
can be scored, and can be organized to be randomly presented to the user. Questions
do not need to be contained in a test; they can be interspersed in the title to provide
simple knowledge checks to the user.
You can also create tests and add questions by importing questions from a
comma-separated value (CSV) file. For details, see Importing and exporting a
CSV question file.
Select from the following question types:
True or False A question with one correct answer out of two possibilities.
Multiple Choice
A question with one correct answer from multiple possibilities.
Multiple A question with one or more possible correct answers from multiple
Response possibilities.
Fill in the Blank
A question in which the user supplies a short answer that is compared
to a list of known correct answers.
Number Entry A question that requires that users specify a corresponding number to
answer a question.
Matching A question with a column of items on the left-hand side and a column
of scrambled items on the right-hand side. The user must match items
in the left column with items in the right column to answer the ques-
tion.
Rank/Sequence A question that requires that users assign an order or priority to con-

- 505 -
 tent.
Drag and Drop A question that requires the user to drag source objects such as text
or images to defined targets within a larger, work area image.
Hot Spot A question with a visual multiple-choice set used to identify areas of
an image; one or more possible correct answers are possible.
Short Answer A question in which the user supplies a short answer (typically less
than 80 characters). This question type cannot be automatically
graded by the testing module.
Essay A question in which the user supplies a long (typically more than 80
characters) answer. This question type cannot be automatically
graded by the testing module.
Likert A question that requires that users specify their level of agreement to
a statement.
Follow these steps to add a question to your title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location to which you want to add a question.
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Home ribbon, click the down-arrow under Add object in the Quick
Insert group and select the Add Question graphic.

l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Question from the Add Question
group. To select a specific question type, click the drop-down list and select a
supported question.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work area, select New and
Question.
l Type Ctrl+8.
The Question Creator window opens.
3. In the Question Creator window, use the Question Type button in the right corner
to select the question type if you have not done so already.
4. Next, complete the controls based the type of question you are configuring:
l True or False
l Multiple Choice
l Multiple Response
l Fill in the Blank
l Short Answer
l Essay
l Matching

- 506 -
 l Drag and Drop
l Hot Spot
l Rank/Sequence
l Likert
l Number Entry Question
5. Complete the fields as directed and click OK.
l If the question is included in a test, the feedback will only appear if the test
has the Show per question feedback option enabled within the test’s prop-
erties. For details, see Showing feedback for each question.
l If there is more than one question on the page with question feedback, the
feedback for all questions on the page will be presented when the user
attempts to leave the page (unless immediate feedback is selected).
See also: Specifying question properties

Creating a true or false question

A true or false question has one answer out of two possibilities. Use the Question
Creator to configure a true or false question as follows. You can assign point values for
each question, specify whether to retain values between sessions, include images.
See also: Adding questions
To add a true or false question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select True or False. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey ribbon,
click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and select
True or False. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. The program will auto-
matically increment the numeric value in the variable to cor-
respond with the number of questions that have been
created within the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question

- 507 -
 sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will
use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, select which choice is the correct choice by selecting the
appropriate button in the Correct column. To change the choices text, click the
appropriate choice you want to change to select it, then click it again. The text
becomes selected. Edit the text as necessary.
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button to include a Submit but-
ton on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, click the
appropriate feedback item under the Feedback Item column and use the feedback
type drop-down list in the bottom box to select the type of feedback. The table will
be populated based on the feedback selections you specify. For descriptions of
each of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the

- 508 -
 Process Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the
question if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click OK.
The true or false question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a multiple choice question

A multiple choice question has one correct answer from multiple possibilities. Use the
Question Creator to configure a multiple choice question as follows. You can assign
point values for each question, specify whether to retain values between sessions, and
include images.
See also: Adding questions
To add a multiple choice question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Multiple Choice. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey rib-
bon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Multiple Choice. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.

- 509 -
 Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question
sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will
use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
Question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, enable the Randomize Choices check box to shuffle the
order of the answer choices on the page. Enable the Show Choices As Droplist
to show the choices to the question in a drop list.
Select which choice is the correct choice by selecting the appropriate button in the
Correct column. To change the choices text, click the appropriate choice that you
want to change to select it, then click it again. The text becomes selected. Edit the
text as necessary. Use the controls in the Image column to include images with
each choice. (This option is not available when Show choices as listbox is
enabled.) To add choices, click the row containing Click here to add a new
choice.Click to delete a choice.

- 510 -
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box and use the list to select whether to include indi-
vidual feedback by choice or general feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
To specify feedback for each choice, select Individual Feedback by Choice; oth-
erwise, select Correct/Incorrect Feedback. Then specify when the feedback
should be displayed. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the
user either leaves the page or the Process Question action is executed or select
Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user answers the ques-
tion. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to include a Submit button on
the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each

- 511 -
 of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click OK.
The multiple choice question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a multiple response question

A multiple response question has one or more correct answers from multiple pos-
sibilities. Use the Question Creator to configure a multiple response question as follows.
You can assign point values for each question, specify whether to retain values between
sessions, and include images. You can also specify to grade each choice.
Use the Change Contents action to make sure question choices are properly
delimited. Commas within correct choices must be changed to the &#44 escape
sequence. See Selecting the action for more information about using Change
Contents.
See also: Adding questions
To add a multiple response question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Multiple Response. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey
ribbon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Multiple Response. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question
sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-

- 512 -
 culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will
use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Grade each Select this if each choice is to be graded.
choice
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, enable the Randomize choices check box to shuffle the
order of the answer choices on the page. Enable the Show choices As listbox to
show the choices to the question in a list-box.
Select which choice is the correct choice by selecting the appropriate button in the
Correct column. To change the choices text, click the appropriate choice that you
want to change to select it, then click it again. The text becomes selected. Edit the
text as necessary. Use the controls in the Image column to include images with
each choice. (This option is not available when Show choices as listbox is
enabled.) To add choices, click the row containing Click here to add a new
choice.Click to delete a choice.
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button to include a Submit but-
ton on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For

- 513 -
 details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. By default, attempts are counted when the user
navigates to the next page or when the Process Question action is
triggered. Select On Process Question to display maximum-
attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select Imme-
diately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately when
the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button
to include a Submit button on the page for processing the answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click Next until you have finished configuring each choice and click Finish.
The multiple response question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a fill in the blank question

A fill in the blank question requires the user to supply a short answer that is compared to
a list of known correct answers. Use the Question Creator to configure a fill in the blank
question as follows. You can specify whether to retain values between sessions and
include images.
See also: Adding questions
To add a fill in the blank question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Fill in the Blank. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey

- 514 -
 ribbon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Fill in the Blank. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must be a
Name new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable will be
used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be accessed
from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond with
the number of questions that have been created within the title.
Retain Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
value after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question on
between the same computer in a future session, the answer provided previously
sessions by the student is retained. If this option is not selected, the question will
revert back to its default state of unanswered with every launch of the
course.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
with ques-Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine, or
tion Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media Library.
3. In the Choices area, use the Text Limit field to specify the maximum length of an
answer in characters. Select a limit of up to 2048 characters. Enable the Multi-Line
check box to provide a larger default entry field for entering answer text. Enable the
Case Sensitive field to specify whether correct answer text is case sensitive.
Select ANY Answer if the correct answer is to include a few key words in a sen-
tence or paragraph rather than an exact match of a word. Otherwise, select
ALL Answers.
To change the choices text, click the appropriate choice that you want to change to
select it, then click it again. The text becomes selected. Edit the text as necessary.
To add choices, click the row containing Click here to add a new choice.Click to
delete a choice.
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user

- 515 -
 answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to include a
Submit button on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click Finish.
The fill in the blank question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

- 516 -
Creating a number-entry question
A number-entry question requires that the user specifies a corresponding number to
answer a question. Use the Question Creator to configure a number-entry question as fol-
lows. You can specify whether to retain values between sessions and include images.
See also: Adding questions
To add a multiple response question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Number Entry. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey rib-
bon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Number Entry. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question
sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will
use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.

- 517 -
 Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, use the Correct Answer Includes list to specify whether the
correct answer must include all of the corresponding answer value [All of the fol-
lowing (AND)]; otherwise, select Any of the following (OR). Use the Text Limit
field to specify the text limit of the answer in characters. Select a limit of up to 2048
characters.
Use the Select Choice to Edit table to configure the choices. Use the list in the
Relationship column to specify the relationship of the possible answers to the val-
ues of each choice. Enter the values under Value and Value 2 by clicking within
the column. (Value 2 is enabled only for "Between Including" and "Between
Excluding" relationships.) To add choices, click the row containing Click to enter
additional choices.Click to delete a choice.
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to include a
Submit button on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-

- 518 -
 imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click Next until you have finished configuring each choice and click Finish.
The number-entry question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a matching question

Matching questions requires the user to match items in one column to randomized
choices in another column. The user must match items in the left column with items in
the right column to answer the question.Use the Question Creator to configure a match-
ing question as follows. You can assign point values for each question, specify whether
to retain values between sessions, and include images. You can also specify to grade
each choice.
See also: Adding questions
To add a matching question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Matching. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey ribbon,
click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and select
Matching. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name

It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_

####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
- 519 -
 Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question
sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will
use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Grade each Select this if each choice is to be graded.
choice
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, use the Line Color and Width field to configure the color and
width of the lines drawn when attempting to match answer pairs. In the Matching
Pairs table, configure the correct matching pairs represented by the individual
rows in the table. Choices in the second column will be placed in random order
when the question is displayed to the user. Text in the Name column represents
the name used in the question variable for tracking the results. It is not a label. Text
in the Text column represents the label to be displayed for the choices in the two
columns. Replace the text as necessary. Use the controls in the Image column to
include an image with each choice. To add matching-pair rows to the table, click
the row containing Click to enter a new pair(s). Click to delete a row.
Use the Distractors table to add distractors to the question. Distractors are items
that are not part of a matched pair, but are available as a possible choice to the
user. They are used to add complexity to a matching question. Use the radio but-
tons in the Left Column and Right Column columns to specify the appropriate loc-
ation in which to place the distractor. Use the controls in the Image column to
include images with each distractor choice. To add additional distractors, click the
row containing Click to enter a new distractor(s). Click to delete a distractor row.

- 520 -
 4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to include a
Submit button on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click OK.
The matching question is added to your title.

- 521 -
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a rank/sequence question

A rank/sequence question requires the user to assign an order or priority to content. Use
the Question Creator to configure a rank/sequence question as follows. You can assign
point values for each question, grade each choices, specify whether to retain values
between sessions, and include images.
Use the Change Contents action to make sure question choices are properly
delimited. Commas within correct choices must be changed to the &#44 escape
sequence. See Selecting the action for more information about using Change
Contents.
See also: Adding questions
To add a rank/sequence question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Rank/Sequence. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey rib-
bon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Rank/Sequence. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question
sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will

- 522 -
 use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Grade each Select this if each choice is to be graded.
choice
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, enable the Randomize Choices check box to shuffle the
order of the answer choices on the page. Enable the Show Choices As Droplist
to show the choices to the question in a drop list.
Use the table to configure the correct order of the choices. To add choices, click
the row containing Click here to add a new choice. To change the choices text,
click the appropriate choice that you want to change to select it, then click it again.
The text becomes selected. Edit the text as necessary. Use the controls in the
Image column to include images with each choice. Click to delete a choice.
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to include a
Submit button on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when

- 523 -
 this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click OK.
The rank/sequence question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a drag and drop question

A drag and drop question requires the user to drag source objects such as text or images
to defined targets within a larger, work area image. Use the Question Creator to con-
figure a drag and drop question as follows. You can assign point values for each ques-
tion, specify whether to retain values between sessions, and include images.
See also: Adding questions
To add a drag and drop question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Drag and Drop. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey rib-
bon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Drag and Drop. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.

- 524 -
 Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
between ses- after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question
sions on the same computer in a future session, the answer provided
previously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected,
the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with
every launch of the course.
Point Value Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question
is 1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without
changing this option, all the questions within a test are of equal
value. If points are assigned to each question, the program will
use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further,
the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not
within a test.
Grade each Select this if each choice is to be graded.
choice
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Drop Image This field is required. Select an existing image to display with the
(Required) question text. A sample drop image is provided. Select Browse
from File to navigate and select a file from your machine, or
Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. In the Choices area, enable the Snap Drag Items to Center of Drag Zones
check box if items are to snap to the center of a drop zone when the user attempts
to place the item in a target area and enable the Show Drop Zone Outlines check
box if outlines are to be displayed around the possible drop zones. Use the Out-
line Color field to specify the outline color. Use the Maximum drops per zone
field to specify the maximum number of items that can be dragged into a drop zone
(to fill an answer bucket or to limit the number of dropped items per zone to 1, for

- 525 -
 instance).
For questions with overlapping drop zones, list correct areas last in the table
to ensure that they will be on top of incorrect areas.
Use the two tables in the Choices area to identify the correct drop zone for each
drag item. Click the first row to configure the first drag item. Text in the Item Name
column represents the name used in the question variable for tracking the results. It
is not a label. Text in the Item Text column represents the label for the drag choice.
In the second table, the Drop Zone Name is also a name used in the question vari-
able for tracking the results. It is not a label. Replace the text as necessary. Use the
controls in the Image column to include an image with each choice. Enable the
appropriate check box in the Correct column to specify the correct drop zone, if
any, for each drag item. Drag items without corresponding correct drop zones are
distractors. Drop zones without corresponding drag items are distractors. To add
drag rows to the tables, click the row containing Add New Drag Item. When a row
is added , a new drop zone is added to the drop-zones image on the right. Click
to reposition and resize each drop zone if necessary. Click to delete a row.

4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button to include a Submit but-
ton on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-

- 526 -
 played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
6. Click OK.
The drag and drop question is added to your title.
See also: Answer and response variable value formats
Additional resources: Building a Drag and Drop Question in Lectora and Lectora
Online

Creating a hot spot question

A hot spot question requires users to use a visual multiple-choice set to identify areas of
an image; one or more possible correct answers are possible.Use the Question Creator
to configure a hot spot question as follows. You can specify whether to grade each
choice and retain values between sessions.
See also: Adding questions
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Hot Spot. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey ribbon,
click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and select
Hot Spot. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must be a
Name new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable will be

It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_

####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond with
the number of questions that have been created within the title.
- 527 -
 Point Specify the point value of the test question. Points are used to cal-
Value culate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored
into the overall test score. The default point value of each question is
1 (except for non-gradable question types). Therefore, without chan-
ging this option, all the questions within a test are of equal value. If
points are assigned to each question, the program will use the sum of
test points to calculate question weight and further, the test score. The
Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not within a test.
Retain Enable this check box to cause the question answer to be retained
value after the session is closed. When the user returns to this question on
between the same computer in a future session, the answer provided pre-
sessions viously by the student is retained. If this option is not selected, the
question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with every
launch of the course.
Grade This option is only available if the correct answer requires more than
each one choice. Select this to give the users credit for each selection that
choice they correctly identifies; otherwise, they will be required to select all
correct answers to receive credit for answering the question correctly.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Hot Spot This field is required. Select an existing image to display with the
Image question text. Sample hot spot images are provided. Select Browse
(Required) from File to navigate and select a file from your machine, or Browse
My Media to search and select a file from the Media Library.
Hotspot Select how users are to select the hot spot area. Select Radio But-
ton/Check box to require users to use a radio button or check box to
select the answer or select Transparent Area to require users to
select a transparent area to select the answer.
3. In the Choices area, select Correct Answer Includes More Than One Choice if
more than one choice is correct for this question. Use the Outline Color list to
select the outline color for the hotspot choices.
For questions with overlapping hot spots, list correct areas last in the table
to ensure that they will be on top of incorrect areas.
Use the table to select which choice is the correct choice by selecting the appro-
priate check box in the Correct column. Text in the Name column represents the
name used in the question variable for tracking the results. It is not a label. Edit the
text as necessary. To add choices, click the row containing Add New Hot
Spot.Click to delete a choice. Use the preview image on the right to reposition

- 528 -
 the hotspot choice areas. Click to reposition and resize each hotspot choice
area if necessary.
4. Click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so, enable
the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should be dis-
played. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user exits the
page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the user
answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button to include a Submit but-
ton on the page for processing the question to provide feedback.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, select the
appropriate feedback row in the table and use the Action controls in the bottom box
to configure the feedback action. The table will be populated based on the feed-
back actions you specify. For descriptions of each of the available feedback
actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
5. Finally, click the Attempts tab to configure the question attempts. By default,
attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next page or when the Pro-
cess Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from answering the ques-
tion if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed. You can
configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed when
this occurs. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. Select On Process Question to display max-
imum-attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select
Immediately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately
when the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit"
Button to include a Submit button on the page for processing the
answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached.
imum
This setting has no affect for correct answers. A correct
Attempts
response will always yield correct feedback, regardless of
which attempt is successful.
Use the feedback type button in the Maximum Attempt Feed-
back area to select the type of feedback. For descriptions of each
of the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.

- 529 -
 6. Click OK.
The hot spot question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a short answer question

A short answer question requires the user to provide a brief answer (typically less than
40 characters). This question type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module.
Use the Question Creator to configure a short answer question as follows. You can spe-
cify whether to retain values between sessions and include an image with the question.
See also: Adding questions
To add a short answer question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Short Answer. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey rib-
bon, click the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and
select Short Answer. The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this ques-
tion.
Variable Name Specify the associated variable name for this question.
This must be a new unique variable that does not already
exist. The variable will be used to store the user’s answer
to the question. It can be accessed from anywhere in the
title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention
(Question_####) for question variables. the pro-
gram will automatically increment the numeric
value in the variable to correspond with the num-
ber of questions that have been created within the
title.
Retain value between Enable this check box to cause the question answer to
sessions be retained after the session is closed. When the user
returns to this question on the same computer in a future
session, the answer provided previously by the student is
retained. If this option is not selected, the question will
revert back to its default state of unanswered with every
launch of the course.
Text Limit Specify the maximum length of the answer text in char-
acters. Select a limit of up to 40 characters.
Question Type Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.

- 530 -
 Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Question Select an existing image to display with the question text,
select Browse from File to navigate and select a file
from your machine, or Browse My Media to search and
select a file from the Media Library.
3. Next, click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so,
enable the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should
be displayed. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user
exits the page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the
user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to
include a Submit button on the page for processing the question to provide feed-
back.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, use the
Action controls in the bottom box to configure the feedback action. The table will be
populated based on the feedback actions you specify. For descriptions of each of
the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
4. Click OK.
The short answer question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating an essay question

An essay question requires the user to supply a long answer (typically more than 40
characters). This question type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module.
Use the Question Creator to configure a short answer question as follows. You can spe-
cify whether to retain values between sessions and include an image with the question.
See also: Adding questions
To add an essay question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Essay. Otherwise, on the Test & Survey ribbon, click
the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and select Essay.
The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.

- 531 -
 Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Text Limit Specify the maximum length of the answer text in number of char-
acters.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Question Specify the text of the question.
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or Browse My Media to search and select a file from the Media
Library.
3. Next, click the Feedback tab to configure feedback for the question. To do so,
enable the Enable Feedback check box then specify when the feedback should
be displayed. Select On Process Question to display feedback when the user
exits the page or select Immediately to display feedback immediately when the
user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button check box to
include a Submit button on the page for processing the question to provide feed-
back.
Next, specify how the feedback is to be displayed to the user. To do so, use the
Action controls in the bottom box to configure the feedback action. The table will be
populated based on the feedback actions you specify. For descriptions of each of
the available feedback actions, see Selecting the action.
If the question is within a test, the test must be set to Show Feedback for
Each Question, in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. For
details, see Showing feedback for each question.
4. Click Finish.
The essay question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Creating a Likert question

A Likert question requires the user to specify his or her level of agreement to a state-
ment. Use the Question Creator to configure a Likert question as follows. This question
type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module. You can specify whether to

- 532 -
retain values between sessions, include an image with the question and configure cus-
tom scale labels if necessary.
See also: Adding questions
To add a Likert question:
1. If the Question Creator window is already open, click the Question Type button in
the right-corner and select Likert . Otherwise, on the Test & Survey ribbon, click
the drop-down list under Question in the Add Question group and select Likert .
The Question Creator window opens.
2. In the Question Creator, complete these controls on the Question tab:
Name Specify the name by which you will recognize this question.
Variable Specify the associated variable name for this question. This must
Name be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The variable
will be used to store the user’s responses to the statements. It can
be accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_
####) for question variables. the program will automatically
increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond
with the number of questions that have been created within
the title.
Retain value Enable this check box to cause the question responses to be
between ses- retained after the session is closed. When the user returns to this
sions question on the same computer in a future session, the answer
provided previously by the student is retained. If this option is not
selected, the question will revert back to its default state of
unanswered with every launch of the course.
Question Verify that you are creating the appropriate question type.
Type
Instructions Specify the instruction text for the question. For example, "Using
the scale on the right, please indicate your level of agreement with
the following":
Image with Select an existing image to display with the question text, select
question Browse from File to navigate and select a file from your machine,
or select Browse for Media to search and select a file from the
Media Library.
Connector Use the list to select the type of connector bar to display between
Style the scale choices. A connector bar is not required.
3. In the Statements area, use the Scale list to select the type of scale to display.
Several predefined scales are provided, such as Agreement, Importance, and
Relevance. Select Custom Labels from the Scale list to specify your own scale

- 533 -
 with each statement. Provide the new labels in the Custom Scale Labels window.
Use the Edit button to customize a scale, for example, to reverse the order or add
more choices. Use the Number of Choices list to select the number of appropriate
choices for each statement. Enable the Include N/A Choice check box to include
N/A (not applicable) as an additional choice.
4. In the Select Statement to Edit area, click a choice to select it, then click it again
to edit it. Text in the Name column represents the name used in the question vari-
able for tracking the results. (For example: 1-Agree.) It is not a label. Edit the text as
necessary. Replace the statement text in the Statements column with the text of
your Likert questions. To add statements, click the row containing Click to enter or
paste new questions. Click to delete a choice. A preview of the choices array is
provided.
5. Click OK.
The Likert question is added to your title.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Specifying question properties

To access the properties of a question, double-click the question graphic of the question
in the Title Explorer.
See also: Adding questions
Use the controls on the Question Properties window to complete the following tasks:
l Changing the name of a question
l Changing the associated variable name of a question
l Retaining the value between sessions
l Enabling author control
l Adding a description of the question
l Viewing the HTML name of a question
l Editing the question
l Changing the feedback settings
l Changing the point value
l Enabling feedback
l Changing the attempts settings
l Enabling maximum attempts
l Making a question initially invisible
l Placing a question on the top layer

- 534 -
 l Associating a cascading style sheet (CSS) class name
l Changing the transitions
See also: Answer and response variable value formats

Changing the name of a question

To change the name of question:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Specify the new name of the question in the Name field.
The name is changed.

Enabling author control of a question

Protect the question by enabling Author Control. With Author Control enabled, additional
authors will not be able to edit the question unless they have the master Author Control
password. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Prop-
erties.
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the first group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable author control on a question:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the question.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
The question is protected by author control. The graphic changes to the Locked Con-
trol graphic.

Changing the associated variable name of a ques-

tion
You can change the name of the variable associated with a question. The variable asso-
ciated with the question is used to store the user's answer to the corresponding question.
See also: Actions and variables

- 535 -
To change the associated variable name of question:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Specify the associated variable name in the Variable field. This name must be
unique to all existing variable names. Variable names cannot contain spaces or
special characters. The variable will be used to store the user’s answer to the ques-
tion. It can be accessed from anywhere in the title.
It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_####) for question
variables. the program will automatically increment the numeric value in the
variable name to correspond with the number of questions that have been
created within the title.
The associated value is changed.
See also: Answer and response variable value formats

Retaining the question answer between sessions

You can enable the program to retain question answers after the session is closed. If the
user returns to the same computer to answer the question in a future session, the ques-
tion will retain any answer that was previously supplied.
To retain the question answer between sessions:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Enable the Retain question answer between sessions check box .
Answers will be retained between sessions.
See also:Answer and response variable value formats

Specifying a description of the question

You can specify a brief description of the question.
To specify a description:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the graphic of the question and click Properties. The Properties rib-
bon is displayed.
2. Click the Expand arrow in the lower-right corner of the first group on the Properties
ribbon. The Description window opens.
3. Specify the description in the box and click OK.
The description is associated with the question.

- 536 -
Editing a question
You can change the possible answers, alter the question text, and edit other properties
of your question.
To edit a question:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to edit in the Title Explorer.
Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Edit Question in the Question and Feedback group. The Question Creator
opens.
3. Change the question configuration as necessary. View the appropriate topic for
details about reconfiguring the question:
l True or False
l Multiple Choice
l Multiple Response
l Fill in the Blank
l Short Answer
l Essay
l Matching
l Drag and Drop
l Hot Spot
l Rank/Sequence
l Likert
l Number Entry Question
Edit the question as necessary.

Changing the feedback settings

You can change the feedback settings for a question, such as whether feedback is dis-
played and how it is displayed . If feedback was previously configured, you can disable it
or change how it is displayed to the user.
To change the feedback settings:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Edit Feedback in the Question and Feedback group. The Question Creator
opens to the Feedback tab.

- 537 -
 3. Change the question configuration as necessary. View the appropriate question
topic for details about reconfiguring the feedback:
l True or False
l Multiple Choice
l Multiple Response
l Fill in the Blank
l Short Answer
l Essay
l Matching
l Drag and Drop
l Hot Spot
l Rank/Sequence
l Likert
l Number Entry Question
Edit the feedback as necessary.

Changing the point value

You can change the point value assigned to each question. Points are used to calculate
the percentage weight of each question and will be factored into the overall test score.
The default point value of each gradable question is 1. Therefore, without changing this
option, all the questions within a test are of equal value. If points are assigned to each
question, the program will use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and fur-
ther, the test score. The Point Value is irrelevant if the question is not within a test and
for non-gradable questions.
To change the point value of question:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the Point Value field in the Question and Feedback group to specify the new
point value of the test question.
The point value is changed.

Enabling feedback
You can change whether feedback is enabled for your question. If feedback was pre-
viously configured, you can disable it. For details about configuring feedback based on
the type of question, see Adding questions.
To change whether feedback is enabled:

- 538 -
 1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. To enable feedback, select the Enable Feedback check box in the Question and
Feedback group.
Feedback is enabled.

Changing the attempts settings

You can change the attempts settings, such as the number of attempts and when to
count the attempts. By default, attempts are counted when the user navigates to the next
page or when the Process Question action is triggered. The user will be locked from
answering the question if he or she exceeds the maximum number of attempts allowed.
You can configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback) to be displayed
when this occurs.
To change the attempts settings:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click Edit Attempts in the Attempts group. The Question Creator opens to the
Attempts tab.
3. Specify the controls as follows to configure the attempts settings:
Set Maximum Enable this check box to set the maximum number of attempts and
Allowed specify the attempts in the Maximum Attempts Allowed field.
Attempts Next, specify when the maximum-attempts feedback is to be dis-
played to the user. By default, attempts are counted when the user
navigates to the next page or when the Process Question action is
triggered. Select On Process Question to display maximum-
attempts feedback when the user exits the page or select Imme-
diately to display maximum-attempts feedback immediately when
the user answers the question. Enable the Add "Submit" Button
to include a Submit button on the page for processing the answer.
Enable Feed- Select this to provide feedback when maximum attempts have
back for Max- been reached. Use the feedback type button in the Maximum
imum Attempt Feedback area to select the type of feedback as one of
Attempts the following:
No Feedback Do not show feedback.
Display Mes- Display a text message. Type the text of the mes-
sage sage in the box.

- 539 -
 Display Page Display a page. Select the page in the Page to
show list.
Set Text Block Update the text of a text block. Use the Text
block to update list to specify the target text
block and use the text box to specify the new
text for the text block.
Set Character Change the pose of a character image. Use the
Pose Target list to select the new character pose.
Show Show an object that was hidden. Use the Target
list to select the object.
Perform Action Perform an action. Select the Action from the
list and use the exposed fields to configure the
action you want performed.

Edit the attempts settings as necessary.

Enabling maximum attempts

You can control whether the maximum the maximum number of attempts is a factor to cor-
rectly answering the question. Additionally, you can specify the number of attempts
allowed to answer the question. By default, attempts are counted when the user nav-
igates to the next page or when the Process Question action is triggered. The user will
be locked from answering the question if he or she exceeds the maximum number of
attempts allowed. You can configure additional feedback (maximum-attempts feedback)
to be displayed when this occurs.
To change the maximum number of attempts:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Select the Enable Max Attempts in the Attempts group. This enables the Max
Attempts field.
3. Specify the number of attempts using the Max Attempts field.
The maximum number of attempts is changed.

Making a question initially invisible

By default, questions are set to be initially visible. That is, they appear when users open
the pages on which the questions are located. You can initially hide a question until an
action has been executed to show the question.
See also: Selecting an action
To make a question initially invisible:

- 540 -
 1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Appearance group, clear the Initially Hidden check box.
The question will be initially invisible.

Placing a question on the top layer

You can force a question to always be on the top layer of the page. This is useful when
you have multiple objects layered on your page.
To force a question to the top layer:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Appearance group, enable the Always on Top check box.
If multiple objects are set to Always on Top, the program will refer to the
ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of the objects
is on the top layer. The top-most object listed on the page in the Title
Explorer is on the bottom layer of the page.
The question is forced to the top layer.
See also: Layering objects

Associating a cascading style sheet (CSS) class

name
You can associate a cascading style sheet (CSS) class name for the object. By ref-
erencing the class name in your custom JavaScript, you can control how the question is
displayed on the Web.
To add a CSS class name:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Appearance group, click the arrow in the lower-right corner to expand the
window.
3. Specify the CSS class name to associate with the question. Separate multiple
CSS names with a comma.
The CSS class name is associated with the question.

- 541 -
Specifying transitions
You can specify how a question is displayed on a page. Transitions will produce a
visual effect as the question appears and disappears. You can select from over 10 dif-
ferent transitions. Plus, you can control the directions at which the transitions should
occur.
Use the Speed slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place.
To specify new transitions:
1. Double-click the graphic of the question you want to change in the Title
Explorer. Alternatively, you can right-click the graphic of the question and click
Properties. The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Transitions group, click Transition In to change the transition when the
question is initially displayed and click Transition Out to change the transition
when the question is completed or canceled. The Transitions window opens.
3. Specify the following information on the appropriate Transition In or Transition
Out tab:
Transition Select a transition type as one of the following:
None
l

l Random

l Random (No Fly)

l Appear

l Bars

l Blinds

l Box

l Checkerboard

l Circle

l Dissolve

l Fade

l Float

l Fly

l Split Horizontal

l Split Vertical

l Strips

l Wipe

Transition Options Specify the appropriate option based on the transition you
selected.
Transition Effects Specify the appropriate effect.
Delay before trans- Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition.
ition Select between 0 and 600 seconds.
Speed Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition
should occur.

- 542 -
 4. Click OK.
The new transitions are set.

Adding surveys
Add surveys to obtain feedback from your users about your title. You can process results
and submit them to learning management systems or custom databases.
You can also create surveys by importing questions from a comma-separated
value (CSV) file. For details, see Importing and exporting a CSV question file.
In this chapter, the following topics are covered:
l About surveys
l Creating a survey
See also: Adding questions

About surveys
Surveys are only slightly different from tests. They are different in that surveys are not
graded and there are no correct answers or feedback for survey questions. Like a test,
surveys can contain sections and pages. Use sections to organize pages within a sur-
vey. The pages are the physical pages that your users will see, and will contain the ques-
tions that comprise the survey.
See also: Understanding the book metaphor

Creating a survey
Creating a survey is similar to creating a chapter. When added to your title, a survey is
displayed in the Title Explorer as a new chapter following the currently selected chapter.
A Page 1 and a Last survey page will be added by default to the survey. Additional
pages can be inserted, and survey questions can then be added to the pages of the sur-
vey.
You can also create surveys by importing questions from a comma-separated
value (CSV) file. For details, see Importing and exporting a CSV question file.
Standard navigation buttons (Cancel, Back, Next and Done) are automatically added to
the pages of your survey. You can remove these controls and add your own custom nav-
igation, if desired.
The Done button that is added to the survey's last page is programmed with the
Submit/Process Survey action. This action is necessary at the end of the survey
so the results will be submitted and the appropriate completion action is taken. If
you add your own custom navigation to the test, the button on the last page of the
survey that navigates users out of the survey must have this action.
If you later randomize your survey, the Done button should be removed and
replaced with the same button used to navigate forward within the survey.

- 543 -
Follow these steps to create and add a survey:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the page after which you want the survey to appear
2. Do one of the following:
l From the Test & Survey ribbon, click Survey from the Add Test or Survey
group
l Type Alt+6
l Select Add Survey from the Quick Insert group on the Home ribbon
The survey is added to the title and the Survey Properties ribbons (Properties, Beha-
vior & Results) and the Action ribbon are highlighted.
View these topics to customize the survey:
l Changing the name of a survey
l Enabling author control
l Changing the page size
l Changing the HTML page alignment
l Specifying inheritance settings
l Changing the background properties
l Changing the text properties
l Setting the transition properties
l Adding an action
l Removing a survey from the table of contents
l Making each question mandatory
l Retaining answers between sessions
l Submitting results
l Setting the resulting action when a survey is completed
l Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled

Setting the resulting action when a survey is com-

pleted
You can specify the action to take when the survey is completed. For example, you can
send users to specific location within the title or open a different title.
To set the resulting action when a user completes a survey:
1. Double-click the graphic of the survey you in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior & Results ribbon, select the appropriate target for the Go To

- 544 -
 action from the Target drop-down list in the On Completed group. Specify the
appropriate target options based on the target you selected.
See also: Selecting an action's target
The resulting action is set.

Setting the resulting action when a survey is can-

celed
You can specify the action to take when the survey is canceled. For example, you can
send users to specific location within the title or open a different title.
To set the resulting action when a user cancels a survey:
1. Double-click the graphic of the survey you in the Title Explorer. Alternatively, you
can right-click the survey in the Title Explorer and select Properties.
2. On the Behavior & Results ribbon, select the appropriate target for the Go To
action from the Target drop-down list in the On Completed group. Specify the
appropriate target options based on the target you selected.
See also: Selecting an action's target
The resulting action is set.

- 545 -
Actions and variables
Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity
and dynamically updated information.
This chapter covers the following topics:
l About actions
l Adding an action
l Working with variables
See also: Answer and response variable value formats
Additional resources: Video Game Design and Mechanics

About actions
Three components make up an action:
On Specifies which event should trigger an action, such as a keystroke or a
mouse click.
Action Specifies what should happen when the On trigger occurs, such as display a
message, launch a program, or cancel a test.
Target Specifies a target used by the action. Targets can be chapters, sections,
pages, tests, surveys, questions, objects, or variables. The Action defines
which targets can be used.
These three parts work together to create the end result. Depending on where you are
adding an action, the options available to you will vary.
Actions added to organizational levels including the title, chapters, sections, pages,
tests, test sections and surveys adhere to the same inheritance principles as other
objects within your title. That is, if an action is added to the title level, the action will
execute on every page of the title if the action is triggered. Similarly, if an action is added
to a chapter, section, test, survey or test section, it will execute on every page within the
chapter, section, test, survey, or test section, respectively, if the action is triggered. Fin-
ally, if an action is added to a page, it will only execute on that page if the action is
triggered.
See also: Understanding inheritance
The following table lists all events, actions, and targets available in your title:
On Action Target
Any Key Cancel Test/Survey Chapter, Section, or Page
Device Rotation Change Contents (Character/New Pose)
Done Playing Current Page
Hide First Page in Title

- 546 -
Keystroke Display Message Last Visited Page
Mouse Click Display Page in (Location in Title)
Mouse Double- Popup Modify this Object to This Object
Click Exit Title/Close Win- Next Chapter
Mouse Enter dow Next Page
Mouse Exit Go To Next Section
Right Mouse Go To Web Address (Object)
Click Hide Previous Chapter
Show Launch a pro- Previous Page
Show Page gram/document Previous Section
Timer Modify Variable This Object/This Chapter/This Section/This
Move Page/This Test
Mute Media (xAPI Verb/Object)
None/No Action Title
Open Attachment Web Address
Pause Variables
Play
Print Current Page
Process Question
Process Test/Survey
Reset All Variables
Reset Form
Reset Question
Reset Test/Survey
Resize
Run Action Group
Run JavaScript
Send Course Com-
pletion
Send Email
Send Statement
Set Character Pose
Set Tracking Status
Set Progress Bar Pos-
ition
Set State
Show
Step Progress Bar Pos-
ition
Stop
Submit Form
Submit Variable Val-

- 547 -
 ues
Toggle Play Mode
Toggle Show/Hide
Unmute Media
Synchronized actions set within audio and video objects can be used within a title
to trigger actions while the object is playing. For details, see Adding and man-
aging the synchronized events in an audio objectAdding and managing the syn-
chronized actions in an audio object and Adding and managing the synchronized
actions in a video objectAdding and managing the synchronized actions in a
video object.

Adding an action
You can add actions to the organizational levels of your title (chapters, sections, and
pages) and to objects within your title. Actions are dependent upon three major assign-
ments: the on event, the action, and the target.
See also: About actions
To add an action to your title:
1. In the Title Explorer, select the location onto which you want to add an action and
do one of the following.
l From the Insert ribbon, click Action from the Add Navigation and Inter-

action group
l From the Home ribbon, click from the Quick Insert group

l From the Properties ribbon for objects,click Action from the Add group.
l Right-click in the Title Explorer or in the work-area and select Add Action.
l Type Ctrl+4
The action is added to the Title Explorer and the Action ribbon is displayed.
2. Use the controls on the Action ribbon to complete these tasks:
l Change the name of an action
l Select another action
l Add a description
l Viewing the HTML name
l Select an action's trigger
l Delay an action
l Select an action

- 548 -
 l Select an action's target
l Specify conditions
l Add an action
l Launch the Action pane
l Enable author control on an action
When you have completed defining your action, you can preview and test the func-
tionality of the action within your title in Run Mode, Preview Mode, or Debug
Mode. For details about switching between modes, see Switching between modes.

Changing the name of an action

You can change the name of an action. Names are automatically assigned to action
based on the type of action and its trigger. For example, the name OnMClkGoto is an
action that will go to a target when users click their mouse.
To change the name of an action:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. Specify the new name of the action in the Action field in the Action group.
The name of the action is changed.
See also: Viewing the HTML name of an action

Selecting another action

From the Action ribbon, you can select which action to configure. You can move through
actions that you have assigned to the same object. The settings for the action you select
are displayed in the Action ribbon.
To select an action so you can view its settings in the Action ribbon:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action you want to change. The
Action ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the appropriate Previous or Next button in the Action group to select
the action. Alternatively, you can use the drop-down list in the Action field to select
a specific action.

Enabling author control on an action

Protect the contents of an action by enabling Author Control. With Author Control
enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the action unless they have the mas-
ter Author Control password. The master Author Control password must first be set
within the Title Properties.

- 549 -
When Author Control is enabled on a title, the Author Control graphic is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the Text group on the Properties ribbon. The graphic changes to
the Locked Control graphic to show that the object is password-protected.

See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable author control on an action:
1. Do one of the following:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the action.
l In the work area, right-click the action and select Properties.
The Properties ribbon is displayed.
2. Click the . Author Control graphic in the first group.
Author control is enabled on the action. The graphic changes to the Locked Control
graphic.

Adding a description
You can add a description to an action.
To add a description to an action:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Action group, click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner. The Descrip-
tion window opens.
3. Specify the description in the window and click OK.
The description is assigned to the action.
See also: Viewing the HTML name

Viewing the HTML name of an action

The HTML name is assigned when you create the action. The name, which is used to
identify the action, cannot be changed.
To view the HTML name of an action:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Action group, click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner. The Descrip-
tion window opens.
The HTML name is displayed in the HTML Name field.

- 550 -
See also: Adding a description

Selecting an action's trigger

The action trigger determines when an action is executed. Different action triggers are
available based on the location to which you are adding an action.
To select the trigger:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action you want to change. The
Action ribbon is displayed.
2. In the Trigger group, click the Trigger drop-down list to select the appropriate trig-
ger. Select from the following triggers:
On Setting Description
Any Key Executes the action when the user presses any key on his or
her keyboard. Actions with this trigger can only be applied to
organizational levels such as the title, chapters, sections,
pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
Device Rotation Executes the action when the orientation of the user's tablet or
phone is rotated, for example from horizontal/landscape to ver-
tical/portrait. Actions with this trigger can be applied to organ-
izational levels, such as the title, chapters, sections, and pages,
and the object level (images, buttons, and text).
Done Playing Executes the action when a media object (such as a video) to
which the action is attached, has completed playing. The action
will only execute in titles published to the Web if the media is
converted to Flash. Actions with this trigger can also be applied
to timer progress bars. When the time specified within the timer
progress bar has elapsed, the action will execute.
Converting your audio media to MP3 and video media to
MP4 is recommended. Due to plug-in limitations, the
Done Playing trigger will not be executed when WMA
and WMV media are done playing when your title is pub-
lished or viewed in Run mode. For details about con-
verting your audio to MP3, see Converting to MP3. For
details about converting your video to MP4, see Con-
verting to MP4.
See also: Publishing a title
Working with audio
Working with video
Working with Flash animations
Working with progress bars

- 551 -
Hide Executes the action when an object to which the action is
attached, is hidden. This trigger can also be used to execute an
action when navigating off of a page and can be applied to
organizational levels such as the title, chapters, sections,
pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
Keystroke Executes the action when the user presses a specified key on
his or her keyboard. Click the Next Key Typed button, and
press the key you want to execute the action. Key combinations
using the Shift and Ctrl keys are accepted. This will capture
the keystroke for the action. Actions with this trigger can only be
applied to organizational levels such as the title, chapters, sec-
tions, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
Mouse Click Executes the action when a user clicks his or her left mouse but-
ton on the object or page to which the action is attached. This
trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the
title, chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys
if the title is being published to the Web.
Mouse Double Executes the action when a user double clicks his or her left
Click mouse button on the object to which the action is attached. This
trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the
title, chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys
if the title is being published to the Web.
Mouse Enter Executes the action when a user places the mouse cursor over
the object to which the action is attached. This trigger cannot be
applied to organizational levels such as the title, chapters, sec-
tions, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
Mouse Exit Executes the action when a user moves the mouse cursor off of
the object to which the action is attached. This trigger cannot be
applied to organizational levels such as the title, chapters, sec-
tions, pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.
Page Show Executes the action when the page is shown.
Right Mouse Executes the action when a user clicks his or her right mouse
Click button on the object or page to which the action is attached.
This trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as
the title, chapters, sections, pages, tests, test sections, and sur-
veys if the title is being published to the Web.
Show Executes the action when an object to which the action is
attached, is displayed. This trigger can also be used to execute
an action when navigating on to a page and can be applied to
organizational levels such as the title, chapters, sections,
pages, tests, test sections, and surveys.

- 552 -
 Screen Swipe Executes the action when a user swipes left with a finger on a
Left touch device or with a click-and-swipe-left using a mouse.
Screen Swipe Executes the action when a user swipes right with a finger on a
Right touch device or with a click-and-swipe-right using a mouse.
Timed Interval Executes the action continuously on a specified time interval.
When this is selected, specify the time interval (in seconds) by
typing a value in the Interval field. Use the Delay field to spe-
cify a delay (in seconds) when starting the specified time inter-
val.
See also: Delaying an action

Delaying an action
You can delay an action by a specified number of seconds. When the action's trigger is
fired, the action will not execute until the delay time has elapsed.
To delay an action:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Trigger group, use the Delay field to specify the number of seconds to delay
the action.
The action is delayed.
See also: Selecting an action's trigger

Selecting the action

The action determines what action will be taken when the specified On trigger has
occurred. Different actions are available based on the trigger selected.
On triggers do not apply to actions specified within button, form object, test or sur-
vey properties.
To select the action:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Action and Target group, use the Action drop-down list to select the appro-
priate action. The default action is None (No Action). Select it to take no
action. The list is divided into the following categories:
l Navigation
l Objects
l Commands
l xAPI

- 553 -
 l Documents
l Media
l Variables
l Questions, Tests & Surveys
l Forms
l Progress Bars

Navigation
Go To This action navigates to the target location specified. When
you select this option, you can further specify if the target
location should be opened in a separate window.
See also: Executing Go To actions
Go To Web This action launches the specified Web address. When you
Address select this option, you can further specify if the target loc-
ation should be opened in a separate window.
See also: Executing Go To actions
Exit Title/Close This action exits the title if it is executed from the main win-
Window dow presenting the title or closes the current window if it is
executed from a secondary or pop-up window.

Objects
Hide This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is
currently visible. When the target object is hidden, the selec-
ted transition (out) will be applied to the target object.
See also: Specifying an object's transitions
Show This action causes the target object to become visible if it is
currently hidden. When the target object is shown, the selec-
ted transition (in) will be applied to the target object.
See also: Specifying an object's transitions
Toggle This action causes the target object to either become vis-
Show/Hide ible or hidden, depending on its current visibility state.
When the target object is shown, the selected transition (in)
will be applied to the target object. When the target object is
hidden, the selected transition (out) will be applied to the tar-
get object.
See also:Specifying an object's transitions
Move This action repositions the target object specified in the Tar-
get field to a specified position in the Move To field at the
speed you select in the Speed field.

- 554 -
 To directly specify the positions, specify random positions,
or specify the value of a variable to use for the positions,
click the Move To field. The Move window opens. To dir-
ectly specify the coordinates, enter the coordinates in the X
Position (Horizontal) and Y Position (Vertical) fields as
necessary.To edit the position, speed, or effect, click the
graphic in the Move To field. The Move To window opens.
To specify the value of an existing variable to use to repos-
ition the object, click the corresponding Variable list and
select the appropriate variable. (To create a new variable,
click the button. Define the new variable in the Add Vari-
able window.) To specify a random X or Y position, click the
corresponding Random button. The random number
assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value spe-
cified and less than or equal to the max value specified.
Use the Effect field to select the appropriate effect. Click
OK to close the Move window.
Move the slider in the Speed field to select the speed from
(Slow) to (Fast).
See also: Modifying variable values
Creating a variable
Resize This action resizes the object specified in the Target field to
the width and height in pixels specified in the Size To field
at the speed specified in the Speed field. You can also spe-
cify a percentage relative to the target object's current size.
To directly specify a width and height in pixels, specify a
random width or height, or specify the value of an existing
variable to use for the width and height, click the graphic
in the Size To field. The Size To window opens. To directly
specify the new width and height, enter the appropriate num-
ber of pixels in the Width and Height fields as necessary.
To specify the value of an existing variable to use to resize
the object, click the corresponding Variable list and
select the appropriate variable. (To create a new variable,
click the button. Define the new variable in the Add Vari-
able window.) To specify a random X or Y position, click the
corresponding Random button. The random number
assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value spe-
cified and less than or equal to the max value specified. To
specify a percentage relative to the target object's current
size, enable the Use Percentage of current size check

- 555 -
 box. Select the percentage from the Percentage list, or dir-
ectly type a value into the field. Use the Effect field to select
the appropriate effect. Click OK to close the Size To win-
dow.
Move the slider in the Speed field to select the speed from
(Slow) to (Fast).
See also: Modifying variable values
Creating a variable
Change Con- This action changes the contents of the object to which the
tents action is applied and replaces it with the target object spe-
cified in the Target field. This action can be used to change
the contents of a text block to a specified variable value,
change the contents of questions, or change images, audio,
video and other objects. Specify the variable whose value
will replace the text in the Value field. To change the con-
tents to specific text, select Set Text in the Value field and
enter the text in the Text field. To specify additional text, an
existing variable, a new variable, or a random value, click
the Expand arrow in the Text field. The Text window opens.
Enter additional text as necessary. Click the Variable but-
ton to insert an existing variable's value, click the New Vari-
able button to configure and insert a new variable, and click
the Random Value button to configure and insert a random
number. Click OK to close the Text window.
When the object is an image, you can select a resource
from several locations. You can select a previously impor-
ted file, select a local file, or select from the Media Library.
Previously imported files are listed. Select one to select a
previously imported file. To select a local file, select
Browse from File. To select from the Media Library, select
Browse My Media.
• For multiple response and rank/sequence ques-
tions, use the Change Contents action to make
sure question choices are properly delimited. Com-
mas within correct choices must be changed to the
&#44 escape sequence. For details about working
with multiple response and rank/sequence ques-
tions, see Creating a multiple response question
and Creating a rank/sequence question.
• Shapes are not valid targets for the Change Con-

- 556 -
 tents action.
Set Character This action sets the new pose of the character. Set the char-
Pose acter to change to one of the following new poses:
l Arms crossed
l Happy
l OK Sign

l Pointing down left

l Pointing down right

l Pointing middle left

l Pointing middle right

l Pointing up left

l Pointing up right

l Sad

l Thinking

l Thumbs Down

l Thumbs Up

l Waving

l Writing

See also: Working with characters

Set State This action sets the state of the button as either enabled or
disabled. Use the Target field to select the appropriate but-
ton and use the State field to select the appropriate state.

Commands
Display Message This action can be used to display the text specified in the
Message field in a generic message box. You can display
specific text or display the value of variable. To specify addi-
tional text, an existing variable, a new variable, or a random
value, click the Expand arrow in the Message field. The
Message window opens. Enter additional values as neces-
sary. Click the Variable button to insert an existing vari-
able's value, click the New Variable button to configure and
insert a new variable, and click the Random Value button
to configure and insert a random number. Click OK to close
the Message window.
See also: Modifying variable values
Creating a variable
Display Page in This action can be used to display the page specified in the
Pop-up Target field text in a pop-up window. If the location selected
is scrollable, select the object to scroll to in the Scroll To
field; otherwise, select Top of Page.

- 557 -
 Run Action This action starts the target action group (a group con-
Group taining only actions). The actions contained within the
action group will begin executing one-by-one, from top to
bottom, as the actions are listed within the group in the Title
Explorer.
See also: Grouping and ungrouping objects
Print Current This action will launch the user's Print window, enabling
Page the user to print the current page.
Run JavaScript This action executes the JavaScript specified in the
JavaScript field. You can specify JavaScript text or the
value of a variable. Click the Expand arrow to specify addi-
tional text. The JavaScript window opens. Specify the addi-
tional text as necessary. Click OK to close the JavaScript
window.
• You can use tokens within a Run JavaScript action
for replacement and manipulation within your cus-
tom Javascript. For details, see Token replacements
for custom JavaScript.
• For custom JavaScript relating to Seamless Play
Publishing, see Custom JavaScripting.
Send Email This action launches the user's email application and cre-
ates a new email to the address specified in the Address
field. To specify additional addresses, click the Expand
arrow in the lower-right corner of the Address field. The
Address window opens. Separate additional addresses
with a comma. Click OK to close the Address window.
This action requires that each user have an email client,
such as Microsoft Outlook, on the computer from which they
are accessing the published title. In addition, the email
server must be configured to accept communications from
the published title's location, so the email can be suc-
cessfully submitted.
Set Tracking This action sets the tracking status for a specific chapter,
Status section, page, test, test section, or survey. For example, you
can use this action to mark a page as "In Progress" until a
user completes viewing a video.
l When the Set Tracking Status action is used
to set the tracking status for a title, chapter, sec-
tion, page, test, test section, or survey to "Not

- 558 -
 Started", all the child chapters, sections, and
pages will be reset to "Not Started". For
example, setting the title to "Not Started" will
force all of the child chapter, sections, pages,
tests, test sections, and surveys to "Not Star-
ted". Setting a chapter to "Not Started" will force
all child sections, and pages to "Not Started".
l When the Set Tracking Status action is used
to set the tracking status for a title, chapter, sec-
tion, page, test, test section, or survey to "In Pro-
gress", the target is set as "In Progress"
regardless of whether its children are "Com-
pleted". Additionally, chapters, sections, pages,
tests, test sections or surveys above the target
(its parents) will never automatically go to "Com-
pleted" because it is "In Progress". The only
way to change the status of a target set to "In
Progress" is by using another Set Tracking
Status action to set it to another condition (for
example, "Completed").
l When the Set Tracking Status action is used
to set the tracking status for a title, chapter, sec-
tion, page, test, test section, or survey to "Com-
pleted", the target is set to "Completed"
regardless of the tracking status of the children.
The only way to change the status of a target
set to "Completed" is by using another Set
Tracking Status action to set it to another con-
dition.
l Graded tests cannot be the target of a Set
Tracking Status action. Graded tests will be
automatically set to "Completed" when they are
passed; otherwise, graded tests will remain
"Not Started" or "In Progress" as appropriate.

xAPI
Send Statement For xAPI titles, this action allows for statements of learning
experience to be delivered to and stored in a learning
records store (LRS). The target consists of a verb and an
object. Use the Verb field to specify the xAPI statement
verb. Use the list to select a predefined verb or enter your

- 559 -
 own verb. Entered verb names are appended to the ADL
namespace so any future ADL verbs can be used or you
can use your own unique verb. Use the Object field to spe-
cify the target object. You can also use text to report on any
activity. The Object defaults to the parent object of the
action (that is, the object to which the action is attached).
To specify additional objects, specify a random value, or
specify the value of an new or existing variable, click the
Object field. The Object window opens. To directly specify
the object, enter it in the window. To specify the value of an
existing variable to use as the object, click the cor-
responding Variable list and select the appropriate vari-
able. (To create a new variable, click the New Variable
button. Define the new variable in the Add Variable win-
dow.) To specify a random value, click the Random
Value button. The random number assigned will be greater
than or equal to the min value specified and less than or
equal to the max value specified. Click OK to close the
Object window.
Lectora uses the ADL definitions for verbs. For more inform-
ation on the ADL verbs, visit http://www.adlnet.gov-
/expapi/verbs.
See also: Modifying variable values
Creating a variable
Working with the Experience API (xAPI)
Send Course For xAPI titles, this action allows for the completion status
Completion of the course to be delivered to and stored in a learning
records store (LRS). Use the Status field to indicate the
course status as either completed, passed, or failed.
See also: Working with the Experience API (xAPI)

Documents
Launch a Pro- This action will launch the specified program or document.
gram/Document You can launch one of the additional files contained within
the title, or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web
address of the file you want to launch.
To display an additional file, specify the fully qualified file
name in the File field.
To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the
file you want to launch, specify the file's location in the File

- 560 -
 field.
If you require additional room, click the Expand arrow in the
File field. The File window opens. Enter additional values
as necessary.Click OK to close the Value window.
See also: Working with documents
Open Attach- This action opens the specified attachment.
ment See also: Working with attachments

Media
Pause This action causes the target media object such as a video
or audio clip to pause, if it is currently playing.
Play This action causes the target media object such as a video
or audio clip to begin playing, if it is not already playing.
This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar.
For more information, see Working with progress bars.
Converting your audio media to MP3 and video
media to MP4 is recommended. Due to plug-in lim-
itations, synchronized actions within WMA and WMV
media used with the Play action will not work when
your title is published or viewed in Run mode. For
details about converting your audio to MP3, see Con-
verting to MP3. For details about converting your
video to MP4, see Converting to MP4.
Stop This action causes the target media object such as a video
or audio clip to stop playing, if it is currently playing.
Toggle Play This action causes the target media object such as a video
Mode or audio clip to either start or stop playing, depending on
whether it is currently stopped or currently playing.
Mute Media When executed, the action will stop the audio of media this
is being played by the Flash player.
iOS Safari does not allow the volume to be adjusted
programmatically. Volume can only be adjusted by
the physical device buttons.
Unmute Media When executed, the action will play the audio of media this
is being played by the Flash player.
iOS Safari does not allow the volume to be adjusted
programmatically. Volume can only be adjusted by
the physical device buttons.

- 561 -
Variables
Modify Variable This action enables you to set or change the value of the
variable specified in the Target field. Specify the type of
modification in the Type field and the value of the modi-
fication in the Value field. To specify additional values, an
existing variable, a new variable, or a random value, click
the Expand arrow in the Value field. The Value window
opens. Enter additional values as necessary. Click the Vari-
able button to insert an existing variable's value, click the
New Variable button to configure and insert a new variable,
and click the Random Value button to configure and insert
a random number. Click OK to close the Value window.
See also: Modifying variable values
Creating a variable
Submit Variable This action submits the values of all defined variables to the
Values relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI
script) specified in the Submit Address field.
You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field,
where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient
to which you want to submit the variable values. This action
requires that each user have an email client, such as
Microsoft Outlook, on the computer from which they are
accessing the published title. In addition, the email server
must be configured to accept communications from the pub-
lished title's location, so the email can be successfully sub-
mitted.
See also: Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI
Reset All Vari- This action causes all the variables contained in the title
ables (except for the read-only, reserved variables) to be reset to
their initial or default values. This will reset all test results,
questions, and form objects.

Questions, Tests & Surveys

Process Ques- This action processes the target question. Processing the
tion question includes determining whether the answer is cor-
rect or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback
(if any) defined within the question properties.
See also: Adding questions
Process Test/Sur- If the target is a test, this action causes the test to be scored,
vey results to be submitted, and the appropriate When Com-

- 562 -
 pleted/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to
be executed. This includes grading the testing if one or
more of the following is true:
l Grade the test is enabled on the Test Results ribbon
l Showing the test results if Show Test Results is
enabled on the Test Results ribbon
l Submitting the results to a learning management sys-
tem (LMS)/learning record store (LRS) or to email, a
custom CGI script program, or to Google Drive if Cus-
tom Results Submission is enabled on the Test/Sur-
vey ribbon
l Routing the user to the page specified within the
On Completed/Passed or On Canceled/Failed
action on the Behavior ribbon.
See also:Creating a test
If the target is a survey, this action causes the survey results
to be submitted, and the appropriate When Completed or
When Canceled survey actions to be executed.
See also: Creating a survey
Reset Question This action resets the target question. This will clear the
question's answer if it was previously supplied, and reset
the question back to its default, unanswered state.
Reset Test/Sur- If the target is a test, this action causes the test score to be
vey reset to 0, and will reset all of the questions contained
within the test to their default, unanswered state. If the target
test is randomized, the action will additionally cause the
test pages to be re-randomized.
If the target is a survey, this action will reset all of the survey
questions contained within the survey to their default,
unanswered state.
Cancel Test/Sur- This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the
vey When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or tar-
get survey's properties to execute.
See also: Setting the resulting action when a test is
failed
Setting the resulting action when a test is
passed or completed

- 563 -
 Forms
Submit Form This action submits the target form using the specified sub-
mission properties set for the target form.
See also: Specifying form submission properties
Reset Form This action causes all the form objects of the target form to
be reset to their initial or default values.

Progress Bars
Set Progress Bar This action sets the target custom progress bar to a spe-
Position cified Position. This position is relative to the Range spe-
cified within the target progress bar's properties. You can
directly specify a position, specify a random position, or spe-
cify the value of an existing variable to use for the position.
To directly specify a position, specify a random position, or
specify the value of an existing variable to use for the pos-
ition, click the Position field. The Position window opens.
To directly specify the new position, enter it in the window.
To specify the value of an existing variable to use as the
position, click the corresponding Variable list and select
the appropriate variable. (To create a new variable, click
the button. Define the new variable in the Add Variable
window.) To specify a random position, click the Ran-
dom button. The random number assigned will be greater
than or equal to the min value specified and less than or
equal to the max value specified. Click OK to close the Pos-
ition window.
See also: Working with progress bars
Step Progress This action increases or decreases the target custom pro-
Bar Position gress bar according to the specified Step Size in the Type
group on the target progress bar's Properties ribbon. When
configuring this action, use the Target field to select the
appropriate progress bar and the Direction field to specify
in which direction to show the progress. The action moves
the bar forward or backward one Step Size increment. If an
associated variable is used with the progress bar, the vari-
able value will increase (or decrease) by that amount spe-
cified by Step Size.
See also: Working with progress bars
The action is selected.
See also: Selecting another action

- 564 -
Executing Flash commands
The Flash command action is only available if a Flash object (.swf) is accessible from
the location to which the action is being added.
See also: Working with Flash animations
To execute a Flash command:
1. Add an action to your title and select Flash Command from the Action list in the
Action and Target group.
See also: Adding an action
2. Select the appropriate Flash animation target to which you want to apply the Flash
command from the Target list in the Action and Target group.
3. Use the Command list to select from the available Flash commands for com-
municating with your Flash animation:
Call Function When executed, the action will execute a function defined within
the target Flash animation. Use the Name field to specify the
name of the function you want to execute. Use the Value field to
optionally specify a string-valued argument for the function. For
example, if your Flash animation contains a function myFunc-
tion( arg ), that you want to execute, specify myFunction
in the Name field and specify the appropriate value (representing
arg) that you want passed into the function in the Value field.
The function myFunction must be registered as callable
from a container within Flash.
Get Variable When executed, the action will retrieve the value of a variable
contained within the target Flash animation and save it to a spe-
cified variable within your title. Specify the target Flash anim-
ation's variable name in the Name field and use the Variable list
to select the variable within your title to which you want to save
the value.
Go To Frame When executed, the action will navigate within the target Flash
animation to the frame number specified in the Number field. The
frame number specified is 0-based. That is, if you want to nav-
igate to the first frame of the target Flash animation, enter "0" in
the Number field. If you want to navigate to the 34th frame of the
target Flash animation, enter "33" in the Number field.
Go To Label Similar to the Go To Frame option, when executed, the action
will navigate within the target Flash animation to the frame label
specified in the Name field. The label Name specified must
match a frame label within the target Flash animation.

- 565 -
 Go To Next When executed, the action will navigate within the target Flash
Frame animation to the next frame.
Go To Pre- When executed, the action will navigate within the target Flash
vious Frame animation to the previous frame.
Pause When executed, the action will pause the target Flash animation.
Play When executed, the action will play the target Flash animation.
Set Variable When executed, the action will set the value of a variable con-
tained within the target Flash animation to the value specified in
the Value field. Specify the target Flash animation's variable
name in the Name field and use the Value field to specify the
value to which this variable should be set. You can directly spe-
cify a value, specify a random value, or specify the value of an
existing variable to which the Flash animation's variable should
be set.
To specify a random value, enter RAND(min, max) in the Value
field. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal
to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value
specified. The random number generated will be assigned to the
value of the variable specified in the Name field.
To specify the value of an existing variable to which Flash anim-
ation's variable should be set, enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the
Value field, where Variable_Name is the name of the variable
within your title whose value will be assigned to the value of the
variable specified in the Name field.
Stop When executed, the action will stop the target Flash animation.
The Flash command is set.

Executing Go To actions
The Go To action enables direct navigation within a title. The resulting action is depend-
ent upon the target used with the action.
See also: Selecting an action's target
When the Go To action is selected and the Target is either a chapter, section, page, or
Web address, the Open in field is enabled. This option gives you the ability to open the
target location in a new or existing window. Additionally, with the Target as either a
chapter, section, or page, the Scroll To field is enabled. Use the Scroll To field to scroll
directly to a location in the title, such as an existing image or Top of Page.
To open the target location in a new window:
1. In the Open in field, select New Window. This enables the Window Properties
sub-menu item.

- 566 -
2. Select the Window Properties sub-menu item to configure the new window's prop-
erties. The New Window Properties window opens. This window enables you to
define the window size, where it should appear relative to the parent window, and
additional HTML properties that determine the controls that should be displayed
within the browser window if the title is published to the Web.
3. Specify the following information within the New Window Properties window:
Window Name The name specified will appear at the top of the new window.
Window Style Use the drop-down list to select the style of the window. Select
from the following:
Use Pub- Select this to use the publishing option for pop-up win-
lish dows (Use Lightbox Pop Ups) to determine the
Option style of the window. This is the default.
See also: Publishing a title
Lightbox Select this to display a Lightbox-based pop-up win-
Pop Up dow. This will override the publishing option for pop-
up windows (Use Lightbox Pop Ups).
Using Lightbox pop-ups eliminate issues your
users might encounter with pop-up blockers.
New Select this to create a new browser window.
Browser
Window
Window Size This specifies the size to which the new window will open. If Use
Default Size is selected, the window will open to the page size of
the target location. Clear this option to specify the width and
height of the new window size in pixels.
Screen Pos- This specifies the location of where the new window will open, rel-
ition ative to the upper-left corner of the parent window. Clear this
option to specify the exact x and y coordinates of where you want
the new window to open.
No Scrollbars When this option is selected, the scrollbars are disabled within
the browser window.
No Menubar When this option is selected, the menu bar is disabled within the
browser window.
No Toolbar When this option is selected, the toolbar is disabled within the
browser window.
Non resizable When this option is selected, users will not be able to resize the
Window browser window.
No Status Bar When this option is selected, the status bar is disabled within the
browser window.

- 567 -
 No Location When this option is selected, the location bar is disabled within
Bar the browser window.
The target location will open in a new window.

Selecting an action's target

The target is the object or location to which the action is applied. Different targets are
available based on the action selected.
Use the Target list in the Action and Target group on the Action ribbon to select from
the following targets:
Target Setting Description
Previously Vis- This target can be used with the Go To action. When the action is
ited Page executed, it will take the user to the previously visited page, regard-
less of its location within the title.
Chapter, Section, This target can be used with the Go To action. When this target is
or Page selected, you can select a specific chapter, section or page from the
Name list. If the location selected is scrollable, you can also choose
to automatically scroll to an object on the page. Select the object
from the Scroll To list. If the content on the page fits within the view-
ing window without requiring a scrollbar, this setting has no effect.
When the action is executed, it will take the user to the location and
scroll point specified.
When this target is used, you have the ability to open the target loc-
ation in a new window.
See also: Executing Go To actions
Current Page This target can be used with the Go To action. When this target is
selected, you can scroll to an object on the current page. Select the
object from the Scroll To list. When the action is executed, the cur-
rent page will scroll to present the scroll point object at the top of the
window.
Next Chapter, These targets can be used with the Go To action. When the action
Next Section, or is executed, it will take the user to the next chapter, next section, or
Next Page next page, relative to the current location.
Go To, Next Page actions from a test results page will navigate to
the pages defined in the Target fields on the On Com-
pleted/Passed and On Canceled/Failed panels. For details, see
Setting the resulting action when a test is passed or completed and
Setting the resulting action when a test is canceled or failed.
Previous These targets can be used with the Go To action. When the action
Chapter, Pre- is executed, it will take the user to the previous chapter, previous
vious Section, or section, or previous page, relative to the current location.

- 568 -
Previous Page
Title This target can be used with the Go To action. When the action is
executed, it will open the title specified in the Title location field.
Web Address This target can be used with the Go To action. When the action is
executed, it will take the user to the Web address specified in the
Web address field. A relative or fully qualified path can be specified
within the Web address field.
When this target is used, you have the ability to open the target loc-
ation in a new window.
See also: Executing Go To actions
This Object/This Use this target to reference the object to which the action is applied.
Chapter/This Sec- This enables you to easily re-use the action on other objects without
tion/This having to specifically identify a new target.
Page/This Test
Objects Objects such as images, audio, video and progress bars can be tar-
gets of many actions.
Variables Variables are the targets for any Modify Variable actions and
Change Contents actions where the target is a text block.
See also: Modifying variable values
Displaying a variable value

Specifying conditions
Using variables, you can create conditional actions. Conditional actions are actions that
will only execute when a logical variable statement such as MyVariable equals 1, is true.
You can specify single or multiple conditions for an action. This enables you to execute
the action, only when the specified conditions have been satisfied.
Consider the following example:
l Action A
The action specified on the General tab of the Action Properties window.
l MyVariable = 1
The condition specified on the Condition tab of the Action Properties window.
If MyVariable = 1, Action A will execute when the On trigger specified on the General
tab of the Action Properties window is fired. If MyVariable is equal to anything other than
1, the action will not execute.
See also: Defining conditions
To place a condition on an action:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.

- 569 -
 2. In the Conditions group, click Always. The Set Action Conditions window opens.
3. Conditions require the use of a variable. Select the Variable from the list, select a
Relationship and enter a Value. If multiple conditions are defined, select whether
All of the Following conditions or Any of the Following conditions should be true
to execute the action.
You can copy and paste multiple conditions from one action to another. Once you
have finished defining your actions, click Copy Conditions. Create the new con-
dition as necessary. Click Paste Conditions to paste the copied conditions to the
appropriate row in the table. Click New Variable to define a new variable. Click the
corresponding in the final column to remove a condition.
4. Click OK.
The conditions are defined.
See also: Working with variables
Answer and response variable value formats

Defining conditions
To specify conditions of an action, click the Condition list in the Conditions group on
the Action ribbon. The Set Action Conditions window opens.
Three components make up a condition:
Variable or Chapter- The name of the variable or assignable unit, chapter, section,
/Section/Page test, test section, survey, or page whose value must satisfy the
Relationship with the Value for the action to execute. Click the
New Variable button to configure and insert a new variable.
Relationship The relationship between the value of the Variable and the
value in the Value field that must be true for the action to
execute. (See the Relationship definitions below.)
Value The value to which the value of the Variable is being com-
pared. You can directly specify a value, specify a random num-
ber or specify the value of an existing variable.
To specify a random number, enter RAND(min, max) in the
Value field. The random number assigned will be greater than
or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the
max value specified. The random number generated will be
used to determine the Relationship with the Variable.
To specify the value of an existing variable, enter VAR(Vari-
able_Name) in the Value field, where Variable_Name is the
name of the variable whose value will be used to determine the
Relationship with the Variable.

- 570 -
These three parts (Variable or Chapter/Section/Page, Relationship, and Value) work
together to create a single condition. To copy and paste a condition, select a condition in
the table, and click Copy Conditions. Then place your cursor within the table where
you want to place the copied condition, and click Paste Conditions.
Variable relationships
Within each condition, the following Relationships can be used for variables:
Contains Determines if the value of the Variable contains the exact
value typed in the Value field (including capitalization, spa-
cing and punctuation). If so, the condition is true.
Does Not Contain Determines if the value of the Variable contains the exact
value typed in the Value field (including capitalization, spa-
cing and punctuation). If not, the condition is true.
Equal To Determines if the value of the Variable is equal to the exact
value typed in the Value field (including capitalization, spa-
cing and punctuation). If so, the condition is true.
Greater Than Determines if the value of the Variable is greater than the
value typed in the Value field. If so, the condition is true.
Greater Than or Equal Determines if the value of the Variable is greater than or
equal to the value typed in the Value field. If so, the condition
is true.
Is Correct* Determines if the question associated with the Variable was
answered correctly. If so, the condition is true.
Is Empty* Determines if the Variable has a value. If not, the condition is
true.
Is Not Correct* Determines if the question associated with the Variable was
answered correctly. If not, the condition is true.
Is Not Empty* Determines if the Variable has a value. If so, the condition is
true.
Is Passed* Determines if the test associated with the Variable was
passed. If so, the condition is true. Based on the test's Low-
est Passing Score.
See also: Customizing test results
Is Not Passed* Determines if the test associated with the Variable was
passed. If not, the condition is true. Based on the test's Low-
est Passing Score.
See also: Customizing test results
Less Than Determines if the value of the Variable is less than the value
typed in the Value field. If so, the condition is true.
Less Than or Equal Determines if the value of the Variable is less than or equal

- 571 -
 to the value typed in the Value field. If so, the condition is
true.
Not Equal To Determines if the value of the Variable is equal to the exact
value typed in the Value field (including capitalization, spa-
cing and punctuation). If not, the condition is true.
* = The Value field will be disabled.
Tracking relationships
Within each condition, the following Relationships can be used for AU, chapter, section,
page, test, test section, and survey. Note that the Value field will be disabled.
Is Not Started When the AU/chapter/section/page/test/test section/survey is
in the initial state.
Is In Progress Determines if the user has started (that is, accessed at least
one page in) the AU/chapter/section/test/test section/survey,
but has not completed the AU/chapter/section/test/test sec-
tion/survey.
Is Completed Determines if the user has completed all the pages within the
AU/chapter/section/test/test section/survey. Pages become
completed when the user enters them (On Show). A graded
test must be submitted and passed to be Is Completed. A
survey must be submitted to be Is Completed.
Is Started Determines if the user has completed (that is, accessed) a
page within the AU/chapter/section/test/test section/survey,
or the user has completed all the pages within the
AU/chapter/section/test section, or passed and submitted a
test or survey. (Essentially, this equates to Is In Progress or
Is Completed.)
Is Not In Progress Determines if the user has not started the AU/chapter-
/section/test/test section/survey, or the user has completed all
the pages within the AU/chapter/section/test section, or
passed and submitted a test or survey. (Essentially, this
equates to Is Not Started or Is Completed.)
Is Not Completed Determines if the user has not started the AU/chapter-
/section/test/test section/survey, or the user has completed
(that is, accessed) a page within the AU/chapter-
/section/test/test section/survey but not all pages, or has not
passed and/or submitted a test or survey. (Essentially, this
equates to Is Not Started or Is In Progress.)
The condition of these status relationships will contain the following values:
Scenario Is Not Is In Pro- Is Com- Is Star- Is Not In Is Not

- 572 -
 Started gress pleted ted Progress Completed
If something has not True False False False True True
been started
If something has been False True False True False True
started but not com-
pleted
If something has been False False True True True False
completed
See also: Answer and response variable value formats
Additional resources: Status Tracking with Lectora V11.3 - Trivantis Community

Executing an alternative action when conditions

are not met
You can execute an alternative action when the defined conditions of the action have not
been met.
Consider the following example:
l Action A
The action specified on the Action ribbon
l MyVariable = 1
The condition specified in the Conditions group.
l Action B
The action specified in the Else Action group.
If MyVariable = 1, Action A will execute and otherwise, Action B will execute when the
trigger specified in the Trigger group is fired.
To execute an alternative action when the conditions are not met:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Else Action group,use the Action list to select the action to execute when
the conditions are not met. The Target field is enabled. when the action requires a
target.
3. Specify the target and any additional information as necessary.
See also: Selecting an action
Selecting an action's target

Adding an action
You can assign actions to actions.
To add an action to an action:

- 573 -
 1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the original action. The Action rib-
bon is displayed.
2. Click Add Action from the Manage group. The action is added just below the
original action in the Title Explorer and the Action ribbon is displayed.
3. Configure the settings of the new action. For details, see About actions and Adding
an action.
The action is added to the action.
See also: Using the action pane

Using the Action pane

The action pane is a dockable window that provides you detailed information about the
actions defined in the current title.
To open the Action pane:
1. In Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the action. The Action ribbon is dis-
played.
2. In the Manage group, click Action Pane. The action pane opens. Alternatively,
you can open the Action pane by clicking Action Pane from the Panes group on
the View ribbon.
3. Using the window, you can complete the following tasks:
View action The table lists the name, trigger, action, and target, and condition for
details each action. For details about changing these settings, see Adding
an action.
Reorder You can reorder actions in two ways: select an action and either
actions click Move Action Down and Move Action Up or place your
cursor within the first column and drag the action to re-order the list.
The location of the action will change in the Title Explorer.
Add an Add actions as necessary. To add an action, click Add Action .
action Alternatively, you can type Ctrl+4. The action is added to the list and
displayed in the Title Explorer.
Delete an Delete actions as necessary. To delete an action, select the action
action and click Delete in the final column. The action is deleted from
the list and removed from the Title Explorer.

Working with variables

The program gives you the ability to use variables within your title. Every title has a set of
reserved variables and you can create your own variables. Variables can be used to cre-
ate conditional actions or display dynamic information to the user.
This section covers the following topics:

- 574 -
 l About variables
l Reserved variables
l Using the Variable Manager
l Modifying variable values
l Displaying a variable value
l Displaying variables inline within text blocks
See also: Using the Variable Manager

About variables
Variables are logical objects within a title that enable you to store, modify, and test val-
ues of numbers or strings during the runtime of a published title. You can conditionally
perform actions in a title based on variable values and you can display variable values
to the user.
There are many uses for variables, including branching to different sections of a title
depending on user preferences and displaying information based on multiple user
inputs. Variables enable you, as the title author, to capture what a user has done (such
as click on a button) within the title and to conditionally act on that at a later time.
For example, suppose you want to give users three opportunities to answer a question
correctly. You can create a question with a Check My Answer button. The user will click
on the button to see if their answer is correct. Every time the user clicks on the button,
you can increment the value of a Question_Count variable. The Question_Count vari-
able is initially 0, and can modified to increase by a value of 1 every time the user clicks
on the Check My Answer button. Finally, you can execute a conditional action that if the
Question_Count is greater than or equal to 3, reveal the correct answer to the user.

See also:Answer and response variable value formats

- 575 -
Reserved variables
Every title has a set of predefined, reserved variables. These variables are read-only;
they cannot be modified. Additional variables, some of which are read-only, are avail-
able within the title depending upon the type of title you are creating.
See also: Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS
Predefined Variable Description Dynamically
Updated?
AICC_Student_Lan- This variable contains either the language of the Yes
guage student's interface in the LMS or the language that
the student selected within the content itself.
BrowserType This variable contains the name of the browser No
currently used to view the title. The variable is set
to Lectora when run in preview mode, and Lect-
oraViewer when run as a title published for offline
use. For titles published to the Web, the variable
value contains the browser used to view the title,
such as Internet Explorer.
BT_Score_<object For BranchTrack simulations, this variable con- Yes
name> tains the score of the BranchTrack scenario,
where <object name> is the name of the
BranchTrack object. If the scenario has not yet
been started or the scenario cannot be scored, the
value is 0. For details about accessing the
BranchTrack editor and adding BranchTrack sim-
ulations to your title, see Starting BranchTrack
and Working with BranchTrack objects.
BT_Path_<object For BranchTrack simulations, this variable con- Yes
name> tains the path (selections) through the
BranchTrack scenario, where <object name> is
the name of the BranchTrack object. The scenario
path is identified as a colon-separated value, such
as ":1:2:7:25:". For details about accessing the
BranchTrack editor and adding BranchTrack sim-
ulations to your title, see Starting BranchTrack
and Working with BranchTrack objects.
CurrentChapterName This variable contains the name of the chapter Yes
that includes the current page being displayed. If
there is no current chapter, then this variable has
the value of Unknown.
CurrentDate For titles published to the Web, this variable con- No

- 576 -
 tains today’s date in the form <Day of the Week>,
<Month> <Day>, <Year>. For example: Wed-
nesday, March 11, 2014. For titles published for
offline use, this variable contains today’s date in
the form <Month> <Day>, <Year>. For example:
March 11, 2008.
The date and time display differently
depending on the user's browser and locale
settings. To avoid this situation, use the
Date Format and Time Format publish
strings to specify the appropriate text to be
used at runtime. For details, see Specifying
publish strings preferences.
CurrentPageName This variable contains the name of the current Yes
page.
CurrentView This variable contains the name of the device and Yes
orientation currently being used to view the title.
This will be one of the following values: Desktop,
PhonePortrait, PhoneLandscape, TabletPortrait,
and TabletLandscape.
CurrentSectionName This variable contains the name of the section that Yes
includes the current page being displayed. If there
is no current section, then this variable has the
value of Unknown.
CurrentTime This variable contains the current time in the form No
hh:mm AM/PM. For example, 4:19 PM.
The date and time display differently
depending on the user's browser and locale
settings. To avoid this situation, use the
Date Format and Time Format publish
strings to specify the text to be used at
runtime. For details, see Specifying publish
strings preferences.
CurrentTitleName This variable contains the name of the title. Yes
ElapsedTime This variable contains the amount of time the user No
has spent within the current title.
PageInChapter This variable contains the current page number Yes
relative to the pages within the current chapter.
PagesInChapter This variable contains the total number of pages Yes
in the current chapter.

- 577 -
PageInSection This variable contains the current page number Yes
relative to the pages within the current section.
PagesInSection This variable contains the total number of pages Yes
in the current section.
PageInTitle This variable contains the current page number Yes
relative to the entire title. If your title contains
frames, this variable contains the current page rel-
ative to the total number of pages within that
frame.
PagesInTitle This variable contains the total number of pages Yes
in the title. If your title contains frames, this vari-
able contains the total number of pages within that
frame.
Platform This variable contains the name of the platform on No
which the published title is running. For offline-
published titles, this could contain Microsoft Win-
dows NT, Microsoft Windows XP, and so on. For
titles published to the Web, the variable contains
Win32 for 32-bit Windows platforms, and MacPPC
for Macintosh PowerPC platforms. Values can
also include:
• iPad
• Win32 (Windows operating system)
• iPhone
• MacIntel (Mac™ operating system)
• Linux (Android™ operating system)
PublishDate This variable contains the date and time that the No
title was published in the form <Month> <Day>,
<Year> hh:mm AM/PM. For example, July 21,
2008 4:20 PM.
<test name>_Score For each test in the title, a variable will be created No
that will contain the score of the test. If the test has
not yet been taken or the test cannot be scored,
the value is 0.
<test name>_<test For each test section in the title, a variable will be No
section>_Score created that will contain the score of the test sec-
tion. If the test has not yet been taken or the test
cannot be scored, the value is 0.
Question_#### This variable contains the user's answer to the Yes
question. This variable name can be changed

- 578 -
 within the question's properties.
RadioGroup_#### This variable contains the user's selection from Yes
the radio buttons contained in the group. This vari-
able name can be changed within the radio button
group's properties.
Radio_#### For each radio button (not contained in a radio but- Yes
ton group) in the title, a variable will be created
that will contain whether the radio button is selec-
ted. If selected, the variable will have a value of
"on" and otherwise will have no value. This vari-
able name can be changed within the radio but-
ton's properties.
Checkbox_#### For each check box in the title, a variable will be Yes
created that will contain whether the check box is
selected. If selected, the variable will have a value
of "on" and otherwise will have no value. This vari-
able name can be changed within the check box's
properties.
Entry_#### For each entry field in the title, a variable will be Yes
created that will contain what the user has typed
within the entry field. This variable name can be
changed within the entry field's properties.
DropList_#### For each drop-down in the title, a variable will be Yes
created that will contain what the user has selec-
ted from the drop-down list. This variable name
can be changed within the drop-down list's prop-
erties.
List_#### For each list box in the title, a variable will be cre- Yes
ated that will contain what the user has selected
from the list box. This variable name can be
changed within the list box's properties.
ProgressBar_#### For each custom progress bar in the title, a vari- Yes
able will be created that will contain the value of
the range position of the progress bar. You can
select to associate this progress bar with an exist-
ing variable, a new variable, or no variable.
If you have designated your title as an AICC/SCORM for LMS title type, the following
additional variables are available within your title:
Predefined Vari- Description Modifiable?
able

- 579 -
AICC_Core_ This variable contains information used by the pub- Yes
Lesson lished title to properly calculate the score of the user in
the current title. If you modify the value of this variable
within the content of a title that contains more than one
automatically graded test, then the AICC_Score of the
student cannot be properly updated and reflected to
the AICC/SCORM Learning Management System
(LMS).
For all versions of SCORM including SCORM
2004, this variable is typically referred to by your
LMS as cmi.suspend_data.
AICC_Core_ This variable contains the information required by the No
Vendor program when running an AICC-compliant title within
an AICC learning management system. This variable
is not used by published content.
AICC_Course_ID This variable contains the id of the course in the No
AICC/SCORM learning management system.
AICC_Credit This variable reflects whether the AICC/SCORM title is No
being taken for "credit" or just in a "browse" mode.
AICC_Lesson_ID This variable contains the name of the title's No
assignable unit.
AICC_Lesson_ This variable contains the current location within the Yes
Location title content. The published content sets this variable
on every page of the title to reflect the current location
of the student within the AICC/SCORM LMS.
For all versions of SCORM including SCORM
2004, this variable is typically referred to by your
LMS as cmi.location.
AICC_Lesson_ This variable contains the current status of the course Yes
Status within the AICC/SCORM LMS. The program sets the
value of this variable to incomplete. The
AICC/SCORM LMS will further modify the variable
based on the current AICC_Score for the user and the
value specified as the Mastery Score.
For SCORM 2004, this variable is typically
referred to by your LMS as cmi.success_
status . For all other versions of SCORM, it is
typically referred to as cmi.core.lesson_
status.

- 580 -
AICC_Score This variable contains the average of all test scores in Yes
the published title. If you modify the value of this vari-
able within the content of a course that contains more
than one automatically graded test, the modification
will be lost when the user completes an automatically
graded test.
For SCORM 2004, this variable is typically
referred to by your LMS as cmi.score.raw.
For all other versions of SCORM, it is typically
referred to as cmi.core.score.raw.
AICC_Student_ID This variable contains the user id as reported by the No
AICC/SCORM LMS.
For SCORM 2004, this variable is typically
referred to by your LMS as cmi.learner_id.
For all other versions of SCORM, it is typically
referred to as cmi.core.student_id.
AICC_Student_ This variable contains the user name as reported by No
Name the AICC/SCORM LMS.
For SCORM 2004, this variable is typically
referred to by your LMS as cmi.learner_
name. For all other versions of SCORM, it is typ-
ically referred to as cmi.core.student_
name.
AICC_Time This variable contains the total time the user has been Yes
in the published title. This value is automatically
updated while the student is viewing the title. If you
modify the value of this variable, the modification will
be lost when the student exits the title. Also, this vari-
able must be in the format of HH:MM:SS:mm to be
valid when reported to the AICC LMS.
For SCORM 2004, this variable is typically
referred to by your LMS as cmi.total_time.
Additionally, cmi.session_time is also auto-
matically set.
CMI_Core_Entry This variable is only accessible in SCORM published No
titles and contains information related to whether the
student has previously accessed the published title.
For SCORM 2004 this variable is typically

- 581 -
 referred to by your LMS as cmi.entry and for all
other versions of SCORM it is referred to as
cmi.core.entry.
CMI_Core_Exit This variable is only accessible in SCORM-published Yes
titles and is used to indicate how or why the student
exited the published title.
For SCORM 2004 this variable is typically
referred to by your LMS as cmi.exit and for all
other versions of SCORM it is referred to as cmi.-
core.exitcmi.core.exit.
This exit value is automatically set to suspend if
an unfinished course is being attempted, oth-
erwise it is left alone. Some LMS vendors
require specific values that you can set through
this write-only variable. If your LMS vendor
requests that the course needs to set this vari-
able, it can be done with a Modify Variable
action. For details about configuring the Modify
Variable action, see Adding an action.
CMI_Com- This variable is only accessible in SCORM 2004 pub- Yes
pletion_Status lished titles and determines the point at which the stu-
dent has actually completed viewing the published
title. In a SCORM 2004 published course, the author
MUST set this variable at the point in the course that
the student has been determined to have completed
viewing the necessary content for the course.
• Lectora supports SCORM 2004 3rd Edition.
The value must be one of these four tokens:
“completed”, “incomplete”, “not attemp-
ted”, or “unknown”. The hosting LMS might
require different values if it does not conform to
the same specification.
• This variable is typically referred to by your
LMS as cmi.completion_status.
If the title is being created for placement on the CourseMill learning management sys-
tem, the following additional variables are available:
Predefined Vari- Description Modifiable?
ables
CM_Course_ID This variable contains the ID of the course as No

- 582 -
 defined in CourseMill.
CM_Course_ This variable contains the name of the title as No
Name defined in CourseMill
CM_Student_ID This variable contains the student ID as reported by No
CourseMill.
CM_Student_ This variable contains the student name as reported No
Name by CourseMill.

Using the Variable Manager

You can use the Variable Manager to browse, add, edit, and delete variables. All
reserved and user-defined variables within your title are accessible from the Variable
Manager window.
Click Variable Manager from the Tools ribbon. The Variable Manager window

opens. Use the tabs within the Variable Manager window to display the lists of variables
within your title. You can display all of the User-Defined variables, Unused variables, or
Reserved variables by clicking the corresponding tabs.
Use the Variable Manager window to complete the following tasks:
l View a variable's usage
l Create a variable
l Edit a variable
l Delete a variable

Viewing a variable's usage

The Variable Manager will display the details of where your variables are being used
within the title.
To view a variable's usage:
1. Click Variable Manager from the Tools ribbon. The Variable Manager win-

dow opens.
2. Click the User-Defined tab if you want to see the usage of one of your user-
defined variables or click the Reserved tab if you want to see the usage of a
reserved variable.
3. Select the variable within the list. The variable's usage details are displayed within
the Variable Used box.
If the variable is used within an action at the title level, the action name will appear
within the list. Otherwise, the specific chapter, section, or page containing the
action using the variable will be displayed. For example:

- 583 -
 l Action 1
l Chapter 1 > Page 1 > My Action
l Chapter 2 > Section 3 > Page 4 > My Other Action
Click on any of the locations within the Variable Used box to highlight the cor-
responding action within the Title Explorer of your title.
4. Click Close.

Creating a variable
Every title has a set of reserved variables, however, you can also create your own vari-
ables. Provide a recognizable name for the variable and specify the initial value. Values
can be retained between sessions, if necessary.
See also: Reserved variables
To create a variable:
1. Click Variable Manager from the Tools ribbon. The Variable Manager win-

dow opens. Click on the User-Defined tab if the Variable Manager window is not
already opened to this tab.
2. Click the Add button. The new variable is added to the list.
3. Use the controls within the Variable Information box to specify the following:
Variable Name Specify the name for the variable. This name must be unique
to all existing variable names. Variable names cannot contain
spaces or special characters.
Initial Value Specify the initial value for the variable. This is the default
value of the variable when the published title is launched.
Retain variable Select this to retain the variable's value through subsequent
value between launches of the published title. With this selected, if the vari-
sessions able value has changed, the next time the user launches the
published title, the variable will load with the previously mod-
ified value.
Random initial Select this to assign a random integer value to a variable.
value When you select this option, specify the Min Value and Max
Value in the fields provided. When the published title is
launched, the default value of the variable will be a random
number greater than or equal to the Min Value specified and
less than or equal to the Max Value specified.
4. Click OK to create the new variable.

- 584 -
Editing a variable
When you have created a user-defined variable, you can edit its name, initial value, and
whether or not it is retained. Reserved variables cannot be edited.
To edit a variable:
1. Click Variable Manager from the Tools ribbon. The Variable Manager win-

dow opens. Click on the User-Defined tab if the Variable Manager window is not
already opened to this tab.
2. Select the user-defined variable you want to edit and click the Edit button.
3. Use the controls within the Variable Information box to edit the following:
Variable Name Specify the name for the variable. This name must be unique to
all existing variable names. Variable names cannot contain
spaces or special characters.
Initial Value Specify the initial value for the variable. This is the default value
of the variable when the published title is launched.
Retain variable Select this to retain the variable's value through subsequent
value between launches of the published title. With this selected, if the variable
sessions value has changed, the next time the user launches the pub-
lished title, the variable will load with the previously modified
value.
Random initial Select this to assign a random integer value to a variable. When
value you select this option, specify the Min Value and Max Value in
the fields provided. When the published title is launched, the
default value of the variable will be a random number greater
than or equal to the Min Value specified and less than or equal
to the Max Value specified.
4. Click OK to accept the changes.

Deleting a variable
You can delete unused variables within your title. Reserved variables and user-defined
variables being used within your title cannot be deleted.
To delete a variable:
1. Click Variable Manager from the Tools ribbon. The Variable Manager win-

dow opens. Click the Unused tab.

2. Select the variable you want to delete and click the Delete button. If you want to
delete all unused variables within your title, click the Delete All button.
3. Click Close.

- 585 -
Modifying variable values
You can modify the value of a variable during the runtime of a published title. The
Modify Variable action enables you to replace, round, add to, subtract from, multiply and
divide variable values. All variables can be accessed from anywhere within your title, so
this action can be added to any location within your title.
To modify a variable value:
1. Add an action to your title and select Modify Variable from the Action list in the
Action and Target group on the Action ribbon. For details about adding an action
see Adding an action.
2. Select the target variable name from the Target list. This is the variable whose
value you want to modify. It can be a string-valued variable (containing non-
numeric characters) or a number-valued variable (containing only numeric char-
acters). If you have not created the variable you want to modify, click the New Vari-
able submenu item on the Target list and add a new variable. For details, see
Creating a variable.
3. Select how you want to modify the variable from the Type list. Choose from the fol-
lowing:
Add to Vari- For number-valued variables, this will result in the mathematical
able addition of the target variable's value and the value specified in
the Value field. For example, if the target variable's value is 3 and
the value specified in the Value field is 2, the resulting value of
the target variable is 5.
For string-valued variables, this will result in the joining of the tar-
get variable's value and the value specified in the Value field. For
example, if the target variable's value is Hello and the value spe-
cified in the Value field is World, the resulting value of the target
variable is HelloWorld.
Divide Vari- This modification type is only applicable for number-valued vari-
able by ables. It will result in the mathematical division of the target vari-
able's value by the value specified in the Value field. For
example, if the target variable's value is 21 and the value spe-
cified in the Value field is 7, the resulting value of the target vari-
able is 3.
Multiply Vari- This modification type is only applicable for number-valued vari-
able by ables. It will result in the mathematical multiplication of the target
variable's value and the value specified in the Value field. For
example, if the target variable's value is 3 and the value specified
in the Value field is 7, the resulting value of the target variable is
21.

- 586 -
 Round Down This modification type is only applicable for number-valued vari-
Variable ables. It will result in the target variable's value being replaced by
the greatest whole number lower than its current value. For
example, if the target variable's value is 3.75, the resulting value
of the target variable is 3.
Round Vari- This modification type is only applicable for number-valued vari-
able ables. It will result in the target variable's value being replaced by
the nearest whole number greater or lower than its current value.
For example, if the target variable's value is greater than or equal
to 3.5 and less than 4, the resulting value of the target variable is
4. If the target variable's value is less than 3.5 but greater than 3,
the resulting value of the target variable is 3.
Set Variable This modification type will replace the current value of the target
Contents value with the value specified in the Value field.
Subtract from For number-valued variables, this will result in the mathematical
Variable subtraction of the value that you specify in the Value field from the
target variable's value. For example, if the target variable's value
is 5 and the value specified in the Value field is 3, the resulting
value of the target variable is 2.
For string-valued variables, this will result in the removal of all
instances of the value that you specify in the Value field from the
target variable's value. For example, if the target variable's value
is ABACAB and the value specified in the Value field is A, the res-
ulting value of the target variable is BCB.
4. When necessary, specify the value in the Value field by which you want to modify
the target variable's value. You can directly specify a value, select a random num-
ber or specify the value of an existing variable. To select a random number, enter
RAND(min, max) in the Value field. The random number assigned will be greater
than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value
specified. The random number generated will be used to modify the Target vari-
able. To specify the value of an existing variable, enter VAR(Variable_Name) in
the Value field. The Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value
should be used to modify the Target variable.
When you have completed defining your action, you can preview the functionality of the
action within your title by clicking the Run Mode or Preview Mode toolbar graphic on the
Mode bar. You can also preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking
the Debug Mode toolbar graphic on the View ribbon. This will also launch the Debug
Window, which will display when the action was fired and any variable manipulations
that occur with the action.
See also: Switching between modes

- 587 -
Displaying a variable value
Using actions, you can display the value of a variable within a title. This enables you to
customize your title for each user. Variables are displayed by setting the contents of a
text block to the value of a variable. For example, suppose you want to display the page
number on each page. You can create a single action to display the value of the
PageInTitle variable, and through inheritance, the page number will appear on every
page of the title.
To display a variable value, complete the controls on the Action ribbon as follows:
l From the Trigger list in the Trigger group, select Show.
l From the Action list in the Action and Target group, select Change Contents
l From the Target list, select the text block into which you want the variable value to
be displayed. This enables the Value list.
l From the Value list, select the name of the variable (PageInTitle, for example) you
want to display. If necessary, click the expand arrow in the lower-right corner to
enter more information.
When you have completed defining your action, you can preview and test the func-
tionality of the action within your title in Run Mode, Preview Mode, or Debug
Mode. For details about switching between modes, see Switching between modes.
See also: Adding a text block and typing the text within the text block
Displaying variables inline within text blocks
Understanding inheritance
Answer and response variable value formats

Displaying variables inline within text blocks

You can display the value of variables inline within text blocks. This allows you to cus-
tomize the text based on the current value of variables in a title.
To display the variable's value inline within the text, include the VAR(varName) syntax.
The syntax is used as a placeholder that is replaced with the current value of the vari-
able when the title is run. For example, a text block with the text "Hello VAR(myVar)",
provided that the value of myVar on page load is "World", the user at run time would see
"Hello World".
l You can also add and display the value of variables inline within text using
the Variable drop-list located on the Properties ribbon for text. For details,
see Adding variables from the Text Properties ribbon.
l If you do not want your VAR expression to be processed, place "\\" before the
VAR expression. (For example, "Hello \\VAR(myVar)" will result in "Hello
VAR(myVar)".)

- 588 -
Select from the reserved variables or the variables that you have defined. Use all upper-
case for "VAR" and no spaces are allowed in between the parenthesis and the variable
name. If the variable name does not exist, then the user will see VAR(varName) exactly
as shown in the Publisher.
If you do not want your VAR expression to be processed, place "\\" before the VAR
expression. (For example, "Hello \\VAR(myVar)" will result in "Hello \\VAR(myVar)
".)
For details about using the Variable drop-list in the Properties for text, see Adding a vari-
able from the Text Properties ribbon.

- 589 -
Publishing a title
While creating your title, you can publish it to the desired format, to the Web or for offline
use, for example. You can also publish your title to meet a specific standard, such as
AICC, SCORM and xAPI, or to the CourseMill learning management system. Addi-
tionally, you can publish your title for online review to ReviewLink.
View these topics for more information about publishing a title:
l Publishing to ReviewLink
l Publishing for offline use
l Publishing to HTML
l Publishing to CourseMill
l Publishing to AICC
l Publishing to SCORM
l Publishing to xAPI
l Publishing to xAPI cmi5
l Command line publishing
l Publishing options

Publishing to ReviewLink
ReviewLink is an online review tool developed by Trivantis. ReviewLink allows you to
share titles with online reviewers and capture their feedback. Reviewers can add com-
ments and attach files to reviewed pages to provide feedback. Comments and attach-
ments are tabulated and presented to both publishers and reviewers so they can
manage the status of the comments and complete the review cycle.
You must provide your ReviewLink user ID and password to publish titles to
ReviewLink. Sign-up is available through the publishing process. When you sign-up,
your ReviewLink credentials are saved within your preferences. See Setting ReviewLink
preferences.
To publish your title to ReviewLink, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Publish in the Publish group
and select ReviewLink. The program performs an error check and displays the res-
ults in the Publish Title to ReviewLink window.
See also: Running an error check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The

- 590 -
 Publish for ReviewLink Options window opens.
5. If you have not yet signed up with ReviewLink or if ReviewLink does not recognize
your Lectora product, you will be prompted to sign-up or sign-in.
l To sign up, specify an Email address and password for your new ReviewLink
account. You will use this email address and password to log-in to
ReviewLink. Re-enter your password in the Confirm field and click OK to cre-
ate your new account.
l To sign in, select I already have a ReviewLink account, provide the Email
address and password for your account, and click OK.
6. Use the following tabs on the Publishing Location window to specify your pub-
lishing settings:
l ReviewLink Options
l HTML Options
l Compress and Convert
7. Once you have completed configuring the publishing options, click OK. Your title is
published to your local directory. When the publishing process has completed,
click the Upload Title button to upload your title to ReviewLink.
When the upload process has completed, you can view your title in ReviewLink.
Click the ReviewLink button to launch ReviewLink. Alternatively, using a
QR Code reader, scan the QR Code in the Publish Title for Review window to
quickly launch ReviewLink.
Reviewers are sent an email that provides detailed information about how to
access and review the content.
8. Click the Done button to close the publishing window.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it and upload it to
ReviewLink so reviewers can see your changes. Repeat these steps as necessary to
republish your title.
Additional resources: Lectora and Lectora Online: Streamline Your Review Cycle with
ReviewLink

Publishing for offline use

You can create a title that can be used offline. The title does not require that users be
connected to the Internet. Additionally, you can create a zip or executable file and you
can preview the title after it is published.
To publish your title for offline use, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Publish in the Publish group

- 591 -
 and select Offline. The program performs an error check and displays the results in
the Publish Title for Offline Use window.
See also: Running an error check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The Pub-
lish for Offline Use window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:
l Offline Options
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Click OK to publish your title to your local directory.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window.
You can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. To do so, click
the drop-down list in the Preview button and select Open Published Folder. In the
file list, double-click LectoraViewer.
Your title is published for offline use.

Publishing to HTML
You can publish your title in HTML format if you want to post it to the Internet or your own
Intranet. When you publish in HTML, the program will create the necessary files for you
to upload to a Web server.
Internet Explorer allows you to define which version's engine is used to render the
content on a page. The Publisher automatically sets the compatibility mode for
Internet Explorer to use the latest standard. This is equivalent to setting IE's com-
patibility to Edge mode. Edge-mode tells Internet Explorer to display content in the
highest mode available. If a future release of Internet Explorer supports a higher
compatibility mode, all pages set to Edge-mode will appear in the highest mode
supported by that version. Other browsers are not affected.
When you publish to HTML, the actions in your title are converted to Web-based pro-
gramming code, such as JavaScript. If your images are not already in .jpg or .gif format,
they are automatically converted.
To publish your title to HTML, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Publish in the Publish group
and select Web (HTML). The program performs an error check and displays the

- 592 -
 results in the Publish Title to HTML window.
See also: Running an Error Check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The Pub-
lish to HTML window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:
l HTML Options
l FTP
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options, click OK. Your
title is published to your local directory. When the publishing process has com-
pleted, click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. If
you did not configure FTP settings, this option is not available.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. When available, you can
also click the Preview button to launch the published title. Use the pull-down on
the Preview button to choose the browser or open the location of the published
files.
Viewing the title from the local file system in Google Chrome will not honor
Seamless Play publishing. The title will display as though using non-Seam-
less Play. To review the title with Seamless Play, use the Preview button to
choose the browser. For information about enabling and disabling Seamless
Play, see Specifying HTML options.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it so the new changes
are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your
title.

Publishing to CourseMill
CourseMill is a learning management system developed by Trivantis and designed espe-
cially for easy integration of titles. These learning management systems make the deliv-
ery, management, and tracking of online learning across your organization easier and
more affordable. For more information about CourseMill, visithttp://trivantis.-
com/products/coursemill-learning-management/.
Before publishing to CourseMill, make sure the CourseMill server has been defined
within your preferences.
See also: Setting CourseMill preferences

- 593 -
To publish your title to a CourseMill server, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. From the Publish menu, select Publish to CourseMill. The program performs an
error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to CourseMill window.
See also: Running an error check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The Pub-
lish CourseMill/SCORM Location window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:
l CourseMill Options
l SCORM Options
l AU Options
l HTML Options
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options, click OK. Your
title is published to your local directory. When the publishing process has com-
pleted, click the Send Title button to upload your title to the CourseMill server spe-
cified.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. When available, you can
also click the Preview button to launch the published title.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it so the new changes
are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your
title.

Publishing to AICC
The Aviation Industry CBT Committee (AICC) was established in 1988 to define stand-
ards on how Computer Managed Instruction (CMI) systems should operate in presenting
course materials to students. For the latest specifications, documents, and explanations
of terms, see the official AICC website (http://www.aicc.org).
Titles published will meet or exceed the guidelines for a Web-based CMI system.
To publish your title to an AICC system, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. From the Publish menu, select Publish to AICC/Web-Based. The program per-
forms an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to AICC

- 594 -
 Compliant Web Content window.
See also: Running an Error Check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The Pub-
lish AICC Location window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:
l AICC Options
l HTML Options
l FTP
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options, click OK. Your
title is publish to your local directory. When the publishing process has completed,
click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. If you did
not configure FTP settings, this option is not available.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window.When available, you can
also click the Preview button to launch the published title.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it so the new changes
are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your
title.

Publishing to SCORM
The Shareable Content Object Reference Model (SCORM) is a set of inter-related tech-
nical specifications built upon the work of the AICC, IMS, and IEEE to create a unified
content model for Web-based learning content. For the latest specifications, documents,
and explanations of terms, see the official SCORM website (http://www.adlnet.gov/).
Titles published with the Publisher will meet or exceed the guidelines for SCORM 1.0,
1.1, 1.2 and 2004.
To publish your title to a SCORM system, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. From the Publish menu, select Publish to SCORM/Web-Based. The program
performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to SCORM
Compliant Web Content window.
See also: Running an Error Check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1

- 595 -
 and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The Pub-
lish SCORM Location window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:
l SCORM Options
l HTML Options
l FTP
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options, click OK. Your
title is published to your local directory. When the publishing process has com-
pleted, click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. If
you did not configure FTP settings, this option is not available.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. When available, you can
also click the Preview button to launch the published title.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it so the new changes
are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your
title.

Publishing to xAPI
The Publish to xAPI option is part of an evolving standard that enables users on learning
management systems to download the next generation of SCORM-compliant materials,
called Experience (xAPI). For the latest specifications, documents, and explanations of
terms, see the official xAPI website (https://experienceapi.com/).
For more information about working with xAPI, including information about how to set up
your titles to use xAPI, publishing with the xAPI options, and understanding the xAPI
experience statements, see Working with the Experience API (xAPI).
To publish your title for xAPI, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Publish in the Publish group
and select xAPI. The program performs an error check and displays the results in
the Publish Title to xAPI Compliant Web Content window.
See also: Running an error check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The

- 596 -
 Publish to xAPI window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:
l xAPI Options
l HTML Options
l FTP
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options, click OK. Your
title is published to your local directory. When the publishing process has com-
pleted, click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. If
you did not configure FTP settings, this option is not available.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. When available, you can
also click the Preview button to launch the published title. Use the pull-down on
the Preview button to choose the browser or open the location of the published
files.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it so the new changes
are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your
title.

Publishing to xAPI cmi5

The Publish to xAPI cmi5 option is part of the xAPI standard that complies with the cmi5
standard. For more information about xAPI and cmi5, visit https://-
experienceapi.com/cmi5/.
To publish your title for xAPI cmi5, follow these steps:
1. Save your title.
2. On the Home ribbon, click the drop-down list under Publish in the Publish group
and select xAPI. The program performs an error check and displays the results in
the Publish Title to xAPI cmi5 Compliant Web Content window.
See also:Running an error check
3. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary, click Cancel and repeat steps 1
and 2 until your title is free of errors.
4. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. The Pub-
lish to xAPI window opens.
5. Use the following tabs on the Publish Location window to specify your publishing
settings:

- 597 -
 l xAPI cmi5 Options
l HTML Options
l FTP
l Compress and Convert
l Languages
6. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options, click OK. Your
title is published to your local directory. When the publishing process has com-
pleted, click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. If
you did not configure FTP settings, this option is not available.
7. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. When available, you can
also click the Preview button to launch the published title. Use the pull-down on
the Preview button to choose the browser or open the location of the published
files.
When you make changes to your title, you will need to republish it so the new changes
are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your
title.

Command line publishing

The program supports command line publishing. This enables you to use a command
line invocation of the program to publish to the standard publishing formats that the pro-
gram supports. A benefit of this feature is that a third-party application can issue the
batch command to publish without having to go through the interface to publish the title.
This is an advanced feature and should only be used if you are familiar with com-
mand line programming.
If there are special parameters that you want to use when publishing using the command
line interface, you must first publish the title using the program and select those options.
The command line publishing interface will use the most-recent options that have been
specified within the program.
To invoke command line publishing, open an MS-DOS command prompt, and enter the
following:
Lectora [/p[option]] [/c] [/o log] title
/p[option] Publish the title to the necessary format, where option is one of the following:
SFX Single File Executable
HTML HTML
AICC AICC/Web-based
SCORM SCORM/Web-based
XAPI Experience API (xAPI)

- 598 -
/c Create a console window for messages
/o log Optional log file (log) to capture publishing messages
title The full path to the title that you wish to publish
If you have any of the optional publishing packs installed with the program, you can
use the abbreviated name for the publishing option to publish. Also, be sure to sur-
round the whole path with quotation marks if the file path includes spaces in the
name.
For example, you would specify the following to publish the title The Human Eye.awt
to HTML with a console window and logfile, assuming it was downloaded to the
default titles directory:
lectora /pHTML /c /o C:\output.txt
"C:\Users\<yourname>\Documents\My Titles\The Human Eye\The
Human Eye.awt"

Publishing options
Specify the following options when completing the publishing process:
l ReviewLink options
l HTML options
l Compress and Convert options
l Languages options
l Offline options
l FTP options
l CourseMill options
l SCORM options
l AICC options
l xAPI options
l xAPI cmi5 options
l AU options

Specifying ReviewLink options

Use the controls on the ReviewLink Options tab to specify publishing options per-
taining to ReviewLink. Complete the controls as follows:
Title Name Specifies the name of the current title.
Update Existing Content This control is enabled when your sign-on credentials
and title name is recognized by ReviewLink. Select
this radio button to publish the title as a revision to an

- 599 -
 existing content item. Optionally you can update the
status of existing comments within the content and
notify your reviewers of the update.
l Select Update status of “New” and “Not OK”
comments to “Fixed” to inform reviewers that
they can verify the changes for your update.
lSelect Notify reviewers of updated content to
send a notification email to reviewers specifying
that the content has been updated.
Publish as New Content Item This control is enabled when your sign-on and title
name is recognized by ReviewLink. Select this radio
button to publish the title as a new content item.
Reviewers Specify the email addresses of the reviewers of this
title. Separate each email address with a comma.
Reviewers are sent an email that provides detailed
information about how to access and review the con-
tent.
Comments Due Enable this check box to optionally specify a due-date
for comments. The current due date is specified in the
field. Click the calendar icon to adjust the date.
Account Settings Click this button to view and manage your ReviewLink
account settings. See Specifying ReviewLink pref-
erences for details about specifying your ReviewLink
account settings.

Specifying HTML options

Use the HTML Options tab to specify a number of different publishing options:
Destination Folder Specify the directory in which you want to save the res-
ulting files of the published title. Click the Choose
Folder button to navigate and select a location.
This directory listing is for local or network loc-
ations, not the Internet. The program will auto-
matically create the files in a new folder in the
same working directory as the .awt title file, unless
otherwise specified.
Publish all pages Select this to publish all the pages and resources regard-
less of whether they have been updated.
Publish only updated pages Select this to publish only the pages and resources that
have been updated since your title was last published.
This option is only available if you have previously pub-

- 600 -
 lished the title.
Create a zip file Select this to compress all files into a single Zip file.
File name of first page Specify the HTML page name of the first page of your
title. By default, this is index.html.
Use Lightbox Pop Ups Select this to display pop-up windows using a Lightbox-
style window. This options is enabled by default.
If you disable this option, pop ups will be dis-
played in a new browser window and your users
might encounter issues with pop-up blockers.
Create ALT tags for images This option is selected by default and will create ALT
and buttons tags for all images and buttons in the title. ALT tags are
created based on the names that are used in your title's
Title Explorer. ALT tags are used by screen readers to
identify the image or button.
Include Title Manager Frame This option enables you to store all variable data locally,
instead of within the browser's cookies. It is suggested to
select this option if your title contains a large number of
questions or variables. Selecting this will increase your
title's performance if your title contains a significant num-
ber of questions or variables.
Convert page names to This option will only default as selected when the pro-
short ID-based names gram encounters a page name with a multi-byte inter-
national character. This option will use the page’s
unique internal number so that the generated HTML
page names are compatible with Web browsers.
Publish for Seamless Play This option is selected by default and provides for auto-
playing of media and smooth flow from page to page,
eliminating the screen wipe commonly associated with
HTML pages.
• For Internet Explorer users, Internet Explorer 10
or newer is required to experience the benefits of
Seamless Play.
• For custom JavaScript relating to Seamless Play
Publishing, see Custom JavaScripting.
Protect content (disables If this option is selected, the program will eliminate the
copying content) functionality of keyboard shortcuts such as copy and
paste, as well as equivalent right-click menu options
within the browser so users cannot easily copy content
material.
Disable browser resize of For responsive titles, select this to prevent non-desktop

- 601 -
published content views from being displayed when the browser window is
re-sized. For details about creating responsive content,
see Working with responsive content.
Scale content to fill window If this option is selected, your content will fill the full size
of the browser. Enable the Fit content to width check
box if you want your content to fill the browser based on
the width of the browser.
• To scale content on mobile devices, see Scale
content to fill mobile device view (RCD only).
• For the best results possible, use a larger, high-
resolution image in the title and then size it appro-
priately for the page. When the image is pub-
lished with Scale content to fill window
enabled, as the image is zoomed, it gets closer to
the original size and will still look crisp. Disabling
Optimize published image sizes when scaling
will also help. This ensures the Publisher will
keep the original size with the published content.
Scale content to fill mobile For responsive titles, if this option is selected, your con-
device view (RCD only) tent will fill the full size of the browser for mobile devices.
For details about creating responsive content, see Work-
ing with responsive content.
Debug Published Content Select this to debug your title within its published format.
If this option is selected and you launch your published
title, an additional debug window will launch, displaying
all of the variable interactions and actions executed
within the published title. When this option is selected,
the Debug Options button is enabled. Click the button
to configure the type of information you want to see in
the debug window.
See also: Setting debug options
Working with the debug window

Specifying compress and convert options

Use the Compress and Convert tab to compress media when publishing. Select the
Audio to MP3, Video to MP4, or Images to JPG check boxes to compress the cor-
responding resource types within your title. Use the sliders to select from ten different
levels of compression.
Selecting to compress your media objects will compress all audio, video, and
image resources within your title. Alternatively, you can compress individual audio

- 602 -
 and video objects. See Converting to MP3 audio and Converting to MP4 video.
When you choose to compress audio and video, the program will automatically convert
all of your title’s audio files to MP3 and all video files to MP4 (not including .flv files).
These are highly-compressed file types that can be played with the Flash plug-in or
using HTML5 and are therefore supported across computer, tablet, and smartphone
browsers. If your audio or video files are already in a compressed format, such as Win-
dows Media Audio (.wma) or Windows Media Video (.wmv), it is not recommended to fur-
ther compress, as this will greatly diminish the quality of your audio or video. However,
the media can not be accessible across both traditional and mobile platforms.
You should also take into consideration the type of audio and video you have added to
your title. If the audio contains simple voice overs or small sound bytes, this kind of audio
can be highly compressed without losing much quality. If the audio is music, high com-
pression will result in a loss of quality of the music. Similarly, if the video contained
within your title does not contain a lot of movement, it can be highly compressed without
losing much quality. Alternatively, if your video contains a lot of movement, compression
will result in a loss of quality of the video.
When you choose to compress images, image types other than .gif, .png or .jpg will be
converted to .jpg files. The program will attempt to compress all images larger than 10k
within your title. Compression will only occur if it results in the image size decreasing by
more than 2k. Otherwise, the image will not be compressed.
l When your compression settings are low, the quality of the audio, video and
images will be maximized and file sizes will be larger.
l When your compression settings are high, the quality of the audio, video and
images will be minimized and the file sizes will be smaller.
l On mobile devices, only .mp3 audio and .mp4 video file types are supported.
Additionally, synchronized actions are only supported with .mp3 audio and
.mp4 video file types. Synchronized actions are actions configured to run at
specific times while the media object is playing, like hiding or showing mes-
sages or moving a pointer on a diagram. For more information, see Adding
and managing the synchronized actions of an audio object and Adding and
managing the synchronized actions of a video object.

Specifying language options

Use the Languages tab if you are publishing your title in multiple languages.
Text from your title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file that
can be translated and used to publish multi-language versions of your title. Use
the Translation Tool to create the RTF of the text in your title. For details, see
Managing translations.

- 603 -
To publish your title in multiple languages, specify the translated RTF file path and folder
name. After your main title is published, the program will publish your translated titles
using the translation files you provide.
To publish in multiple languages:
1. For each additional language to which you want to publish, navigate and select the
RTF file containing the translated text in the Select Translation File (RTF) field,
select the language in the Language pull-down list, select the publish string set in
the Select Publish String Set pull-down list, and specify the name of the folder in
which to copy the translated publish files in the Specify Publish Folder field.
The language you specify using the Language list will not affect the Lan-
guage setting declared for individual text blocks if it is not inherited from the
title.
See also: Specifying publish strings preferences
2. Select Add Language.
3. The information you specified is populated in the Translation File Path table. The
folder containing the published, translated content, will be automatically created
with the name you specify.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each language in which you want to publish your con-
tent.
The main title is published along with the translated versions.

Specifying Offline options

Use the Offline Options tab to specify publishing details. Complete the controls as fol-
lows:
Destination Specify the directory in which you want to save the resulting file or
Folder click the Choose Folder button to navigate and select a location.
This directory listing is for local or network locations, not the
Internet. The program will automatically create the offline files
in a folder in the same working directory as the .awt title file,
unless otherwise specified.
Publish all Select this to publish all the pages and resources regardless of
pages whether they have been updated.
Publish only Select this to publish only the pages and resources that have been
updated pages updated since your title was last published. This option is only avail-
able if you have previously published the title.
Create a zip or Select this to create a single zip file of all the offline files or an execut-
executable file able file. The executable file is created with the same name as the
title. Select Zip File (.zip) to create the zip file or select Executable
File (.exe) to create the executable file.

- 604 -
Replace Icon Select this to use a unique icon representation of the published title.
Selecting this option enables the Browse button. Click the Browse
button to navigate and select the icon you want to use for your title.
The program can only use .ico files for this option.

Specifying FTP options

Use the FTP tab to specify FTP publishing options. You have the ability to immediately
FTP the published title to a Web server. Use the controls on this tab to specify the fol-
lowing:
FTP Title To Select this to enable the Host, Profile, User ID, Password, and Initial
Host Remote Folder fields.
Profile Specify the name of the profile for saving the current FTP settings.
Use the list to select from different profiles. To create a new profile or
change the current profile name, click Save.
Host Specify the host name of your Web server. For example,
www.trivantis.com.
User ID Specify the user ID that can access the Web server.
Password Specify the password that corresponds with the user ID to access the
Web server.
Initial Remote If you are required to publish to a specific directory, specify the dir-
Folder ectory in this field. For example, if you specify MyDirectory, your title
will be published to www.trivantis.com/MyDirectory.
You can also create a new directory by typing in the name of the
directory you want to create in this field.
Use FTP Proxy If you need to connect to your Web server through a proxy or if you are
required to go through a firewall to access your Web server, you can
specify proxy information for transferring your title. Select this to
enable the FTP Proxy Host, Port, and Login to Firewall fields.
Host Specify the host name of your FTP Proxy server.
Port Specify the port number for the FTP Proxy server.
Login to Fire- Select this to enable the User ID and Password fields for logging into
wall a firewall.
User ID Specify the user ID that can access the firewall.
Password Specify the password that corresponds with the user ID to access your
firewall.
Transfer Mode Specify the mode for transferring the published title as either Active
Mode or Passive Mode. Select Passive Mode for transferring to a
server that is not behind a network firewall and the client is behind a
network firewall. Select Active Mode for transferring to a server that is

- 605 -
 behind a network firewall and the client is not behind a network fire-
wall. Consult your network administrator for more information. In most
cases, select Passive Mode since your server is most likely behind a
network firework.
Transfer Mode is disabled if you opt to use the SFTP protocol.

Specifying CourseMill options

Use the CourseMill Options tab to specify CourseMill server login details. Complete the
controls as follows:
Course ID Specify the Course ID that is defined with CourseMill. You must have
the Course ID to send your title to the CourseMill server.
Instructor ID Specify the ID of the instructor that is assigned to the course to which
you are uploading the title.
Password Specify the corresponding instructor's password.

Specifying SCORM options

Use the SCORM Options tab to specify publishing options pertaining to the SCORM sys-
tem. Complete the controls as follows:
Conformance Level Use the list to select the conformance type and level. Select
from
l SCORM 1.0 Compliant
l SCORM 1.1 Compliant
l SCORM 1.2 Compliant
l SCORM 2004 Compliant
The published course Select this option if you want the published title to be launched
will be presented in a from the SCORM system in a new window. When this option
separate window than is selected, and the user exits the published title, the window
the LMS. will close, and the user will be returned to the SCORM system.
The published course Select this to record interaction data for the questions con-
will report Test/Survey tained in the graded test being submitted to the AICC system.
Question Interaction to Enable the Append timestamp to interaction to create
LMS. unique ID to ensure that the interaction ID is unique.
Interaction data includes the following information for each
graded question:
l Question text (CourseMill and SCORM 2004 systems)
l User's answer
l Whether the user's answer is correct or not

- 606 -
 l Time the question was answered
l Amount of time the user spent on the page containing
the answer
Enable the Append timestamp to interaction to create
unique ID. check box if you want a unique ID created each
time the test or survey is taken.
Prompt the user to nav-Select this to enable the automatic bookmarking feature for the
igate to the last viewed published title. When this is selected, and the user is returning
page. to the published title within the SCORM system, the user will
have the option to skip to the page he or she last viewed
within the published title.
Course Creator Specify the name you want the SCORM system to display as
the creator of the published title.
Course ID Specify the ID of the course as it will be known within the
SCORM system.
Course Title Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed
within the SCORM system.
Additional Keywords Specify any additional keywords that can be used to define
(Comma Separated) the content of the course. When users search for courses
within the SCORM system, searched terms are compared to
course titles and keywords and will help users find the content
for which they are searching.
URL of Course Folder Specify the Web address of the location of your course within
(optional) the SCORM system.
Course Description Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want it
to be displayed within the SCORM system.

Specifying AICC options

Use the AICC Options tab to specify publishing options pertaining to the AICC system
and LMS information. Complete the controls as follows:
The published course Select this option if you want the published title to be
will be presented in a launched from the AICC system in a new window. When this
separate window than option is selected, and the user exits the published title, the
the LMS window will close, and the user will be returned to the AICC
system.
The published course Select this to record interaction data for the questions con-
will report Test/Survey tained in the graded test being submitted to the AICC sys-
Question Interaction to tem. Enable the Append timestamp to interaction to
LMS create unique ID to ensure that the interaction ID is unique.
Interaction data includes the following information for each

- 607 -
 graded question:
l User's answer
l Whether the user's answer is correct or not
l Time the question was answered
l Amount of time the user spent on the page containing
the answer
Course will reside on dif- Clear this option if you know that the course will be pub-
ferent network server lished to a content server that is separate from the AICC sys-
than LMS. tem. If you are using the JavaScript Title Manager (see
AICC Options) you will need to specify the Cross-domain
redirector URL in the field provided. This is typically the loc-
ation of a script that is used to facilitate the communication
between the content server and the AICC system. See
Sample. If you are not using the JavaScript Title Manager,
a signed applet is automatically provided to facilitate the com-
munication between the content server and the AICC sys-
tem.
Course Creator Specify the name you want the AICC system to display as
the creator of the published title.
Course ID Specify the ID of the course as it will be known within the
AICC system.
Course Title Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed
within the AICC system.
Additional Keywords Specify any additional keywords that can be used to define
(Comma Separated) the content of the course. When users search for courses
within the AICC system, searched terms are compared to
course titles and keywords and will help users find the con-
tent for which they are searching.
URL of Course Folder Specify the Web address of the location of your course within
(optional) the AICC system.
Course Description Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want
it to be displayed within the AICC system.

Sample ASP script

<%@ Language=VBScript %>
<%
Response.Buffer = True
Dim objXMLHTTP, xml, command, aicc_loc, version, session_id,
aicc_data, postbody

- 608 -
'get passed params depending on method sent'
if(Request.Querystring("aicc_loc") <> "") then
aicc_loc=Request.Querystring("aicc_loc")
command=Request.Querystring("command")
version=Request.Querystring("version")
session_id=Request.Querystring("session_id")
aicc_data=Request.Querystring("aicc_data")
else
aicc_loc=Request.form("aicc_loc")
command=Request.form("command")
version=Request.form("version")
session_id=Request.form("session_id")
aicc_data=Request.form("aicc_data")
end if

' Build the post body string'

postbody = "command=" + Server.URLEncode(command) + "&ver-
sion=" + Server.URLEncode(version) + "&session_id=" +
Server.URLEncode(session_id)
if aicc_data <> "" then
postbody = postbody + "&aicc_data=" + Server.URLEncode(aicc_
data)
end if

' Create an xmlhttp object:'

Set xml = Server.CreateObject("Microsoft.XMLHTTP")
' Or, for version 3.0 of XMLHTTP, use:'
' Set xml = Server.CreateObject("MSXML2.ServerXMLHTTP")'

' Opens the connection to the remote server.'

xml.Open "POST", aicc_loc, False
xml.setRequestHeader "Content-Type", "application/x-www-form-
urlencoded"

'Actually sends the request and returns the data:'

xml.Send postbody

'Send back the response'

Response.Write xml.responseText

- 609 -
Set xml = Nothing
%>

Specifying xAPI options

Use the xAPI Options tab to specify publishing details. Complete the controls as fol-
lows:
Conformance Level This field is disabled.
The published course Select this option if you want the published title to be launched
will be presented in a in a new window. When this option is selected, and the user
separate window than exits the published title, the window will close, and the user will
the LRS. be returned to the LRS.
The published course Select this to record interaction data for the questions contained
will report Test/Sur- in the graded test being submitted to the LRS.
vey Question Inter- Interaction data includes the following information for each
action to LRS. graded question:
l User's answer
l Whether the user's answer is correct or not
l Time the question was answered
lAmount of time the user spent on the page containing the
answer
The published course Select this to enable the automatic bookmarking feature for the
will prompt to restore published title. When this is selected, and the user is returning
the last viewed loc- to the published title within the LRS, the user will have the
ation in the LRS. option to skip to the page he or she last viewed within the pub-
lished title.
Activity ID Specify the ID of the course as it will be known within the LRS .
Activity Name Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed
within the LRS .
Activity Description Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want it
to be displayed within the LRS .

Specifying xAPI cmi5 options

Use the xAPI Options tab to specify publishing details. Complete the controls as fol-
lows:
Conformance Level This field is disabled.
The published course Select this option if you want the published title to be launched
will be presented in a in a new window. When this option is selected, and the user
separate window than exits the published title, the window will close, and the user will
the LRS. be returned to the LRS.

- 610 -
The published course Select this to record interaction data for the questions contained
will report Test/Sur- in the graded test being submitted to the LRS.
vey Question Inter- Interaction data includes the following information for each
action to LRS. graded question:
l User's answer
l Whether the user's answer is correct or not
l Time the question was answered
l Amount of time the user spent on the page containing the
answer
The published course Select this to enable the automatic bookmarking feature for the
will prompt to restore published title. When this is selected, and the user is returning
the last viewed loc- to the published title within the LRS, the user will have the
ation in the LRS. option to skip to the page he or she last viewed within the pub-
lished title.
Activity ID Specify the ID of the course as it will be known within the LRS .
Activity Name Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed
within the LRS .
Activity Description Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want it
to be displayed within the LRS .

Specifying AU options
Use the AU Options tab to specify additional course details. Complete the controls as
follows:
Course Type Specify the type of course.
Developer ID Specify the ID of the course developer.
Mastery Score (%) Specify the score (as a percentage of correct answers) that
marks the threshold where a user will be considered to have
passed the assignable unit.
Limit maximum time Select this to enable limiting the maximum allowable time to
complete the course.
Hours/Minutes/Seconds Use the corresponding fields to specify the time limit.
Time Limit Action Specify the action to be triggered when the time limit is
reached. Select from:
l Continue No Message
l Continue With Message
l Exit No Message
l Exit With Message

- 611 -
Creating Web-based, accessible content
(Section 508/WCAG)
You can use Lectora to create titles published to a Web-based format (HTML,
CourseMill, SCORM/Web-based, AICC/Web-based) that comply with the standards set
in Section 508 - 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act and Web Content Accessibility
Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 - Level AA. To comply with WCAG 2.0 - AA, your titles must also
meet the 2.0 Level A standards.
These standards govern the requirements that must be met to enable Web-based con-
tent to be accessible to individuals with disabilities. View information about these stand-
ards at http://www.section508.gov and http://www.w3.org/TR/WCAG20/.
Various government agencies have successfully created Web accessible content using
the program. While the Section 508 and WCAG 2.0 standards can be interpreted in vari-
ous ways, this section provides information and instructions for satisfying the require-
ments set forth in Section 508 1194.22 and WCAG 2.0 - Level AA.
For details about using pre-defined accessibility settings within Lectora, see Preparing a
title for accessibility.
For additional accessibility information, including links to Lectora VPAT documents, visit
Lectora Accessibility Support.
View these topics for more information about creating accessible content:
l Using program features and tools for creating Web-based accessible content
l Complying with Section 508
l Complying with WCAG 2.0 - Level AA

Links to Community Resources

l Trivantis Community Shared Content and Recorded Webinars on Accessibility
l How to Add Closed Captions to Video and Audio in Lectora
l Creating Accessible eLearning: What You Need to Know
l How to Use Lectora to Create Accessible Courses
l How-To Course: Developing Accessible Content in Lectora
l Accessibility: How to Order Title Objects in Lectora
l Trivantis Community Forum - Web Accessibility Discussion
l Making eLearning Accessible eBook
l Lectora 508 Template Shared by Community Member
l Tips and Tricks for Developing a 508 / WCAG Compliant Course

- 612 -
Using program features and tools for cre-
ating Web-based accessible content
View these topics for more information about creating Web-based accessible content:
l Working with ALT tags
l Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot be used
l Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects
l Using actions and integrating accessible interactivity
l Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information
l Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order
l Ensuring users can complete and submit tests, surveys, and forms
l Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation
l Using audio and video
l Checking for accessibility
l Tools that can be used to access and measure color contrast
l Browsers that support zooming on Lectora published content
l Allowing users to review and correct test question before submission
l Providing users a way to hide moving, flashing, or updating content
l Objects and actions that do not work with the keyboard
l Keyboard tabbing order and visual focus

Working with ALT tags

Text equivalents in the form of ALT tags can be provided for buttons, images, and anim-
ations in the program. The accessibility requirement not only necessitates that text equi-
valents must be provided, but also implies that the alternative text must be properly
implemented. Follow these guidelines when providing alternative text:
l Alternative text provided for buttons or other navigational components should
inform the user where he or she will be taken.
l Alternative text for images or animations that convey additional information should
describe the conveyed meaning.
l Alternative text used within ALT tags should be as succinct as possible (less than
156 characters), while also conveying the meaning behind the object. Objects that
require a description that cannot be succinctly described in less than 156 char-
acters must be accompanied by a full textual description.
l Media used for decoration or simply for page layout should omit alternative text or

- 613 -
 use “empty” ALT tags so that a screen reader does not present unnecessary inform-
ation to the user.
ALT tags in the program are created from the object’s name as it is listed in the Title
Explorer. This is the same name that appears in the Name field of the object’s prop-
erties. Object names serving also as the ALT tags should be limited to 156 characters.
See also: Changing the name of an object
If you cannot describe the animation, image, or button in less than 156 characters, use a
textual caption, hidden description, or a pop-up window to provide the object’s descrip-
tion.
See also: Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot be used
If images, animations or buttons within your content are of no informational value or are
used merely for decoration, the objects should have empty ALT tags. This enables
screen readers to ignore the object and prevents the screen reader from announcing any
unnecessary information to the user.
Buttons intended to be ignored should be omitted entirely from the title, and images that
have an empty ALT tag cannot have actions attached to them.
See also: Using an empty ALT tag for an object

Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot

be used
If you are unable to provide a succinct description of an object within an ALT tag, there
are other means of providing alternative text. These include:
Providing a textual You can include a visible text block on the page in proximity to
caption the object you need to describe. The text block should include a
text-only description of the object. Ensure that the object itself
uses an empty ALT tag. The text will serve as the only descrip-
tion for the object.
See also: Adding a text block and typing the text within the text
block
Providing a hidden You can layer a text block containing a description of the object
description underneath the object itself. While the text will not be visible to
the user, it will still be recognized by a screen reader. Ensure
that the object itself uses an empty ALT tag. The text will serve
as the only description for the object.
See also: Layering objects
Displaying a descrip-You can also make the object a clickable object and launch a
tion in a pop-up win- pop-up window containing the object’s textual description.
dow See also: Adding an action

- 614 -
Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable
objects
You can use hyperlinked text, buttons and other objects to execute actions when clicked.
Section 508 and WCAG require that such objects must be accessible with use of a key-
board only. Objects, like buttons, that have an On Mouse Click action attached to them
will be able to receive focus when a user presses the Tab key. When the button, hyper-
link, or other clickable object is in focus, the user can then press the Enter key to execute
its actions.
You must ensure that these objects are properly labeled or have a proper ALT tag so the
user is aware of what will happen when the button or object is clicked. Hyperlinks should
be logical and able to stand alone, out of context. Links should always be linked to
information that is relevant to the content. When hyperlinking text, do not use hyperlinks
such as “Click here” to access the Learning Portal. Instead, use descriptive hyperlinks
such as “Access the Learning Portal.”

Using actions and integrating accessible inter-

activity
You can create interactive components within your titles with the use of actions.
However, there are limits to what can be included in accessibly-compliant content.
Screen readers can only interpret the content that is visible on the page when it is ini-
tially displayed to the user. That is, interactive rollovers, or objects that display addition
information on the page when clicked, cannot be included. The new information that is
displayed to the user as a result of the event is not recognized by the screen reader. Do
not use any of the following actions to modify information on a page after the page has
initially been displayed to the user:
l Change Contents
l Hide

l Move To

l Set Progress

l Show

l Size To

l Step Progress

l Toggle Visibility State

Action triggers, such as On Mouse Enter and On Mouse Exit, should also be avoided.
These actions cannot be triggered without the use of a mouse, and therefore do not com-
ply with the rules that necessitate that objects are accessible with the use of a keyboard.
Actions that use keystrokes to execute the actions often conflict with the standard key-
strokes built into screen readers. In general, actions that must be executed after a page
has initially been presented to the user, should use the On Mouse Click trigger.
See also: Adding an action

- 615 -
 Selecting an action
Selecting an action's trigger
An alternative approach to displaying additional information to the user after a user has
clicked on an object is to launch a pop-up window containing the additional information.
When a new window is displayed to the user, the screen reader will automatically switch
focus and begin reading the content within the new window. When using this approach,
be sure to include a means for the user to then close the pop-up window. Also, Lightbox
windows cannot be used, traditional pop-up windows must be used.

Labeling text blocks and tables for proper asso-

ciation of information
You can label text blocks and tables within text blocks with appropriate headings so that
screen readers can more easily identify the information for the user.
Users of screen readers sometimes search by headings to find important content on a
page. You can create page titles with the use of text blocks, and label the text block as a
Heading 1 or Heading 2. When you label the text block as a heading of either type, it is
recognized by screen readers and even search engines as containing important inform-
ation.
See also: Adding text to your title
Changing the HTML text type of a text block
When you create a table within a text block, if that table contains data and is not used
solely for layout purposes, you must identify the header row of the table so that a screen
reader can properly identify the information within the table. Cells within the table are
automatically referenced with the left-most column of the table, and the designated
header row. The program can only natively support the simplest of tables that contain
only a single header row.
See also: Adding tables to a text block
Including a header in a table
Editing a table

Using the Title Explorer to configure object lay-

ering and reading order
The Title Explorer provides a means to control the layering of overlapping objects on a
page. It also provides a means of specifying the reading order in which objects are iden-
tified by screen readers.
See also: Using the Title Explorer
Objects are layered on a page based on their listed position in the Title Explorer. An
object that appears in the top-most position of the list of objects that appears in the Title
Explorer is actually on the bottom-most layer of the page. Similarly, the object listed in

- 616 -
the bottom-most position of the list of objects that appears in the Title Explorer is actually
on the top-most layer of the page. Reading order coincides with the layering order. An
object on the bottom-most layer of a page is identified first by the screen reader, while an
object on the top-most layer of the page is identified last. That is, screen readers identify
objects on a page in the order from top to bottom that they are listed in the Title Explorer.
See also: Layering objects
Objects that are inherited are always identified first. Additionally, they are always layered
on the bottom-most layer of the page on which they are inherited. Consider a page that
inherits objects from both the title level and the chapter level in which it is contained. A
screen reader will first identify inherited title level objects (from top to bottom), second,
inherited chapter level objects are identified (from top to bottom), and finally, page level
objects are identified last.
Certain object properties can alter the layering and reading order. The Always on Top
property places the object on the top-most layer of the page and at the same time, makes
it the last object identified by a screen reader. Objects such as buttons have this option
set by default. Be sure to modify these settings based on your needs. Additionally, the
Use empty ALT tag when published to HTML property available for images, buttons and
animations, will cause the screen reader to ignore the object entirely. This property, how-
ever, has no bearing on the actual layering of the object on the page.
See also: Placing an object on the top layer
Using an empty ALT tag for an object
Specifying that the group will be read last

Ensuring users can complete and submit tests,

surveys, and forms
Form objects can be used to create forms for collecting information from the user. These
form objects include radio buttons, check boxes, drop-down lists, list boxes, and entry
fields. Many of the test and survey questions also include these types of form elements.
Section 508 and WCAG require that all such form elements are properly labeled so
screen readers can announce their purpose to the user.
See also: Working with forms
When you add test and survey questions to a title, no additional steps are needed to
ensure the questions are accessible. Drag and Drop, Hot Spot, and Matching questions
should not be used within your titles.
Most form elements are automatically labeled appropriately, but additional steps are
necessary if you are using drop-down lists, list boxes, or entry fields. A textual label must
be added and properly associated with the drop-down list, list box or entry field. Use the
following steps to properly label these form objects within your titles:

- 617 -
 1. Add the drop-down list, list box, or entry field to your title.
2. Add a text block to your title and type the label you want to appear for the form
object. For example, “Last Name.”
3. Place the text block within visual proximity to the form object, and also rearrange
its location within the Title Explorer to ensure a logical announcement of objects by
the screen reader.
4. Access the text block’s properties. Select the Label for option, and choose the form
object to which the label pertains.
See also: Associating a text block with a form object

Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive

navigation
Section 508 and WCAG require that long lists of navigation components must be able to
be skipped by users depending on screen readers. This is so the user is not forced to
listen to the announcement of navigation components on every page that is displayed.
There are a number of ways to achieve this within your titles. You can:
l Provide a skipnav button or link that, when executed, will automatically bring users
to the main content of the page and enable the screen reader to begin announcing
the main content.
l Place navigation components so they are announced as the last objects on the
page. This requires careful object ordering in the Title Explorer.
l Hide navigation components from view if you have detected that the user is using a
screen reader to interpret the content.
The first of these options is the preferred method, and is used widely within accessible
content. Users of screen readers should be accustomed to accessing information in this
way. Use the following steps to implement this solution:
1. Create a button, hyperlink or other clickable object and ensure it is the first object
that will be announced to the user on every page he/she visits. Consider using a
transparent button. Since this functionality is meant entirely for users relying on
screen readers, an invisible button will be hidden from view for users that are not
relying on screen readers.
2. Ensure the object you created in step 1 has an appropriate ALT tag. Examples of
labels that are typically used for this kind of functionality are Skip to Main and Skip
to Content.
3. Add an additional object to the pages of your title that is announced just before the
main content on each page, but after navigation components would typically be
announced. This again requires careful object ordering in the Title Explorer.

- 618 -
 See also: Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order
4. Configure the action on the object you created in step 1 with the following:
On: Mouse Click
Action: Go To
Target: Current Page
Scroll To <select the object created in step 3>
See also: Adding an action

Using audio and video

Section 508 and WCAG require that multimedia presentations have synchronized cap-
tions that are presented with the audio, video or animation. Along with this requirement,
you must take additional steps to ensure that audio, on its own, or as part of a video or
animation, does not conflict with a screen reader’s verbal identification of objects.
You can add closed captioning to mp3, .m4a, and .flv audio objects and .flv, .mp4, and
.f4v video objects.
Use the following instructions for providing closed captioning for audio files:
1. Add a mp3, .m4a, and .flv audio object to your title.
See also: Adding an existing audio file
2. Access the audio’s properties.
3. Clear the Auto Start check box.
See also: Automatically starting an audio
4. Within the properties of the audio, import a caption file. This file must be of the XML
file format.
The audio player’s controls can be accessed with use of a keyboard only, and as the
specified captions are displayed within the video, a screen reader will announce what is
displayed.
Use the following instructions for providing closed captioning for video files:
1. Add a .flv, .mp4, and .f4v video object to your title.
See also: Adding an existing video file
2. Access the video’s properties.
3. Clear the Auto Start check box.
See also: Automatically starting a video
4. Within the properties of the video, import a caption file. This file must be of the XML
file format.

- 619 -
The video player’s controls can be accessed with use of a keyboard only, and as the spe-
cified captions are displayed within the video, a screen reader will announce what is dis-
played.
See also: Working with closed-captioned audio
Working with closed-captioned video

Checking for accessibility

The program’s Accessibility Check tool should not be used as the final indicator determ-
ining if a title is Section 508- or WCAG-compliant, or if it is not. Instead, the Accessibility
Check tool can be used to help identify objects within your title that may require special
attention in order to comply with Section 508 or WCAG requirements. For example, the
Accessibility Check tool cannot determine if you have appropriately provided syn-
chronized captions for animations that may exist within your title. However, it can detect
that animations exist, and will supply a warning indicating that you may need to address
the animation.
The Accessibility Checker will help in determining if your title complies with Section 508
of the Rehabilitation Act - Paragraph 1194.22 (a) through (p) and WCAG 2.0 Guidelines -
Level AA. The Accessibility Checker only applies to titles that will be published to a
Web-based format (HTML, CourseMill, AICC/Web-based, and SCORM/Web-based).
Follow these steps to run the Accessibility Check:
1. Save your title.
2. From the Tools ribbon, select Accessibility Check from the Review group. The
program rapidly reviews your title for 508/WCAG 2.0 - Level A- Compliance errors
and displays the results in the Check Title for Accessibility window.
3. For each item that is flagged by the tool, a reference to the corresponding
508/WCAG 2.0 - Level A- rule is cited, along with additional information about how
to resolve the issue. Double-click items that are warnings (displayed in blue) or
errors (displayed in red) to jump to the page containing the object that is causing
the problem.
4. Make the necessary changes to your title to resolve the errors and click Done.
Re-run the Accessibility Check as necessary until you have eliminated all errors. Some
warning messages (displayed in blue) may never be resolved.

Tools that can be used to access and measure

color contrast
WCAG 2.0 1.4.3 Contrast (Minimum) requires the visual presentation of text and images
to have a contrast ratio of at least 4:5:1, with the exception of large text, incidental text,
and logotype.

- 620 -
The benefit cited for this success criteria is that people with low vision and color vision
deficiencies often have difficulty reading text that does not contrast with its background.
Providing contrast between the text on your page and the background images and colors
used in your Lectora title will make the text more readable.
You can use the links below to find tools for measuring color contrast. These tools are
recommended by the W3C, and can be referenced here: http://www.w3.or-
g/TR/UNDERSTANDING-WCAG20/visual-audio-contrast-contrast.html.
l List of color contrast tools (http://www.456bereastreet.com/archive/200709/10_col-
our_contrast_checking_tools_to_improve_the_accessibility_of_your_design/)
l Colour Contrast Analyser - Firefox Extension (http://juicystudio.com/article/colour-
contrast-analyser-firefox-extension.php)
l Contrast Analyser – Application (http://www.pa-
ciellogroup.com/resources/contrastAnalyser)
l Contrast Ratio Analyser - online service (http://juicystu-
dio.com/services/luminositycontrastratio.php)
l Contrast Ratio Calculator (http://www.ms-
fw.com/accessibility/tools/contrastratiocalculator.aspx)
l Colour Contrast Check (http://snook.ca/technical/colour_contrast/colour.html)
l Colors On the Web Color Contrast Analyzer (http://www.-
colorsontheweb.com/colorcontrast.asp)
l American Printing House for the Blind Guidelines Print Document Design
(http://www.aph.org/edresearch/lpguide.htm)

Browsers that support zooming on Lectora pub-

lished content
The success criteria for the WCAG 2.0 1.4.4 Resize Text standard maintains, “Except for
captions and images of text, text can be resized without assistive technology up to 200
percent without loss of content or functionality.“
When you publish your title to a Web-based format, such as HTML, SCORM, and AICC,
any browser that supports Zoom functionality can be used to resize text.
All modern browsers will support zooming, including:
l Mozilla Firefox - supports full page zoom and text only zoom
l Internet Explorer - supports text size changes and full page zoom
l Chrome - supports full page zoom and extensions are available to support text only
zoom
l Safari - supports full page zoom and text only zoom

- 621 -
Allowing users to review and correct test ques-
tion before submission
To conform with WCAG 2.0 3.3.4 Error Prevention, “for Web pages that cause legal com-
mitments or financial transactions for the user to occur, that modify or delete user-con-
trollable data in data storage systems, or that submit user test responses, at least one of
the following is true:
l Reversible: Submissions are reversible.
l Checked: Data entered by the user is checked for input errors and the user is
provided an opportunity to correct them.
l Confirmed: A mechanism is available for reviewing, confirming, and correcting
information before finalizing the submission.”
When you are developing tests in Lectora, be sure to provide a means for users to check
their answers and correct their responses before submitting the test. Verify that questions
do not have a limited number of attempts enabled that can prevent users from changing
their answer once those attempts have been exhausted. Check that navigation within the
test allow users to navigate both backward and forward to allow for a full review of their
answers prior to submission. Finally, be sure to give users control over when a test is
submitted, rather than automatically submitting the test. In this way you will be complying
with Guideline 3.3 Input Assistance: Help users avoid and correct mistakes.

Providing users a way to hide moving flashing or

updating content
Guideline 2.2.2 Pause, Stop, Hide states that “For moving, blinking, scrolling, or auto-
updating information, all of the following are true:
l Moving, blinking, scrolling: For any moving, blinking or scrolling information that (1)
starts automatically, (2) lasts more than five seconds, and (3) is presented in par-
allel with other content, there is a mechanism for the user to pause, stop, or hide it
unless the movement, blinking, or scrolling is part of an activity where it is essen-
tial; and
l Auto-updating: For any auto-updating information that (1) starts automatically and
(2) is presented in parallel with other content, there is a mechanism for the user to
pause, stop, or hide it or to control the frequency of the update unless the auto-
updating is part of an activity where it is essential.”
In Lectora, if you are using objects that update automatically such as RSS Feeds, Twitter
Feeds, Web Windows, and Audio or Video synchronized actions that show objects, then
you need to take this guideline into consideration. Verify that users have the ability to
hide these objects. Further, be sure to avoid the use of transitions and Move or Size

- 622 -
actions that automatically move objects across the page or cause unnecessary flashing
or blinking.

Objects and actions that do not work with the key-

board
According to WCAG 2.0 2.1.1 Keyboard, “All functionality of the content is operable
through a keyboard interface without requiring specific timings for individual keystrokes,
except where the underlying function requires input that depends on the path of the
user's movement and not just the endpoints.”
Keep in mind that not all objects and actions in Lectora result in accessible content that
support the use of a keyboard. Although the majority do, certain objects cannot receive
keyboard focus, and certain actions cannot be executed with use of a keyboard. As you
design and develop content, you will need to be cognizant of the non-accessible items in
the list below:
Objects:
lMenu
l Document

l QR Code

Questions:
l Matching
l Drag and Drop

l Hot Spot

Action Triggers:
l Mouse Enter
l Mouse Exit
l Mouse Double Click
l Right Mouse Click
l Screen Swipe Left or Right

Keyboard tabbing order and visual focus

The Title Explorer provides a means to control the tabbing order of clickable objects for
users relying on a keyboard.
Tabbing order is based on the object's listed position in the Title Explorer.
A clickable object that appears in the top-most position of the list in the Title Explorer will
receive focus first when using a keyboard to navigate the page.
When an object receives focus through tabbing, a visual indicator is displayed. The indic-
ator highlights the object that is in focus. Pressing the Enter key will execute the action
associated with object just as clicking the object using the mouse.
See also: Using the Title Explorer

- 623 -
 l Visual indicators are only supported by Firefox, Safari (latest version with
accessibility settings turned on), and Internet Explorer 9 and 10.
l For Internet Explorer 8 and 9 users, tabbing to a shape or button to navigate
will cause the entire rectangular area of the shape to be selected rather
than the outline of the shape.

Complying with Section 508

You can publish titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 - 1194.22 of the
Rehabilitation Act. These standards govern the requirements that must be met to enable
Web-based content to be accessible to individuals with disabilities. View information
about these standards at http://www.section508.gov.
Various government agencies have successfully created Web accessible content using
the program. While the Section 508 standards can be interpreted in various ways, this
section provides information and instructions for satisfying the requirements set forth in
Section 508 1194.22 for Web-based Intranet information and applications.
For details about using pre-defined accessibility settings within Lectora, see Preparing a
title for accessibility.
Section 508 References
Requirement
1194.22 (a) Working with ALT tags, Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot
be used
1194.22 (b) Using audio and video
1194.22 (c) Tools that can be used to access and measure color contrast
1194.22 (d) The program produces HTML code that complies with this requirement.
You can test this by turning off style sheets within the browser and ensur-
ing the published content continues to be readable. For details, see
Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order.
1194.22 (e) The program does not support server-side image maps.
1194.22 (f) Image maps can be created with the use of layered images and trans-
parent buttons. Applying appropriate alt tags to the images and trans-
parent buttons so the activity can be discovered by users relying on
screen readers enables you to comply with this requirement. For details,
see Working with ALT tags, Providing alternative text when ALT tags can-
not be used, Using hyperlinks, buttons, and other clickable objects
1194.22 (g) Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information
1194.22 (h) Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information
1194.22 (i) If you are using frames within your title, the frames are automatically iden-
tified in the published HTML code to comply with this requirement. For
details, see Changing the default content frame style.

- 624 -
1194.22 (j) Providing users a way to hide moving, flashing, updating content
1194.22 (k) The program enables you to attach documents that can be used to com-
ply with this requirement. For details, see Working with attachments.
1194.22 (l) Published content relies on JavaScript and HTML code that can comply
with this requirement when the features of the program are properly used
to satisfy the remaining requirements in Section 508 1194.22 (a) through
(p). For details, see Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects,
Using actions and integrating accessible interactivity, Checking for
accessibility, Objects and actions that do not work with the keyboard.
1194.22 (m) Ensure that external content within the title added with the use of Flash
objects, HTML Extensions and Web Windows can comply with Section
508 1194.22 (a) through (l). For details, see Working with Flash anim-
ations, Working with Web windows, Working with HTML extension
objects.
1194.22 (n) Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order,
Ensuring users can complete and submit tests, surveys, and forms
1194.22 (o) Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation, Using hyper-
links, buttons and other clickable objects
1194.22 (p) Take this requirement into consideration when using time-based objects
and features within your titles such as timer progress bars, delayed
actions, and timed tests. For details, see Specifying the type of progress
bar, Delaying an action, Timing the Test.
For more information and detailed instructions, access the self-paced How-To course
"Developing Accessible Content" available within the Lectora University (http://Lect-
oraU.com).

Complying with WCAG 2.0 - Level AA

You can publish titles that comply with the standards set in the Web Content Access-
ibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 - Level AA. These standards govern the ideal require-
ments that must be met to enable Web-based content to be accessible to individuals
with disabilities. View information about these standards at http://www.w3.or-
g/TR/WCAG20/.
Various government agencies have successfully created Web accessible content using
the program. While the WCAG 2.0 – Level AA standards can be interpreted in various
ways, this section provides reference to information and instructions for satisfying the fol-
lowing Level A and AA requirements.
For details about using pre-defined accessibility settings within Lectora, see Preparing a
title for accessibility.
WCAG Requirement References
1.1.1 (Level A req.) Working with Alt Tags, Providing alternative text when ALT tags

- 625 -
 cannot be used, Using audio and video, Labeling text blocks and
tables for proper association of information, Ensuring users can
complete and submit tests, surveys, and forms
1.2.1 - 1.2.5 (Level A Using audio and video
and AA reqs)
1.3.1 (Level A req.) Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of inform-
ation, Ensuring users can complete and submit tests, surveys,
and forms
1.3.2 (Level A req.) Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading
order
1.3.3 (Level A req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind.
1.4.1 (Level A req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind.
1.4.2 (Level A req.) Using audio and video
1.4.3 (Level AA req.) Tools that can be used to access and measure color contrast
1.4.4 (Level AA req.) Lectora relies on browser capabilities to resize text. For details,
see Browsers that support zooming on published content
1.4.5 (Level AA req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind. For details, see
Rendering a text block as an image
2.1.1 – 2.1.2 (Level A Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects, Using
reqs.) actions and integrating accessible interactivity, Checking for
accessibility, Objects and actions that do not work with the key-
board
2.2.1 (Level A req.) Take this requirement into consideration when using time-based
objects and features within your titles such as timer progress
bars, delayed actions, and timed tests. For details, see Spe-
cifying the type of progress bar, Delaying an action, Timing the
Test, Allowing users to review and correct test questions before
submission
2.2.2 (Level A req.) Providing users a way to hide moving, flashing, or updating con-
tent
2.3.1 (Level A req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind.
2.4.1 (Level A req.) Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation, Using
hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects
2.4.2 (Level A req.) Changing the name of a chapter, section or page
2.4.3 (Level A req.) Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading
order, Keyboard tabbing order and visual focus
2.4.4 (Level A req.) Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects
2.4.5 (Level AA req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind.
2.4.6 (Level AA req.) Specifying the HTML text type of a text block, Labeling text
blocks and tables for proper association of information

- 626 -
2.4.7 (Level AA req.) Keyboard tabbing order and visual focus
3.1.1 (Level A req.) Declaring the language for the title
3.1.2 (Level AA req.) Declaring the language for the text block
3.2.1 (Level A req.) The program produces HTML code that complies with this
requirement.
3.2.2 (Level A req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind.
3.2.3 (Level AA req.) Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading
order, Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation.
3.2.4 (Level AA req.) Author must design with this requirement in mind.
3.3.1 – 3.1.3 (Level A Author must design with this requirement in mind. For details, see
& AA reqs.) Ensuring users can complete and submit tests, surveys, and
forms, Using hyperlinks, buttons and other clickable objects,
Using actions and integrating accessible interactivity
3.3.4 (Level AA req.) Allowing users to review and correct test questions before sub-
mission
4.1.1 – 4.1.2 (Level A The program produces HTML code that complies with this
reqs.) requirement.

- 627 -
Appendix
View these topics for additional information:
l Supported media types
l Title Wizard gallery
l Matching colors used within your title
l Creating custom HTML skins for the media
l Automatically starting media on mobile devices
l Submitting test, survey and form results to Google Drive
l Submitting test, survey and from results to CGI
l Answer and response variable value formats
l Setting the SCORM status to complete
l Working with the Experience API (xAPI)
l Token replacements for custom JavaScript
l Custom JavaScript
l Frequently asked questions
l Viewing third-party public licenses
l Trademarks

Supported media types

The Publisher supports a wide variety of the most popular types of media found in all
aspects of multimedia and the Internet. With such a wide selection, your title can host
dazzling video, sound, animations, and even three-dimensional interactive movies. The
following chart illustrates the media types that the program supports.
The recommended media file types are .mp3 audio and .mp4 video. Lectora will
attempt to convert audio media to .mp3 and video media to .mp4 if the program
encounters the audio and video file types from this list.
Check that you have the latest codec files before attempting the conversion. If the
conversion fails, try one of the several conversion tools available on the Internet.
Animations Images
lGIF (.gif) l Window BMP (.bmp)
l Flash files (.swf, .spl) l Graphic Interchange
Audio Format (.gif)
l JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg)
l AIFF (.aiff, .aif)
l Portable Network Graph-
l AU Format (.au)
l M4A (.m4a) ics (.png)

- 628 -
 l MP3 (.mp3) lTIFF (.tif)
l Wave (.wav) lWindow Media Format
l Windows Media Audio* (.wma) (.wmf)
l Advanced Streaming Format* (.asf) l Enhanced Media Format

l Flash Video (.flv) (.emf)

Streaming Audio Video
lStandard Streaming Audio (.mp3, .m4a, .flv) lWindows Video (.avi)
l Windows Media Services l MPEG (.mpg, .mpeg,

Documents .mp4, .m4v)

l Windows Media Video
l Rich Text (.rtf)
l Text (.txt) (wmv)
l Advanced Streaming

Format (.asf)
l Flash Video (.flv, .f4v)

Streaming Video
l Youtube Video
l Standard Streaming
Video (.mp4, .m4v, .f4v,
.flv)
l Windows Media Ser-
vices

HTML Extensions
In addition to the supported media types, the program enables you to extend the func-
tionality of your title by adding HTML Extension objects. With the use of HTML Exten-
sions, you can further add:
l Java Applets
l Header Scripting (JavaScript)

l Shockwave Movies

l Custom HTML

l ASP Scripts

l JSP Scripts

l Meta Tags

l Top of File Scripting

l PHP Scripts

l Cascading Style Sheets

l ColdFusion

l ASP .NET (.aspx)

See also: Working with HTML Extension objects

- 629 -
Title Wizard gallery
Design Wizard The Design Wizard will guide you through
creating a new title based your for
responses to key design questions
involving the title type, size and theme,
and organization.

Aqua Creates a title designed for the 640 x 480

screen format with optional chapter name
buttons and scrollable page format.

Shaded Border Presentation Creates a title with a colored-shaded bor-

der on the sides, top, or bottom.

Certificate Creates a corporate orientation title with

optional default and custom topics.

- 630 -
Corporate Orientation Creates a corporate orientation title with
optional default and custom topics.

Mobile Gel Tech Creates a chapter- or page-based title

with page dimensions that compliment the
screen size of mobile devices.

Mobile Corporate Site Creates a corporate site title with dimen-

sions that compliment the screen size of
mobile devices.

- 631 -
Module X Creates a chapter- or page-based title
with three optional color themes and
chapter name buttons.

NaturalWave Creates a title with a fun template with five

optional color themes and chapter-name
buttons.

Photo Album Creates a digital photo album of your own

images.

- 632 -
Platinum Creates a chapter- or page-based title
with the option to build chapter-name but-
tons.

Product Launch Creates a title for a product launch

announcement with optional default and
custom topics.

Reflection Creates a chapter- or page-based title

with four optional color themes and
chapter name buttons.

- 633 -
Standard eLearning course Creates a title with commonly used course
components and structure suitable for pub-
lishing to a learning management system.

Blank Title Creates a new title with blank pages, pop-

ulated with pages and chapters as spe-
cified. Add other navigation as you see fit.

Framed Title with TOC Creates a framed title with a table of con-
tents in the left frame.

- 634 -
Tabbed Presentation Creates a title with a tabbed folder look
with three optional styles of folders.

Matching colors used within your title

When you have the ability to select a color, whether it be for a background, text, or link
color, an eye-dropper tool is available in the color list. The eye-dropper tool will
enable you to select a currently used color from within your title or on your desktop.
To use the eye-dropper tool:
1. Select the eye-dropper tool from the color list. Your mouse cursor will display the
eye-dropper.
2. Move your mouse to place the eye-dropper tool over the color that you want to use.
This can be a color from the program interface, a color from an image within your
title, or a color elsewhere.
3. When the eye-dropper is on top of the color you want to use, click your left mouse
button. The new color will be selected within the Color list.

- 635 -
Creating custom HTML skins for media
You can customize the framework of the media player by creating and applying your
own HTML skins.
A skin consists of a packaged .zip file containing a .css file and a sprite .png image file
containing the component graphics. The .css file defines the settings for the skin's com-
ponents: control bar, display, dock, and playlist. Use your favorite image editor to design
and save the visual elements that make up the skin and link to them in the skin's .css file.
Flash-based custom skins used in Lectora 16.0 and older will no longer work. Use
one of the skins available in Lectora or convert, rebuild, or create your desired cus-
tom skin.
To create a custom skin using the new format:
1. Create a sprite .png image file containing all of the images for the skin. Name the
sprite .png image file the same as the name of your custom skin. Several sprite
image creators are available on the Web. Having buttons that are the same width
and height is recommended. Additionally, the images should be the same height
that you want for the height of the controller.

Figure: Example sprite image

2. Note the X and Y position of each of the images in the sprite image file. These
coordinates are needed when you create the .css file in step 3.
For example, here are the X and Y positions and dimensions for the example sprite
image shown in Step 1:
Skin Image X,Y position Width Height
Background image 0, 0 80 24
Play button 0, 24 20 24
Play hover button 20, 24 20 24
Pause button 40, 24 20 24
Pause hover button 60, 24 20 24
Fullscreen button 0, 48 20 24
Fullscreen hover button 20, 48 20 24
Unfullscreen button 40, 48 20 24

- 636 -
 Unfullscreen hover button 60, 48 20 24
Mute button 0, 72 20 24
Mute hover button 20, 72 20 24
Unmute button 40, 72 20 24
Unmute hover button 60, 72 20 24
Captions button 0, 96 24 24
TimeHandle 24, 96 6 16
3. Create the .css file for the skin, guided by the provided sample CSS file below.
Name the .css file the same as the skin is named within the file.
Depending on the name of your skin, replace sample accordingly.
For example: sample is to be replaced with .yourSkinName and sample.png is
to be replaced with yourSkinName.png.

Sample:
div[id^="video"] .sample .mejs-controls {
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) 0px 0px;
height: 24px;
bottom: -24px;
}

Your skin:
div[id^="video"] .yourSkinName .mejs-controls {
background: url(Sprites/yourSkinName.png) 0px 0px;
height: 24px;
bottom: -24px;
}

Each of the images that makes up the skin requires its respective CSS class. For
the background, use mejs-controls that will point to the background image within
the sprite. this is done with background url(Sprites/sample.png) 0px
0px where 0px 0px represents the X and Y position within the sprite image. Use
the classes for both audio and video accordingly as shown in the sample .css
below.
4. Modify the height accordingly to your image. If you would like the control bar to be
below the video, change the bottom property accordingly.
5. Replace the other controls with their respective image and sizes.
For example:
.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-pause button {
width: 20px;
height: 24px;

- 637 -
 background: url(Sprites/sample.png) no-repeat -
40px -24px;
margin: 0;
padding: 0;
}

Note that the x and y position are negative to show the appropriate CSS offset pos-
ition.
6. For the time rail and volume slider, change the background color to your liking.
Use RGBA values to display with an alpha transparency, and use a hex value as
well to support older browsers.
7. Once the .css and sprite image files are complete, zip them together. The .zip
name should match your .css file name.
Sample CSS File

/*Make sure that this matches the name of your .css file. For
example, if your .css file is called sample.css, make sure
this class is called .mejs-container.sample */
.mejs-container.sample {

/*This is the container for all of the controller elements.*/

.sample .mejs-controls { 
position:absolute;
bottom:0;

- 638 -
 width:100%;
}

/*These 2 ID blocks define the background image for the

video/audio controller for Lectora.*/
div[id^="video"] .sample .mejs-controls {
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) 0px 0px;
height: 24px;
bottom: -24px;
}

div[id^="audio"] .sample .mejs-controls {

background: url(Sprites/sample.png) 0px 0px;
height: 24px;
bottom: 0;
}

/*These 2 ID blocks define the background image for the

video/audio controller for Lectora Online.*/
div[id^="vid"] .sample .mejs-controls {
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) 0px 0px;
height: 24px;
bottom: -24px;
}

div[id^="sndtobj"] .sample .mejs-controls {

background: url(Sprites/sample.png) 0px 0px;

- 639 -
ion of the time-slider relative to the width of the con-
troller.*/
.sample .mejs-time{
top:0px;
left: 0px;
position:relative;
}

/*This is the time code container.*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-time { 
background:url(Sprites/sample.png) repeat-x 0 0;
height:17px;
position: relative;
top: 0px;
}

/*This is the media progress bar.*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-time-rail { 
background:url(Sprites/sample.png) repeat-x 0 0;
height:22px;
}

/*This sets the color, or color and alpha depending on the

browser, and height of the total time-slider bar.*/
.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-time-rail .mejs-time-total {
background: #383838;
background: rgba(0,0,0,0.6);
height: 8px;
}

- 640 -
idth: 20px;
height: 24px;
}

/*This defines the play button tag.*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-playpause-button button {
width: 20px;
height: 24px;
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) no-repeat 0 -
24px;
margin: 0;
padding: 0;
}

/*This defines the pause button tag.*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-pause button {
width: 20px;
height: 24px;
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) no-repeat -40px -
24px;
margin: 0;
padding: 0;
}

/*This defines the play button hover state*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-playpause-button button:hover {
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) no-repeat -20px -
24px;
}

/*This defines the pause button hover state*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-pause button:hover {
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) no-repeat -60px -

- 641 -
;
background: #333333;
color: #FFFFFF;
padding-top: 2px;
border-radius: 3px;
}

/*This is the container that wraps the length time code.*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-duration-container {
position: absolute;
top: 32px;
right: 65px;
border: solid 1px #999999;
background: #FFFFFF;
color: #333333;
padding-top: 2px;
border-radius: 3px;
color: #333333;
}

/*This defines the size and position of the captions but-

ton.*/
.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-captions-button {
position:relative;
width:24px;
right:4px;
top:0px;
}

/*This defines the captions button tag.*/

.sample .mejs-controls .mejs-captions-button button {
width:24px;
height:24px;
left:-1px;
top:0px;
background: url(Sprites/sample.png) no-repeat 0 -
96px;
}

You can import skins and add them to the list of skins that can be applied to the audio
and video controllers. For details about applying a skin to the audio controller, see Apply-

- 642 -
ing a skin to the audio controller. For details about applying a skin to the video controller,
see Applying a skin to the video controller.
See also: Working with audio
Working with video

Automatically starting media on mobile

devices
By default, browsers on mobile devices play media only when the media is initiated by a
user gesture, such as a finger tap on a button. Additionally, if the action is delayed for
more than one second, the media will not play, even if it is initiated by a user gesture.
Lectora provides several methods of initiating media play without a user gesture. There-
fore, to achieve the desired effect on mobile devices, the following circumstances require
special handling:
l Audio used as a background sound
l “Auto Start” property enabled for the media
l Target of a play action with a delay of more than 1 second
l Target of a play action triggered by something other than a user gesture, such as
the Show, Hide, or Done Playing trigger.
l Target of a play action that is contained within an action group
l Target of a play action triggered by a synchronized action from another media
object
You can have up to 25 of these cases per page on a mobile device. However, if you
have a page with more than 25 total audio and video objects that require special hand-
ling, one or more of them may not play as desired. When the title is published, you will
see the following warning message:
W4060 - You have more than 25 audio / video objects that
require special handling for mobile devices. Some of them
may not work properly. See the Help for details.
To ensure all of your media are played on mobile devices, confirm that Publish for
Seamless Play is enabled when specifying HTML options during publishing and that
there are no more than 25 total audio and video objects on a single page (including
inherited objects) that require special handling as identified above. For details about spe-
cifying HTML options, see Specifying HTML options.

- 643 -
Submitting test, survey, and form results to
Google Drive
You can enable the Publisher to submit test, survey, and form results directly to Google
Drive, Google's online storage system. Additionally, templates are available online for
submitting test or survey results to Google Drive.
Lectora https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1l3nxS5VbZ0EzvfiwadWLg1ING59_AXk-
Test/Sur- bDSUrTyEafhQ/copy
vey Sub-
mission
Lectora https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1BLUavcery8T_cphKcMWjPbr8v7A7G-
Test/Sur- 386e6DBvSuarA/copy
vey Sub-
mission -
Anonym-
ous
Lectora https://-
Form doc-
Sub- s.google.com/forms/d/1diNtFqpoOdvPPXMIVvaWHCLOQj9DcQTX0mTwfF58tWY/copy
mission
To locate the online templates:
1. Click the link for the appropriate form.
2. Create a copy of the form in your Drive account.
3. Do not upgrade the form. When prompted to upgrade to the new forms, click Not
Now.
4. Click View Live Form.
5. Copy the link in the address bar from the live form, that will be the link used in the
Publisher.
6. Paste this URL as the value requested in the Publisher in the Google Drive Form
URL field in the Settings for submitting to Google Drive (described below).
7. When you ready to see the results, click View responses.
To custom-configure results to be submitted directly to Google Drive:
1. Open the Properties for the test, survey, or form.
2. For tests, enable the Custom Results Submission check box in the Results Sub-
mission group on the Results ribbon. For surveys, enable the Custom Results
Submission check box in the Results Submission group on the Behavior & Res-
ults ribbon. For forms, enable the Submit Form check in the Data Submission

- 644 -
 group on the Properties ribbon.
3. Select Google Drive in the Submit To field.
4. Click Settings to specify the Web address for the Google Drive document.
See also: Submitting test, survey and form results to CGI
About variables
Including variable values with the results
Displaying a success message when a test is submitted
Additional resources: Incorporating Google Docs Forms in Lectora

Submitting test, survey and form results to

CGI
You can enable the program to submit test, survey, form results and variable data to a
server-side, CGI program that can then write the information to a file or database. All
information for test and surveys, including the user's name and email address, test ques-
tions, test answers, and scores is submitted, enabling you to manage user results from
your titles more efficiently and effectively.
All data communicated to the CGI program are reported as name/value pairs:
l Variable values are submitted with the name of the variable as the name, and the
value of the variable as the value.
l Form object values are submitted with the name of the form object as the name,
and the value of the form object selected or provided by the user, as the value.
l For tests and surveys, the name/value pairs that are submitted are fixed as follows:
Name Value
name The user's name
email The user's email address
TestName The name of the test/survey
NumQuestions The number of questions in the test/survey
PassingGrade The value specified as the Lowest Passing Score within
the test's properties (not applicable for surveys)
Score The total score of the test (if it is scored)
l For questions contained in surveys or tests, the name/value pairs that are sub-
mitted iterate for the number of questions contained in the test or survey. In each of
the following, the X is replaced by the actual number of the question.
Name Value
QuestionX The text of the question
AnswerX The user's answer to the question
CorrectAnswerX The correct answer to the question (not applicable for sur-

- 645 -
 vey questions)
QuestionTypeX The type of the question. The type of question is iden-
tified with one of the following numbers:
l True/False = 1
l Multiple Choice = 2
l Short Answer = 3
l Essay = 4
l Fill in the Blank = 5
l Matching = 6
l Drag and Drop = 7
l Hot Spot = 9
l Likert = 10
l Rank/Sequencel = 11
l Likert Table = 12
l Multiple Response = 14
Use the following information to help you design a script to process output. Combining
the information offered here with the expertise of your database manager and IT or ISP
staff; you should be able to develop an effective connection between the program and
your database.
A programmer knowledgeable in server-side scripting and database integration
over the Internet/Intranet should perform the integration between the program and
the database. If you have questions about the information contained here, contact
the Trivantis Support team.
The following are examples of scripts that you can use when creating your custom CGI
scripts.
l Sample ASP Script
l Sample Perl Script
See also: Customizing the test results
Specifying form submission properties
For titles published to the Web, the script must reside on the same server as the
published title content. Cross-domain scripting is forbidden within Web browsers.

Sample ASP Script

<%@ Language=VBScript %>
<%

- 646 -
'Get the parameters posted from the test'
testname=Request.form("TestName")
score=Request.form("Score")
user=Request.form("name")
numQuestions=Request.form("NumQuestions")
passingGrade=Request.form("PassingGrade")

'Validate that this is actually from a Lectora test'

if testname="" Or score="" Or user="" Or numQuestions="" Or
passingGrade="" then
Response.Write "<html>"
Response.Write "<head><title>Failure</title></head>"
Response.Write "<body>"
Response.Write "STATUS=500"
Response.Write "<br>"
Response.Write "Could not parse test results due to a para-
meter error."
Response.Write "</body></html>"
else
'Write the results to a file named the same as the test'
'This could be a database or any kind of object store, but'
'to keep it simple, we will just use a flat text file'
fileName = "c:\" & testname & ".log"

'Open the results file for append'

Const ForReading = 1, ForWriting = 2, ForAppending = 8

Set objFSO = CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject")

if not objFSO.FileExists(fileName) then

objFSO.CreateTextFile(fileName)
end if

Set objInFile = objFSO.OpenTextFile( fileName, ForAppending,

True )

'Write the results'

objInFile.WriteLine( Date & ", " & Time & ", " & user & ", "
& score )

'Older courses produced by Lectora used a zero based index

- 647 -
for the questions '
'(i.e. Question0 is the first question)'
'Newer courses are one based (i.e. Question1 is the first
question)'
'determine which one it is'
Dim startIndex
valTemp = Request.form("Question0")
if( valTemp="" ) then
startIndex=1
else
startIndex=0
end if

'Write all of the questions and answers'

for i = startIndex to cint(startIndex + numQuestions-1)
nameQ = "Question" + CStr(i)
nameA = "Answer" + CStr(i)
valQ = Request.form(nameQ)
valA = Request.form(nameA)
objInFile.WriteLine( nameQ & ": " & valQ )
objInFile.WriteLine( nameA & ": " & valA )
Next

'Close results file'

objInFile.Close
Set objInFile = Nothing
Set objFSO = Nothing
end if
%>

Sample Perl Script

#!perl
use CGI;
$q = new CGI;
#get the parameters passed to the script
###################
$name = $q->param('name');
$testName = $q->param('TestName');
$numQuestions = $q->param('NumQuestions');
$passingGrade = $q->param('PassingGrade');
$score = $q->param('Score');

- 648 -
if( $testName eq "" || $numQuestions eq "" )
{
print "Content-type: text/html\n\n";
print "<html>";
print "<head><title>Failure</title></head>";
print "<body>";
print "STATUS=500";
print "<br>";
print "Could not parse test results due to a parameter
error.";
print "</body></html>";
exit 0;
}
#####################
#get the current time
#####################
($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst)
= localtime(time);
$year = $year + 1900;
$mon = $mon + 1;
$currtime = "$year-$mon-$mday $hour:$min:$sec";
#####################
#opens test data file for append and write the data
##################### $testName .= ".log";
open( TESTDATA,">>c:\\$testName" ) or die;
print TESTDATA "$currtime $name $numQuestions $passingGrade
$score\n";
#####################
# Older courses produced by the program used a zero based
index for the
questions (i.e. Question0 is the first question)' # Newer
courses are one
based (i.e. Question1 is the first question)'
# determine which one it is'
#####################
$startindex = 0;
$temp = $q->param('
Question0'); if( $temp eq
"" )
{
$startindex = 1;

- 649 -
}
$index = $startindex;
#####################
#Write out all of the questions and answers
#####################
while( $index < ($startindex + $numQuestions) ) {
$qst = "Question$index"; $ans = "Answer$index"; $qval = $q-
>param
( $qst ); $aval = $q->param( $ans );
print TESTDATA "$qst: $qval\n";
print TESTDATA "$ans: $aval\n";
$index += 1;
}
close TESTDATA;
##################### #reply that it worked
#################### print $q->header();
print "STATUS=200\r\n";

Answer and response variable value formats

All answers to questions as well as entries and selections in form objects are stored
within the associated Variable Name for the question or object. These variables can be
accessed from anywhere in the title, for example, for use with Modify Variable and
Change Contents actions or as a condition for other actions. It is therefore helpful to
understand how stored responses are formatted:
Form objects
Object Stored Value Format (if not empty)
Radio Button “on”
Radio Button The text of the selected radio button label
Group
Check Box “on”
Entry Field The entered text string or numeric value
Drop-down List The text of the selected item
List Box The text of the single selected item or the text of multiple selected
items separated by comma(s). For example: Item One,Item
Two,Item Three
Questions
Type Stored Value Format (if not empty)
True or False The text of the selected choice

- 650 -
Multiple Choice The text of the selected choice
Multiple Response The text of the single selected choice or the text of multiple selec-
ted choices separated by comma(s). For example: Item One,Item
Two,Item Three
Fill in the Blank The entered text string or numeric value
Number Entry The entered numeric value
Matching The Left Item Name-[dash]-Right Item Name for each matched
pair, separated by commas. Unmatched items will not be
included. For example: Pot-Soup,Pan-Turkey
Rank/Sequence The numeric value or the text of each choice in the order iden-
tified, separated by commas. For example: 1,3,4,2 or
Monday,Wednesday,Thursday,Tuesday
Drag and Drop The Drag Item Name-[dash]-Drop Zone Name for each matched
pair, separated by commas. Unmoved drag items will have "(na)"
- no answer - as corresponding drop zone. Unused drop zones
will not be included. For example: Drag Item 1-Drop Zone 3,Drag
Item 2-Drop Zone 2,Drag Item 3-(na)
Hot Spot The Hot Spot Item Name of the single selected choice or the
names of multiple selected hot spot choices separated by com-
mas. For example: Item One,Item Two,Item Three
Short Answer The entered text string or numeric value
Essay The entered text string or numeric value
Likert The statement Name-[dash]-Scale text for each answered state-
ment, separated by commas. Unanswered statements will not be
included. For example: Clearly Presented-Strongly Agree,Helpful
Examples-Agree
l When used as an action condition, all text strings are case-sensitive.
l If Retain value between sessions is enabled, this check box causes the
question answer or form object entry/selection to be retained after the ses-
sion is closed. When the user returns to this item in a future session, the
response provided previously by the student is retained. If this option is not
selected, the question or form object will revert back to its Initial Value state
with every launch of the title.

Setting the SCORM status to complete

By default, you cannot successfully publish a title to SCORM if the title does not include
a graded test. The SCORM standards require that a completion status be associated
with the course, and this completion status is tied to the results of a test, by default. The
following steps provide a workaround for manually setting the SCORM status. When

- 651 -
these additional steps are taken, you can successfully publish the title to SCORM even if
the title does not include a test.
To manually set the SCORM status, first set the content type of the title to AICC/SCORM.
To do so, select Title Options from the Design ribbon. In the Title Options window,
change the title type to AICC/SCORM for LMS. Next, do one of the following:
l At the appropriate location within the title, configure the following action:
Trigger <trigger>
Action Modify variable
Target AICC_Score
Value 100
For SCORM 1.2-based learning management systems, the score of the course is
directly related to the completion status. A score of 100 will always indicate a "com-
pleted" lesson status. If you are using SCORM 2004 or a LMS that does not sup-
port this relationship between score and lesson status, use the following
implementation.
l At the appropriate location within the title, configure the following action:
Trigger <trigger>
Action Modify variable
Target AICC_Lesson_Status
Value completed
Consult the correct terminology that is recognized by your LMS for the appropriate
Value setting.
See also: Reserved variables
Creating an AICC/SCORM title for a LMS

Working with the Experience API (xAPI)

This section describes how to work with the xAPI elearning specification. This Exper-
ience API, known as xAPI, allows content developers to collect data based on the learn-
ing experience of their users. The section includes information about publishing with the
xAPI options and understanding the xAPI experience statements. For the latest spe-
cifications, documents, and explanations of terms, visit the official xAPI website (http://tin-
canapi.com/).
For more information, visit these xAPI-related submissions in our Trivantis Com-
munity:
l Your xAPI Questions—Answered!
l xAPI and Lectora: An Introduction
l xAPI in Practice – Moving Beyond SCORM to a Big Data Future

- 652 -
 l xAPI in eLearning – Beyond SCORM to a Big Data Future
Publishing with the xAPI options
You need to publish to xAPI to enable the automated and manual xAPI statements. Fol-
low the steps described in Publishing to xAPI to prepare your title for publishing to xAPI.
Most of the automatic xAPI statements are controlled through the publishing options
when you publish a title to xAPI. These options are grouped together on the xAPI
Options tab after you click Publish:
Conformance Level This field is disabled.
Launch course in sep-Select this option if you want the published title to be launched
arate window from in a new window. When this option is selected, and the user
LRS exits the published title, the window will close, and the user will
be returned to the LRS.
Report test/survey Select this to record interaction data for the questions contained
question interaction in the graded test being submitted to the LRS.
to LRS Interaction data includes the following information for each
graded question:
l User's answer
l Whether the user's answer is correct or not
l Time the question was answered
l Amount of time the user spent on the page containing the
answer
Prompt the user to Select this to enable the automatic bookmarking feature for the
navigate to the last published title. When this is selected, and the user is returning
viewed page to the published title within the LRS, the user will have the
option to skip to the page he or she last viewed within the pub-
lished title.
Activity ID Specify the ID of the course as it will be known within the LRS .
Activity Name Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed
within the LRS .
Activity Description Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want it
to be displayed within the LRS .
Consider the following when completing the options on xAPI Options tab:
l Notice that the Activity ID, Activity Name, and Activity Description for the course
can be set here. The options are used as the context for other statements. When
creating the Activity ID, be sure to follow the rules for an IRI (International
Resource Identifier), such as avoiding spaces and special characters.
l An attempted activity statement is sent automatically when the course is started. It

- 653 -
 is sent for the activity specified in the Course Information section (specified by
Activity ID, Activity Name, and Activity Description) of the xAPI publishing
options.
l When the option Prompt the user to navigate to the last viewed page is selec-
ted, your published course can report a xAPI statement with the verb experienced
for each page visited by a learner. The activity in this is the HTML page name and
it is URI-encoded so it can be used for the Lectora bookmarking function.
If you want to track progress through the course, add these two actions at the
title level:
l On Show - xAPI Statement - attempted - VAR(CurrentPageName)
l On Hide - xAPI Statement - completed - VAR(CurrentPageName)
l Questions inside of a test or survey will be reported when answered if the option
Report test/survey question interaction to the LRS is selected. The question
text and the response are stated in the xAPI statement.
The test must be graded, but it does not need to be included in the overall score.
l Additionally, the ActivityContext - Parent statement subsection is set to its test’s
activity.
Sending Passed or Failed Test Statements
Passed or failed xAPI statements will automatically be sent for tests that are set to be
graded. The score is set along with the verb passed or failed. The object display name is
the name of the test. The ID is the IRI of the activity with the name of the test added to it.
(See examples below.)
The result score properties for min to 0 and max to 100 are all set to 0 by default. The
Lowest Passing Score (%) field (located on the test's Results tab) should always be
included even if it is set to 0 (in case of none correct).
Sending Completed, Passed, or Failed Activity Statements
When you set the AICC_Lesson_Status variable, an xAPI statement is sent. The fol-
lowing conditions will determine what type of statement is sent:
l You can use a modify variable action to set AICC_Lesson_Status to completed,
passed, or failed. If this is done, the course will send a corresponding Completed
or Passed or Failed statement.
l Setting AICC_Lesson_Status to passed or completed will set the xAPI state-
ment’s result.completion to true and the result.success to true. If AICC_Lesson_
Status is completed and the score is less than the AU mastery score, res-
ult.success will be false.
l If AICC_Lesson_Status is set to failed, the xAPI statement’s result.completion is
set to true and result.success is set to false.

- 654 -
 l The score should be included in the completion statement if it exists if you have a
graded, included test or if you manually set AICC_Score.
Sending an xAPI Statement
You can send an xAPI statement from any location in the course. It will default to the com-
mon xAPI statement elements allowing you to specify a verb and an object. This can be
triggered on one of the many triggers available for actions. If you need full control over
the statement and all its values see Specifying verbs and objects below.
Specifying verbs and objects
Lectora Inspire uses the ADL definitions for verbs. Additionally, any verb name can be
entered. Entered verb names are appended to the ADL namespace so any future ADL
verbs can be used or you can use your own unique verb. (The LRS would not validate
the verb and would allow you to report on it; therefore allowing the use of that
namespace.)
For more information on verbs, visit http://www.adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs.

For the object portion of the statement, you can use any of the dynamic variables using
advanced edit and the variable macros. You can also use text to report on any activity.
This object field will be the activity identifier. To ensure this is a valid IRI, a minimal
replacement of characters is done using this expression:
ActivityID (the location of the Activity IDs)
Consider using conditional actions and action groups for the ability to do complex track-
ing scenarios.
Specifying additional statement values
ActivityContext values are automatically set.
Sending a xAPI statement and dynamically updating the statement
Using the run Javascript action, you can customize and dynamically update the xAPI
statement as you go through the title with your learner by using variables defined in your
title. This allows you to easily set up templates that will satisfy any use case.
Below is a simple but effective example of the Javascript that you can execute using the
action.. This javascript will create the statement and then send the statement that you cre-
ated.
var stmt=
{
"verb": {
"id": VarxAPIVerbID.getValue(),
"display": {
"und": VarxAPIVerbDisplay.getValue()

- 655 -
 }
},
"object": {
"definition": {
"name": {
"en-US": "xAPIandLODemo"
}
},
"id": "http://uniqueurl.com/xAPIandLoDemo",
"objectType": "Activity"
},
"result": {
"score": {
"scaled": (parseInt(Test_1_Score.getValue()) / 100)
},
"completion": true,
"success": true
}
}

var tcAPI = window.parent.frames['titlemgrframe'];

var tc_driver = tcAPI.tc_driver;

tcAPI.TinCanSendStatement(tc_driver,stmt,function(xhr){});

The above statement contains some function calls to get the value of Lectora variables.
These could also be static string values, for example if you just wanted to specify the
verb and other values in the statement.
Below are two options for customizing the xAPI statement:
VarxAPIVerbID.getValue This uses the user defined variable xAPIVerbID. Use
() the same Var prefix as if you were referencing the vari-
able in all the other actions. You can set this variable to
any verb you want. Make sure that you do both the ID
and the Display.
In this example, ID is an URI such as
http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/answered
(An example corresponding Display is answered.)
(parseInt(Test_1_ This uses a reserved variable of Test_1_Score to
Score.getValue()) / send the score that they received on the test. (This does
100) not have the Var prefix as it is not a user-defined vari-
able. Additionally, the Var is automatically prepended to
it when it is published.)

- 656 -
Getting additional information
For more information about xAPI statement specification, visit https://-
github.com/adlnet/xAPI-Spec/blob/master/xAPI.md. For more information about the xAPI
statement generator and tester, visit http://tincanapi.com/statement-generator/.
xAPI Statement Output Examples (from SCORM Cloud)
2014-11-05T04:05:36.259
Joe King passed 'http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template'
with score 50
2014-11-05T04:05:36.256
Joe King incorrectly answered 'Survey Question 1' with
response 'true'
2014-11-05T04:05:36.254
Joe King incorrectly answered 'My Test Question 2' with
response 'false'
2014-11-05T04:05:36.251
Joe King correctly answered 'My Test Question 1' with response
'true'
2014-11-05T04:05:34.803
Joe King sent 'Custom-xAPI-Statement'
2014-11-05T04:05:34.047
Joe King experienced 'xAPI Actions Page'
2014-11-05T04:05:31.994
Joe King experienced 'After Survey Page'
2014-11-05T04:05:27.433
Joe King experienced 'Last survey page'
2014-11-05T04:05:25.582
Joe King experienced 'Test 1 Fail'
2014-11-05T04:05:21.783
Joe King failed 'Test 1' with score 50
2014-11-05T04:05:17.391
Joe King experienced 'Last test page'
2014-11-05T04:05:12.855
Joe King experienced 'Page 1'
2014-11-05T04:05:10.555
Joe King experienced 'Page 1'
2014-11-05T04:05:09.837
Joe King attempted 'http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template'

Attempted Course Statement (auto)

- 657 -
2014-11-05T04:05:09.837

Joe King attempted 'http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template'
{
    "id": "3d26bd57-0558-4a02-934d-501c7d85d3b7",
    "actor": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "verb": {
        "id": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/att
        "display": {
            "en-US": "attempted"
        }
    },
    "context": {
        "registration": "61d426da-436a-4b2a-8daa-
ce94f6082f2f",
        "contextActivities": {
            "grouping": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ]
        }
    },
    "timestamp": "2014-11-05T04:05:07.734Z",
    "stored": "2014-11-05T04:05:09.837Z",
    "authority": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },

- 658 -
         "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "object": {
        "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Te
        "definition": {
            "name": {},
            "description": {}
        },
        "objectType": "Activity"
    }
}

Attempted Course Statement (auto)
2014-11-05T04:05:10.555
Joe King experienced 'Page 1'
{
    "id": "3ed638c0-a422-41e5-b7d7-42bf43e59b39",
    "actor": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "verb": {
        "id": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/exp
        "display": {
            "en-US": "experienced"
        }
    },
    "context": {
        "registration": "61d426da-436a-4b2a-8daa-
ce94f6082f2f",
        "contextActivities": {
            "grouping": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",

- 659 -
                     "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ],
            "parent": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ]
        }
    },
    "timestamp": "2014-11-05T04:05:08.506Z",
    "stored": "2014-11-05T04:05:10.555Z",
    "authority": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "object": {

        "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template/a001_
page_1.html",
        "definition": {
            "name": {
                "en-US": "Page 1"
            }
        },
        "objectType": "Activity"
    }
}

Passed / Failed Test Statement (auto)

2014-11-05T04:05:21.783
Joe King failed 'Test 1' with score 50
{
    "id": "1820c7e8-6509-4c45-b672-af7ae301ec40",

- 660 -
     "actor": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "verb": {
        "id": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/fai
        "display": {
            "en-US": "failed"
        }
    },
    "result": {
        "score": {
            "raw": 50,
            "min": 0,
            "max": 100
        },
        "success": false,
        "completion": false
    },
    "context": {
        "registration": "61d426da-436a-4b2a-8daa-
ce94f6082f2f",
        "contextActivities": {
            "grouping": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ],
            "parent": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"

- 661 -
                 }
            ]
        }
    },
    "timestamp": "2014-11-05T04:05:20.030Z",
    "stored": "2014-11-05T04:05:21.783Z",
    "authority": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "object": {

        "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template/Test%2-
01",
        "definition": {
            "name": {
                "en-US": "Test 1"
            }
        },
        "objectType": "Activity"
    }
}

Question Answered Statement (auto)

2014-11-05T04:05:36.251

Joe King correctly answered 'My Test Question 1' with response-
 'true'
{
    "id": "a8af22bf-8e38-447c-8e6a-500c3673f867",
    "actor": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"

- 662 -
     },
    "verb": {
        "id": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/ans
        "display": {
            "en-US": "answered"
        }
    },
    "result": {
        "success": true,
        "response": "true"
    },
    "context": {
        "registration": "61d426da-436a-4b2a-8daa-
ce94f6082f2f",
        "contextActivities": {
            "grouping": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ],
            "parent": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ]
        }
    },
    "timestamp": "2014-11-05T04:05:10.000Z",
    "stored": "2014-11-05T04:05:36.251Z",
    "authority": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },

- 663 -
         "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "object": {
        "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Te
Question_1_67_1415160320014",
        "definition": {
            "description": {
                "en-US": "My Test Question 1"
            },

            "type": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/activities/cmi.i-
nteraction",
            "interactionType": "true-false",
            "correctResponsesPattern": [
                "true"
            ]
        },
        "objectType": "Activity"
    }
}

Custom xAPI Statement from xAPI Statement Action

2014-11-05T04:05:34.803
Joe King sent 'Custom-xAPI-Statement'
{
    "id": "6a108ff9-1bcc-4bb0-9021-732fb7bad775",
    "actor": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "verb": {
        "id": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/sen
        "display": {
            "en-US": "sent"
        }
    },

- 664 -
     "result": {},
    "context": {
        "registration": "61d426da-436a-4b2a-8daa-
ce94f6082f2f",
        "contextActivities": {
            "grouping": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ],
            "parent": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ]
        }
    },
    "timestamp": "2014-11-05T04:05:32.376Z",
    "stored": "2014-11-05T04:05:34.803Z",
    "authority": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "object": {

        "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template/Custo-
m-xAPI-Statement",
        "definition": {
            "name": {
                "en-US": "Custom-xAPI-Statement"

- 665 -
             }
        },
        "objectType": "Activity"
    }
}

Passed / Compld / Failed Course Statement (auto)

2014-11-05T04:05:36.259

Joe King passed 'http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Template' wit-
h score 50
{
    "id": "6e8c000e-47d0-4b8c-842b-d9573422ce1b",
    "actor": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": 
"ZUASCUHYVJ|[email protected]"
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "verb": {
        "id": "http://adlnet.gov/expapi/verbs/pas
        "display": {
            "en-US": "passed"
        }
    },
    "result": {
        "score": {
            "raw": 50,
            "min": 0,
            "max": 100
        },
        "success": true,
        "completion": true,
        "duration": "PT25.97S"
    },
    "context": {
        "registration": "61d426da-436a-4b2a-8daa-
ce94f6082f2f",
        "contextActivities": {

- 666 -
             "grouping": [
{

                    "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Tem-
plate",
                    "objectType": "Activity"
                }
            ]
        }
    },
    "timestamp": "2014-11-05T04:05:33.714Z",
    "stored": "2014-11-05T04:05:36.259Z",
    "authority": {
        "name": "Joe King",
        "account": {
            "homePage": "http://cloud.scorm.com/"
            "name": "ZUASCUHYVJ|wieloch@trivantis
        },
        "objectType": "Agent"
    },
    "version": "1.0.0",
    "object": {
        "id": "http://www.uniqueurl.com/xAPI%20Te
        "objectType": "Activity"
    }
}

Token replacements for custom JavaScript

You can use tokens within an external HTML object and a Run JavaScript action for
generic replacement and manipulation within your custom Javascript. For example, use
the %HTMLNAME% token within the Run JavaScript action to represent the HTML name
of the object that has the action.
The following token replacements are supported within an external HTML object and a
Run JavaScript action:
Token Replacement
%WIDTH% Width property of the object.
%HEIGHT% Height property of the object.
%HTMLNAME% HTML name property of the object.
%HTMLNAME_ Object name property based on the ID of the object. For example, if an
image has ID 315, the token would be %HTMLNAME_315% and

- 667 -
 replaced with the HTML name of the image.
For details about adding and managing external HTML objects, see Working with HTML
extension objects. For details about executing the Run JavaScript, see Selecting the
action.

Custom JavaScripting
When extending your title with JavaScript, the container elements should not be ref-
erenced directly. With the HTML option Publishing for Seamless Play, containers such
as window and document can no longer be referenced directly. Instead you need to
use the global methods below to properly access these containers.
Publishing for Seamless Play is a HTML publishing option that provides for auto-playing
of media and smooth flow from page to page, eliminating the screen wipe commonly
associated with HTML pages. It is set by default. For details, see Specifying HTML
options.
getDisplayWindow() Returns the window objects that is to be used for dealing
with the js objects generated by Lectora and all window
related attributes.
getDisplayDocument() Returns the document object that is to be used for deal-
ing with the visual HTML objects, it contains all of the cur-
rently HTML elements for the page.
getCurrentPageDiv() Returns an HTML element that represents the page div.
getCurrentPageID() Returns a string with the name of the current page div.
appendElement(obj, This function can be used for attaching objects to the cur-
parentElement, htm- rent page div; the customer would only need to pass in
lElement) the last attribute as either a HTML element or a string.
If you use jQuery, you will want to make sure any selectors execute in the correct
context. For example, when trying to format all input elements, reference the dis-
play window:
$('input',getDisplayWindow()).css('border','0px');
Here are some examples for clarity:
Let's say we have an HTML Extension of Type Custom Div that looks like this
<p id="demo"></p>
And in our title we have a button with an action to run JavaScript to change our para-
graph to the current date. The JavaScript looks like this
document.getElementById('demo').innerHTML = Date();
This works in non Seamless Play Publish; however, it will not work in Seamless Play
Publish.

- 668 -
For Seamless Play Publish, you have to change the JavaScript so that it correctly finds
the document:
getDisplayDocument().getElementById('demo').innerHTML = Date
();
Here is an appendElement example. This simply adds a list item to the pageDiv:
appendElement(null,null,"<li>text<li>");

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently asked questions:
l Why can't I select and edit title objects?
l What is the size or position of my object?
l What if I changed something by accident?
l How do I resize by image?
l How do I check my spelling?
l How do I open a new browser window?
l What file extensions does the program support?
l Can I import an existing title into my current working title?
l How do I keep my objects from moving?
l How do I select all the objects on my page?
l How do I select and format hyperlink text?
l How do I add the same object to every page?
l How do I exclude an item from a page?
l What file extensions does the program support?
l Why is my random test finishing too soon?
l Can the program display mathematic equations?
l Do the program tests support book marking?

Why can't I select and edit title objects?

A common occurrence when developing a title in the program is to forget that your title is
currently in Run mode . When a title is in Run mode, you will not be able to select and
manipulate any objects on the screen until you switch back to Edit mode.
See also: Switching between modes

What is the size or position of my object?

A useful way to find out the dimensions or position of any object on the page is to look at
the bottom left corner of the main window. After you click on any object, its location and

- 669 -
size are displayed in a status area in that corner. These numbers will update as you
modify the size and/or position of the object.
See also: Using the status bar

What if I changed something by accident?

Lectora features multiple undo commands. If you have just changed, resized, added, or
deleted something and you suddenly realize that you did not intend to do that, or you
were unhappy with the result, Undo the action by typing Ctrl+Z. Optionally, you can
select (Undo) from the quick-access bar. The quick-access bar is the area of the title
bar in the top-left corner of the workspace window. The bar contains handy default
options to save, undo, and redo, along with the ability to add and remove options of your
choice. You can also move the bar below the ribbon, if desired.
If you then decide you want to redo the action then simply press Ctrl-Y. Alternately,
select (Redo) from the quick-access bar.
See also:Using the quick-access bar

How do I resize my image?

Objects that can be sized and have an original aspect ratio (width to height ratio) such as
images and buttons have the button property Maintain Ratio, which is set by

default and can be accessed on the objects Position &Size ribbon. When this property
is set, sizing the image keeps the image at the same width to height ratio as the original
image imported into the title.
All sizable objects can be sized proportional to their current width and height. By holding
down Shift while using the mouse to drag a corner or side of the object, the object will
size relative to its current width and height.
See also:Moving and resizing objects
Making objects the same size

How do I check my spelling?

Lectora helps you spell check your text. If you are in text edit mode, you can spell check
the current block by selecting the Spell Check option on the right-click menu for the text
block.
You can also spell check all text blocks on the current page or all text blocks in the entire
document by selecting those items on the Tools ribbon.
See also: Checking spelling

How do I open a new browser window?

If you are publishing your title to HTML and you want to link to an external Web address,
but want the student taking the title to stay in your title, open the external Web address in

- 670 -
a different window.
You can do this by creating an action or putting an action on a button or a text link. From
the action drop-down list, select Go To Web Address and select New Window in the
Open In field. You can optionally set the new window properties by clicking the Edit
button.
See also: Executing Go To actions

What file extensions does the program support?

For the list of supported media types, see Supported media types.

Can I import an existing title into my current work-

ing title?
Yes. To do so, follow these steps:
1. Select From Other Title from the Import group on the Tools ribbon.
2. Browse for the appropriate .awt file.
3. Click OK.
See also: Importing content from existing titles

How do I keep my objects from moving?

The program provides object locking. Once an item is locked, it must be unlocked to
change the placement or size. It is a good idea to lock all your objects in a finished title
to prevent the user from accidentally moving an object.
To lock the position of an object:
1. Do one of the following to display the Position & Size ribbon:
l In the Title Explorer, double-click the graphic of the object.
l In the Title Explorer, right-click the graphic and select Properties.
l In the work area, double-click the object.
l In the work area, right-click the object and select Properties.
2. Click the Position & Size ribbon.
3. Click the Lock graphic in the Position & Size group so that the locked padlock
. graphic is displayed.

The position of the object is locked.

You can also lock the position of the object by right-clicking on the object within the Title
Explorer (or within your work area) and selecting Size/Position Locked from the right-
click context menu. When the object is locked, a check mark will appear to the left of the
Size/Position Locked option within the menu.

- 671 -
See also: Locking and unlocking objects

How do I select all the objects on my page?

You can select all the objects on a page in several ways:
l Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select each object under a page in
the Title Explorer.
l Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select each object on your working
page.
l Right-click on a page in the Title Explorer and choose Select All Objects from the
pop-up menu.
See also: Selecting objects and grouping them

How do I select and format hyperlink text?

Perform the following steps:
1. In the text block, highlight the text.
2. Either click Hyperlink in the Text group on the Home ribbon or right-click and
select Add Hyperlink. Use the Add Hyperlink window to configure the link.
See also: Adding hyperlinks to text

How do I add the same object to every page?

The Inherit feature enables you to easily place the same object on every page of your
title:
1. If you would like the same object to appear on every page of the entire title, select
the title icon in the Title Explorer. A blank page will appear in the working area.
2. Add the object to this page in the exact spot you want it to appear on every page of
your title.
The Inherit feature also enables you to place the same object on every page of a
specific chapter or section by selecting the chapter or section and following the
steps above. For more information on the Inherit feature, see Understanding inher-
itance.
See also: Understanding inheritance

How do I exclude an item from a page?

Anything you add directly under the main title will appear on every page of your title.
Objects that are added directly under a chapter will appear on every page of that
chapter. Objects added directly under a section will appear on every page of that sec-
tion.
Perform the following steps to exclude an item from a page:

- 672 -
 1. Click Inherit from the Inherit Settings group on the Properties ribbon for the

page.
2. Use the drop-down list to select from one of the following inheritance options:
ALL objects from parents Places all objects within the Inherited list. These
objects will continue to appear throughout your
chapter, section , or page.
NO objects from parents Places all objects within the Excluded list. These
objects will not appear within the chapter, section, or
page.
Specific objects from par- Allows you to select the objects to inherit or exclude.
ents Select an object in either list and click the arrow but-
tons to move items from one list to the other in the dir-
ection of the buttons. Select several objects by
holding down the Ctrl key while selecting objects.
3. Click OK.
See also: Understanding inheritance

What extensions do my files have?

Your title will have a file extension of .awt.
When you publish to HTML, you will have several different files in the HTML folder. The
files that will be published to the Web will have extensions of .html, .js (javascript), .jar
(java), and .css (cascading style sheets). All of these files can only be published to the
Web.
If you have added ASP or JSP code to a page using the External HTML Object, your pub-
lished pages will have the extensions of .asp or .jsp.
See also:Working with HTML extension objects

Why is my random test finishing too soon?

This occurs when the Submit button is left on the last page. In many cases the last page
of the exam will be randomly picked before the test is over and the Submit button will
remain on the page.
Remove the Submit button from the last page and inherit the Next button in its place.
See also: Randomizing test pages

Can the program display mathematic equations?

Yes. Use the Equation Editor to create an equation image. To launch the Equation
Editor, click Equation from the Add Image group on the Insert ribbon.
See also: Working with Equations

- 673 -
Do the program tests support book marking?
If you are publishing to AICC/SCORM then book-marking should be automatic through
your LMS.
If you are publishing to HTML then you can enable the Retain Answers Between Ses-
sions setting in the Behavior tab and also keep track of users taking your course by
using variables. Be sure Retain variable values between sessions is enabled for your
user-defined variables when defining these variables. Keep in mind that the program is
using cookies to keep this information and will only be stored if the users return to the
test from the same computer.
See also: Publishing a title
Creating a variable

Trademarks
Lectora, Lectora Online, ReviewLink, and CourseMill are trademarks of Trivantis in the
United States, or other countries, or both.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Coldfusion are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States,or other countries.
Android, Google and Google Drive are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google
Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.
Camtasio Studio and Snagit are trademarks or registered trademarks of TechSmith Cor-
poration in the United States and/or other countries.
Firefox is a trademark or registered trademark of Mozilla Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Flash is a trademark or registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
Java, and JavaScript are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
in the United States, other countries, or both.
Mac, Macintosh, QuickTime, iPhone and iPod are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Outlook, and PowerPoint, and Windows, Windows NT, and
Word are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other coun-
tries. Internet Explorer is a product of Microsoft Corporation.
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated.
YouTube is a trademark or registered trademark of Google, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of
other companies.
© Copyright Trivantis 2016

- 674 -